Let's focus our attention on this last image. Where this images fails, for me, is the angle at which this image was taken. I am shooting slightly down on the Hyena. This means that the background is close, right behind its head. The result is that I could not blur the background to make the Hyena stand out more. It lacks any kind of wow-factor. The ideal would have been to get down low and shoot from ground level, thereby placing the background much further back, allowing me to blur the background more.
But what is one to do in the wild? You can't get out of the vehicle lest the Hyenas see you either as a threat to the little ones or as food. Neither of these options are better than the other. In anticipation for scenes exactly like these I brought a mono-pod along. The idea was to lower the camera upside down on the mono-pod to ground level. I was going to trigger the camera with a wired remote release. By using my phone as a monitor for the camera, (bluetooth) I was going to capture a much better image. After all, that is what I learned to do from an OM Systems photographer.
While I don't know how this OM Systems photographer got away with it, I can tell you that our driver refused permission to use my contraption. You are not supposed to break the silhouette of the vehicle. The animal should only see the vehicle and nothing else outside of the vehicle. The Hyena's were very peaceful and lazy, I strongly doubt if a mono-pod right from the vehicle's side would have made any difference to them. Regardless, we have to stick to the rules. We can just wonder about how others do it.
Perhaps the lesson to be learned is that the animals come first, not our photography. Sometimes we should just enjoy the experience and do the best we can photographically.
]]>
Remember that herd of buffalo? I am still not sure that this specimen was up to here:
As photographers, we never know when these moments will show up. Always be ready so as not to miss them. Here is what I do to make sure that I am ready:
Check the space available on my memory card from time to time. The last thing you want is to arrive on a magical scene or pivotal moment just to find out that your card is full.
Check all camera settings from time to time. In the mad rush at a scene you may have set your camera a certain way for that situation, but then forgot to return it to some baseline setting. This is not the moment to realize that you images are needlessly to noisy because the camera was still set that way because of the previous dark forest scenes. Or perhaps you just shot a landscape image leaving your camera on F11 or F16 which is not what you want when shooting action. In between sightings set your camera for current conditions and check if the settings are appropriate for where are you now, for what your are facing, and for the lighting conditions. I once lost a shot because my lens' focus limiter was set due to a previous shoot.
Check your battery level from time to time. Don't wait to fully run out of battery power before you switch out batteries. Using a battery until it is fully depleted is not healthy for the battery any way. But once again, you don't want to miss a once in a lifetime shot because your battery ran out just at the wrong moment.
Check the front element of your lens from time to time. If there is mist, spray, or rain, your shots will be ruined if you did not clean/dry your front lens element. Similarly, things get dusty on safari. Make sure your front element is clean every so often.
Be alert. Things can happen quickly. Try to anticipate things. It does not help for your gear to be ready when you are not.
Have fun out there, be safe, and capture some humor.
]]>
The Nikon acquired the focus in a jiff. It tracked the dragonfly with easy. I would say that it is quite a bit faster at focus acquisition and better at tracking than my Sony. I am not knocking the Sony here. This kind of photography is not what that camera was intended for. A friend was shooting with a Nikon D850 (most probably the best DSLR ever made by any manufacturer). I handed him my Z8, fitted with the 180-600mm to try on the dragonfly. He was very impressed by what this camera can do. I look forward to shooting dragonflies more in the Spring. One issue I have with some of Nikon's lenses is the length of their minimum focusing distance. I wished that both the 180-600mm and the 800mm PF lenses could focus a bit closer. For small subjects such as these, having to step back to get focus, means that now we have to crop the image considerably, stealing valuable resolution in the process.
Dragonfly images are often made or ruined by the wings. Unless the light is right their wings can be lost in the image (they are semi-transparent). Back lighting works well for them.
]]>
They sat reasonably still, so low shutter speeds due to the darkish forest scene did not cause focus sharpness issues. It was fun to watch them move about in the forest. I was amazed to see them jump. Apparently they have not fear of heights or risk. They are high up in the trees and just jump great distances to get to another tree. Obviously, getting such a jumping image became my goal. But here is where photographic challenges started.
Jumping monkeys move fast. Fast movement in darkish conditions leaves us with little choice. We have to get the image sharp, which means a fast shutter speed. However, a fast shutter speed is not possible in darkish conditions. Regardless of consequences to noise, I cranked up the ISO. I wanted that shot. But catching that image inside the forest proved near impossible from the confines of a vehicle.
Then it happened! We witnessed them jump across the road. They were high up in the trees and simply jumped from one tree to the next, right over the road. So we waited for more of them to jump, and we were rewarded:
You can see from the dull cloudy sky that the light levels were low. If you want to find out how I deal with noisy images check out the blog I wrote about that recently - there is amazing software that deals with that. We waiting and were rewarded yet again.
This was a thoroughly enjoyable experience. Photographically speaking this experience reiterated the point that getting a sharp image is more important than getting a noise free image. Noise can be removed, an out of focus image is not salvageable. As photographers we often deal with tradeoffs. We have to make tough decisions. Never compromise on getting the image in focus, most other tradeoffs have software and or editing solutions.
]]>One day in Tanzania it was a slow day. So I practiced my own advise. I noticed some lovebirds going back to the same tree over and over. So I thought that perhaps I could find a nest. I walked over to that tree and just started searching. I looked and looked, but the nest was never found. Neither did the lovebirds pose nicely. There were too many branches and leaves in the way. If you have read my bird image blogs, you will also know that bird images are typically best when taken from their eye level. Standing on the ground beneath a tree shooting up into a tree is hardly going to provide great bird images. However, even without an image taking it slow and genuinely looking around may reveal something we can photograph later on. So I still recommend it.
Yes, you guessed it, I did find something. It was not the birds that I were initially after. But taking it slow and looking helped me to discover what I would have never seen otherwise. There was no movement. There was no noise. There was no way to find it but to slowly look and search. This is what the search revealed:
It may not be the greatest image but it is the only image of a bat that I ever took. A few moments later, while I was still looking I saw:
Slowing down and looking may not always produce results, but the information we gather may help our photography as we possibly uncover a nest, a bat, a snake, droppings that may alert us to something going on, finding a favorite perch, etc. It also helps us to enjoy nature and to get out of the rat race, even for just a while.
]]>You have a long lens on that does not work for how close you are to the buffaloes. I can hear you suggest to just change lenses ... but read on.
There is dust in the air. You are in the midst of a herd. This is not the time to change lenses. If only I had a second body with a different lens on ... wishful thinking.
There are too many of them and there always seems to be one in the way.
At times there are moments where one just needs to put the camera down for a few moments to enjoy the experience, to listen, to marvel. But we are photographers and we want images. How do we solve these problems?
Despite all the qualities of a long prime lens (sharpness, larger aperture, better blurred backgrounds) I love the versatility offered by zoom lenses. Here I used my 180-600mm lens and simply zoomed out as far as I could. Secondly, as I have suggested so many times before, try to shoot at the edges of the chaos. Your chances of isolating something there is exponentially higher than what it would have been in the midst of the chaos. Even at 180mm, we were still too close most of the time.
Well, then look for something else. After all, even if you do manage to get the perfect portrait of your favorite buffalo, how many portrait shots do you need? Go for variety. Shoot as many different images as you can. That may mean that your main subject no longer features as your main subject. That does not matter. Get whatever shots present themselves.
Profile images becomes another possibility. To ensure variety, choose to go for a young one, or a very old one. Get something different. Also see if you can combine species ...
Here we have a portrait but what makes it more interesting and different is the committee meeting taking place in the background. Be on the lookout for scenes that provide a variety of opportunities. We don't just want to walk away with only portraits. Observe and take in the scene for a few moments. Just enjoy the scene, but as you do, start looking and searching for a variety of possible images and then get to work.
]]>
One possible solution is to forgo the carcass scene and shoot on the edges of the scene so as to isolate one or two vultures. We have to find a way to not have just chaos. Now don't get me wrong, chaos can make for great images, but not if there is only chaos. Something has to stand out. Something must not be chaotic or something needs to be the focal point on interest. If you can find a scene in which you have a clear focal point of interest in the midst of chaos then you may have a golden opportunity for making good images. But how do you find that clear focal point of interest in the midst of chaos? This is no easy task.
The solution is to be patient, but ready. You have to watch the scene intently through the camera's viewfinder, ready to click away at any moment. Chaos is constantly changing. We just have to wait for that change to favor us. Wait for something to stand out, for something to be different. Wait for something to be clear amongst the chaos.
Sooner or later some vulture has to pose. The carcass has to be exposed at some point. perhaps that only happens towards the end of the feast. We just have to be patient to catch those moments. Those moments work best if we can see something of the carcass and some bird stands out. Perhaps it is only a head, but there has to be something that is clear and not just chaos. In the end you may be rewarded.
]]>
Today's modern cameras will automatically recognize the subject's eye and focus on it. These systems work brilliantly, generally speaking. There are situations though, like this one, where the wind is swaying those out of focus leaves back and forth. Those leave end up right in front of the Lion's eye. This can trick the camera's autofocus system and leave you frustrated at best, missing the shot at worst. So how do we solve that problem?
The best solution is to use what Nikon's users often refer to as the hand-off technique. We use a wide area box to tell the camera to only focus on what is found in the box. When focus has been generally acquired (on the Lion versus on the moving leaves), then we would hand focus off to the eye tracking to take over. The problem is when the focus is on the leaves the Lion's face is so blurred that the camera cannot discern the eye. By using the box the get the focus in the ball park we get the Lion's face reasonably in focus which allows the camera to now make out the eye.
It is best to program two autofocus modes on two different buttons. I use the two front buttons, next to the lens. This means that I can switch focus modes in a split second. Thus using two different focusing modes solves the problem and gives us what we want, sharply focused eyes.
]]>To my knowledge there is no saving an out of focus image. Due to modern technology noisy images can now be saved (somewhat). That makes the choice clear, I will take a noisy image any day before taking a blurry image. So how high of an ISO do I accept these days? The truth is that I no longer care. Yes, I still prefer to get as clean of an image as I can get. But I am not going to loose a shot because of ISO. Here is how I deal with too high ISO.
These two images were taken on the edge of the day. It was overcast and I did not have much light to work with. A fast shutter speed was required as these birds move quite quickly. The one image was taken at ISO 16,000 and the other at ISO 18,000. Yes, you read that correctly! The raw files are noisy, and years ago I would have just thrown these images away. Now I can look at this image at 100% magnification and it is clean. So how do I get noisy images clean?
Firstly, I ran these images through DXO Photo Lab (DXO PureRaw would also work). Their noise reduction is probably some of the best noise reduction out there. This software creates DNG raw files which I then import into Photoshop. Since it is a raw file, Photoshop pulls these files into Adobe Camera Raw. Guess what? Adobe also now has AI noise reduction. This is where I run the file through noise reduction again (a second time). Voila, the image is clean.
Don't give up on noisy files. Clean them. My priority in shooting fast moving wildlife now is shutter speed first, ISO second. I will not worry about the ISO but I must shoot at the right shutter speed.
]]>
Yes, this bird, in this shape, is not going to win any birding beauty contests. But the image is interesting to me. It makes me ask questions. Did it just escape from a predator chasing it? Is it just windy? Did the bird ruffle its feather like we would take a stretch? How did the feathers come to be this way? Why is the right side looking so much worse than the left side? Perhaps the image evokes some emotion or calls for a chuckle. The image has character. It is that character that makes the image.
Not every bird image needs to be combed and brushed to perfection. We can relate to this bird because we also have similar days. I would caution though, that birds are probably best presented either preened or badly unkept. I do not think that halfway in between works very well. So I am not dinging my preening friends. If just a feather of two are drawing attention away, by all means, comb those feathers. But when an image like this presents itself, don't pass the opportunity by because the bird is badly unkept. That is where the character comes from.
]]>So I ask myself, is it always necessary to fill the frame with just the bird? Do images work where the bird is a small part of the image? Can we use the rest of the frame space to tell the story of the bird?
Here is an example. This Kingfisher is small-ish in the frame. Yet the image works for me because of two reasons. Firstly, the perch makes up for the small size of the bird. The perch is telling a story. It is dry. The leaves are busy drying out and dying. The second reason is the background, for it is telling the same story as the perch. There is no water here, it is dry. The background does not have much green in it. This is not what you will typically find on a river bank or besides a pond. The Kingfisher is fishing for insects instead of fish. The Kingfisher seems out of place here. But that is precisely what is making the viewer wonder and ask questions. That means that they are engaging with the image.
Imagine this same image where the bird filled the frame. Almost all of the leaves and the expansive background would be lost. Would that image ask questions and make one wonder what is going on? I think that there is a place for images like this to break the monotony of frame filled images and to tell a little bit of a story.
]]>These two Buffalos were the first to reach the water. They walked right in. One has to shoot quickly as the rest of the herd crowds out the space fast, making it difficult to get a shot of just one or two specimen. As I was photographing them I decided to watch the Oxpeckers. There were more than just Buffalo actors present.
Including other actors enhanced the image significantly. Would this have been an interesting image had it only included the Buffalo? The Buffalo is pretty static. It is the other actors performing the action. These birds make this image. One of them is busy at the Buffalo's eye. Another is coming in for a landing, and yet another is taking a drink perched on the Buffalo. The Buffalo tolerate the Oxpeckers because they cleanse them from ticks. The Oxpeckers want to be there to harvest the ticks, yummy! This is a classical symbiotic relationship.
This image reminds me that we need to include all the actors but know what to exclude. This image would not have been impactful had there been a number of Buffalos included. Sometimes we can be so focused on getting the image of the main subject that we forget the other actors. At other time, the other actors can become the main subject with rich reward.
]]>
I think not! This image was taken on exactly such a day. Based on the blog that I referred to above, get some images while the sunlight is harsh (shooting for back lit images and rim-lit images). Those are not the only kind of images we can get on such days. All that is needed to get an image such as this one is patience. Yes, just wait. Those clouds are moving. It is just a matter of time before one of those clouds gets between you and the sun. Once that happens you have diffused light for a few minutes. Shoot now!
The clouds will keep moving, so before long you will no longer have diffused light but harsh light again. Great, use this time to watch the insects, to position yourself, to look at possible backgrounds, and to find your next subject. Then just wait. Soon another cloud will have mercy on you and provide better light. For as long as there are clouds and a bit of wind up there you should get more diffused light opportunities to shoot in. Just wait.
]]>
All the zebras are grazing except one. All of them have their heads down, except one. The more the other zebras form a boring, monotonous pattern the more our one exception zebra will stand out. But that is what makes the shot. Would you have liked this image of this lone zebra just standing there without the pattern of the other zebras? Have you not seen a million lone zebra images before? What makes this image is not just the lone zebra but the fact that it is different. It is standing out from the others. The boring, monotonous pattern of the others together with the exception is what makes this image. The boring, monotonous pattern is precisely what makes our different zebra different. Without the pattern this is not a good image. Without one being different, we don't have a good image. It takes the combination of the pattern and the breaking of the pattern (that which is different) to make the image.
So how do we find images like this? Look for boring, monotonous patterns, then find a way to break that pattern. Wait for the exception. Find anything different and you have your image.
]]>
Someone may argue, "but surely, you have to check your exposure and your focus. What is the point of having more images if they are all out of focus or wrongly exposed?" I get the argument. But can we not look at the histogram in the viewfinder to ensure correct exposure? Can we not look at the camera's focus indicator in the viewfinder (the focus block turns green when focus is locked)? If you don't trust these, then sure, look at one image, but please don't look at every image you take. Just shoot, shoot, and shoot.
]]>
This is the image I got. I am very happy with this image. But if I showed you all the other possible shooting angles you would also see the dilemma that I faced. There were buildings in the background, in all directions but one. We often get so excited by our subject that we forget about the background. In fact, when looking through the viewfinder we often don't even notice the background because we are only focused on the subject. This image would have been an automatic deletion had I taken it from any other angle.
So consider the subject, the composition, and the light. These are the things that photographers are taught to pay attention to. But if you want your nature images to go to the next level you also need to consider the background. I have written about this before, but with birds and insects it is also important to shoot at their eye level. So please consider all these things to get the best possible image given what you are presented with.
]]>However, if the subject is thin-ish and we get the angle to the light right, we can have both back lighting and rim-light. The back lighting will not be that strong since it has to penetrate more petals or two wings, or perhaps a bird's wing. Nevertheless, here is an example of what we can create:
Neither the backlighting or the rim-light is as strong as in other examples, but we can see the vivid color in the wings caused by the back lighting and we can see some rim-lighting on the back edge of the wings. An image like this definitely beats the same image taken with the harsh light coming from behind the photographer.
The lesson is simple. We tend to see a subject, walk towards it, and take the image. We need to stop and think first (provided the subject will wait for us or return again). We need to ask ourselves questions. How does the light look? From which angle is the light going to be more flattering? Can I use the weakness of bad light as a strength? Given what I am facing here, what is the best possible image I can get?
]]>When the light is harsh, we do have a problem. But that very problem also provides a strength or two if used intentionally and creatively. Why can't we turn the harsh light into a feature of the photograph? Can we position ourselves and the subject in such a way to create the beautiful rim-light effect? Or what about taking a back lit image to take advantage of the strong light?
The back lighting, although harsh, helps to separate the subject from the background - it stands out better. It helps us to see things that we typically cannot see under soft diffused light, such as the veins, the structure, and how the wings are made. So harsh light aught not always to be treated harshly. We can use it's strength to create a different kind of image.
Sure, harsh light does not usually make for good insect and flower images. So it does not make sense to shoot with that harsh light coming from behind us. We have to move around and figure out how to best use the light we have. In the example, I quite like how the butterfly turned out. It is not your typical butterfly image, yet it is interesting.
The next time the light is harsh and you are presented with a shooting opportunity, it might be better to find ways to take advantage of what that kind of light offers than to forgo shooting at all.
]]>However, whether an image is easy or difficult to take, does not, in my mind, determine the beauty of an image. Yes, I fully believe, as I have written in these blogs numerous times, that actions image are more engaging and generally better photography. But for today, I am going to indulge, just for beauty's sake, to look at a classic clean bird shot.
Yes, I know, I can almost hear the pros yelling at me, "that perch is to thick for the size of the bird." They are right. This image will look much better had the perch been smaller. Some photographers would make the perch smaller in Photoshop. So there you have it, I formally agree with the pros. However, that is not my topic today. I just want to focus on the beauty of the classic clean bird shot.
What is the classic clean bird shot? This is it. There is no clutter, no branches going in different directions, no distracting leaves (or anything other than the bird for that matter). The image is clean - free from distractions and pretty much everything but the bird and its perch. Another feature of the classing clean bird shot is the buttery smoothly blurred background. Even the background is clean. This is that classic shot. And "yes," even though it is an easy shot to take with no technical difficulty, these kind of images are still beautiful.
Do I prefer an action shot? Yes! But from time to time I just want to relax. I just want to slow down. I don't want a heart throbbing, "oh wow," or "that's incredible" moment. There is a time and a place to simply look at uncluttered, quiet, peaceful, and clean beauty.
]]>
It is so tempting to zoom in closer, to fill that frame with the bird. And yes, I do recommend filling the frame. But in this case the frame is filled. Perhaps not by the bird but by the whole story. This image tells the story of this bird and how it hunts, where it lives, and the weapons it uses. Not every image needs to be of just the bird. I love that the twigs with their thorns make part of this image's story. Good composition is in place. The bird is strategically placed in the frame. The zoom is set so that the twigs fill the rest of the frame. The bird has space to look into. Its eye is clearly visible. The longer tail plays its part in balancing the composition.
Overall, I like that this image tells the story. Perhaps some images are just better suited to story telling than others. For the photographer the skill is to know when to zoom in to capture the bird or the action and when to zoom out to tell the story.
]]>
I think so. I really like this image. Some may argue, as I have discussed on previous blogs, that I should have cropped this differently, vertically perhaps. That idea was played with. In the end this crop was settled on. So what draws me to this image? I like how the tail feathers fit neatly between the thorn branches. The bird's eye contact is special to me. The bird is almost saying, "did you get it?" The smooth background is a bonus. The bird stands out nicely from the background. All in all, I just find this a pleasing image.
You don't always have to be out in the wild to get nice images. This image was taken right in the camp. Granted, the camp is in Tarangire. One can argue that the camp itself is in the wild. But what I means is that even in the hustle and bustle of people moving around and about buildings there are still images to be made. You don't always have to be on the safari vehicle to get the goods. By the way, this is a mousebird.
]]>
This image follows the basic rules of composition. However, the plant on the top left corner of the image is distracting. Some would say, "just crop it out." Others may add, "and while you are at it, also crop the distraction out or the top right corner." Often in life the solution to one problem creates another problem. You are just exchanges one problem for the other. I thought long and hard on whether to crop the top left corner plant out of the image. But when you do you create two other problems. Firstly, I rather like the fact that the plant to the right of the offending one does not leave the side of the image leaving it without a base. I want it to go down rather than leave the image on the left. Cropping the left plant out would also remove the plant to the right's base on which it stands. Secondly, that would leave less space for the bird to look into. The rules of composition say that there always needs to be enough space for movement to move into or to look into. To me, cropping the left plant out places the bird's head closer to the left edge of the image that I want.
Now I can almost hear you say, "but if you were to also crop out the distracting plant in the top right of the image there would proportionately be more space in front of the bird to look into than there would be behind the bird." I would have to concede, that you are right. As usual, that now introduces a different problem. By the time all the cropping is done you may not be left with enough resolution to keep the image printable. It does not take that much resolution to fill a 4k screen. But that basically limits a print's size to roughly 8X11. Cropping both ends of the image would also mess with your aspect ratio. How will you frame your odd ratio image without incurring the cost of a custom frame. Many other printing options will actually be eliminated with such an aspect ratio.
So what do you prefer, because you have to choose which problem to live with? Do you prefer cropping tighter but loose the ability to print at a decent size, or do you prefer the image as it is thus retaining the ability to print it larger? If you never print your image then cropping it more would make sense. If you want to print the image then maybe not so much. However, I will still argue that an odd aspect ratio image does not look that nice on a 4k display either as much of the screen's real estate will be unused. My personal conclusion is to just leave it as it is.
]]>
So how do we get nice images such as this one? Here are a few tips:
Overcast but bright days are best. The soft defused light just works well with birds. Long lenses need light because even if your bird is sitting still, your camera and lens is still moving as you are holding them. This means that you will need a fast shutter speed. So make sure that you have enough light so as not to necessitate a too high ISO.
Get as close to your bird as you can without impacting the bird's behavior. This means you will need less cropping leaving you with higher resolution files. Secondly, this also helps to blur your background better. Your distance to the subject impacts depth of field.
Choose a perch where the background is far back. The further the background the better it will be blurred. Creamy, blurred backgrounds make birds pop and stand out.
Consider the perch. The image above is not a set up. It was taken in Tanzania, in a field. Still, choose where you wait to maximize your success. Images of birds sitting on perches that are large in proportion to the bird tend not to look that great. So take images of birds on smaller perches.
Shoot from the bird's eye level. Shooting up or down on birds results in images that are not the best. Sometimes you have no choice and those images can be nice, but the best images often come from shooting at eye level to the bird.
Enjoy being out there with the birds.
]]>Birds do bath. Placing yourself near a water source highly increases your odds of seeing some action. You may want to just sit and observe for a while. We want to take notice of the general flight paths preferred by our winged friends. They tend to use the same routes. Now that you know where they come from and to where they go when they are done, we can choose where to position ourselves.
Consider your background. Get as clean a background as you possibly can. Think about the direction of the light. Based on how small your bird is and the lens you are using, it is now time to select your distance. You must also choose a spot that will not alter the bird's behavior, otherwise they will just fly another way and you will not get your shot. Besides, it is always better not to impact the wild life we photograph. Now just sit and wait.
I took this image in Tanzania near a water hole. Just be patient and enjoy the experience. Set yourself up for success and you will be more successful.
]]>Having said that, I also like close-up work. In true macro photography the detail of what is being observed is what tells the story. In close-up photography it is the insect or subject in it's environment that tells the story. Both stories are worth telling. Perhaps, for me, macro's story is more fascinating whereas close-up photography's story is more beautiful. Macro photography can be more interesting while close-up photography can be more pleasing. When looking at a macro image of an insect I have never felt, "wow, that is beautiful," fascinating and interesting, yes, but beautiful not so much. In fact, some insects seen from too close up are ugly as can be. It is a good thing that these insects are small. Can you imagine looking in the face of a fly as big as a dog's face? Don't get me wrong, I do like both kinds of images, but for different reasons.
This is a close-up image. The bee and the flower tells the story. If we were to look at a true macro image of the bee's face, then the face itself would be the story. The two genres are closely related but they are also vastly different. True macro photography is more technically difficult to do. The extremely narrow depth of field is difficult to deal with. Using focus stacking adds a layer of complexity.
If you are a beginner, I would suggest that you start with close-up photography and work yourself towards macro as your skill level increases. Enjoy the journey there and remember, close-up photography in and of itself is fun and beautiful.
]]>
This image is rather interesting since the bee's right wing shows well, whereas its left wing is moving so fast that it is not well defined. A ghost shape is there, but I would have preferred if that wing was a little more defined. The light from a flash is extremely fast, so it should catch the wing. But there are other settings that may impact this. We have to look at the balance or ratio of flash versus that of the ambient light. The smaller the aperture and lower the ISO the more we rely on the flash. The more we rely on the flash the smaller the role played by the ambient light. The more we rely on the flash, the less we worry about the shutter speed. The light from the flash acts as a very fast shutter speed. But that also means that if the wing is not at the right angle to the light when it fires, then the wing is not going to show well.
The idea is to get the balance right so that the wing is showing a bit more. It is perfectly okay to have it blurred, but it has to show. Had my settings and the light conditions allowed a bit more impact from the ambient light the wing would have showed up better. Or perhaps the wing would have showed up better had the wing been at a different angle when the flash fired. It takes a lot of trial and error. Just keep on trying, the perfect image will come.
]]>
These two images were taken during the same session at a garden. Which one do you prefer? Do you know why you prefer one over the other? At first glance I prefer the top one because the bee seems slightly bigger in the frame and is therefore slightly more impactful. But the more I look at both of these images, the more I start to favor the bottom one. Why? It all comes down to the details.
In the first image the bee's face merges with its right front leg. It is difficult to figure out what is what. The profile is more confused because of this. In the second image, the leg and face are separated. The profile is not confusing. To me, it just makes for a more pleasing image. Things like these are small details, but they make a huge difference. Such details tend to be out of our control. That is why I shoot macro images at ten frames per second. I shoot in short bursts, precisely because I want a sequence of images to choose from. There will be little details that can make a huge difference. These details cannot be edited in or out later. When you cull your image haul from a shoot, make sure to pay attention to little details.
]]>
An engaging macro image (of insects) usually requires making eye contact with your subject. You need to get to their level and look them in the eyes. Insects like bees don't just sit there posing for us. They are at work gathering pollen. How do we get them still-ish? The best technique is to take hold of the plant's stem with your left hand while holding the camera in your right hand. As the bee moves, we counter that movement by turning the plant in the opposite direction. We move the plant with our left hand to place the bee where we need it.
That means that all the weight of the camera gear is on our right hands. We are holding the camera with one hand only. For macro photography, that would include a flash and a diffuser. Perhaps I am weak, but after twenty minutes my right hand hurts. The size of the gear becomes uncomfortable (I realize that I have small hands). The weight starts to feel heavier. It is a real problem.
Now, if you, like me, shoot a wide variety of subjects (from landscapes to animals and birds to macro), then it is probably not worth making gear decisions only based on size and weight. However, if you shoot primarily macro, there is definitely an advantage to be gained by using smaller and lighter gear. For how long can you hold your gear with a flash with just one hand?
]]>
In this image we show the side profile of the moth. Because the whole insect is basically on the plane of focus the whole insect is basically in focus. Photographing your subject from a side angle works really well and solves the depth of focus issue. Like most issues in life, things are not always that simple for every situation we face. Not all subjects show well from a side angle. In this case, a side angle works well because the moth does not have any body parts coming our way. What should we do to solve the depth of field problem if the subject also had wings that were open? For example, if this moth opened its wings then it would be near impossible (without focus stacking) to get the wing and the moth's eye in focus.
Therefore, at times, a side view does not work well and we should consider other angles such as a frontal view. Let's look at a different kind of subject such as a dragon fly.
A side profile would render the wings out of focus. Yes, the tail would be in focus. So the photographer needs to make a decision. Either the tail or the wings are going to be out of focus depending on whether we are approaching the dragon fly from the side or the front. For me, this images works because the face, from this angle, is so powerful. The wings help to move the viewer's eyes to that face. The tail is just not that important, in this image. In fact, I wish I could have taken this image even more from the front. I could not since I was already dangerously leaning over the water and had I gone any further I would have landed, camera and all, into the water. If, however, I could have shot this image directly from the front I could have hidden the distracting tail behind the dragon fly's head and the wings would have been even more in focus.
The bottom line is that there is not one answer that solves all our photographic problems. What we are photographic should dictate the angle of attack we choose. At times, a side angle works best and at other time a frontal angle is best. Let your subject determine what you should do.
]]>Shoot many images, oh, and just be patient. Here is what I am talking about:
Okay, the background is beautiful. But the stem right behind the bee is a distraction for me. I would much prefer if the background right behind the subject did not have anything behind it other than a blurred background. There is nothing we can do to solve this. The bee flies off too soon. There are too many unknowns, we don't know where it is going to land. In cases like this, the only way to get rid of that stem is to follow the bee as it moves and shoot, shoot, and shoot. Most of the time you will get another image without the pesky stem behind your insect.
The other alternative is to pick your flower, to position yourself in such a way that you have a nice background, and then just to sit and wait for the insect to come to your flowers. Sometimes that works well, sometimes following the bee works. I have been successful both ways. The point that I would like to highlight is that the "background" does not just refer to the distant background but to any and everything behind your main subject. Sometimes, that background is not in the distance but right behind your subject.
Twigs right behind a bird, tend to ruin your photograph. Brush behind animals mostly don't make for great images. Stems behind insects can also be problematic. Whatever technique you chose, try to make sure that your subject does not have something distracting behind it. Yes, you can still tell a story and show the environment of the animal by including that which makes part of its life, but place that to the side and try to do your best to have nothing distracting directly behind your subject.
]]>Let me show you an image:
If you look at the bee's wing, on your right-hand side you can see that in the background there is an out of focus lighter line going from the white petal to the top right of the image. It is not too bothersome because it is blurred and not too bright, although I would prefer that it not be there at all. That line would bother the viewer much more if it intersected with the bee's body (rather than just being behind the wing). Let's say that that brighter line did find itself right behind the bee's body. What can you do about it? It is not possible to reach over the bee to move it out of the way, as the bee will fly away.
The best thing to do is to move that line by moving your position. If you move to the left somewhat, that line will also move to the left, placing that line right behind the bee's body. If you move to the right, that line will move to the right (relative to the position of the bee). The closer the object is the bee, the less it will move relative to your movement. The further it is away from the bee, the more it will move as you move. In this case, I did not want that line right behind the bee's body, nor behind the orange section of the flower. So I moved so that that line's position relative to the bee changed to the right of the bee (to behind it's wing).
So you might ask, "well, why didn't you move even more to get that line more to the right of the image so that it is not behind the wing anymore?" I could have, but we also want to pay attention to the bee's eyes. I did not want the bee to look too much to the left of the image (which would have happened had I move too much to the right). In macro photography, being on eye-level and making eye contact is important. So you want to photograph the insect from their front. Catching the insect from the side does not make for an engaging image. There are some exceptions thought. If you have an insect that does not have its two eyes facing forward but one on either side of the head, then side images work well (think moths or butterflies).
Whether you are shooting still life pictures, landscapes or macros, always consider your angle of attack and that angle's impact on the background.
]]>Since I take multiple stacks of the same scene (to make double sure I got the shot), and since my camera was moving when I took the stack, and since the insect may have also moved, I examine the stacks first. I look for composition, the pose of the insect, and most importantly FOCUS. The quality of your focus will be determined by how smoothly you moved the plant and the camera closer together as you took the stack of images.
I now choose the stack that I am going to process and load them all into DXO PhotoLab (DXO Pure Raw will suffice if you want to save money).
All that is basically done in DXO is noise reduction. You may say that there should not really be much noise at such low ISO values. That is true, but I just hate noise and love super clean images, so my first step is always to reduce noise using DXO. Their noise reduction is legendary and probably still the best today.
Next the stack is loaded into focus stacking software. Here I recommend three different choices. Luminar NEO, Helicon Focus, and a macro favorite Zerene Stacker. Even though Zerene Stacker seems to be favored by many, personally I do not use Zerene stacker because of two reasons. Firstly, I refuse to work with companies that charge you based on what you use your images for. What I use my images for is none of their business. They are my images and I strongly resent a company trying to lay claim to them is any form (or wanting to share in their profit). To charge me more because I sell my images is nonsense. Imagine buying a car and the dealer tells you that the car costs $10,000 if you are the only one to drive in it, but $20,000 if your friends join you in the car, and $30,000 if you use the car to Uber because you profit from using the car. I will never do business with any company employing this strategy. Secondly, their software seems pricey to me. Although it must be said that I find Helicon Focus a bit pricey too. Either way, this software will take the in focus parts of each image in the stack, put them together and output an in focus image. I export the file as a DNG file.
The DNG file is now processed using Adobe Camera Raw and Photoshop. The final image is saved as a TIFF file for future use and as a JPG prepared for web use (internet).
That is it. I hope that this series on macro photography was helpful.
]]>
Just like any other photograph, composition matters, background matters, angle of view matters, and color matters. Let's look at an example:
This image is not staged. It is not taken indoors or using a studio type setup. Everything about this image is natural, even the background. But the way the image turned is no accident. Everything about this image was intensionally orchestrated to come out that way. Let's see what we can learn from this image by looking at each element.
Compositionally speaking, you can see that the rule of thirds are used here.
The ladybug is looking into the image and has room to move into the image. You never want your subject to leave your image as so will your viewer.
There is action. Interaction between animals makes images more interesting. Have your insect interact with another animal or with a water drop, or with a leaf or a flower or something. Images that show behavior, interaction, and movement will most always be more interesting than static images of the bug just sitting there doing nothing and looking half dead.
With insects, just like with birds, try to get to their eye level. The worse kind of shot is the boring angle right from above or from a 45 degree angle from above. We want the viewer to engage with the insect, they need to make eye contact with the subject. Get down low.
Since the stem this ladybug is sitting on is controlled with my left hand, I can slightly move the plant. So move it in such a position that the background is pleasing. Backgrounds can make or break our images.
Direct sunlight on insects often do not make for great images. I deliberately placed myself between the insect and the sun to place the subject in my shade. Let your flash manage your light and let that diffuser do its work. If your position relative to the insect and the plant's stem does not make for a nice composition because you moved to block the sun, just gently move that plant or stem with your left hand to get it the way you want it. This is the nice thing about macro, much of it is in your control.
Remember that depth of field is your biggest enemy when it comes to macro images. To maximize your depth of field make sure that that stem runs parallel to your focal plane (your sensor). Often we let the stem angle away from us, only to ruin the focus. The more parallel everything is to your sensor the better your depth of field will be.
Compose a bit loosely. There needs to be some space around your subject. Because we are taking a number of images at different distances, the size of the subject is going to differ from image to image. The composition needs to allow for enough room around the subject to allow for a slightly larger subject towards the end of the stack of images, so as not to cut any part of the subject off.
Now that we have our stack of image, it is time to process them. I will share my processing workflow with you next week.
]]>Hold the camera with your right hand. Take ahold of the plant with the insect on it with your left hand. This will help to stabilize the plant from the wind. You also need to move the plant to get the composition and angle you desire. Once the insect is at the angle you want, slowly move the camera and plant closer to each other. Once your focus peaking lights up press and hold your shutter button as you very slowly continue to move the camera and plant closer to each other. Try to keep the insect in the same place in the viewfinder to make the stitching easier later on. Keep on shooting for two to four seconds. This is why we want to shoot at 10 frames per second. We want to shoot quickly to minimize how long we shoot. We want to shoot without the insect moving much. The quicker the better, but we cannot shoot more than 10 frames per second either because the flash cannot keep up. 10 Frames per second seems to be the sweet spot. If you get underexposed frames in the sequence then your flash did not keep up. Increase your ISO a bit and set your flash on less power.
We now have twenty or more images. Because we kept on moving the subject and the camera closer to each other as we shot each image will now be focused at a different place. Image one will be focused on that which is closest to the lens. Image two will be focused on the next part of the insect. So each following image should be focused on the next part of the image. At the end of the day we have a sequence of images each focused from front to back of the insect. All we need to do now is to stack or stitch the images together (which we will explain in an upcoming blog).
In the controlled environment of a studio or indoor setup things work a bit differently. Approach the shoot as you would a still life image. Once again, your background will be held in place by a clamp. Move your plant to how and where you want it. Place your camera on a tripod. Move it to the desired distance from the subject. Focus on the closest point of the subject and fire off your shot. Now turn your focus ring ever so slightly to focus on the next part of the insect. Take another image. Repeat this procedure until you have an image where every part of the insect is in focus.
If you are using an auto focus lens and if your camera has a focus stacking or focus shift feature built in, then let the camera do the process for you. Either way, the idea is to end up with a number of images that cover the entire focus depth of the subject. With extreme macro images this may best be done with a focus rail that can move the camera at minute distances. All that is now left to do is to stack or stitch the images together.
Set the ISO to a value of around 400 - 640 and just leave it there. There is no need to change this.
Set the shutter speed to about 200th of a second. Just make sure that your camera can sync with your flash at this speed. If your camera cannot sync with your flash at this speed then set your shutter speed at the fastest shutter speed that your camera can sync with your flash. You do not need to use any High Sync Speed functions of the flash. We don't really care too much about which shutter speed we use because the short flash duration will freeze the subject. We just want a shutter speed that is fast enough to have the image vastly underexposed if it were not for the flash.
Set the aperture to F8 or F11. We want to maximize our depth of field without allowing diffraction to steal our sharpness. Between F8 and F11 seem to be a good balance between depth of field and diffraction. Besides, many lenses seem to perform at their peak at F8.
Once the ISO, shutter speed and aperture have been set we leave them alone. We do not tamper with them again as the exposure will be controlled by the flash going forward.
Set the flash on manual. Use 1/16th or 1/32nd power. Shoot a test image and review the exposure. Just adjust the flash's strength to get the exposure as you want it. This is the only variable you need to change. Typically, once you find the strength of the flash that works for you, it is almost a set and forget scenario. This makes shooting very easy, in terms of exposure.
Lastly, make sure that your camera's white balance is set on flash. You want a fixed value rather than a variable value as you will be stitching images together using focus stacking software. Having different images all shot at different white balance settings just creates extra work in post processing.
You are now ready to go. However, there are a few other things you may want to set as well.
I shoot at 10 frames per second, which I will discuss when I talk about technique.
If your subject is static or you are shooting using an indoor setup AND you are using an auto focus lens you may want to consider ignoring what I will tell you next week regarding technique and use the focus shift feature (some systems call it focus stacking) of your camera (if your camera has this feature). This is a feature where you set your focus to the closest point that you want in focus and then your camera will take an image set at that distance, change the focus distance a little and take another shot, and repeat the process multiple times. This will give you a number of images each focused at a different place which can then be stitched together with focus stacking software. If you use this feature, set the interval between the images at 0.1 to give your flash a chance to power up between images.
We are all set to start macro photography. Next week we will talk about technique.
Shooting a subject close to the flash is a recipe for harsh light and perhaps for blown highlights. So you will need a diffuser. If your budget is tight, you can make one. If you want pro result spending a bit more may be worth it. I decided on the AK diffuser but there are a few reputable brands with good products to choose from. Don't skimp on the diffuser, this to a large extent will impact the quality of your imagery. Remember, in photography it is all about the light, and macro photography is no exception here. Your diffuser is what is going to control to quality of the light you work with.
You have a number of choices regarding lenses. The cheap option is to get a Raynox lens element that connects to the front of the lens you already have, thus increasing its magnification and enabling you to focus at closer distances. The more expensive option is to get a dedicated macro lens. All you need is a manual focus lens. You will be focusing with distance anyway, as I will explain in an upcoming part of this series. I got the excellent Venus Optics Laowa 90mm lens. It is not that expensive, as far as lenses go. It also overs up to 2X life size magnification rather than the 1X offered by most autofocus alternatives (usually at more than double the price of the Laowa lens).
You do not need an expensive camera since you will not be using the camera's autofocus system. However, for reasons which I will explain later, you may prefer a camera that can shoot at 10 frames per second.
You may also want to consider a few cheap accessories. Firstly, some background cards work fantastically. I got the series offered by AK diffusers. I also use a cheap self standing monopod and a clamp to hold the background card in place for me. For macro studio setups I also use a camera remote trigger (which you can also do via an app on your phone).
Speaking about apps, I am using a free app that displays the color wheel (harmony of color). I move it to match the predominant color of my subject and then look at what the complimentary color to that color is to help me to choose the best background color card to use. That is it. Next week we will talk about the technique necessary for successful macro photography.
This "research" sent me to B&H Photo to purchase what was needed. I programed a "macro mode" into my camera's memory bank with the recommended settings. Ready for action, I started to explore a garden and a field. The macro world is small and thus not noticed easily. So one has to stand still and just look. Move in closer and just watch for movement. Soon I started to notice ladybugs, ants, and other insects.
I snapped away and my macro journey began. Let me warn you though, that I was greeter by frustration. Getting and keeping focus is difficult. The insects move and the wind makes the plants sway. But the biggest challenge is the small depth of field. I will talk about how to overcome this problem in a future part of this series. So what have I discovered so far?
Patience is key. I just kept on trying and trying. After a few hours I got the hang of it.
It is immensely rewarding to see the images come to life, to look at the fine details of insects I have never seen before .
Even though my first focus was on insects, I soon realized that you can look at anything through the macro lens.
So I decided to start with easier subjects, indoor flowers do not move.
A mist sprayer makes the world of difference to add interest. In a few hours I already had some nice images. I am really enjoying this type of photography now that I have learnt a few things and have the right equipment. I highly recommend that you give it a try.
So why the sudden interest in macro now? And why should you be interested in macro too? They say that necessity is the mother of invention, or in my case the mother of inspiration. Nebraska is not renowned for its exotic landscape scenery. So I was forced to branch out into other genres of photography. That got me into bird photography. Yet, certain seasons are not the best for bird photography as many of them are migratory. What then was I to photograph now that landscapes have generally been ruled out and birds are not always present? This is where macro photography enters. This is what persuaded me to enter this genre and why perhaps you might want to as well:
Macro opportunities are everywhere. There is no place where you cannot shoot macro. In winter you can shoot snowflakes. There are always plants that can be explored with a macro lens. There are always bugs. Anything can be interesting when seen through a macro lens.
You don't have to travel. Macro possibilities abound anywhere and everywhere, right where you are.
Weather almost does not matter. The time of day does not matter. Yay, no more getting up hours before sunrise. Everything you shoot in macro is in the shade of your flash diffuser and lit by your flash.
It is reasonably cheap to get into, relative to some other genres of photography. You don't need a fancy flash, a cheap one is just fine. A manual focus macro lens is cheap compared to many other lenses. We will talk about equipment in the coming weeks.
Do you notice the heart just above this ladybug's head? Yes, I have come to love macro photography. this is one of my very first macro images. And yes, the narrow depth of field is still frustrating, but we will solve that puzzle in another part of this series. Macro allows you to enter another small world. It lets you see details that you have never seen before. Come follow me through this series as I share my macro journey with you and teach you what I have learned. Perhaps it will inspire you to try macro.
]]>There is just something greatly rewarding about getting a great image. It gives a person a sense of achievement, a certain sense of satisfaction. That image is not just a picture, there is an emotional connection, precisely because of all of the adversity mentioned above which was overcome.
It opens up conversations about the photography which we so love. Don't you just love telling the stories behind your images? I cannot tell you how many times people come to my home, start talking about the images on my walls, and then go "wow" when they find out that I took them. It is immensely satisfying when visitors just stare at a large print on the wall and then move even closer to inspect it from close range for even longer. Then the conversation just flows. And who does not love to talk about their passion? This is not a selfish or self-centered conversation about just my passion. Soon inquiry is made of their passions and hobbies. If they are also very passionate about whatever they do it seems to form a bond. Even though our passions may be very different, we often share dedication, overcoming obstacles, and a level of expertise and effort. We just "get" each other's experience. It deepens our friendships or at the very least our understanding of each other.
Being out in nature and witnessing the wonderful scenes that make our images are good for one's soul. It refreshes me. It makes me happy and gives me joy. It melts stress away. I know of a few photographers who view photography as therapy. After a divorce or tragedy they feel that photography helps them to process their thinking and bring healing.
Photography can provide great shared experiences. I have had the privilege to be involved with many photographic workshops. It is awesome to share the experience with like-minded people, to talk shop, to help each other, to see the world as others see it by looking at their images from the same shoot.
What about you, why do you do photography?
Images like this one is a prime candidate for people to over process. They select the subject, the bird in this case. Then they can brighten the bird without changing anything else in the image. The reasoning behind this idea is simple. They want their subject to stand out more from the background. That is precisely why this image illustrates this issue so well. The bird is basically the same color as the rest of the image, with the exception of the brighter wingtips. No wonder people want to brighten the bird to stand out more.
However, we have to be careful with that approach. Making the subject stand out can also make it stand out like a sore thumb. Brightening the bird too much will make it stand out in a bad way. It will not look natural. The bird is part of this image and part of the same general light. It needs to look dark, just like the rest of its surroundings. If the bird is much lighter than its surroundings it will just look wrong.
Therefore, be careful with your processing. Just because there are all these new easy tools to use does not mean that we should go overboard. Go ahead and brighten your subject a little but stop well short of making it look unnatural. Because we can, does not mean that we should. Moderation is best. When you are done processing your images. Walk away. Come back in an hour and look at it. Does it still look good? Can you easily tell that it has been "doctored?" Call and ask your spouse what s/he thinks about the image.
When these new tools excite you, stay calm and process gently.
]]>If this is so difficult (and COLD), why bother doing it? I am glad you asked. We do it because we love challenging ourselves and to grow. But we also do it to chase the images that those very conditions may produce (if we overcome these challenges). In case you wonder if dim light can, in fact, produce nice images, here is an examples of what I am talking about:
Besides the obvious advice of dressing warmly, here are some best practices to help you get images in these conditions.
What would you prefer, an out of focus image or a noisy image? There is no saving an out of focus image, but there are tools to mitigate noise. So use the widest aperture your lens offers to get as much light to the sensor as possible, choose the shutter speed needed to freeze the action and then let the ISO fall where it may. If the ISO really gets too high then slow down the shutter speed just a bit. Blurry wingtips are acceptable and can even be pleasing as long as the face and eyes of your subject are sharp.
Use AI noise reduction software on your raw file. Personally I prefer DXO PhotoLab or DXO PureRaw. Adobe also recently updated their AI noise module and now produce amazing results too. You will be surprised how good noisy images can be cleaned up these days. Luminar Neo's noise reduction also works very well. You can also look at the offerings from Topaz.
A dark viewfinder is a serious issue. If you can't see you cannot compose your image, let alone following fast moving action. Most modern cameras allow you to set your viewfinder brighter in the menu settings. This can help a little, but usually not by much. Nikon cameras have a fantastic feature that you can turn on that ignores your camera settings for the viewfinder's purposes. It changes your settings just for the viewfinder to brighter it while not affecting your images. This feature is like magic. It lets you see in almost darkness. That was what allowed me to take these images.
Autofocus systems need contrast in order to be able to focus. There is very little contrast in dim light. One trick that you can use is to set yourself up to shoot into the light which creates contrast. Parts of these birds' wings are quite bright because of being backlit. This not only helps your camera to focus but can also make your images more impactful. You can try to lower your angle to shoot upishly. If your subject has a brighter sky behind it you have contrast and your camera can focus. So your position relative to that of your subject, the sky, and the sun, can make a huge difference in aiding your camera with acquiring focus.
Dressing warmly solves the cold problem but solving one problem often creates more problems, just different ones. One such problem is that warm clothing can, at times, be noisy. When a sleeve rubs against another part of a jacket it can create enough noise to scare your subjects. When they can't see that well they are more skittish for self preservation's sake. Any noise during dim lit times of the day can send your subjects to seek safety elsewhere. I don't know if it is just me who thinks this but to me it just seems as if noise travels further at night. So be cognisant of this problem and select clothing that does not make noise when it moves. I have yet to find gloves that work in Nebraska's cold. I have tried a number of pairs but the cold just laughs at them. Thicker gloves will impede my ability to control the camera. Please don't suggest "photographic" gloves where the fingers can be exposed to control the camera. Exposed fingers in Nebraska's winter make no sense to me. I have been in severe pain for forty or fifty minutes as my fingers thaw inside, and that was after having full gloves on, without any fingers being exposed. By the way, if your fingers are really cold, they should thaw slowly, don't put them in warm water, for example, as that may possibly injure you. I am not a medical provider, so please seek professional help. Either way, next winter I will experiment with electric gloves. I will let you know if they work both for heat (which I am sure will work wonderfully) AND for camera operability.
Be careful and safe. Have fun trying something new.
]]>However, that does not mean that this attempt was a total bust. There were some images to be had. This outing served the purpose of establishing the proof of concept. From that perspective it was a success. Before we discuss what I would consider that success to be, let's look at the image in question:
When attempting to shoot an image such as this one, the dynamic range (the range between bright white and very dark in which there is still detail) of your camera is very important. It is so easy to get either the sun and or the foreground blown out (having no detail). Things worked out well in this department. The color rendition also stayed true without fading. Unfortunately, my winged friends did not exhibit their usual aggressive behavior toward each other when they were between me and the sun (of course they continually displayed their behavior when they did not have the sun right behind them). So I never had the opportunity of shooting them as they jumped up and "into" the sun. For me to get this image a lot of things will have to work out. Ideally, the sun needs to be a bit lower and hover just above the trees in the background at the same time when the birds cooperate. They tended to stay toward the left most of the time, so my chances of getting the image I am after are slim. I cannot move my position to the left thereby positioning the birds in front of the sun from where they mostly do their thing because the terrain slopes downward in that direction and I will be too low. So why did this image prove the concept to me then if things did not quite work out?
Well, let's look at what did work out and what showed promise:
Even though the chances are going to be low-ish, this image proves that I can get the birds between me and sun, even if just on a few and short occasions.
I am now convinced that the dynamic range will work out, it is possible to get detail in the birds and in the sun.
I was lucky enough to get a bird flying across the sun. That was not where I focused, but it shows me that it may possibly work out.
My season for photographing these Prairie Chickens are now over for this year. We will try this again next year. If you want to attempt this kind of photography, here are a few tips for you:
Use a large aperture and a fast shutter speed. You have to get the action in focus and these birds can move fast.
Use auto ISO to let the camera nail the exposure. Yes, I am aware that there are superhuman photographers who claim to shoot everything on full manual. That can certainly work in this situation. Just figure the exposure out with the sun included in the image and set the camera accordingly. However, then your viewfinder will be dark when the sun is not in the frame. When these birds jump up and fight you just don't have the time to change settings. I shot until the light got too intense and harsh and the auto ISO nailed every shot. So I don't understand the big deal of why some people refuse to use such a great tool. It works wonderfully, at least for me.
Use a Gimbal head on your tripod. This type of photography takes time and unless you are Rambo's brother I cannot see how a person can hand hold the camera and a long lens for that long.
IMPORTANT - stop shooting into the sun the minute when the sun gets much brighter than the sunrise glow (or should I say the minute before the sun gets too bright). You will damage the camera's sensor looking straight into the sun with a telephoto lens when the sun's strengths is too strong.
IMPORTANT - NEVER look into the sun with your eyes or through the viewfinder of an SLR or a DSLR. You will permanently damage your eyes. In this case, I only looked using my mirrorless camera, that way I am not looking at the sun but at a TV monitor which cannot be bright enough to harm me.
Stay safe and enjoy making your dream images.
]]>So what is changing, what is new?
Water Enhancer AI - helps you to quickly change muddy lifeless water into bluer water.
Twilight Enhances AI - changes the look of an image to what if may have looked like if you took it during twilight.
New Masking Tools - for the first time we will now have Luminosity Masking (selecting areas of an image based on brightness). there will also be AI object selection.
The HDR module can now batch process up to 1000 images. Just drag and drop them into the module.
There is also a new landscape category in Tools so that you can easily find your favorite landscape tools in one place.
I may not say more now but there will also be a rebranding.
Feel welcome to explore the software here (affiliate link - which does not add any cost to you). In fact, you may get a discount if you order from this link.
Personally, I don't use some of the AI features but many people like them. Other programs may be better at certain things, like DXO seems to be better at noise reduction. However, how much will you pay if the use the best software for this, and another best software for that, and that, and that? Luminar offers a great balance between what you get and what you pay for.
Here is an example of a deeply cropped image shot at ISO 8000. Now I would normally not use such an image but I thought that this example will give you a good idea of what can be done with this software. Please note, that from Raw to final image, only Luminar Neo was used.
So what will it take to get that dream shot?
I will have to get permission to erect my own blind. Check!
Since the blind has to be set up in total darkness one has to have a way to know where to pitch it. On a previous trip I waited for the birds to leave, picked my spot, and took measurements. So the next time I go, I will know to take so many steps from the permanent blind to the West and so many paces to the North. Check.
The image I dream of will have to have a cloudless sky. I am watching the weather reports.
The birds need to get used to my blind. Unfortunately, that means I will have to go multiple times.
The imagined image will require taking the shot at an exact moment. To increase my chances of getting it right I have to learn the birds' behavior to better predict that moment. Check.
Luck. A lot of luck will be needed. Why? Well, let me tell you about my dream, then it will make sense. First, please look at this image.
You might wonder what on earth this image has to do with my Prairie Chickens. My dream is to have two Prairie Chickens jump up into the air, fighting each other (as they often do). I want to be shooting right into the sun. I want to catch those Prairie Chickens inside the sun. For this to work out, they would have to be in the precise position between me and the sun. They would need to jump the exact height needed. Oh' and it needs to happen within just a few short minutes after sunrise before the sun gets too strong and harsh.
So what do you think? Do I stand a chance? I can dream! Now, I just need to keep plugging away, trying over and over again, until I succeed. I sure hope that one of these days you will see this shot. I am already seeing it in my mind.
]]>The Lek which I visit has two permanent blinds set up. As usual, these blinds are set up for bird watchers and not photographers. Firstly, the blinds are set up facing each other on either side of the mound. This means that, at times, you have the other blind in your background depending on the bird movement. My biggest gripe, however, is that they are facing North and South. The birds are only at the Lek from before sunrise until about three or so hours later. This means that half the birds' bodies are always shaded. Furthermore, the dry grass shimmer with the side lighting, which makes exposure difficult.
It is important to consider the direction of the light. Are you okay with where the shadows are? What if the bird's face is in shadow because a wing is lifted up or if another bird interacts with "your" bird and casts a shadow on the target bird? This has been a big problem for me to deal with. Here is an example:
I really want to love this image. The light is early and soft. the bird is coming right at me. it's beak is even open. BUT the face is in shadow (and this is after I have lightened it in post processing). To solve this problem I wanted to shoot with the sun behind me. I want the whole bird sunlit. So I received permission to set up my own blind. Here is the result.
I wish I had a different background, but I don't. The mound makes it difficult because you are always shooting upwards, hence the sky as a background. The permanent blinds are higher than my little blind which meant that I could get a different background. Photography is always about tradeoffs. Before deciding on where to take your position, you may want to consider the direction of the light. What kind of result do you want? Side lighting looks very different from full frontal light. If possible, take images from a number of angles from the sun and decide which is best for you. The direction of the light can impact your images greatly.
Happy shooting.
]]>I did not realize how attached I was to my Sony system. For reference, I am not a very sentimental person, but I was almost in tear when I shipped my Sony equipment off. It felt like I was saying good bye to be close friend. After all, my Sony gear traveled all over with me, to England, Israel, Botswana, Namibia, South Africa, to name a few places, and of course to many placed in the USA.
Learning the different vocabulary for familiar features has been a chore.
Setting up the Nikon has been a nightmare. Perhaps it is just me, but the implementation of their memory bank system seem ill advised. These memory banks (or custom settings - C1, C2, C3 on the Sony's mode dial) never save a certain set point. They remain live and stay changed according to any and all changes that you make when you shoot. They really should not be referred to as a bank because you cannot bank on them. Perhaps the better name for them is a bookmark, bookmarking where you were last at or how things were last set when you used it. So Nikon users have to save the reference point settings (to be able to bank on them) to memory cards. But then when you format your memory card your settings are gone. To add to the confusion, there are two different kinds of memory banks. I have no idea why this is the case. To change from one bank to another requires multiple menu steps. In Sony land, custom settings are true banks to which you can save all your settings in one bank versus the different types of banks with Nikon. Furthermore, to change from one bank or custom setting to another on the Sony takes all but one turn of a dial and you are set.
There were also some nice surprises in Nikon land. For years I wished that my Sony would allow me to record short audio files and attached it to the relevant image. For example, I would have loved to be able to record a note stating that this image is the start of a series of seven images which are part of a panorama image, or that the next five images are part of a focus stack. The Nikon Z8 has this feature, a dream come true. Other than the memory bank issue and having to learn different names for what features are called, I managed to drive the menu system well.
Coming from my Sony A7R IV, I like blackout free shooting a lot. It means that one can adjust to birds' flight paths easier and follow them in the viewfinder better. It is just more pleasant to use. Because of the rolling shutter effect of my Sony I always used the mechanical shutter. Boy, do I like silent shoot with the Z8! A nice touch of Nikon is giving you a soft cloth "housing" for each lens, making them a bit more protected inside my backpack.
It is still early days but for now I am satisfied with the switch. All in all, it was cheaper than buying the Sony A1. Next week we will leave all this gear talk behind us and get back to some actual photography.
P.S. It really bothers me that Canon, Nikon, and Sony all do not use the Arca Swiss dove tail system for their lens feet. WHY???? This causes additional expense and hassle. Almost every reviewer under the sun complains about this, and have been for a number of years now, and yet, here we are having to waste money on buying something that can easily be incorporated into the product. After all, Sigma and Tamron's lens feet are Acra Swiss compatible.
]]>Nikon
I really do not like the size of their Z8 and Z9 cameras. I know I am in the minority, but I am still the one that has to live with my decision. My hands are the size they are and I cannot change that. With bird photography one sits with the camera in hand for hours. Comfort matters. If Nikon did not have the Z8 and only the Z9 was available I would not even have looked at Nikon. Gear is expensive as it is, I don't have extra money laying around to hire a Sherpa to haul a Z9 around.
It would have been really nice if pre-capture could shoot in Raw. The Z9 does! Perhaps a future firmware update would make this option available on the Z8. Since the Z8 just had a massive firmware update without including this feature, I somehow doubt that it would come along in the future. Nikon has to keep some differentiation between the Z8 and the Z9. Nikon seems to be listening to their users and one can only hope that this will be fixed.
Nikon seems to always be taking their sweet time to manufacture their goods. There are stories of people waiting for ordered gear for faaaaaar toooooo long. A similar situation exists right now regarding the 180-600mm lens. You cannot get it anywhere. I have either been to or communicated with various camera stores and all of them seem to have waiting lists. I can't even find this lens used; which is understandable since it is a newly introduced lens. I know that my up coming trip is my problem but I am not going on that trip without gear. After all, part of the trip is a safari for photography. If I cannot get the 180-600mm lens then I cannot go with Nikon. They will loose not only the sale of this lens but of everything.
Sony
Pre-capture. The Sony A1 does not even offer this feature. For bird photography, this is a great feature. I will not be happy to pay over $4,400.00 for a used body without having this feature. Sony has officially promised a firmware update for the A1 but the promised feature list does not include pre-capture.
Price. The Sony A1 (which is the only option in the Sony camp over 33MP and capable of shooting at more than 12 frames per second) has been on the market since January of 2021. It is arguably getting to the end of it's run before an updated camera model takes over. Yet, the price has not dropped from the eye watering price of $6,500.00. I am really hesitant to buy a camera for this much, so close to it getting replaced. Once it gets replaced it will obviously still continue to work as well as before but it's value will take a significant hit. Even on the used market they tend to go for around a hefty $4,400.00 now. How much will I get back for it once a new model is released. Not that I will change right away but it is something to consider. Then I will still need to add CF-Express type A cards at double the price.
So here is what I need to consider. Can I even get Nikon's 180-600mm before my trip, without which I cannot consider Nikon at this point? Will I be able to get a used and discounted enough Sony A1 to make financial sense? I am searching for both options, far and wide, on a daily basis. At this point it is all about availability and price. If I get the Nikon 180-600mm before I can get a reasonably priced Sony A1, then I am switching to Nikon. If I happen to get the Sony A1 first, then I will be staying with Sony. It is reasonable to argue that I should not be making such an important decision all based on the timing of an up coming trip. Yet, I feel that both brands are so good and offers what I need (mostly) that I cannot go wrong with either. Since the price that I am going to pay is very similar, between going to Nikon versus staying with Sony, I don't feel that I am making a mistake either way, regardless of the trip; the asterisks being depending on price and availability.
Sony has been a good brand for me. People complain about their menu system. I simply placed the items I use regularly in "My Menu." I assigned one of the custom buttons accordingly and with the press of that one button I have instant access to all the items I use, no searching for anything. Problem solved. People complain about Sony's lack of weather sealing. I have used my gear in rain for years now without any issue. The equipment has held up very nicely and looks as good as new. I know my Sony well. I love the exposure comp dial where it is. It works well with how I shoot. I am amazed that Canon and Nikon don't have such a dedicated dial.
If I migrate to Nikon I will have to climb a learning curve. Things may frustrate me, like not having Zebra lines when whites or blacks are blown. I fail to understand why Nikon does not have this. It is super useful. I read a comment in one forum stating that these Zebra lines can take up a large portion of your view, hindering you from watching what is going on, and preventing you from capturing the image at the right moment. My response: why would you want to take any image if large portions of the image is blown? Besides, features that bother you can be turned off. Missing features cannot be turned on. But, given Nikon's stellar reputation and major firmware updates I am excited to give Nikon a try too. It has been said that one should date your camera but marry your lenses. I do feel that in this department Nikon is the winner, for what I shoot (long reasonably priced good primes).
It has boiled down to a wait and see game of watching availability with Nikon and price of used gear with Sony. But what will I do if both come true; I find a Nikon 180-600mm AND the Sony A1 at a more palatable price? If that happens I will probably move to Nikon. I make this decision based on the fact that Sony cameras are just very expensive (A9 III and the A1), and because the A1 is nearing the end of it's run. So not only am I asked to spend a lot now but I will take a second hit the day I sell it because of it's age (at least more so than a newer and still current model Nikon). I will also get a new warranty on everything for the same price. Lastly, a clear upgrade path to wonderful and reasonably priced long prime lenses are attractive, something Sony does not have at this stage. Ideally, I would love to stay with Sony, if only they would release a real top notch APS-C body for bird and wildlife photography and or release a full frame stacked sensor body at a price that competes with Canon and Nikon. As a bonus, it would be nice if Sony also develops such nice long primes without costing human body parts.
Thank you for taking this journey of decision-making with me. I will let you know what happens.
]]>It is not all rosy news in the Nikon camp. Their APS-C offerings do not seem to me to attract much attention, and for good reason. Some may possibly argue that Nikon has neglected this market segment. Lastly, their lower tier cameras, in my opinion, are also behind the competition, especially as far as autofocus systems are concerned, so I hear. I am not sure if Nikon is choosing to position themselves at the higher end of the market, we will see.
So why am I seriously looking into Nikon? For what I shoot, their offerings are very good, and at reasonable prices. The Z8 is a fantastic camera that received multiple camera of the year awards. It has a stacked sensor with fast readout speed, a feature lacking in Canon (other than the Canon R3 - but 24MP does not interest me). The major complaint against the camera is the lack of a mechanical shutter. This is a valid concern for those who shoot with flash, but that does not impact me. As of a few weeks ago the Z8 received a major firmware update which brought new features to the camera. To me, this was an important firmware update to watch. The Z8's autofocus system, according to many reviewers, was good but behind Sony and Canon's. This was particularly true, say the reviewers, when tracking birds with watery backgrounds and when birds flew from a blue sky background into a vegetation based background. The firmware update not only fixed these issues but may also have brought the autofocus system to parity with Sony and Canon's.
I still have two niggles that are keeping me back from jumping to Nikon. Their pre-capture only shoots in JPEG. Now I don't know what on earth Nikon is thinking here because who buys a $3,800.00 camera to shoot JPEG? Nikon's real strength lies not only in the wonderful Z8 but also in the great bird and wildlife suited lenses. These pro/prosumer lenses cost more than cheaper consumer lenses would. Surely, Nikon must know that their users (of this camera) are avid enthusiasts and pro or prosumers not interested in JPEG for the most part. The second niggle is the bottleneck created by using asymmetrical card slots. One card slots uses the newer CF-Express type B cards while the other slot uses the older SD card type. CF-Express cards handsomely outperform SD cards. This means that, if a photographer sets the camera to use the second card slot as a backup to the first one, that the camera's speed, to clear the buffer, for example, will be limited to the speed of the slowest card. Other than these two issues the Z8 looks like a fantastic camera.
Most people think that Sony's ergonomic are horrible and that their camera bodies are too small and therefore uncomfortable in their hands. Personally I love Sony's form factor and they fit my hand perfectly (I am a small person). I have handled the Z8 and it is quite a bit bigger than not only the Sony's but also Canon's R5. It is a bit big for my liking (And I am asking for the bigger CF-Express card slot in place of the smaller SD card slot). On everything else, I am very satisfied with what the Z8 offers. It's price of $3,800.00 compares very well with the price of $4,400.00 or so of a used Sony A1. One could rightly argue that $600 is not enough to warrant changing camera brands. However, shooting at faster frame rates means that the photographer will need bigger memory cards. The Sony's CF-Express type A cards cost roughly double that of the type B cards. This results in another expense which can be costly. I don't want to buy more SD cards because, they are being replaced by CF-Express cards. Nobody feels good buying VHS tapes when CD's are taking over. It is just not a judicious way to spend one's money (and my budget is tight). Then, of course, the Sony A1 is used. We have not talked about specific lenses yet but since we are talking about finances, Nikon's 180-600mm is priced very kindly, given the competition, at $1,700.00.
Given that I will be satisfied with either the Z8 or the A1, perhaps I should concern myself with the lens offerings. From the reviewers point of view, it seems as though the Nikon 180-600 and the Sony 200-600 are equally sharp with the Nikon having the edge in terms of image stabilization. I am not sure if this is due to the IBIS (in body image stabilization - inside the camera versus that of the lens) system or of the lens' system. If it is due to the IBIS then I believe Sony has already improved that as is evidenced by the A7R V. Any new Sony release should have the improved IBIS also. Both Sony and Nikon's lenses are great. Where there is a difference is what is on offer by each company in terms of long prime lenses. Both companies' 600mm F4's are very good, with Nikon having the edge here because of a built in 1.4X teleconverter. However, these lenses do not interest me as my budget simply, and probably never will, accommodate the financial outlay that those lenses call for. So this will not affect my decision.
Where Nikon shines and where no other manufacturer offers any lenses is in their 600mm F6.3 and 800mm F6.3's. They are light (for what they are). They are sharp. Their autofocus is fast. Compared to the 400mm F2.8 and 600mm F4 lenses these lenses are well priced. For now, they are still well beyond my budget but one can dream. If a very big and luxurious ship sails in bearing my name these lenses are available. If finances ever permit it, I could see myself getting one of these two lenses, whereas I cannot see myself paying for the 600mm F4 or other branded 800mm (and I am not referring to the F22 kind). The price gap between them is just too huge. There is a clear upgrade path that does not exist in the other brands. This is not a big factor for me since my budget is way too limited but what is of interest to me is that Nikon is positioning themselves in the space that caters to what I shoot and to the kind of equipment that I like (and at a tolerable price).
So, my final choice then is between Nikon and Sony. Next week I decide what I am going to do. Please tune in.
]]>However, if I use a Canon camera I also need Canon lenses. NO, I am not a fan of adapting other lenses. Although adapted lenses' performance can be admirable they do not tend to match that of native glass. Because bird in flight photography is so difficult for autofocus systems to track (except whey they fly in front of a clear blue sky) it does not make sense to me to sacrifice any performance by adapting lenses. As much as I like the R5, it is Canon's lenses that do not suit my needs. In fact, for the life of me, I cannot understand Canon's lens strategy right now. They are bringing to market lenses that seem to either cater to the bottom of the market or the top of the market. They don't have lenses (telephoto lenses) that appeal to a person like me, who are seeking lenses catering to the middle or to the middle upper market where enthusiasts and semi-pros function. In the short term, this may be a wise strategy. The bottom of the market moves a lot of volume, and volume sales create good profit. The top end of the market has higher profit margins, also generating good profit. But I question this wisdom of this strategy from a long term perspective.
The bottom end of the market now has nowhere to go to upgrade their bottom end lenses when they grow into photography more and out of their current gear. Most of this market probably will not jump straight from cheaper bottom end gear to the very expensive top market gear. For perspective, the Canon 600mm F4 sells for $13,000.00. So when a beginner becomes an enthusiast, Canon may very well lose them to another brand.
Avid photographers may now not be drawn to Canon because they are not interested in the bottom end gear and they cannot afford the top market gear. Canon may thus not attract these photographers and may also loose their own avid photographers.
I fall into this latter category. On the long end of the lens lineup there is not a single lens that attracts me, while there are many which repulses me. Yes, repulse is a strong word, and it may not even be strong enough given how I feel. I am just not smart enough to understand why someone would buy and what someone will do with Canon's F22 long lenses. Okay, I am exaggerating some. But seriously, a 600mm F11 and an 800mm f11. Yes, they are cheap, but so are doorstops. How about the 200-800mm F9? Many of the reviewers have turned into F9 or F11 apologists. They argue:
One can get great images with these lenses*. Yes, a photographer can, with a massive asterisks. IF you shoot in good light (No, "good light," for real photographers do not refer to bright, middle of the day light. We shoot at sunrise, sunset, lightly overcast days, and yes, even in rain). IF the subject is close to you (So that the background can be blurred. But then again, if the subject is close to me, why would I need an 800mm lens?). IF the background is far from the subject (To blur the background). These "IF's" eliminate probably 90+% of wildlife and bird shooting opportunities. I don't want to buy a lens that is only usable in a small number of cases and in light that is less flattering for photography.
The AI noise removal software is so good today that the aperture is no longer of any concern, just jack up the ISO to get enough light. While this is partly true, the problem of using a too high ISO is not just related to noise. High levels of ISO also negatively impact the vibrancy of colors and contrast not to mention harming the dynamic range. Furthermore, AI software can only go so far. When the ISO really gets up there the image file just deteriorates.
Look, not only are we shooting in less than bright mid day sun, we are also shooting fast moving subjects. This means using a very fast shutter speeds. Sorry, but a very fast shutter speed and a small aperture does not work for bird photography (except when all the "IF's" are met, which is rare). Also, the maximum aperture on a lens (most lenses) is not always the sharpest. It is often best to stop down just one aperture to get the best out of the lens in terms of sharpness. This makes the F9 or F11 even worse. Apparently, I am just not smart enough to "get" the philosophy of these lenses.
Which brings us to the 100-500mm 7.1. 600mm, for birds is often too short. Going down to 500mm is going in the wrong direction. That alone does not rule this lens out, as 500mm is reasonable. Many love this lens. It is small (for what it is). It is light. It is sharp. It is well built. It is an F7.1, which for me is getting to be a problem. People say, "but is it just beyond your current 200-600mm's F6.3." Yes, that is true, but 6.3 is already a compromise, now I am being asked to accept a compromise on top of a compromise. Those pesky "IF's" start to come into play. Okay, perhaps, just perhaps, I can live with F7.1. Let's say I accept F7.1, is the lens priced as an F7.1 lens? Wait, what? This lens sells for $2,900.00! Sorry, three strikes and you are out. Strike one, 500mm can be a bit short. Strike two, F7.1. Strike three, $2,900.00. The Sony 200-600mm and Nikon 180-600 F6.3 sells for under $2,000.00. And both of these lenses are great with a bit longer reach and a better aperture. Canon's lens, as great as it is, for what it is, just does not compete financially. I cannot see myself paying $2,900.00 for an F7.1 which is already a bit short for me.
Here lies the problem. Canon has great bodies but their lens lineup does not favor avid bird and wildlife photographers who don't want to spend $13,000.00 on a lens. There is, for me, no other option with Canon. It is either, spend $13,000.00 or nothing. Oh well, I guess nothing wins. I badly wanted to like Canon again but they are just not offering what I want (and can get from Sony and Nikon). Now if they announce a new 200-600mm F6.3 at a reasonable price that would certainly change the landscape. But I have a trip coming up and have to have my gear in hand by June. Given that the R5 II is rumored to be released this year I was hoping that Canon would be my new photography friend.
My search continues next week.
]]>
I also have two other objections relating to OM systems.
Will OM Systems survive? They are a small company (the imaging division). Olympus sold the imaging division to JIP (the new parent company). Even though the OM-1 has been selling well, their market share is still very small compared to the three big players; Canon, Sony, and Nikon. I am not sure I want to risk a large investment which could loose all of it's value if the imaging division closes down. I recently corresponded with an OM Systems Ambassador who assured me that he sees people switching from the big three to OM Systems in large volumes. Then again, I also spend a lot of time reading in various photographic forums. Mind you, I am not reading what Canon, Sony, or Nikon users are saying, I am reading the OM Systems' forum (these are people who are shooting with OM Systems already). The sentiment in these forums also questions OM Systems' survivability. Furthermore, many of these photographers state that they are either leaving the system or not buying any new gear from OM Systems. The bottom line for me is that this does not inspire confidence in the brand.
Lens pricing. OM Systems have a wonderful birding and wildlife lens in the 150-400mm F4.5 x1.25. The build quality, optical performance, weather sealing, stabilization, and the built-in 1.25x teleconverter are awesome. This is the ideal lens for what I shoot, and it is quite small and light for what it is. But, ... please just be patient with me as I quickly grab a tissue, the price makes me cry. At $7,500.00 this is deal breaker number two. Now many faithful Olympus photographers argue that this lens is an absolute bargain because the full frame equivalent does not exist and the full frame lenses that come close to this cost double this price. To be clear, 2x (field of view as compared to full frame sensors) of 150-400 plus the 1.25x teleconverter gives you 300-1000mm of reach. My counter argument is simple. That field of view advantage comes from the camera's sensor and not from the lens. The lens, physically is no more than a 150-400mm and therefore should not cost more than what it is. The glass, focusing motors, etc. in the lens are no bigger or stronger than what is needed for the stated 400mm. Let's bring in some perspective. The Nikon 400mm F4.5, which is also a professional series lens retails for $3,000.00. Let's add $1,000.00 for the zoom from 150-400. Let's add another $1,000.00 for the built-in teleconverter. This lens should not cost more than $5,000.00. There is no way I will pay $7,500.00 for this lens, even if the camera had a 33MP sensor. What is of further concern is that OM Systems just released a 150-600mm lens and priced it at $2,700.00. The Nikon 200-600 costs $1,700.00 while the Sony 200-600 costs $1,900.00 and both of these lenses are great. To add insult to injury, this lens is a rebadged Sigma lens (I am not bashing Sigma here, they make some great lenses especially their ART line of lenses) which sells for $1,500.00 (once again, my issue is not with the lens but with the price OM Systems want for it). Now I can understand OM Systems adapting this lens to work better with their stabilization system. Let's add $500.00 for that. Why would anyone pay $2,700.00 for this lens?
With all that said, as much as I really wanted to like the OM-1 II with its fantastic 150-400mm lens, the resolution of the camera's sensor and the price of the lens rules them out. The concern about whether OM Systems will still be around in ten years did not help their cause.
Since we are talking about smaller than full frame camera sensors here let us look at two other brands in this space. Panasonic and Fujifilm stand out. Fujifilm especially is noteworthy since they too use a stacked sensor. Their frame rate is great. Unfortunately, both of these companies' offering seem to fall short in the autofocus department. Photographing birds (birds in flight) can be one of the most taxing genres on a camera's autofocus system. In my opinion, both these brands just don't cut it for birds in flight. Now if I was filming video, the Panasonic really shines there, but that is not my focus.
As a result, OM Systems, Panasonic, and Fujifilm have been eliminated from my list. I don't mind smaller sensors. If Sony were to introduce an APS-C camera with top notch autofocus tracking, a stacked sensor, clean noise levels, and a fast frame rate, I would buy it in a heartbeat, provided the price is not so outrageous as the Sony A1's price is (in my view).
My search for gear that better matches what I shoot now continues ... See you next week as I discuss the next contender.
]]>Since I know the Sony system well, and since I have all the Sony lenses that in need, and since it is expensive to switch brands, why don't I just buy another Sony camera better suited to bird photography? Well, that is just the problem. For some reason, I am not smart enough to understand, Sony is the ONLY mainstream camera brand, that I am aware of, that does not offer any camera that can shoot at more than 12 frames per second for under $4,500.00! And that $4,500.00 camera is a previous generation, but still on the market A9 II which has been replaced by the A9 III. Current generation Sony cameras capable of shoot at more than 12 frames per second amount to two offerings, the A9 III at $6,000.00 or the A1 at $6,500.00. When asked to spend that much money (and my money is scarce) it makes a person look around at other offerings. As much as I love my Sony gear, paying $6,000.00 or more for a camera makes me gasp for air. It makes other brands look much more appealing.
I called Sony's customer service line to talk about this and was advised to look at the used market. But why would I buy a used Sony camera at the price of a competitor's new camera? The Sony A1 used is still $500 to $1,200 more expensive than competing cameras, depending on which one we are looking at. The A9 III is not even shipping yet, so it's used market does not exist now. The A9 II is not an option for me because I will not buy any camera with only 24 MP. Now I know, many will say that I am crazy and that many pro photographers prefer 24 MP. I am not getting into that debate here other than to make just three observations.
Please see a previous blog where I wrote about framing. To summarize, when shooting erratic flying birds with long lenses the photographer is forced to shoot a bit loosely framed so as not to clip the bird. One then crops for framing and placement purposes later. That means that although one starts off with 24 MP, the final image after cropping is no longer 24 MP. I can live with a file of 24 MP if that is the final output size, but in bird photography that rarely happens. Cropping is going to happen even if reach is not a problem due to shooting a bit loosely.
A 600mm lens is often just a bit too short for bird photography. So cropping is going to happen unless you only shoot at controlled setups. After cropping a 24 MP file one is not left with much.
When 4K TV's came out, most people said that we don't need to shoot in 4K video because there are no 4K displays out yet. Well, how long did that last? Yes, 4K displays took a while to be released but then the floodgates opened and now who does not have a 4K TV? The same thing is happening with 8K displays. For a still images to fill an 8K display one needs a 33 MP image. For me, who only buys a new camera body rarely, I need this purchase to last. It just does not make any sense to me to buy a camera that cannot fill an 8K display. So the minimum resolution I will accept in a camera is 45 MP. That is 33 MP to fill an 8K display and a bit of room for framing and cropping. Yes, I know that AI software can enlarge images, but I am not starting from behind. One needs to start out in front so that the camera can last a good long time. I am in effect buy the camera now, but for the next ten years. Will we see 12K displays by then?
That then only leaves me with the Sony A1 in the Sony camp. It is a fantastic camera and I would absolutely love to have one. My problem is not related to the camera but the price of it. The Canon R5 can be had for under $3,000 right now (with the current trade in bonus) or refurbished from Canon. The Nikon Z8 sells for $3,800.00 and there is a discount if one bundles it with the 24-120 on top of that. Yes, many will say that the Sony is a better camera but it is not as much better as the premium price suggests. I could be perfectly happy with either the R5 or the Z8.
I have done the math. I can literally sell my gear (at MPB.COM), add the difference that a used A1 will cost me and replace all of my gear from other brands and come out even. That means that I have a brand new kit compared to a used Sony kit, without spending a cent more. That also gives me a new warranty. The price of the Sony is a pill too hard to swallow given the competition out there. Since the total price of switching versus the price of a used A1 (taking the sale of my other gear into account in both cases) is going to be even, and since the Sony A1 is magnificent I am leaving a used A1 in the running. But a new one has been ruled out. Furthermore, I can't just look at the camera here. Some of my Sony lenses are aging. Switching brands would replace them too, without costing me extra.
But what if Sony releases a new camera that does shoot at more than 12 frames per second and has a 45 MP sensor or more for a reasonable price? While I cannot predict the future that does not seem likely. The Sony A7R V is fairly new and is probably not going to be replaced soon. I have a major trip planned and need to have my new camera in hand by June. The Sony A7 IV is also fairly new and I can't see it being replaced before June. In the APS-C sensor world, the A6700 is also too new for replacement.
My journey to find what I need continues. Let's see what happens to the used prices of the Sony A1 in the next month. I will talk about the other brands in the next few weeks. Come follow my journey to a final decision.
]]>My photographic gear journey started off with a Ricoh screw mount camera. My father gave it to me. During that time Ricoh seemed to be dead-ish and just did not bring out anything new. I grew as a photographer but my gear did not. At a massive sale I bought a Canon T70 which I used for a number a years. During college I ran out of money and shooting film was expensive. So I sold everything and did not do much photography for a brief period of time. Right after college I started with photography again. There seemed to be a general consensus (at least from those I talked to) during that time that Canon made the best lenses, Nikon made the best bodies, and Minolta was in between with good bodies and good lenses. So I went with Minolta.
My photography flourished and I was very happy with my kit. Then digital happened! I waited and waited for Minolta to go digital, but that day never came. Eventually, I had to make a decision to jump ship. In hindsight, that was obviously the correct decision. That taught me an important lesson that there is a delicate balance between waiting patiently and waiting too long. Waiting patiently may save you a lot of money and your brand may reward you with a great new release. Waiting too long may cost you a lot of money as a brand loses favor or goes out of business, making your gear almost valueless on the used gear market. I am glad that I sold off all my Minolta gear at the right time. This lesson learnt is busy playing a major role in my decision to consider jumping ship now, but more of that later.
Canon seemed to have the best sensors at the time so I went with Canon. As before, my photography flourished and I was happy with my decision. One day, a number of years later, a client brought a new Sony mirrorless camera to a workshop where I was a co-instructor. I was very impressed with the files that that camera produced. I started looking in mirrorless gear, but more out of being intrigued. Famed photographer Don Smith (donsmithphotography.com), whom I was co-instructing for at some of his workshops, received one of these Sony mirrorless cameras to try out. I distinctly remember the moment when we sat in the hotel room opening one of the raw files after an early morning shoot. We were blown away at the file's ability to lift the shadows without much resulting noise. We were both sold. Naysayer rebuffed with "who shoots underexposed by four or five stops?" But they missed the point. The point was that one could expose for the highlights and save the shadows, effectively gaining dynamic range and getting beautiful shadow areas rather than black areas.
Lesson number two was learnt. Technology advances seem to come in waves. Those very waves crush some companies, sweep others off of their feet, and births new companies which may lead the pack in the new era. The digital era was one of those waves. Minolta was crushed and Canon took the early lead. Mirrorless was one of those technological waves. Canon and Nikon was caught off guard, they were too cautious to move ahead. Sony took the market by storm. Nobody would have guessed a few years earlier that Sony would conquer a lot or market share from Canon and more specifically from Nikon. The auto industry is experiencing such a wave right now. These waves bring with them many questions. One such important question is whether to duck the wave or to ride the wave. Not all of these waves turn out rideable. Some of these technologies don't pan out and at times competing technologies fight it out leaving consumers uncertain. Remember, VHS and Betamax? We have had battles like that in the memory card space too. Both Don and I felt certain that mirrorless was the way to go. We sold our Canon gear and bought into Sony. We were going to ride this wave. In hindsight, we made the right decision. Mirrorless has taken over the market. I have been happily using Sony since almost the beginning of the mirrorless wave.
So why am I considering switching brands now? Just over two years ago I moved from California to Nebraska, a move that I have been very happy with. But Nebraska is not particularly famous for their ocean views or mountain vistas. I don't have landscape photography opportunities here (at least not within reasonable driving distance). I was forced to adapt and found myself gravitating towards bird photography. My Sony A7R IV is a brilliant camera which I love. It excels at landscapes photography, at bird photography not so much. It's autofocus is just too slow and it frame rate likewise. It is not the camera's fault. It is simply not a birding camera, was never intended to be.
Here we are. I have to buy a new camera. Naturally, Sony is the first brand I will look at. It just makes sense since I have the lenses I need and switching system, as we have already said, is very expensive. I have done a lot of research but am not quite at the point of making my final decision yet. Next week, I will share my hesitancy to continue with Sony. During the next weeks I will talk about every brand I am considering and in part five (perhaps six) I will make my final decision. I hope that you will join me on my journey towards that decision.
]]>Having learnt my lesson the hard way with the tripod drama, I started to research Gimbal heads for long lenses. As usual, the gear on offer ranged tremendously in terms of price. As usual, this price gap started to play games in my head. Is there really such a difference in the quality of the products? What if I bought a middle of the road Gimbal? Surely, all the YouTube reviews praising the cheaper ones cannot be wrong, are they? As usual, I did not have enough money for the Gimbal head that I wanted. I was facing the same decision that I faced with the tripods, so many years ago.
However, I learnt my lesson with the tripods, and I was not about to make that mistake again. On the other hand, I only had the money I had. Since this purchase was for a mechanical piece of equipment without electronics I made the decision to buy the head I wanted, BUT to buy used to fit into my budget. It was still a lot of money but I was not about to get burnt twice. After a month with the new Gimbal from Wimberley I was disappointed. I don't know what the previous owner did to the head but it must have been something for the head with a great reputation to disappoint. The rotational friction was not consistent. At certain degrees of rotation it turn smoothly and at other degrees of rotation it was much harder to turn. This made it useless for photography involving panning. Secondly, although it was tightly fitted to the tripod, the head wobbled on it's base. It felt loose.
From all the research that I did, it was clear that Wimberley is the father of these type of Gimbal heads and that they make a very good product. So I emailed the company asking how much they would charge to fix the issues. Now here is where the slogan, "you get what you pay for" comes in:
Wimberley replied quickly and responded to every email I sent promptly. This was great customer service.
Before quoting me a price for the repair they asked if the head was still under warranty. I replied with the serial number. They told me that the head has a ten year warranty. I had only one month of that ten year warranty left. They told me to send it in quickly to take advantage of the warranty. How many companies, knowing that time was short, would have dragged me along, wasting time to make the warranty run out? How many companies would have dealt with this with their best interest at heart versus what was best for me? This was very impressive.
They told me that if something was wrong with the head that was not covered by the warranty, that they did not consider parts as a source of revenue and hence did not charge much. Now compare that with what car manufacturers charge for parts. It is my opinion that if you bought all the parts of a car and built it yourself that $30,000.00 car would easily cost you over $100,000.00. No, not with Wimberley!
I shipped the head to Wimberley in late December. Yes, over the holiday season. They fixed it in a jiff and shipped it back quickly. It was covered by the TEN YEAR warranty and did not cost me a cent to fix.
It is evident that the head was not just fixed, but the part that attaches to the tripod was replaced with a new one.
Yes, you get what you pay for. Wimberley as a company stood by their very generous warranty. They acted in a way that cared more about me than about them. Their good name, in my mind, has become a great name. This Gimbal head is wonderful and I am sure will last me a long, long time. Well done Wimberley. I will recommend Wimberley to everyone. This was a fantastic experience from a company you can count on.
P.S. I am not sponsored by Wimberley nor was I asked to say anything about Wimberley.
]]>The same is true for airshows. We come specifically to photograph the Blue Angels or the F-35. We come for the fast action. But there are other stuff to shoot too. They may actually have nothing to do with planes. What about the concession stands? What about street photography, there are a lot of people? We need to always have an open mind and be on the lookout for anything of interest to photograph.
At every airshow I have ever been at there has always been our faithful parachute jumpers.
While our eyes are fixed upon the sky other stuff are happening on the ground. Are they worthy of an image?
Sure, get the image you came for, but then expand your horizon. Let the creativity flow. Even if you don't get award winning images, you are still creating memories and recording life and experiences. So please, don't forget the other stuff.
]]>
This image would not have worked if it were not for the wingtip trails. The plane would be too small in the frame (if that is all there is). However, these trails play a vital part in the image's composition. They add interest. They lead the viewer's eyes to the plane. The whole idea of this image is impossible to capture if the plane fills the whole frame.
Once again, this image is made by the wingtip trails and the heat mirage. You cannot capture this kind of image while zooming in tightly on the plane. As photographers, we try to shoot a variety of images rather than to get one thousand of the same or very similar images. Frame some images wider to capture more of what is going on, provided something is going on.
We can also use the smoke the pilots so graciously provide to enable a wider framing of the plane. This smoke trail helps the image. If this was a tight shot of the plane, the smoke would just have been a distraction. We have to pick the situations to shoot tight and the scenes to frame wider.
Lastly, please remember that planes are moving. They need space to move into. We don't want them to be leaving the frame. If they do, they will take the viewer out of the frame with them. So always frame the plane in such a way that there is enough space in front of it to fly into. We want the plane to fly into the frame not out of the frame.
]]>Catch them turning sharply of climbing steeply.
Capture the afterburner, that will get the viewer excited.
Show heat mirages.
Photograph their con-trails
Snap clouds forming on their wings or cloud lines from their wingtips.
We have to get something different, something exciting. Here are a few examples:
It takes patience. Follow every plane. Shoot at a very fast shutter speed and at a high frame rate. I shoot in bursts when I anticipate the right moments. The settings are simple:
I use no image stabilization at these shutter speeds.
Use manual with auto ISO. I shoot between 1/2500 and 1/4000th of a second. The lens is set wide open, perhaps stopped down just one stop or two thirds of a stop. The camera chooses the ISO to balance the exposure.
Most cameras tend to underexpose the plane because of the brighter sky in the background. I use exposure comp to fix this. You can also set your exposure to measure off of your focus point to solve this problem. However, it is a small problem. Once my exposure comp is set, it usually stays the same for the whole shoot as most of these jets are the same or similar in brightness.
Focus is set on subject tracking. Most modern cameras may have a setting to track planes specifically. These settings typically work well.
These planes move fast. Do not be discouraged with the difficulty of tracking them in the viewfinder. You will get better with practice. You do not need every single shot to be perfect. You will probably shoot a few thousand images on the day. If just one or two percent of those image turn out well we can call it a success. Even if every image is well exposed, perfectly framed, and sharp as a scalpel, you are surely not going to use all of them. We cull them and only pick the best of the best.
]]>That means that the photographer needs to choose a shutter speed slow enough to allow the props to show movement. Those props need to be slightly blurred. With slow flying craft this works well. But what do we do with Mustang P51's or other prop planes that fly quite fast? The slower shutter speed beautifully blurs the props but may not be fast enough to freeze the plane. Choosing a faster shutter speed to freeze the plane may also freeze the props (or at least not show enough motion blur). There is no set formula that you can use to determine the optimal shutter speed to freeze the plane AND to blur the props. This depends on the speed of the plane, the engine speed and the length of the props. The longer the props the faster the outer edges move. You will just have to experiment using trial and error to get to the right shutter speed for each plane.
Not only are the planes moving. The camera and lens are also moving to track the moving plane. Movement of a long lens and a slower shutter speed do NOT go well together. Camera and lens shake or movement will render the planes out of focus. So even though I prefer to have the camera and or lens image stabilization system turned off when photographing fighter jets, I will turn this system on when dealing with prop-driven planes to help smooth out camera and lens shake. You might wonder why I don't leave the stabilization system on for fighter jets. Well, I use such a high shutter speed shooting those super fast beasts that it makes no difference. That is something you can't do with prop planes as it will freeze the props.
When shooting multiple planes in the same frame it is better to use a smaller aperture to enable both planes to be in focus. Some people prefer to see a bit of space between the planes to separate them. To them it look cleaner, and they are right. However, when planes fly very close to each other, nothing shows the drama of being that close together more than having one plane overlap the other. Yes, the planes look more confusing, but confusion is what we want to show. We want to viewer to start feeling uncomfortable for the planes' sake. We want the viewer to wonder how close the planes are to each other. We don't want the viewer to think that the planes are safe. It all depends on what you are trying to show, which feelings we want to evoke.
Have you starting to look up when your nearest airshow will take place? Next week we talk about photographing fighter jets.
]]>Go online and learn all you can learn from the airshow's website. Pay attention to any maps they may display. Typically, they sell VIP seats right on center stage. For the extra money you usually get shade from erected canopies. These seats are preferred by many as most of the action is going to take place adjacent to the VIP seating. When airplanes storm in from both sides of the runway they are going to do their tricks or pass close by each other right in front of the VIP seating area. Now I suggest that you do not sit there. For the most part the planes performing will only offer a side view of the plane from that position. I don't know about you, but I want to see the glow of the afterburners. I want to photography the heat mirage coming out of the plane. You don't get to see these from a side view. For now, just pay attention to where center stage is.
Use your favorite weather information source to find out in which direction the wind is blowing into. This is important as most performers will spew smoke into the air. This is part of airshows. Even fighter jets, like the Blue Angels, will blow smoke. We do not want to take up position with the wind blowing into our direction. Before long, there is a lot of smoke in the air. If the wind is blowing my way, that means that the smoke is going to be coming my way. The last thing you want is smoke between you and the performing planes. Ideally, we want to sit where the smoke is blowing away from us. That smoke needs to be behind the craft.
As a rule of thumb, I have found that the best position is about three quarters to the end of the standing area (as measured from the ViP seating position and the end of the general audience area). Use the wind direction to determine which side of the VIP seating area is going to be best. If the wind is blowing in the same direction as the runway is going, I want to be seated at the end where the wind is coming from, not where the wind is going to. There are two reasons for this. First, remember the smoke argument from point number two. Second, airplanes like to come in against the wind as it gives them more lift. So I want to position myself where they leave the runway, not where they enter the runway. When they approach the runway they are not typically doing anything other than coming in, in a strait-ish line. They fly over the runway and do their tricks or fly bye's in front of our VIPs and then leave the display area right about where I am seated. That is where I want to photograph them from! I want to catch them turning away from me to expose their afterburners and the heat mirages. I want side on views. I want them climbing. Due to safety concerns, they will typically make their turns away from the audience, which, once again, is what I want. I want to shoot them from behind or from behind-ish at a side angle.
Arrive early. The recent airshow in Lincoln, Nebraska had about 200,000 visitors. There were long lines waiting to get in when the gates opened. We have to be close to the front of the line to get the spot we need to shoot from. Here is where that static display comes in. The gates open well before the flying starts. During this time most people will visit the static display. Just skip that for now. Make a bee line and go park yourself where you planned it, while everyone else is distracted by the static display. You need to be right at the fence or line as close as you can get. The reason has nothing to do with focal length or anything photographic, but not to have people in front of you. They will limit your visibility and ruin your images.
Make sure that you can hear the announcer well. They can be very helpful, warning you which plane is coming next and from which direction.
Take care of yourself. It is easy to get sun burnt and dehydrated. Put sun screen lotion on. Wear is wide hat. Drink a lot of fluids. It also helps to have a friend with you as drinking a lot may make you run a lot. You don't want someone else to take your spot and getting into those small porta potties with all your gear is not fun. A friend can hold the fort and watch your gear in your absence.
Airshows last for hours. If you are not comfortable you will not stay long. The best part of the show is typically at the end of the day. You don't want to miss what you came for. I bring a small and light camping chair with me. I use a gimbal head on a tripod so that I don't have to hold heavy equipment all day. You know that things get heavier the longer you hold them, physics is awfully strange, isn't it?
Now that I have said everything that was said, let me undo all of it. Sometimes, the best vantage point for getting great photographs is not at the airshow itself. Sometimes that place is in a nearby field, or from a building's roof, or from a parking structure. Do your homework. When the Blue Angels come they usually come a few days before the airshow. They practice. They want to see the lay of the land. Use this time to scout for the best alternate locations. You will see them practice and that alerts you to their flight paths. Is there a better place out there to photograph them from?
Enjoy photographing your next airshow. Next week, I will talk about actually photographing the airshow.
However, it was a long day. The sun was beating down in me, in fact, I got sun-burned. By the end of it all I packed up everything and headed home. The memory card was taken out at home and the images were processed. Fast forward some time and I find myself at a lake. There were many Pheasants at the lake. This was the first time I saw such Pheasants out in nature. It was very cold and the wind cut through me. I jumped out of the car excitedly and grabbed my camera. I stalked a Pheasant and was in the perfect position. The light was beautiful, warm, and soft as light clouds defused the the light. I pressed the shutter and the camera would not fire. The main memory card was still sleeping on my desk at home. No problem, I thought. I moved the backup memory card to slot one. (My other memory cards were in my bag in the car) I followed the Pheasant a bit, repositioned myself, and pressed the shutter to shoot. Nothing happened! After fiddling with the menu system dealing with the card slots it worked. But there was a problem. By now the Pheasant was gone. The opportunity was missed. Feeling dejected and wanting to kick myself, I got back into the car, begged for some pity from my awesome wife, and drove off.
A few minutes later I saw another Pheasant in the distance. I watched it to see which way it was going and devised my plan of attack. I took a round about way, walking into the field quite a ways, in the hopes that the Pheasant would be coming my way. It paid off! The Pheasant come strait to me. It did not even notice me. It walked right up to me and came within two yards of me. I was so excited. I thought that I hit the jackpot. The award winning image was already teasing my imagination. Since the bird did not see me yet, I did not want to move and waited for the perfect moment. The light was not as nice as before since the clouds moved some, but I thought that it was still okay. To not scare the Pheasant off, I slowing got the camera into position and pressed the shutter. But the camera would not focus. I had no idea why not. I changed focus modes, but that did not help. I tried a few other focus modes, they did not help either. Within moments the Pheasant saw me, and hurried off. This is the image I got:
At first I thought that my Sony A7R IV's focusing system was useless. I was not happy. I looked at the image in the car and saw that it was back focused. After searching for the problem, I found it. The lens' focus limiter was still set on ten meters (yards) from the airshow. That was two opportunities missed because I never checked and reset my gear. It was a rookie mistake and a hard lesson to learn. So here is my advice:
Reset your gear (all of it, not just the camera) right after every shoot. Remember to reset the settings on your lenses too.
Program your custom shooting modes and use them. If you accidentally forgot to reset your gear, it is much easier to change just one dial to program everything you need for your shoot than to set each individual setting. On my camera, custom mode one is set to landscape settings and custom mode two is set to wildlife. This has saved me a few times in the past. (Yes, apparently it has taken me a long time to learn this lesson)
Load a fresh pair of memory cards right when you take the used ones out. Have at least four memory cards. I prefer that all four of them be the same card (make, model, and size). A camera should never be left without fresh, empty and formatted memory cards. You never know when an unplanned opportunity arises and of course, that opportunity will be short lived not leaving you any chance to check things or to load memory cards.
Luckily, this is not where my story ends. With everything finally set and working, another Pheasant showed up down the road. I wish that it had more direct sunlight on it, but oh well, that is the price you pay for not being prepared.
It is a pity that there is a flower behind the flower the bee is on because I find it distracting. So picking the right flower is important. Backgrounds need to be in the background, meaning that they should not intrude or compete for attention with the main attraction of the image.
It helps to pick a flower and a background that make for a pleasing image all by itself. The insect is just the cherry on top. Remember, we are not taking macro images here where it is all about the insect or a fraction of the flower. We are just taking close-up images. The better the image can stand on its own without the insect the better the image will be with the insect.
With close-ups we can go in quite closely, thus making the insect more important and central to the success of the image. This means that we will have to cut parts of the flower off. There is no problem in doing so but remember the rule of thumb. We cut, we never nick. Cuts are deliberate while nicks seem like mistakes, as if they should not have been made. So cut boldly, don't cut near the edge of something.
This beetle also appeared. In this case, the flower in the background does not bother me as much as the one if the first image because there is separation between the two flowers. The one in the back is not causing confusion leaving the viewer to wonder what is going on. As the beetle moves around, wait for that perfect pose, the perfect position.
As with any movement or of something that lives, always leave more room in front of it than behind it. If your garden is not that nice, just drive around and find someone else's garden that is beautiful. Be respectful and kindly request permission before you start photographing in their garden. But someone mostly seem to have a great garden somewhere. We just need to find them and spend some time there to see what we can find to photograph. Give close-ups a try.
]]>Is the perch itself attractive?
Is is too bright in contrast to the background?
Is there glare?
Is the background far enough to blur?
Is the background pleasing?
Since we are shooting at ponds we should also ask whether there is water in the background or not.
Having water in the background is generally speaking not a good idea as it can cause glare and highlights. Static ponds don't often have pristine clear and beautiful water. Most of the time the water itself in such ponds do not make for a good background. Right, we have spent some time to find out on which perches the dragonflies sit. We have selected the best ones based upon our criteria. Now we just set up and wait.
We often think that polarizing filters are meant for landscape photography. However, it was used to great effect in this image. The green leave that the dragonfly is sitting on had bright glare on the surface leading to the dragonfly. A quick turn of the polarizer removed it. By all means, polarizer filter are excellent for this kind of image.
The sun popped out from behind the clouds a bit for this image. So I changed my position to shoot the same perch from the other way, against the sun. In this way, the perch now became a bit back lit. Rather than a dead-ish looking perch, the back lighting gave it a hint of color.
These little details can make a positive difference to our images.
The sun is still out and a bit harsh in this image. Yet I show it because the introduction of some color is always nice.
I like the symmetry in this image. The dragonfly balances out with the leaf. The sun is behind the clouds again, and I much prefer this softer light over the harsher light of before. The same goes for the next image.
Most places have the odd pond here or there. Where there are ponds there are usually also some dragonflies. They are easy to photograph perched, interesting looking, and can often be colorful. Try taking some dragonfly images.
]]>
Find a pond where they live. Sit quietly and watch them. I find it easier to watch either a certain region of the pond or I choose one dragonfly and keep watching that one. Any dragonfly that enters that region is carefully watched. I pick that region for a number of reasons. First, there has to be a lot of dragonfly activity in that region. Second, I pick the region based on the background. Is the background far enough for me to blur? Is the background pleasing?
I have my camera ready at all times. I find that generally they move too quickly to watch through the camera's viewfinder. So I hold the camera right beneath my eyes. Once a dragonfly slows down or hovers I just lift the camera and shoot. As mentioned in last week's blog about bees in flight, I keep my lens focused at the approximate distance of where I expect the dragonfly to hover. In this way the lens does not have to hunt for focus throughout the entire focus range. Instead, the lens can just fine tune the focus because it is already close. I also have the focus limiter of the lens set according to the distance I am working with to limit the lens's focus range, thereby speeding the auto focus up.
Once focus is locked on I track the dragonfly in the frame. Auto focus tracking is turned on. While I pan with the dragonfly as it flies I shoot at a high frame rate. Don't be disappointed, you will only get a few hits out of many shots. This is normal. As cameras' auto focus systems improve the hit rate will increase. Remember that I am shooting with a Sony A7R IV, which has slow-ish auto focus and tracking. Newer cameras will probably do better.
Fast shutter speeds are required to freeze the action. That necessitates a good amount of light. So I choose slightly overcast days that are still bright. I prefer the softer light. It does take some practice to become quicker at locating the dragonfly in the viewfinder. This is especially true while using longer lenses. The longer the focal length the more difficult it becomes. There are no magic bullets or camera wizardry to help with this except image stabilization which makes the viewfinder less jittery. So just put the hours in, it all boils down to your skill level.
Luckily dragonflies are easy to find and you can go back and back again to photograph them. Enjoy this challenging subject.
]]>
It can get frustrating watching the bees tend to all the flowers except "my" flower. But patience pays off. I wish I had a lens that could focus closer so that I could follow the bees more nimbly rather than setup and wait for them with my 200-600mm. The almost two and a half meters (six to seven feet) minimum focusing distance is a real pain. I was trying to photograph some dragonflies too (a future blog on them will follow), but the minimum focusing distance meant that I had to crop a lot. Luckily, I do have 60mp of resolution to play with. But if there is one fault to that lens it would be exactly this (and perhaps faster focusing motors would be nice too - but hardly an issue). Then again, we should use the right tool for the right job and perhaps this lens was not created for this task. The new Sony 70-200mm F/4 is a semi-macro lens and can focus on subject very close to it. Perhaps I should exchange my 70-200mm F/4 for the newer one.
In a setting with lots of colorful flowers it also becomes easier to choose a nicer background.
Focusing is an issue. The bees can come from any direction making pre-focusing difficult. However, pre-focusing in the middle of "your" flower makes it easier for your camera and lens to focus because the focus is already almost there. It just needs fine tuning rather than hunting to focus. This helps to make focusing a bit faster. Also, most modern long lenses are equipped with focus limiters. By limiting the distance of focus to a shorter range (you know how far "your" flower is) it becomes easier for your gear to perform since it no longer has to search for focus throughout its entire focus range (2.4 meters to infinity for this particular lens).
If I am honest, the autofocus performance of my Sony A7R IV was somewhat disappointing. The AI animal eye detection was totally useless for insects (at least those I was trying to photograph). I believe that Sony's newer cameras with the new AI focusing chip in them are brilliant and best in class at accurately recognizing and locking focus on their eyes. This greatly increases the accuracy of acquiring focus but does not necessarily help with the speed of tracking moving subjects.
Overcast but bright days work best for this type of photography. You don't want harsh shadows or bright flowers in the background to overshadow your subject.
Either way, no matter where you are there is always something to photograph. Go out there and shoot.
]]>
It is easy to be tempted to get an image of animals or birds when they are out in the open. To make this happen, we pick a clear spot to settle down and photograph from. But what if we did the reverse? Since the rabbits allowed me to move around (cautiously), I deliberately picked spots to lie down with vegetation right in front of me. Doing so, rather than choosing a clear spot, allows me to have some of the greenery right in front of the lens. Why would you want that? Having vegetation right in front of your lens enables you to blur it just like the background is blurred. With everything blurred, the rabbit stands out more. The image is more impactful.
Now I would have preferred that the plant in front of the rabbit's face not be there, but don't you like the blurry green from front to back of the image, contrasted with the sharp rabbit? Deliberately placing vegetation right in front of your lens is what is creating the foreground blur. The idea is not to have vegetation in front of your whole view. Rather, you just lower your camera until the vegetation is barely in frame at the bottom of the image.
This technique allows your subject to pop, to stand out prominently. Since everything else in the image is blurred, there is nowhere else for the viewer's eyes to go but to look at the rabbit. This is what we want to achieve. We want to isolate our subject so that it is the only place of interest in the shot.
This same technique can also be used in landscape photography to give depth, to separate the point of interest from the foreground. Move right up to vegetation. Place it blurred at the bottom of your frame. Now your subject is in the distance and it stands out more. Be creative and try this easy way of making things really stand out.
]]>
My wife and I were nearing an exit gate of Yellowstone when I got a glimpse of this fox. I parked the car and got out quickly. Even though the fox did not seem to notice me, it disappeared within seconds into the vegetation. I managed to get just a hand full of shots. It may not be a great image, but this is the first fox that I have ever seen in the wild (in the USA).
Had the camera not been right with me, within arm's reach, I would not have had this shot. Even if my camera was on the back seat of the car I would have missed this image. It all happened in mere seconds. We need to be ready when there is a likelihood that something might happen or show up. Ready does not only mean that your gear is with you but that it is ready too. If, for example, you are driving on safari in Africa, change your battery for a fresh one when the current battery reaches 20 or 15%. You don't want lions to appear a while later when your battery is drained. The same goes for your memory card. Don't wait until it is full to replace. Replace it a good while before it is full so that you are never left in the lurch when something goes down. It is important that your spare batteries and memory cards are also with you in the car. In most places on safari you cannot get out of your car (unless you are inside a gated camp). When a kill goes down is not the time to run out of battery or memory card space with your replacements comfortable in the trunk you can't get to.
When we are in an environment where we can expect things to happen, carry what you need (with spares) right with you in the car.
]]>
Secondly, we always need to see the eye of the bird. Therefore, eliminate any images where the wings obscure the eye. Wings make the bird fly. Wings are often where the action is. So show the action. Show wing movement. Show them stretched out, wide open. Wing positions work equally well above the bird or below the bird.
Wings parallel to the bird's body can work as long as they are clearly visible and defined.
In this case, the wing tips make the difference. Without the upward pointing wing tips the bird's right wing would have seem merged with the body and thus not be that visible.
Lastly, make sure that the bird's head does not overlap with the furthest wing. There needs to be separation between the head and the wing. They should not merge. Now if the wing and the head are different colors (distinctly different) you may still get away with it. But it is still best to have a bit of space between the hand and the wing.
I hope that these tips will help you successfully cull your bird images to leave you with only the best ones.
]]>
With the 60mp sensor of my Sony A7R IV I can crop into the image and still have enough resolution left for a decent sized print. There are many photographers that are against the mega pixel race. They claim that there is no need for so much resolution other than cropping. I disagree! The issue is not just about the ability to crop but rather also about the ability to frame. Let's say, for argument's sake, that the Eagles were closer to me and that I could fill the frame with the bird. These birds move fast. They move erratically. Furthermore, to precisely follow this unpredictable action with a long lens is rather difficult. The smallest movement of the camera and lens nicks a bird's wing. So even if I could fill the frame with the bird, I would still prefer to zoom a bit out and leave the bird a tad bit smaller in the frame. This prevents the bird from getting cut off of the frame. This helps me to create a perfect composition by framing in post using my resolution. This is one of the major reasons why I do not shoot with the OM-1. Its ProCapture feature is so fantastic that this camera has tempted me. But with only 20mp the photographer is left with no room to shoot action a bit smaller in the frame and to compose later in post using resolution. Do so will leave you with a file too small for larger prints.
So while I agree that a 20mp file can be printed largely, especially with today's up-sizing software, the issue is that if you start with an image captured at 20mp and you framed loser to compose later you are left with perhaps only a 10mp file. I would not mind (at the very least I could stomach it) a final image of 20mp but you don't end up with that if your start with a 20mp file. Now you may be temped to say, "just compose right in camera." And I answer, "have you ever tried to follow an erratic fast moving subject with a 600mm lens?"
Call me crazy if you like but I will take more mega pixels any day of the week. And no, it is not just about print size, it is about keeping erratic fast moving subjects in frame by shooting a bit zoomed out to frame and compose later in post. Give me longer lenses (yes, small birds always seem to far) and more mega pixels for bird photography and I am happy. Oh, and by the way, I am no fan of the Canon F/22 (exaggerating to make the point) long lenses. Good light happens at sunrise and sunset when you have less light. Small apertures and little light does not work for action photography, period. Besides, you cannot blur the background well using small apertures unless the subject is really close to you and the background is far away. But in reality, this situation represents the vast minority of situations that bird photographers face. There is just no substitute for good long lenses and higher mega pixel files when shooting erratic fast moving small subjects.
I was watching this gull, trying to identify the pattern of behaviors that lead up to it diving into the water after a fish. If we can identify such patterns than we can predict accurately what will happen next once the pattern is initiated. Soon I learned what to look for. Once I saw the diving pattern initiated I started shooting. Here are the two images I selected:
This moment tells a story and evokes questions. How did it go? Did it get the fish? The right moment creates interest and sometimes even drama. An image like this sure beats an image of the gull just flying around or sitting some place. Photography is about capturing a moment in time. A great photograph is often when that moment in time, captures the right moment rather than just any old moment.
Photography gear can make a huge difference here. We often say that it is the photographer and not the gear, BUT from time to time in history, a genuine game changer technology becomes available that makes getting certain images much easier. Olympus (now OM Digital Systems) released a camera in 2022 that has a feature called ProCapture. If you pressed the shutter button half way down the camera starts shooting. However, these images are not written to the memory card, rather it just goes into the buffer of the camera. Then, when you fully press the shutter to fire it writes the images from the buffer and what you shoot by pressing the shutter fully to the memory card. You can literally "shoot" for a minute before pressing the shutter.
How does this help? Well, it means that you have just captured images that took place before you pressed the shutter fully. You have images that go back further than when you pressed the shutter. You see our reaction time is just too slow. This week I did some experiments with birds. The aim was to point the camera at a bird on a perch, then fire once the bird flies off, thus capturing the bird in flight. I really did my best. I concentrated and pressed the shutter as soon as the bird started flying. Try it yourself and you will see how difficult it is. In most of the images the bird is already out of frame by the time you take the first image. Sometimes, the bird is still in the frame but either half out (cut off) or too close to the edge. Mind you, this happens even though my composition placed the perch on the edge of the frame leaving as much space as possible for the bird to fly into. My reaction time is just too slow. With this new feature, you will have all the shots from a number of seconds before you pressed the shutter. You are guaranteed to capture the right moment, period. The camera even captures these images in full raw mode.
The newly released Nikon Z8 also has this feature, although it is haft baked. The Nikon only does this by capturing JPEG images rather than raw. Personally I do not know any serious photographers that shoot in JPEG. Now I just hope and pray that Sony's next camera will also have this feature because it really is revolutionary. Imagine that you will almost never miss that right moment again.
Combining this new feature with your knowledge and ability to predict behavior will enable you to capture the right moment almost every time.
]]>
I slowly walked back and forth watching for birds on the plants around the accommodations. Once a bird flew off, I would look for the next one. Here are the results:
The lesson I learned was to use every opportunity. It may seem as though it is too much of a bother to get the gear out and to pack it up afterwards, if we only have a half hour available to shoot. Yes, you may not get anything, but then again, you may! For me, this half hour was very productive. Whenever an opportunity arises to photograph take it, even if it is a short opportunity.
Just get out there and shoot.
]]>Start to track the bird with the camera's autofocus system long before they come near. The further away the bird is from the camera the slower the bird moves across the frame of the camera giving the camera more time to acquire focus. Once focus is acquired it is easier for the camera to keep focus. Once the camera tracks the bird you just have to follow the bird in the viewfinder. Then fire when the bird gets close enough.
Since the key is to acquire focus and since this appears to be more difficult for the camera than tracking it once focus has been acquired (in most cases) why not start with a stationary bird? Lock focus on the bird sitting on the perch. Make sure that autofocus tracking is turned on. Then just wait for the bird to fly off and fire away.
Pan with the bird as it flies. This give you more time with the bird in the viewfinder giving you more opportunity for in focus images.
Shoot at a high frame rate. Even if a few images are out of focus as the camera seeks to gain focus you may still end up with a few images in focus because you shot many images.
Let's look at a sequence of a bird in flight. The bird was close to me, sitting on a perch.
Even though the bird is sitting still, the camera is setup for fast action. The moment the bird flies off, the camera is ready and focus is already locked onto the bird. Now we just wait. We watch the bird's behavior. The goal is to look for cues that the bird is going to take off. Then we fire away in a burst, hoping that we were right and that the bird indeed flies off. Without knowing what these clues are and finding them, your success rate will be greatly diminished. Our reaction time is just too slow. When we see the bird take off it takes us a second to realize it and another moment before we press the shutter. By then the bird is gone.
Some signs that the bird is about to take off are:
Another bird flying in fast. Bird hassle each other. When another bird comes storming in, our bird is probably going to take off.
Poop. Birds often take off right after heading nature's call.
Birds use their legs to jolt them upwards as the first step of catching flight. When you see them going down on their legs, shoot because they might take off.
When they look around nervously.
When you see any of these actions shoot.
Most people under-estimate a bird's wingspan. Thus they zoom in too tightly on the bird. When the bird opens its wings and flies off the wings are often clipped. Rather allow a bit more space than you think you are going to need and crop later than clip a bird.
Good luck while you go shoot some bird in flight sequences.
]]>Sometimes these expressions can be humorous. We tend to think of their expressions as human expressions. So these facial expressions mean to us what they would have meant had a human had the expression. This personifies the animal and creates a stronger connection with the viewer.
What does this facial expression tell you? Perhaps it says, "huh," or "what was that?"
Is there a hint of a smile? Is it friendly? Is it happy?
Deep in thought, or just vedging perhaps?
Content and satisfied?
These expressions or little micro expressions happen quickly and they disappear equally quickly. If is very hard to shoot only to capture these expressions. So, once again, when you photograph wildlife the best bet to capture something interesting is to shoot in bursts when things happen and to use a high frame rate. The higher the better (within reason). This way you end of with ten or twenty images in a sequence and you can chose the perfect one later. This gives you a shot at capturing action, or interaction, or expressions.
]]>We often think that birds are constantly on the go and they move fast, therefore we need to be fast too. But this shoot taught me the opposite. Yes, my camera needs to be fast (fast aperture, fast shutter speed, fast autofocus). But I need to be slow, very slow. Moving in closer to the birds scares them off. We were most successful when we stood still, letting the birds get used to us. These little creatures are small, so we have to get close to them to get acceptable resolution (so that we don't have to crop in so deeply, throwing away resolution in the process). You will be surprised how close you need to get to them to have them a decent size in the viewfinder; even with a 600mm lens. So how do we successfully get closer to them without spooking them?
As mentioned already, we need to move slowly. We found that moving a little bit and then standing still for a good amount of time before taking the next step closer worked pretty well. This requires a lot of patience. Next, I also tested the old adage to approach the birds walking slowly in a zigzag pattern rather than directly towards the birds. I felt that this worked good too. We would not move when the bird was on a perch. We waited and allowed the birds to dictate our movements. Once they naturally flew off, we would get a bit closer and wait again.
These scrubs were at or below waist height. I also found that the birds were much more at ease when I crouched down and sat waiting lower down. We needed to do this anyway to get to the eye level of the birds. Yet, birds are birds. They come and go. It just requires a lot a patience waiting for them to come sit on the bush where we were at.
Watching the birds very closely also paid off. We learned that they would use certain perches more than others. We positioned ourselves near the perches that had the most action. It is so tempting to have the camera pointing at one particular perch and then to only watch that perch. Yet when doing so, we don't notice that a bird is posing nicely on a different perch nearby. We need to stay alert and scan all the perches around us. Besides, a hundred images of birds on the same perch gets boring.
Next week we will look at a sequence of images of a bird flying off.
Yes! But just like in landscape photography it is not easy. We have to find the different vantage point. We have to get there and make things works. In the last two blogs I photographed a Prairie Dog colony. I am already shooting from flat on the ground. What other, more unique perspective can I possibly find? I can't go below ground, can I?
Perhaps not. But we can create the illusion that we are shooting from below ground. I noticed that the area in which the colony was, was generally flat. There was a gentle slope, but it was flat-ish. Yet, where they dug their tunnels were little mounds from the excavated sand and mud. That little elevation helped me to create the illusion that I am shooting from below ground. I lay flat on the ground and watched an active mound. Since the mound was higher than what I was, I am shooting slightly upward here. Because I am shooting with a long lens it appears as if I am shooting from within one of their tunnels, or at least from the entrance of a tunnel. I am further away than it appears but telephoto lenses compress things and make it look as if I am right there. By implication, the viewer of this image experiences this images from that same vantage point and therefore also feels as if he or she is right there looking at the Prairie Dog from below.
We have to think creatively and work to get a different more unique perspective. We have too make our images stand out. They have to be different, better different. So ask yourself, how can I achieve that?
]]>I photographed the Prairie Dogs in any and all positions just to get the shots. I was so excited because this was the first time I ever saw them. But once I had the standard images I was happy with, I began to change position. I waited and observed. I tried to capture better images than them being static. I looked for interaction and behavior that shows off their lives.
Barking. Not a fantastic image, but like a bird chirping with its open beak, it is better than having the bird just sit there.
Getting up as high as it can to scout.
A youngster hugging mom.
A mom preening Junior.
Mom tickling the toddler.
Family interaction.
The point is that static images can be good but generally speaking, it is always better to display animal behavior and interaction. These images are just more engaging than static ones. They are cute. They make us smile. They evoke emotion. These things make such images connect with us more. We enjoy them more. They give us an experience rather than just looking at them.
]]>My wife and I were traveling in South Dakota when I spotted a colony (if that is what it is called) of Prairie Dogs. This was the first time in my life that I saw them. They are so cute. We stopped for a photography session with these little creatures. So here is a picture taken by my wife of a Prairie Dog. The image is taken from her eye level, standing as normal.
Look at the background, pleasing? Do you feel like you are part of it's environment? Are you sharing it's experience? Are you connecting with this animal? Rather than standing to take this image from my eye level, this is how I photographed them.
Yes, I got dirty. The ground was soft from previous rain. I had mud and sand on me. But I wanted to get at their eye level for all of the reasons that I mentioned in the introduction of this blog. Did it pay off? Was it worth the discomfort, the sand and the mud? Does it really make that much of a difference? Look at the next images and decide for yourself.
Because the background is now way in the distance, rather than right behind the dog, shooting down from our height, we can blur it easily. This makes the animal stand out from the background. It makes the animal "pop." You can also use foliage right in front of your lens to blur the foreground. Thus both the foreground and the background is blurred. By the way, my wife is a good photographer. I asked her to take the image from her eye level to illustrate this point.
Now we are on the same level as the animal. We are seeing and experiencing the world from his perspective. Besides, most people are not going to lay flat on their tummies to look at these little guys. So when they look at your images they are seeing a fresh angle, a perspective they would never see otherwise. This makes your images unique.
I hope that you are persuaded to get down low and to photograph them from their eye level. As always, put safety first. Make sure you are not putting yourself in danger. I would never go lie down in front of a poisonous snake for example, or an alligator. Also remember that you are now invading their private space. Make sure that they are comfortable. Do not distress them or interfere with their normal life and behavior. While I was there, a lady came with a dog on a leach. The dog went straight for the Prairie Dogs making them scatter. There were baby Prairie Dogs that panicked. When my wife asked her not to bring the dog into the area she was upset at my wife because there was no sign that said "no dogs allowed." I sometimes wonder how people's minds work. Is it okay to rob a bank because there was no sign at the bank that says "no bank robbing?" Can people not think logically for themselves? Do they really need everything to be told to them? Is it not obvious that you don't take a predator (that is what these Prairie Dogs think of this lady's dog) to the homes of their pray? Why scare them? Why disrupt them? Why chase all of them away? So please, get down low, get into their world, BUT only in as much as they are comfortable with.
]]>Light changes fast
While it was overcast I got this image:
Just a few minutes later it started to rain. It was not pouring rain but more than a drizzle. This weather change changed the lighting, the mood of the image, and resulted in a totally different picture:
Notice that the atmosphere of this image is just darker, a bit more gloomy. Yet, the rain drops in the air adds to the image. The rain just lasted for a few minutes and the light changed again:
So when the conditions change quickly we need to be ready and work fast. My camera was out, even in the rain (check first to see if it is safe for your equipment, as some gear is more weather sealed than others). I kept walking, searching for images. While these images are not the best, I still had a good time and I like the images.
Perches matter
Look at the perch of the first and the third images. It is interesting. It does not distract from the bird. There are no twigs in front or behind the bird. This is a pleasing perch. Compare this to the perch of the second image which just is not that clean. You have a twig seemingly poking the bird from behind. Then there is the twig at the back of the bird that does not add to the image. Now with image editing tools those twigs can be removed. And sometimes I do remove distracting little twigs from my images. But if you can help it, pick perches that are photogenic.
Now in nature we cannot control where the bird is going to sit but we can choose which shots we shoot. We can linger around an area that provides good perches rather than waste our time being in an area where the perches are too cluttered, too high (which leads to shooting the birds from below and having the sky as a background), or that does not offer a good background. Good backgrounds are further away from the bird. The further away from the bird the better so that the background can be blurred better.
Stay where the action is
I walked all over the property searching for birds in vain. It seemed as though, at least for the time that I was there, the bird activity were confined to a few areas. It would have been better for me to stay there rather than walk all over to find nothing. As long as there are birds in the area, stay there. Stay where the action is.
Just be alert
These little guys often do not stay long. They come and go. Be alert. Watch them. Be ready. We don't want to miss shots because we only saw the bird just as it flew off. Constantly look around, in all directions.
]]>
I fixed my Gimbal head to my ground-pod. I laid flat on my stomach to try to get as close to eye level with the frogs as possible. They were skittish and did not allow me to get close to them. So I just lay there waiting for them to get used to me. Soon they did and I was in business.
While they were still a bit further away all I could do is shoot a more minimalistic image. There were these green floaties on the water that gave this image a greenish tint. Soon, however, they came a bit closer.
This time, there were plants in the image. I was disappointed that my polarizer was not with me. This image would have been better with some polarization. It would have removed some of the brighter water glare.
Here I changed my angle a bit by slowing crawling more to one side. I wanted to eliminate some of the clutter of the plants and see if I could also minimize the glare on the water with a different vantage point. It worked. I like this image a lot more.
And here is another angle. These are just common frogs, yet look how colorful they are. Just look at those eyes. You may not have exotic animals in your part of the neighborhood. You may not be close to majestic mountains, strong rivers, or vast lakes. But there is always something to photograph. For these fellows, get as low as you possibly can. Yes in the mud. Move slowly. Stay still. And just enjoy watching and photographing them. There is a totally new world of photography waiting if you are willing to go for the smaller and more common animals. And they are beautiful too.
]]>
So how do we make such an image work? Is there not too much clutter and chaos in the scene? How do we make the subject stand out from its environment? Here are a few things that may be helpful:
Even though there is chaos with branches, stems, leaves, and even another insect we still have to create some separation between all of that and the subject. So choose an aperture that shows some of the environment but still blurs it enough so that the viewer will focus on the sharp subject rather than the other stuff.
Use brightness to draw attention to where your want the viewer to look. As you can see, some of the greenery in the background was very bright. But in post processing I darkened them down some in order for the subject to stand out more. Then I brightened the butterfly as it was in shade. By darkening the background and brightening the butterfly it turns the viewer's attention to the butterfly without turning the environment totally off (by making it to blurred or too dark).
Use color. Tone down the background colors a bit and bring out the color of the butterfly. The butterfly's color was very muted as it was in the shade. By bringing out the colors of the butterfly it becomes more prominent in the image.
Use size. The butterfly's size helps place our attention on it. For this kind of scene to work photographically, we have to move in closer to make sure that the butterfly takes up a good size of the image. If this is not possible, then crop into the image to create the same effect.
While this image will not win any awards I still enjoy it. It shows the butterfly's life. It shows where it lives, disorder and all. But it stands out enough to clearly be the subject of the image, and that is what makes it work. So remember the four things you can use to make such images better.
]]>Place another object closer to you on the opposite side of the other objects. Such objects do not have to be the same size as the other objects on the other side of the image to create balance. Objects closer to you visually weigh more than more distant objects. So even a small object close to you can bring balance to larger object on the opposite side of your image.
You can use a person, such as a jogger to bring balance. Yes, a bird in the right position can do it too. You can use just about anything to bring about the balance you seek. Fellow photographers are often willing to be used in your images in this way to bring about balance.
If you don't have access to anyone or anything to place on the empty side of you image and the bird do not obey your commands, you can always use light to try to create balance.
You can always create sun-stars as your bright section of the image to bring about some balance.
The dark rocks on the left of the image are visually very heavy. Since no joggers came along and no bird cooperated with me, I attempted to draw attention to the opposite side of the image by placing a sun-star there. Here is another example of the same scene.
So how do you create a sun-star? You simply position yourself so that the sun is halfway behind a hard surface like a horizon, a tree, a person, or like in this case, the rock. Then you use a small aperture, and voila, you have a sun-star. Most people wait for the sun to reach the horizon before they take their shot. They think that they need the horizon to make the sun-star. But the problem with that is that you only have a few moments as the sun dips below the horizon and the opportunity is gone. Why take that change? What if a group of people walking into your shot just as the sun reaches the horizon? So remember, that any sharp surface will work to create sun-stars. Vertical surfaces works the same.
In this scene, you can use the entire height of that rock to create your sun-star with. Thus you have ten or so minutes available to you, as the sun makes it way down the rock, rather than just a few fleeting moments once the sun hits the horizon.
So remember to thing about the balance of the objects in your image. Create balance by positioning objects to cancel each other's weight out or if that does not work, use something that is brighter.
]]>This is not the kind of scene where HDR (taking multiple exposures at different levels of brightness and then merging them into one balanced image) would work well. We had to drive on the our next location and could not spend more time here. Even if we had more time, it would have taken a long time for the weather to change or for the sun to get low enough. Yes, we were there on the wrong time of day. However, we did not have a choice because of where our accommodations were for the night.
So what do you do? How do you get a half decent image in impossible light?
The only viable option we had was to forget about the large water fall and focus instead only on the parts that were in shade. Go for more intimate, smaller scenes. Put the wide angle lens away and fit a longer lens. Find small areas of interest that are in shade and shoot them. Does any area have nice color? How about nice patterns, or texture? Does anything stand out? Is anything different? If nothing catches your attention just zoom in a bit and start panning (moving the camera from one side to the next) the scene slowly. Soon enough you should see something that perks your interest. Here is an example:
Here are a few tips to photograph waterfalls:
Determine which shutter speed renders the water flow as you want it. Do you want milky smooth water, water movement but with some definition, or water drops frozen in mid-air? You can do all of that with your shutter speed. Slow shutter speeds show movement by blurring it while fast shutter speeds freeze movement.
If you want to show water movement you will have to use a slow shutter speed. Slow shutter speeds will require you to use a tripod to get that which is not moving (the rock face and moss) sharply in focus.
Use a polarizing filter. When things like rocks are wet they are shiny. Shiny stuff can be too bright and distracting. A polarizing filter can cut that shine out, giving you nice and dark rocks and colorful moss. You want to create that contract between the water and the rock.
Continually wipe the front of your lens clean and dry, especially right before you fire. Drops on your lens will ruin your image. Mist on your lens will render your photo dull and slightly out of focus. So keep wiping your lens to keep it dry.
If you are in sunlight make sure to shield your lens from the sun. Failure to do so may result in flare or an image with diminished contrast. You can use your lens-hood. If I need to constantly wipe my lens dry I prefer not to have a longer lens-hood on because I struggle to see in there and to get in there to thoroughly dry the lens. I just place my hand between the sun and my lens to cover my lens with my hand's shadow, then I shoot. If a wider lens is in use it will have a smaller lens-hood, in which case I will go ahead and use its lens-hood.
Even in harsh light, you can still get okay images if you just shoot that which is in the shade and go for smaller sections of the falls.
]]>No problem, I thought. We will just head out into the opposite direction towards location number two. After a drive up the mountain on the other side, the weather was still no good for photography. On to location number three ... bad photography weather. By the way, bad weather is often good photography weather and good tourist weather is mostly bad photography weather. This weather was just drab, overcast with almost no definition in the clouds. With the sun gone to rest, we too turned in with no success.
The next morning we headed up the mountain again (the opposite one to Mt. Shasta). The lake we went to was also still in winter. It was socked in with fog. We waited and waited ... Well, all I could come up with was this:
With no end to the fog we drove down the mountain again. Another location was in our sights. The weather was still no good, but the weather seemed to be changing. There was a huge difference between the foggy weather at higher altitude and that of the valley below. It was still cloudy but they were on the move. Soon enough the weather did change, not completely but enough.
When the weather does not play ball change locations, wait, and wait some more. It is on the fringes of bad photography weather that good weather sometimes shows itself. When weather moves in or out you will find great opportunity for dramatic images. Weather do change. You just need to wait for it. As a result, this was my last image of Mt. Shasta.
I enjoyed the Mt. Shasta area. There is good potential for great shots. When the weather is dead for photography, use the time to scout and wait. Weather conditions do change.
]]>
The flowers are given prominence. Their size are larger than the main mountain peaks in the image. The closer we get to the flowers the larger they will appear in relation to the mountains. As is often the case, solving one problem creates another. By going in close to the flowers we solve the composition problem and we create a beautiful image. BUT, the closer we get to the flowers the more we shrink the depth of field. If we get the flowers in focus then the mountains are out of focus. If we get the mountains in focus then the flowers are blurred. How do we solve this problem?
This is where focus stacking comes in. We photograph the same scene multiple times with the same settings, but we change the focus distance for each shot. So we focus on the flowers and take an image. Then we focus a little further into the scene and take another shot. So we continue to take more images, each focused a litter further into the image, until we reach infinity focus. Many modern cameras will calculate how many images you need from your closest point to infinity, and shoot them for you, changing focus automatically between exposures. This is great, because then you don't have to touch the camera to change focus, thereby accidentally moving the camera slightly. The wider your lens, the fewer images you will need. The longer your lens, the more images will be required. For this scene I took four images all focused on different spots.
Now you have a series of images. When you process them, please make sure that your White Balance and Tint are set the same for each image, as you are going to blend them together and don't want different color casts. The idea is to take the in-focus parts of each image and stitch them together, to make a blended image that is sharp, front to back. To blend the images together, you are going to need software to do it for you, OR, if you are skilled, you can do it manually with layers and masks in Photoshop. Photoshop can do it automatically but I am not impressed with their results (for focus stacking). There are other alternatives to use. Helicon Focus is a good one. More recently, Luminar Neo released a focus stacking extension too.
In Luminar Neo you just grab your series of image and drag them into the focus stacking extension and click on stack. It is literally that simple. In my testing, I compared Photoshop's auto focus stacking feature against the images stacked by Helicon Focus and Luminar. Photoshop came dead last. Helicon Focus and Luminar Neo came out on top, with a very, very similar result.
Why don't you give focus stacking a try? It is easy and it solves a major focusing problem. If you click on Affiliate Links you can get Luminar Neo and the extensions for a discount.
Disclaimer: I am an affiliate of Luminar and get a small commission if you buy software with my link. My commission comes at no cost to you, in fact, you get a discount. I will never sell you something I do not personally use and believe in.
]]>
Start by looking and searching for something that is different. Perhaps a tree is larger than the others, or we find a small tree amongst the large trees. If this fails, forget about grand landscapes in the forest, just for a moment. Is there just one tree, one fern, one something that is interesting that could make a great image by itself. We can eliminate the forest and get an image of just that one tree or one fern or that one something. Walk around until you find it. If you see nothing that strikes you as interesting, go even smaller, yes - eliminate even more. Does one fern leave curl nicely? Does a piece of hanging moss catch the light nicely? Can you shoot just one smaller thing?
You will be amazed how aiming for the smaller things gets your creativity going. Before long, you will start seeing the larger things to photograph. Oh' and while you walk around be observant. Remember that you are on the hunt for things to photograph. Listen for and watch for birds, snails, mushrooms, and the likes. Stand still and just watch the birds. My brother and I were standing at this spot watching a Robin. We followed it's flights here and there, until we discovered something interesting.
Which brings me to my second point. Please do not limit your options by just bringing your "forest lens" along. Here I needed my 200-600mm, but the point is that I had it with me. We wanted to shoot forest scenes but found the nest in the forest. Keep an open mind. We can be too focused on getting a preconceived image that we don't see another opportunity.
Back to the forest. Look for a place which are a bit more open. In forests, this is often where interesting scenes present themselves because with an opening in the forest things are less cluttered, less chaotic. It becomes easier to make sense of things, easier to eliminate things, to make a beautiful composition. Openings in forests also typically have more light which can be used creatively. Streams are one such opening that can present opportunities.
Lighting in forests can be difficult to handle. There are both deep dark shadows and harsh light from the sun poking through. Your best bet is to go to forests when it is overcast (but still being bright to have enough light). If there are clouds rather than it being overcast you will have to wait. Use the time when the sun is out to scout and to decide on your composition. Then wait for a cloud to shield the sun before you take your image.
Tripods can be essential in forest, especially on overcast days. It can be darkish in forests which will result in longer shutter speeds; too long to hand hold, hence the tripod. However, watch out for wind. If there is wind the foliage will move. Moving foliage combined with long shutter speeds produce out of focus images. These days I am no longer as scared as I was years ago for noise. So, I don't hesitate to up my ISO to get to a faster shutter speed if the wind calls for it. The software noise removal is fantastic now a days.
Have fun photographing the forest, but remember that great images have to make sense of the chaos.
]]>Today the embargo lifted on my Non-Disclosure Agreement with Luminar on a new extension. This extension has me very excited. Let me introduce you to Pano Stitching. Now you may ask why we need yet another pano stitching program? We need this one because it is unique and offers complex features that are easily done. You can stitch both RAW and JPEG files. Here are the new stuff I am smiling about:
HDR Panorama. Yes, it can do HDR and Pano in one go! Previously, I used to first have to do the HDR processing for each file in my sequence and save them. Then I could use the HDR'ed files to make my Pano. No more, it is now one single step for both tasks.
Perspective Adjustment. There is a unique and easy way to change the perspective (both horizontal and vertical) to get rid of distortion. It is fun to use.
Pano from Video. You can create a Panorama image from a video file. The program will extract the frames from the video to create a Pano image.
Object/Subject Composition Panorama. You can select a person, animal (subject) or object in the video to place in the Pano.
The extension will launch on July 20, 2023.
Here is the link to the software: Click Here. (Please note that I am an affiliate of Luminar and get a small commission if you purchase the software with my link. The commission comes a no cost to you). Then click on Extension packs.
]]>
I arrived in the area the night before. It is never a good idea to scout for the perfect spot early in the morning while it is still dark, especially when dealing with wet and slippery conditions. No image is worth your life and safety should always come first. So my brother and I went to this area right away, while we still had day light, to scout the location and look at the conditions. This was my first time to this magical spot. The scouting did not take long as this spot is right next to the road (basically).
Researching your photography location before you go can also be vitally important. Reading up on this area, I was warned that if conditions were right for getting color in the clouds you need to be on location an hour and a half to one hour before sunrise. Due to the elevation, the clouds (if there are any) light up much earlier than it would at lower elevation and without the mountain range on the other side of the lake. Now, in this case it did not matter, as we never got the much wished for red clouds. But you have to ready for it, in case it happens. You don't want to get there hearing other photographers talk about how great that was after it is over.
Okay, so you have your composition all sorted out. What techniques are best for this image? Which questions should a photographer in this situation be asking himself or herself to get the best results?
Start asking your questions and determine exactly what you are going to do and have it ready before the sun shows itself. Once the sun pops out you have a very short window of time before your sun star opportunities vanish. Even if you don't want to create a sun star, in some places the light turns harsh really quickly. The nice light only remains nice for so long. You don't want to be using "go time" to figure things out. Go time, is go time.
We have flowing water in the scene. So we need to ask ourselves if we want to show that water movement or if we want to freeze it. In this case, I decided to show the water flowing. The next question, related to this topic, is how much do I want the water to move in the shot. In other words, do I want milky smooth water (a more dreamy effect) or barely moving water, or anything in between? I wanted to show a good amount of water movement but still retain sharpness and texture.
Wanting to show movement but retain sharpness and texture in the water, (or whatever you want show related to the water movement) we now need to ask what shutter speed we need to use to get the effect we want. There are a few things to consider here that impact the correct shutter speed for the desired effect. The speed of the water movement itself impacts the correct shutter speed. So does your distance from the water. The closer you are to the water the more movement you will see for a given shutter speed. Lastly, your focal length (your lens) also effects the correct shutter speed. Wider lenses show less water movement over the frame than longer lenses. Taking these three elements into account we guesstimate the correct shutter speed. Once it is go time, we quickly shoot a few images using different shutter speeds at and around the speed we guesstimated. We do that just to make sure that we nailed it as guesstimating is only so good, right? For this image, I used 0.4 of a second. Typically, I would have used a slightly faster shutter speed than this but this image was taken with a 16mm lens which shows the water moving slower than longer lenses hence a longer shutter speed to compensate. Either way, as long as you took a few exposures at different shutter speeds you can choose the best one later.
The next question concerns depth of field. How much of this image do I want in focus, front to back? Since it is a landscape image, I like everything sharp. That means a small aperture needs to be used. How small? The focal length of the lens AND how far you are from the closest thing in the image impact that. The wider the lens the more depth of field you naturally have at a given aperture as compared to a longer lens. The closer you are to what is included in the frame the smaller aperture you need. At 16mm and at the distance I was from what is included in this image, you can get away with F11. For safety's sake I used f16. Now many will cry hearing that I sometimes use F16 because it creates diffraction which makes the image less sharp. However, I was very close to the water, and since I wanted the water movement with sharp texture I did what I needed to do.
Now we need to look at our ISO. Do we have a reasonable ISO given our preferred shutter speed and aperture? Or is the scene too bright for our settings? If the image is too bright, use a neutral density filter to darken it. If the scene is too dark then increase the ISO. With today's noise reduction software I no longer fear ISO noise upto ISO 3200. This will be different from sensor to sensor and is therefore camera dependent.
At such low shutter speeds you will be better served using a sturdy tripod to prevent camera shake. I use a tripod regardless of shutter speed because, for me, it helps with composition. I also use a remote release to fire the camera so that the camera is not touched (it causes vibrations which negatively impacts sharpness, especially if you print at large sizes).
I focused a little ways into the image.
Now we are ready. All of this is done before the sun peaks out. Obviously the light levels are going to change the second the sun shows itself. But our setting are close-ish. If you shoot in manual you will make the final adjustment as the sun comes out and take your image. Personally, I love aperture priority. Once the sun shows itself I simply use my exposure compensation dial (Sony has a dedicated dial for this which I use for almost all my images) to fine tune the exposure (in conjunction with neutral density filters - for this scene since getting the water movement as I wanted it was important to me).
There you go. With experience, your mind will automatically run through the process that works for you. Develop a workflow that you use for all your shooting. But always ask the right questions and set things up before go time.
]]>I visited the photographically famous Emerald Bay at Lake Tahoe in California recently. So I decided to do a test. I took a picture of the same scene in basically (a few minutes difference) the same light using my cell phone (version 12 from a fruit company) and using my Sony A7R IV. Now before the experienced photographers get upset at me, let me just agree with them that better gear will not make you a better photography per se. You are still the photographer and the gear does not change you. Furthermore, good technique and great light are even more important than gear. That being said, let's look at the two images. I will not identify the images at first. Can you pick which one is the cell phone image and which one is my Sony's image?
What do you think, which camera took this image? Here is the next one.
So what do you think? Is there a difference and is that difference significant enough to justify spending a lot of money on expensive gear? The first image is from my Sony A7R IV. Now there are apps to better control the camera on the cell phone and I certainly could have gotten a slightly better image. But as you can see, it just does not compare to what can be done with good gear and good technique. I will talk about this image again next week and run down what technique I used to get it.
Yes, cell phones can take great images. For many people it may be all they need. They don't shoot right into the sun. They don't go out when there are deep dark shadows AND a bright sun in the same shot. They don't care about blurring the water. And they don't want to spend time editing images in complicated software later. I say this in all sincerity without a hint of belittling such photographers. It all depends on what you photograph, when you shoot, and the conditions you shoot in.
The difference between these two images show one area in which cell phone sensors cannot match those of full frame cameras and that is dynamic range. The large sensor of the full frame camera can handle a bigger difference between the lightest and the darkest areas of your images without losing detail in the extremes than can a cell phone camera sensor. Please note that the image from my Sony is not an HDR, that image comes from one raw file (without using pseudo-HDR - developing the same file twice). In a different scenario in which I am not shooting into the sun, the cell phone would have fared much better.
As for me, I will continue to use my cell phone camera for some photography BUT for serious work in difficult light I love my Sony gear.
]]>
Jenny lake. To not have the water fill 90% of the image you can shoot from a low perspective. The lower you go the more the water will shrink in size. The higher you shoot from the more you will expand the water in the image. Knowing this can be really helpful to minimize boring sections of the image. Besides, foreground interest creates depth.
Not a great shot, so how can we improve on it? We know that the mountain is not going anywhere, so why don't we forget about the mountain for now and look for a better foreground, or something that will go with the mountain? After searching and driving around a bit we improve on this image by getting closer to the flowers at a different spot. Look how it improves the image.
The flowers play a more important role in this image. I am closer to them, making them bigger in relation to the mountain. But what if we go even closer, change the angle, and chose a better location?
You see, moving a few steps this way or that way, getting closer or further, higher or lower hugely impact our images. So don't just get out of the car, pull out your phone or camera and start shooting. Take your time and look around. Let's not take images but rather make images. We are intentional about what we frame in our shot and the image we want. Regardless of the conditions or equipment we can still do our best to get a better image. All of these images were taken with my cell phone.
Here is another scene from Oxbow Bend. Again, the light is not good as it is the wrong time of day. I looked around and did not find anything better to photograph the mountain with, but some flowers. Going close to them to maximize them in the shot relative to the mountain, I got this image.
Even when we are not photographers and only tourists shooting with our cell phones in conditions and times not suited to yield great photographs we can still be intentional, work the scene, and do our best to get at least a better image that we would have had, had we just snapped away without thinking.
]]>
But we are still photographers. Even when we are not doing any serious photography we can still be creative. Here I shot from an angle so that there was no glare on the water (I did not have a polarizer filter with me).
In this image I tried to use the lines to lead the viewer into the image.
Yes, I know, these are not great images. They are just cell phone shots taken at the wrong time of day. However, as photographers we are always mindful of the light. Most of the time the light was horribly bright. So what do you do to solve the harsh light issue. Well, as you can see, there were many clouds. So rather than just shooting shots left and right without paying attention to the light I waited until one of the clouds moved in front of the sun. While the scene was in shadow for a few moments I snapped the shot. These are little things we can do to help us get better images, even when just taking the day off.
Always be checking your angles. Should you shoot from low down? Is the image balanced compositionally? Can I create depth? Watch people's shadows to make sure they are not intruding into the image. Make sure that your spouse shields the lens from direct sunlight since the cell phone does not have a lens hood. Oh' and please wipe your lens with a microfiber cloth regularly as dirt and fingerprints can make your images soft. Learn the basics of how the phone's camera works (tap to focus, tap and hold then slide up or down to adjust the exposure, etc.)
So the point is to still pay attention to photography basics even when you are just having a good time. And by the way, cell phones are capable of taking some decent images.
]]>
OR
I like the color of the first image more. It was taken closer to sunrise on a different day. The second image was taken later in the morning on a different day with different light, so the colors are not that pleasing. But look at the subject matter only. The single bird is okay but to me the interaction and action of the second image are much more engaging. While more static images are okay, they are not often great (there is always exceptions).
Try to get action images when photographing wildlife, or try to get something different, unique. To do this it is helpful to get to know the subject's behavior so that you can anticipate when the action is going to happen. In this case, this was the first time in my life that I saw these birds in real life. However, I prepared by watching videos on them. Furthermore, they start their action just before sunrise. I took about 20 minutes to have enough light to start shooting. That 20 minutes was valuable because I intently watched them to learn how they behave. The more you know about your subject the better photographer it will make you. It will increase your chances of getting action or something unique because you will be ready.
The action happens far to fast to be able to get the unique shot or that perfect action shot by waiting for that right moment. Rather, we shoot in short bursts when things happen. We use the highest frame rate the camera will allow. We take hundreds of images in that one shoot. Then when we get home we select the winners and discard the rest. Another reason to shoot at a high frame rate is not just linked to getting that look, the action, or that unique moment but focus. The best image becomes a bad image if it is not sharp. Sometimes a camera can take a fraction of a second to acquire focus. The images taken before nailing focus are useless. Shooting at a high frame rate highly increases the chance that you will get a sharp image as the auto focus system catches up to the action.
The semi-permanent blinds were probably not designed with photographers in mind. They were too narrow. The fixed (unmoveable) bench did not leave enough room for a tripod between it and the window. With some maneuvering and allowing the back tripod leg to be at less of an angle worked. That meant that the long lens protruded out of the blind. Animals react to movement. With the lens moving from side to side as I shoot it could scare the birds off (hence my first suggestion below). Canon and Sony's long lenses are white and flashy!
Equipment suggestion #1
Use a lens hood. Sometimes they can make a huge difference in picture quality. They help to prevent flare and a loss of contrast. They also help to protect the lens.
Equipment suggestion #2
Use a gimbal head. Now I know that a bean bag on the window sill works for some people. This way there is no need to carry a tripod and head, and it also solves the space issue inside of the blind. But sometimes the action happens really quickly. There is no way you can move the camera as fast on the bean bag as you can on a gimbal head. Nor can you point the camera up (when the birds jump and or fly) as quickly from a bean bag as you can with a gimbal. Moving heavy gear constantly for two to three hours can be hard to do if you are not a weight lifting champion. Moving the gear quickly and tracking the action with a gimbal is effortless without tiring you out.
Equipment suggestion #3
Use fast lenses. I use the Sony 200-600 F6.3. If I had the money I would get the 600 F4. To freeze the action requires a fast shutter speed which shoots up the ISO which results in noise (grainy color dots). The faster the lens the lower the ISO which leaves you with less noise. I see people shooting with F7.1 or even F11 lenses and wonder how their images come out. Use the fastest lens you can afford. By the way, I love the Sony 200-600!
Software suggestion #4
DXO PureRaw 3. This software is great at dealing with the noise. If you regularly shoot at high ISO this program is worth every penny.
Settings suggestion #5
Shoot the lens wide open (for blurred backgrounds and to allow for a lower ISO). Use a high shutter speed to freeze the action. Use auto ISO. So I set my aperture as open as the lens can go (in my case 6.3), and the shutter speed at around 1600 or higher (depending on the light levels), and then with auto ISO I let the camera worry about the ISO and exposure. I have my "Zebras" enabled (to show when whites clip). If any Zebras show up I use exposure compensation to banish them.
Shooting suggestion #6
Be relentless and follow the action all the time but shoot at the highest frame rate in short bursts when something interesting happens. Stop pixel peeping or reviewing your images (unless nothing is happening). You don't want to miss shots because you were not ready. Things can heat up quickly and you may only have one chance. Focus on shooting now and look at the results when you get home. Having said this, there is also the danger that some setting is off and it may ruin the entire shoot. So by all means review the odd image here and there but do so quickly without wasting much time on it.
]]>
But it was not this easy as I experienced a failure before getting this image. The journey took me on a four hour drive to get to where the lek is. I booked the blind and was set. You have to be in the blind and quiet with lights out at least an hour to an hour and a half before sunrise. The blind had plexiglass to look through. You can understand why. This is early Spring in Nebraska, so you have to keep the freezing wind out. However, we cannot photograph through a scratched and dirty plexiglass window and get good images.
I received permission to erect my own blind, which I set up right next to the place's blind. Often in life, solving one problem creates another. On the morning of the shoot it was 16 degrees Fahrenheit with a healthy freezing wind to boot, making it feel like 6 degrees with the wind chill. I waited for about three hours and not a single bird showed up. I did not even hear them. When present, they make what is described as a booming sound but now I was "booming" from the cold. Getting up very early to drive from the hotel to the lek and freezing for hours without success was a little disheartening. So we had to drive the four hours back without even seeing a Prairie Chicken.
Back to the research! I was not going to drive all that way for nothing again (even though this lek had the Chickens there on both mornings before I was there). This time I found a lek much closer to my home. I visited the place twice and got lucky both times. This is what my Prairie Chicken journey taught me:
Do thorough research and planning to maximize your chances of getting good images
Keep on trying until you are successful
Endure the cold (or whatever)(as long as it is safe) because you have to be out there to get the image
Be patient as these images took just less than nine hours of being out there to get
In the next blog I will talk a little about what equipment was used to get these images.
]]>
The last two examples clearly pays no attention to the overlay guides as I just wanted you to see some of the overlay options. Look at the first example again. What if your subject is in the top right corner instead of the bottom left corner. Cycle through the options by pressing the "o" key until you find the overlay that you desire. Now press Shift and "o" to rotate the overlay. Once again, you can repeatedly press Shift and "o" to cycle through all the rotation options. With the overlay in place you can now crop as usual.
But how tightly or loosely should we crop? In this image I am as close as the bird will allow my without flying off. My lens is maxed out at 600mm. But the bird is still too small in the frame. This image needs to be cropped. Let's start with the uncropped image and experiment with various crop options. We will stay with horizontal crops at first.
So this is the full frame. We want to crop the image because of multiple reasons. The out of focus tree in the bottom right bothers me, so I want to eliminate it. The bright windows of my neighbor's home in the top right of the image also needs to go. Lastly, the size of the bird in the frame needs to increase. Let's crop in a bit and see how it looks:
It looks a bit better. Some of the distracting out of focus tree in the foreground in the bottom right has been removed and the bright window in the top right corner is also gone. But this crop is lousy as we still have part of the out of focus tree on the bottom right as well as the window on the top. Let's crop even more to see if that resolved the issue:
All objectionable parts of the image have now been pruned. But is this the best crop we can get from this image? Let's zoom in a bit more to see how that looks:
Although the eye contact the bird is making with the viewer is now nicely visible and we can see the beautiful detail of the feathers the crop seems a bit too tight. The bird seems cramped and has no room to breathe or to live. How is this poor bird ever going to open it's wings? Personally, I like to see a bit more room. I am not a big fan of animal portraits (unless something special is going on or the image is really tight on the face). There is something to be said to see the surroundings, how and where the bird lives.
Some images also lend themselves to vertical crops. Let's start, once again, with the tight crop and move out. Which of the following images do you find more pleasing as you consider how they are cropped?
What does your selection teach you about cropping? How can cropping be used from a composition stand point? Yes, we should always crop in camera. That is the best way to photograph and it gives you the highest resolution in a single shot. In landscape photography we typically do. But life does not always agree to let us work with what is ideal. Sometimes we just cannot get into the right position to crop the way we would like to. Cliffs may prevent us from moving forward. Thorn bushes may poke us. Slippery rocks may threaten us. And in the case of wildlife photography, cropping is just part of life. I just don't have a longer than 600mm lens. I don't own a 1.4 or 2x converter (and there are downsides to them). Even if we can get closer, sometimes we should not as that can disturb breeding animals or it may be dangerous. The only option is to crop.
Cropping does offer compositional advantages too. It is not possible to hand hold a long lens, to focus on the bird, AND watch and control the foliage on the edges of the frame. Even small camera movements make a huge difference as to what is included or excluded in the image. Having space around the bird allows us to place our crop strategically and carefully to include or exclude things on the edges of our frame. This may sound trivial, but it makes a difference. Look, for example, at the last three images. Look at the foliage in the top right corner. Does that top right corner not look the best, neat and clean in the last image compared to the other images? You cannot shoot this precisely with a long lens, hand held. But cropping helps and it certainly improved the composition in the last crop's case.
Even though the bird is smaller in the last image, to me, I like this crop the best. The bird still stands out while it has a bit of room to breathe and live. Review all these images in today's blog to see what a massive difference cropping makes to an image. What is your style when it comes to cropping? Do you crop tightly or do you also, like me, prefer to see a bit more space around wildlife?
]]>
Many times we are not this lucky. Perhaps the background in not blurred as nicely and the bird blends in with the background more. At other times, even with a very nicely blurred background, the colors of the background and that of the bird are so similar that the bird does not stand out as we would like it to. The following image was such an image. Now please bear in mind that the version shown here has already gone through some editing to create separation between the bird and the background. My raw files are taken through DXO PhotoLabs 6 or DXO PureRaw 3, so by the time I take the new "raw" file into Photoshop it is already much improved. Yet, even with this improvement the bird still does not pop out of the background as I would like it to.
So how can we separate the subject from the background more? How can we give it pop? We cannot use luminosity (brightness) values because the bird shares the same brightness as the background (especially in the original raw file). We cannot use color selection because, once again, the bird is the same color as the background. Let's take the image into Adobe Camera Raw (in Photoshop) and show you how I process the image to separate the subject from the background.
If you click on masking (top right red arrow) and then on the blue "+" to add a mask a new dialogue box will appear with a few options. I clicked on "select background." The red area in the image shows what has now been selected. If the selection is not accurate then you can paint it in or out or fix it with color selection. Now you can make adjustments to only the background. I like to darken it just a bit and bring down highlights. Then I repeat the process but this time I select the subject.
I like to brighten my subject a bit. Since this is a bird I may also add a bit of texture to bring out the feather detail. Yet detail is something I do NOT want to add to the whole image as I want to maintain a smooth blurred background. By making edits to the background separately from what I do to the subject allows me make the subject stand out better.
Breaking News! Luminar Neo is having a mother's day sale. Luminar Neo is image editing software that is easy to use and can yield great results fast.
Here are the details:
Luminar Neo Explore Plan now costs $79 instead of $99 + Collection for free.
The Pro plan now costs $99 versus $119 + Collection for free
The Lifetime License (no subscription) is $119 rather than $149 + Collection for free
This special is valid from May 12, 2023 through May 16, 2023.
You can also get the Clouds in Paradise Skies Pack by Team for $29 versus $58 > Click HERE
To get the offers mentioned above click HERE
See what this software can do:
Remove backgrounds
Enlarge images
Remove noise
Combine images into HDR
Make lights sparkle
So here is my original image. As you can see, the image just does not work because the bird is flying out of the image, there is not enough space for the bird to fly into. Rather than trash the image we are going to fix it. Click on the crop tool on the left. Make sure that you place a check mark in "content aware." Now change the "original ratio" setting to just "ratio." Click and hold the right middle crop mark and drag it too the right.
Click the "okay" check mark in the middle top of the screen and watch the magic happen.
We can repeat the process and get the following result.
In the area where the red circle is was a repetitive pattern that did not seem as though it would occur in nature. This can easily been cleaned up using the clone tool. We can then crop the image to get a final picture.
What do you think? Look at all the space we created in front of the bird; magical. This is really easy and only take few seconds. Most people think that the cropping tool in Photoshop is just for cropping in but it can also be used to crop out, for stretching the edge and creating space that once did not exist. This is a powerful tool that can improve many images and even save some that would otherwise have been trashed.
I hope that you found this tip useful. Try it.
]]>
One you have your skills honed try birds that may be more exciting (and difficult to photograph). A common mistake people make when taking images of flying birds, as I mentioned recently in a previous blog, is under-estimating the wing span. We zoom in too close then when the wings open they get clipped because they are wider than we anticipate. So shoot a bit wider, we can always crop a bit later, but there is no fixing a clipped wing.
Obviously, using a camera with good fast auto focus is what is needed here. You will also need a long lens. The wider aperture the lens has the better because you are going to need to use fast shutter speeds to freeze the birds and to get them sharp. However, please note that we do not have to get the entire bird sharp in order to have pleasing images. Look at this image above. The bird is sharp. Most importantly, the eye is sharp. But notice the wing tips, they are out of focus. This is totally okay because it conveys movement. So focus on the eye. Most modern cameras have eye tracking for this purpose. Shoot at the fastest frame rate your camera offers. Then pick the best ones to keep later. You will be surprise what a difference this can make to getting that right moment.
As usual, good light and composition are important. Typically, you will want to shoot with the sun behind you or behind you at an angle. The birds need space to fly into, so more space in front of the bird than behind it is necessary.
Now I will be honest with you. At times, I am too slow and then I get an image where the bird is too close to the edge. Perhaps a wingtip is too close to the edge or the bird does not have enough space to fly into. As long as you have a reasonably blurred background which is not too busy, it is very easy to "create" more space. Join me for next week's blog where I teach you how.
They are amazing. They can run incredibly fast. They run so fast that you can hardly see their little legs. This makes them hard to photograph since most cameras' autofocus systems are just too slow to catch up with these little guys. You have to pan (move the camera with the bird as it runs) so fast to get them in frame. Doing so with a long lens can also be difficult. Because these are common little birds does not mean that they are not challenging to photograph.
Once again, try to catch them doing something. Here I got it with both feet off of the ground, as also the one below:
Catch them with something in the beak.
Here is another bird trying to eat a feast too big for its mouth. And here it is when it is struggling to get the meal down:
These are just common birds but they are still interesting. We often think that we need to travel here or there to be able to get good images but you can get images like these wherever you are. Even common Gulls will do:
Just keep watching them with your finger on the shutter release.
]]>Birds have a larger wingspan than we think. We often compose our images too tightly. Then when the wings start flapping or when they jump or fight we are disappointed because a wing or beak or something is clipped. Frame them a bit looser in the image so that when action happens there is enough space in the frame for it to happen in without amputating some part of the bird. Here are a few action or action-ish images of birds:
Action can be anything the birds do such as preening, shaking off water, etc. It does not have to be much. Any movement or action is better than a bird just sitting on a stick (which is also beautiful, just not as interesting). Use fast shutter speeds to freeze the action. Action does not happen every second, so we just need to be patient but ready.
]]>
Scenes such as this can be tricky as much of the image is brighter than the bird. If the bird is small in the frame one can let the bird become a silhouette. If the bird is larger in the frame it is usually advisable to see some detail on the bird. The camera will typically want to darken to bird too much due to the brighter other parts of the image. Don't let it, shoot in manual or use exposure compensation to control the camera.
Here are some tricks to help you get low light bird images.
Larger birds are easier to shoot in low light (usually). They tend to move slower.
Pick the moment you depress the shutter carefully to coincide with the bird being even slower (eating, burrowing, etc.)
Shoot in bursts at a high frame rate. Even if some of the burst is out of focus, a few may be in focus.
Getting a sharp image is more important than avoiding noise; so use whatever ISO you need to use.
DXO PhotoLab or DXO PureRaw is fantastic at hunting down and banishing noise without sacrificing detail (to the extent that that is possible).
Try to stabilize the camera as much as possible (see my next blog about achieving this).
As we have said before, if the bird is larger in the frame, make sure that you can see some detail in the bird.
This means that I am mostly lying on the ground shooting, or should I say in the water and or mud or dirt. Equipment will NOT make you a better photographer yet it helps you to get better images as it makes photography easier and you more comfortable. Here are a few of my favorite non-camera or lens gear for bird photography:
A ground-pod. A tripod can often not get low enough on the ground and even if it can, how do you move it inconspicuously while you crawl on the ground? How do you prevent the spread out legs from getting stuck in the ground, or on plants? Movement chase the birds away. I like to be able to just slide the ground-pod on the ground. They are fantastic. You can even make one yourself from a used cheap pan. The model I use was bought from Huga Nature in Poland. (I am not affiliated with them or get any benefit from promoting them)
Wimberley Gimbal. Ball heads don't work well for bird photography as you constantly have to keep the gear up. Some will say that you can just increase the friction setting on a ball head to prevent having to constantly keep up the camera and lens but that comes at a cost of free and easy movement. Birds move fast so we need to be able to also move our gear fast, uninhibited. A Wimberley Gimbal carries the weight of the gear, it keeps it in the right position even when untouched. It re-balances the camera and lens automatically if correctly installed to prevent the front of the lens to drop into the sand when you let the camera go. You can move freely and they just work perfectly. I highly recommend this. There are many brands that sell these gimbals heads. I prefer the Wimberley brand. The one I use is the WH-200 Wimberley Head Version II (which I bought used). The ProMediaGear Katana Pro also consistently gets good reviews. (I am not affiliated with Wimberley or ProMediaGear)
Blind. Blinds helps the birds to not see you allowing you closer. It also puts them at ease so that they slow down and act naturally. Besides, blinds make for good sunscreen. I use a blind that drapes over me so that I can crawl and move. Mine is from LensCoat. LensCoat also sells lens covers that are highly rated. (I am not affiliated with LensCoat)
Lens cover. With an expensive lens crawling along the ground in and near brush, sand, and mud, necessitates me to protect my gear. Lens covers also cover the white lens so that it is not so flashy to disturb the birds or alert thieves. The one I use is from Huga Nature in Poland but LensCoat is also an esteemed brand for lens covers.
The right clothing. Photographers often overlook the importance of what you are wearing. Being too cold or too warm will send you packing and end your photography. The other day I was sitting out in 16 degree F or -8.88 degree C weather for three hours to photograph Prairie Chickens (which never showed up). You will freeze without the right clothing. View clothing as you do your photography gear.
You may be tempted to think that I just walked up to the scene and took this image. I wish this was what happened but it was not. The entire scene was explored. Sometimes images just don't jump out at me. I have to work the scene. I walk this way, that way, and this way again. I look at the foreground. I tried this and tried that and sometimes nothing seems to work. Luckily it was overcast and I had the time to explore without loosing the light, in fact, I am glad that it took me time to get to this composition since the light changed and warmed up the scene.
Forest streams often make the best photographs when it is overcast, when the sun is trying to break through. Fog also goes well with forest streams. In this scene I tried to create a lead-in line with the flowing water. A slow shutter speed was used to emphasize the water flow. A 16-35 mm lens was used and the camera is close to the water. The goal was to get the viewer drawn into the image, front to back.
I like this image a lot which teaches me to be patient and not to give up. My son was with me on this occasion and I remember telling him how frustrated I was that I just could not get the composition right and that I was struggling to "see" the image. Just be out photographing when the light works with what you are trying to shoot and keep on working the scene until the composition clicks.
]]>
My wife and I visited the lake but due to the vegetation we had no access to the shoreline. Literally the only two places where I could get to the water was of the image with the fishing pier and this location. But even this location did not offer much of a view. Instead of not getting an image this is the time to get creative.
First, look at what you have to work with. Can you zoom in and isolate something? Can you do something with the sun? How about a sun-star? (see previous blogs on how to create a sun-star. Does going low down offer a more interesting view? Play around with your options. I find a cell phone helpful for this process. I use my phone's camera to look at all the angles and possibilities before making a decision and photographing it with my "good" camera. It is just easier to walk around and try things out this way since my camera is on the tripod, and moving the whole rig around requires more motivation.
This image will certainly not win any awards but it is a pleasing image given that I had almost nothing to work with. You will be surprised what you can get if you start playing around with what you have in front of you.
]]>
The majority of this image looks cold, but that suits the scene with a lake and clouds. The cold look is taken advantage of rather than being a problem. Yet, I wanted to create some color tension which I introduced by waiting until the sky (or part of it) showed some warmth. During post processing I also brightened and warmed up the walkway and deck in the distance. It is important not to overdo it to remain looking natural.
There are a few things to look out for when taken images such as this.
Make sure that structures and water are level.
Make sure that there is good separation between objects. In this case, it is easy not to pay attention to the right railing of the deck. If that railing makes contact with the reflection of the tree in the distance they will look merged. This ruins any depth that you may have in the image. So make sure that you leave gaps between objects to separate them and to create depth.
Smooth out the water to better suit the scene. In this case there was no wind leaving the water like a mirror. If, however, there was some wind causing ripples you can smooth that out beautifully by using neutral density filters to get a shutter speed between 10 and 30 seconds. There is no need to have your shutter speed longer than this for the purpose of smoothing the water. This creates a bit of an ethereal look but pleasingly so.
As I have said before. Different weather or kinds of light does not rule out photographing as long as you carefully chose what to shoot that suits the weather conditions or the kind of light. Even harsh, middle of the day, light can be used effectively to show heat and drought if pairs with the right scene that calls for that kind of light. So don't put the camera away, find what works with the conditions or light.
Go out and photograph.
]]>
Each participant has a swivel chair that can turn 360 degrees. There is no one in front of you or behind you when you shoot because the boat is always positioned in such a way that you have a clear, unobstructed view of the wildlife. We are on the boat for three hours at sunrise and again for another three hours before sunset. During the rest of the day we teach wildlife photography, image editing, and hold image reviews.
If wildlife is your photographic passion and you seek to learn this craft, please join us. We offer a six to one, participant to instructor ratio. Send me an email to discuss this workshop scheduled for June or July 2023.
]]>Wildlife
During our workshops we visit a "game park" for wildlife photography. There is something very special about photographing wildlife in the wild.
Spitzkoppe
This unique place offers photogenic scenes around every corner, including the famous arch.
Sossusvlei and Deadvlei
This place offers some of the highest sand dunes in the world.
This is an amazing place. To get here you have to walk on sand and cross over a small sand dune. But once you get here, you get to photograph some iconic images.
Kopmanskop
This is where a diamond town battled the desert and lost. This ghost-town offers great images.
Quiver Tree Forest
I am planning another Namibia workshop featuring both wildlife and landscape locations. The workshop will be in June or July 2023. If you are interested in joining me, please send me an email. We offer a six to one ratio of participants to instructors, with a maximum of twelve participants. Both my fellow instructor and I have photographed Namibia a number of times and we have hosted workshops here before.
]]>My go-to app for processing HDR was Aurora HDR from Skylum. Before I continue, it needs to be disclosed that I am an affiliate of Skylum software. You can interpret that in two ways:
Since I make a few sents when someone buys Skylum software from my link, I must be biased. Hence, for self gain, I promote this software and showcase it as being better than what it really is. Therefore, what I have to say about it must be taken with a bag full of salt.
Since I have access to lots of software from different companies and still choose to use this software from Skylum it must be pretty good. You can get a discount for buying the software from the link in this blog or on the affiliate links page of my website.
By the way, some weeks ago I wrote about other software (DXO PureRaw 2) from which I gain nothing. In all seriousness, I write these blogs simply to share my passion for photography, hoping that it helps someone. Skylum has been in the HDR software space for a long time. Their HDR technology is very mature and very good. In my opinion, their HDR process produces images much nicer than PhotoShop does.
In the past, you had to use one of Skylum's image editing software offerings for general editing purposes AND buy Eurora HDR for you HDR work. Now, the HDR function is built right into their Luminar Neo product. Two software packages in one! All my HDR work is done using the Skylum software. Here is an example, provided by Skylum:
Here is the link to earn yourself a discount or to learn more about the product:
This software is really top notch and I use it for every image I process (HDR for my HDR work but Luminar Neo for non-HDR images). Please take advantage of the discount.
You will find them where there is water. Before becoming dragonflies they actually live and hunt underwater. Dragonflies can sit still for long periods of time and are generally really forgiving of your presence. You can get quite close to them. This makes them easy to photograph. They also prefer the same perches. So if they fly away, just wait patiently as they will return shortly and sit on the same (or very close to it) perch.
Overcast conditions work best but you will still need a good amount of light, especially if you want to photograph them in flight, which I am still working on. Certain species hover which will make photographing them in flight easier. These guys did not cooperate with my request. For in flight images you will obviously need a really fast shutter speed. Regardless of posed of in flight images use the largest aperture (smallest number on the lens). We want to blur the background. Speaking of backgrounds, they make a big difference. Since these guys sit still, more around and change your angle to line them up with water lilies or better backgrounds. A polarizer is also advisable to remove sheen from the background.
I shot these at 600mm. That creates two challenges. Firstly, the depth of field (that which is in focus) is small. This is a double-edged sword. On the one hand, this makes for nicely blurred backgrounds. On the other hand, we don't want the dragonfly, or part of it, out of focus. The second challenge, at least with my Sony 200-600mm, is the minimum focusing distance. This actually left me quite frustrated. These guys allowed me much closer to them as I was photographing from but I could not focus any closer. Now with the Sony A7Riv this was not a big problem as I could crop and still have between 24 and 32 mega pixels left. However, if I could focus from a closer distance I could have had much more resolution. To solve this issue there are a few solutions.
Firstly, some lenses can focus from a closer distance than others can. Perhaps the 100-400mm is a better choice here for that reason. I don't have that lens so it is not an option for me. I do not regret my choice as when photographing wildlife you always wish for more reach. So for most applications I would take the 600mm reach over the 400mm close focusing any day of the week. The second solution is a 1.4 extender or teleconverter. This makes the dragonfly (or what you are photographing) larger in the frame while basically maintaining the same minimum focusing distance. The tradeoff is that it steals light and it is quite expensive. Do NOT buy cheap ones as that will degrade your image quality. The last solution is to get an extension tube. They are cheap/er and greatly decrease your minimum focusing distance. Their tradeoff is that you will lose the ability to focus at infinity or close to it. But for this kind of photography that is not an issue. Since this is a hollow tube, image quality is not effected.
I plan to spend much more time with these beauties. I want to try photographing them with back-lighting, in flight, and different compositions. Why don't you go try photograph some of them?
]]>In the absence of mountains and rivers and storms this is what I have done. I started looking for the small world. The small world is always present. You just need to look for it but once you start focusing on the small world you will start seeing how many options there are. I went to the garden and started following bees around. Before you do this, please stay safe. If you are allergic to bees stay away and find something else to photography.
This image was taken at 105mm. Set the aperture wide open to blur the background. Go to a bed a flowers where there is a lot of bee activity. This takes patience. Just try to get images, over and over. Follow the bees around. Overcast weather is the best for this kind of photography as we want diffused light. However, it should not be dreary. We still need a good amount of light because these guys are always on the move. To get sharp images we have to use a fast-ish shutter speed. A polarizer is generally a good idea to remove reflections and sheen from leaves. Try to shoot at 90 degrees from the sun which is where a polarizer works best.
Try different angles. Shoot from different heights. Just play around.
We often think that the insect has to fill the frame to make a good image. This just is not true. We are not doing macro here. It is perfectly fine to leave some room for the insect to move around in. In fact, frame the image a bit looser. Show the habitat, the habits, and tell a story.
Have some fun. Hydrate and wear a hat. Just because it is overcast does not mean that the sun cannot burn you. We can get so involved taking these kinds of images that we lose sight of time, heat, and hydration. So take of yourself.
There was quite a bit of cloud cover, so I did not expect a great sunset. My conscience wanted to go home to be with my son. Yet, as a photographer, I always keep my eyes out on the western horizon. I am looking to see if the clouds make contact with that horizon or if there is a gap with no clouds. This is imperative to make a prediction as to what is going to happen at sunset. If the clouds are think there and low down I go home as nothing is probably going to happen. The time passed by as I fought with the wish to go home. This is what the horizon line was telling me.
There was indeed a gap in the clouds. That is what a photographer prays for. When the sun drops into and below that gap as it sets it is likely to light up the clouds in the sky. I unpacked my gear and set up for a good sunset, or so I hoped. Well, you can decide.
This is what it was like after sunset.
So if it is cloudy and you decide to go, always scan the western horizon first. Look to see if there is a gap for the sun to shine through. If so, don't go! You may very well be in luck. Only leave if there is no gap in the clouds or if there is a cloud bank right on the horizon. When it is cloudy that western horizon is your friend. It can send you home early or promise a fiery sky. Always watch that western horizon before you make a decision to go or to stay.
]]>
Yes, lightning is unpredictable, but not fully so. We do know where most of the strikes are going to hit for a scene such as this. Lightning tends to strike mostly in or near where the rain "band" is. When you see the rain "band," frame your image close to it, knowing that that is most probably where the strike is going to be.
Look at this image. The rain band is clearly visible just to the right of center. The rain band stops just to the left of the lowest dark clouds on the right. Now we can frame the image loosely based on where that band is. Keep in mind that that band of rain will constantly move. So keep reframing your composition to adjust to this band's movement.
Many people aim the camera too high. Most of the strikes are going to come from the approximate same height as the cell the rain band is from. So there is no need to frame too high. What is said here only applies to storms moving in or moving out. If you are in the thick of things it could strike anywhere. But for these kind of scenarios pictured above your best chance for success is to aim around the rain band, placing the top of your image just above where the rain band starts.
Always follow governmental guidelines for your safety.
]]>
I started to notice that as the storms start to roll in they tend to generally come from the same direction. I also noticed that God-rays also appeared frequently. I never captured them because I was not in the right place to shoot them (too much going on in the foregrounds facing that direction). But this is the advantage of getting to know your surroundings. You start to notice patterns such as weather patterns, which direction the God-rays appear, and where suitable foregrounds are for different kinds of scenarios.
For this image, I was photographing a mile or so east, at first. I noted that the cloud buildup was suitable for God-rays. So, I forgot about lighting and moved to this location for the God-rays. This image would never have been captured if I did not know my surroundings.
So here is the challenge for each of us. Explore your surrounding area well. Make notes as to which locations are best for which scenarios. Get to know the weather patterns. Armed with this information, you can quickly make better decisions about where to be for which kind of scene. If things change you will be ready because you would know where to go for that. I am now ready and know where all the open fields are (those without homes, power poles and cables, etc.).
It was the famous South African golfer, Gary Player, who once sunk the ball from an almost impossible position in the sand. A reporter called him "lucky." Little did the reporter know that Gary spent hours and days practicing those very shorts from those very positions. Gary responded to the reported by saying, "the more I practice the luckier I get."
Create your luck with preparation. Get to know your surroundings. It will increase the odds of getting the shots you want.
]]>
I love the way the perch is shown here. It adds to the image. This images shows more than just a portrait of a bird. Yes, the bird is smaller in the image, but the perch is now part of the image. I could have cropped the image more but then I would have lost some of the perch.
Show more than just the bird in flight. Now we know where the bird comes from. The perch acts as a barrier to prevent the viewer's eyes from leaving the image on the right. Make sure to leave enough space for the bird to fly into. Once again, the bird is smaller in the frame but it tells more of a story than it would have if it was cropped to only show the bird.
So don't be afraid of zooming out a bit, or cropping less deeply, or shooting from further away. Show a bit more.
]]>
I watched them at two different locations and realized that they seem habitual. They frequent certain perches. I watched them for a long time and identified where I want to attempt to take up my position. I moved slowly and cautiously and then waited, and waited, and waited some more. The birds got used to me and started their previous routines. It was a wonderful experience being out in nature and photographing these birds. Here are a few suggestions to get your started:
Be patient. It just takes time and practice.
Start with stationary birds.
Get to know your camera well. Specifically, learn to control and set your focus modes and preferences.
Auto ISO is your friend, use it. Set your shutter speed and aperture as you want them and trust your camera to set the exposure right using the ISO.
Use a shutter speed of at least double your focal length. Use your largest aperture. If you are using a very long lens such as 600mm or longer you may need to stop down just a bit to get enough depth of field if you are really close to the birds.
Find a location where the background if far away from where your birds are. This will help to adequately blur the background.
Watch your background to make sure it is pleasing. Moving to the left or right a little can make a big difference.
Once you are more experienced, try some bird in flight images
If you use a fast enough shutter speed, turn off image stabilization. For birds in flight you need to increase your shutter speed even higher. Did I mention the need of lots of patience before? Just keep on trying.
First of all, I become acquainted with all the safety and survival information provided by governmental agencies and I obey their guidelines. Secondly, I listen to and closely follow weather reports, warnings and alerts. In addition to this I also practice the following tips:
I only photograph on the edges of storms. That means that I shoot as the storm moves in, but before it becomes severe. I make sure that I am home before the severity of the storm picks up. Similarly, I shoot when the storm is just about over and clearing out.
I use numerous weather cell phone apps that provide life radar data. It is important to know where the storm is, and how it is moving.
I listen in on my ham radio (I am licensed) by tuning in to the repeater frequency. In our area we have active weather spotters during weather events. By listening in on their reporting I know what is happening where. I change my position based on this live information.
I stay a safe distance away (consult your governmental guidelines). As an extra precaution, I stay in the car with the windows rolled up (for lightning). My camera is set up on a tripod with a lightning trigger outside and does not need me to supervise.
I thoroughly scout the area where I plan to shoot weather from long in advance. I need to know alternate routes. I check that all the roads are open before the weather comes by leaving on the shoot early and running routes.
I chose locations situated on or very near to cross-roads. I want to be able to drive off in any of four directions in the unlikely event of a distant tornado. Once again, I greatly minimize the likelihood of such encounters by not being out in the midst of storms and only shooting during the edges of storms before they are strong or severe.
I make sure that my cell phone is signed up to receive weather alerts and take immediate action on receiving them.
Safety should always be our first priority, NOT the image. No image is worth your life. I share only my experience and what I do with this blog. I am NOT telling you to do what I do. Do what the governmental agencies say.
]]>Let's get talking about image editing software. Please note that everybody have their own preferences and these are just mine. I am not saying that my choices are the best, their are what is working for me and what I know best. I use four different image editing programs:
Photo editing is very important and can make a huge difference.
* Disclosure: I am an affiliate of Skylum. Click on affiliate links to get a discount code if you choose to buy the software. I get a small commission without costing you anything extra (in fact, you get a discount). I use Skylum's software on every single one of my images.
]]>Here is what else I carry in my bag:
When I am going on a long hike I may leave some of my gear behind in my car to save on weight. That is what is in my bag.
]]>Camera sensors are becoming so good at high ISO that photographers are not scared to use higher ISO to get shutter speeds high enough to shoot handheld.
Noise reduction software have also become so good that we can can boost ISO even higher.
Photographers don't like the hassle of carrying and dealing with tripods. Oh' and did I mention the weight of tripods?
Some photographers feel more creative and free without being kept back and or slowed down by a tripod.
However, I still use a tripod faithfully. Here is why:
No matter how good camera sensor performance is at high ISO they will always be better at lower ISO.
The same argument goes for noise reduction software. Image quality is everything to me.
Having a camera mounted allows me to scan the boarders of my image to prevent nicking things. It help to compose more precisely.
It slows me down, enabling me to concentrate better. I get my freedom to roam, and play with possible composition without dealing with a tripod by using my cell phone. Once I find what I want then I get serious with my real camera and my tripod.
I don't want to touch my camera when it fires because even the slightest camera shake becomes an issue when you print large. And I print large - 40X60. More about triggering the camera in the next blog.
Many times I have my camera setup and then need to wait for the sun to reach the horizon or for that wave to come in. You just cannot do that handheld.
Please don't laugh at me but my tripod is also very hand when I try to walk from rock to rock in a river. I spread its legs, plonk it down, make sure it is stable and then use it as a crutch to get to the next rock. I cannot tell you how many times it has saved me from falling into the water. My tripod is my friend.
So which tripods are better? There is no doubt that carbon fiber tripods are the best. They are also light. Another benefit is that they do not conduct the cold like aluminum tripods do. Believe me, you will thank me when you deal with your tripod in the cold. Personally I use a Really Right Stuff tripod - a beefy one. I know that they are expensive but they last. I have had mine for many years now and it just keeps working perfectly. Your selection of which tripod head to use will depend on what you shoot. For heavy and long lenses that need to track moving subjects a Gimbal head is the way to go. Since I shoot more landscapes I prefer a ball head. The one I use is an Arca Swiss Z1 Monoball. Like the tripod it has lasted me for many years and it is still as rock solid as the day I bought it. Please buy good support equipment. unstable support is worse than shooting handheld. Things need to be locked down tightly to get pin sharp images, especially as higher and higher mega pixel cameras come to market. Your tripod and tripod head are items that can last you a lifetime if you buy right.
The only issue I have with my tripod head is the knob to open and close the clamp. Don't get me wrong, it still works perfectly. I have just come to detest using the knob, especially when it is cold and I have gloves on. I much prefer a lever system to the knob system. So recently I got one of these:
This image is from Adorama.com
The bottom of this panning clamp fits to my normal Arca Swiss dove tail on my tripod head. Now I no longer have to deal with the knob on my tripod head and use this lever instead. As an added bonus I can level my camera using the ball head. This can be done in seconds. Trying to level your tripod using the tripod's legs is a nightmare. Then I can use this gadget to pan for panoramic images. I bought mine used for half price. Once again, Really Right Stuff's gear is some of the very best there is. If I were to start over I would get a ball head with this kind of panning base and lever clamp built in from the get go. This will save on cost and weight. Both Really Right Stuff and Arca Swiss have them now. By the way, the reasons why I went with the Arca Swiss rather than the Really Right Stuff ball head was because of price and maximum load weight allowance (which convinced me of its stability). After many years of use I have not regretted my choice.
Another thing that will greatly enhance the stability and sturdiness of your tripod is to fit it with spikes. I press my tripod into the ground with the spikes. It makes the tripod as solid as a rock. It may help prevent your tripod from being blown over by strong wind. This really does make a difference to the sharpness of you images.
This image is from Amazon.com
These are cheap and I highly recommend them. Just don't use them indoors as they can damage your flooring. I realize that a good tripod and head are expensive, but remember, in all likelihood, if you buy right, you only have to buy once and never again (baring some unforeseen circumstance). A tripod and good head are indispensable for my style of shooting. That may not be true for you, depending on what and where you shoot and how far you have to walk to get there.
]]>In part I we will talk about cameras, lenses, and filters. In part II I will talk about tripods and tripod heads. Part III will talk about other accessories. Part IV will cover photo editing software.
All the top camera manufacturers have excellent gear. So I will not go into which brand is this or that. One thing that seems quite clear is that mirrorless cameras are the future while DSLRs are dying out, fast. Choose the model that fits what you shoot. Certain models are better for sports/action/wildlife while others are better for landscape/portraits and so forth. If you can afford them, some manufacturers have a model that is great at everything, but be prepared to cash out your pension fund. Before you buy a camera look into which lenses are available. You are not just buying a camera, you are buying into a system and the system as a whole is important.
For landscape photography I primarily use a 16-35mm, a 24-105mm, and a 70-200mm. Some purists may scoff at me because I use zoom lenses rather than primes. My rebuttal is simple:
The top zoom lenses today are extremely good. Yes, I know that people have been saying this for a long time, but this time it is really true. There are manufacturing techniques that can produce extreme aspherical lenses from high quality glass that was just not possible before. Just look at MFT charts and you will see that the top zooms are so close to primes that one is spitting hairs to determine the difference.
Zooming with your feet (moving closer or further away) is not the answer. Changing positions are simply not always possible, lest you want to fall off a cliff, for example. Secondly, changing positions alters the composition. Moving always seems to introduce an unwanted element into the image. Something always seems to be in the way.
I don't want to be changing lenses all the time. During safaris there is always dust that gets onto your sensor. Near water spray the risk is the same. Landscape photographers shoot when the weather is not playing nice with your gear. Zooms promise me more versatility and and less lens changes.
For wildlife photography I use two bodies. One is fitted with the 70-200mm while the other has the 200-600mm on. Personally I shoot with Sony and I just love my 200-600mm.
Please do not use UV or other so called protective filters. Use your lens cap for protection, it works better. There is also no need for graduated neutral density filters. Just bracket and blend in your editing software. So which filters do I use? I only use two kinds of filters, a polarizer and neutral density filters (which I use rarely).
That is it. That is all I use as far as cameras, lenses, and filters are concerned.
]]>If you are serious about day-time lightning photography, get yourself a lightning trigger. The one that I believe to be the best is the one from Stepping Stones (https://lightningtrigger.com/). I am not sponsored or affiliated with them in any way, in fact, they don't even know who I am (other than buying mine from them). Let's get into the best camera settings:
Pre-focus and then set your camera/lens on manual focus. Shoot in manual mode with a shutter speed at between 1/4 and 1/20th of a second. Keep your ISO as low as possible. Pick an aperture to balance your exposure. Feel welcome to play with either your ISO or your aperture to get the right exposure because your shutter speed is the most important setting. If you are at the lowest ISO and a small aperture and your image is still over exposed then use a mild Neutral Density Filter (as mild as possible to get the exposure right).
A photo of lightning in the sky will rarely be as interesting as one with something in the foreground. A foreground will add scale and interest.
This image was taken around sunset or just thereafter. Is this not a much better image than one with just a bolt in the clouds? Make sure the know the weather patterns of your location. You need to know where the storms come from and how they move. Then go scouting long before the storms come. Find location that will work. The best locations are often the one with an open view to lots of sky.
Place your camera and trigger on a sturdy tripod. Anchor it into the ground so that the wind cannot blow it over. Protect your camera and trigger from the rain. Get everything ready and started before the storm is close or dangerous. Then go and wait in a safe place and retrieve your gear later. Be ready to be amazed with possible nice images.
]]>
As you can see, the light levels are very low. My Sony 200-600mm lens is already set to F.6.3; the largest aperture at 600mm which allows the most possible light to enter the camera (for this lens). Image stabilization helps to prevent camera shake but does nothing regarding the moving birds. A high shutter speed with low light and lens already wide open only leaves the photographer with one last option. Jack the ISO high. If you don't do this your image will be too dark.
High ISO leads to noise. Oh' I hate noise! But what can we do about it? Firstly, rather get the shot with noise than bringing down the ISO as that will bring down your shutter speed which in turn will lead to out of focus images. Noise will always be preferred above out of focus images. Lucky, there has been great progress made by image editing software using AI technology to get rid of noise. Of late I tried out the offering from DXO called "Deep Prime." The program was very impressive at dealing with noise.
In the past, I have hated the result gained by noise reduction software almost as much as the noise itself. They used to wipe out all detail (okay, almost all) and leave you with a mushy, paintery mess devoid of the detail that should be there. Deep Prime still leaves detail where detail should be. I am definitely adding this software to my toolkit. There are other options too, such as the offerings from Topaz Labs and On1. Now we can be less afraid of high ISO images and focus on getting the images we want to get. This is a good day.
]]>
The light is not good and hence this image is not that great. Nevertheless, what lessons can we learn about composition? When we get to this scene the first thing that drew my attention was the mountain peak and the color of the trees beneath it. So that is our starting point. We now start walking around looking for something in the foreground to put with it, to create interest, depth, and balance. The Virgin river is obviously a strong candidate to be my foreground interest but it could also be something else.
So I went with the river. Now that we have our foreground we walk around a bit more to place the objects where we want them. By walk around we can change the placement of objects in relation to each other. The mountain peak is placed where the top third line and left third line intersect because this is a strong compositional place. If you don't know what these third lines refer to, please search my blogs for the "rule of thirds."
I now walk, watching how the river in relation to the mountain peak changes position until the curve in the river points to the mountain peak. We also move further away or closer to the river so that everything harmoniously work together. Notice the curved line in the bottom right corner as it too curves towards the mountain peak. This creates balance. The river is a lead-in line that creates depth and interest.
Make sure that everything in your images work together to create interest, depth, and balance.
]]>
Here we have a wet rock-race. The reflection from the sky killed this image. In addition to the rock-face we also have water reflecting the sky. So you might say, well the water looks really good and the rock-face is not that bad. Well, that is because I used a polarizer. Without a polarizer you would have thrown this image away. The polarizer did a fantastic job at minimizing the reflections.
Polarizers also help to minimize the sheen on leaves. Thus in turn helps to saturate the color of the leaves. Polarizers work wonders in forests and in scenes like this. Just remember not to include the sky in the image if you are combing a polarizer with a wide or ultra-wide angle lens.
Please do yourself a favor and buy a very good polarizer. It makes no sense to use an expensive lens with a cheap filter in front. Your lens can never be any better than the filter you attach to it as that filter determines the quality of light that your lens sees. Personally I prefer Scotts Glass filters in brass rings. Please do yourself an even bigger favor and never buy any screw-on filter of any kind that is not in a brass ring. Other rings will stick to your lenses and they can be a nightmare to get off. This is true especially of polarizer filters as the front element rotates thereby minimizing the grip you can get on it to remove it from your lens. You just don't have this problem with brass filters. Struggling out in the field to get a filter off of the lens when wearing gloves is a recipe to drop a lens.
Be out in nature more and enjoy your photography.
]]>
My camera was mounted to a tripod. I waited for the birds to get close to where I wanted them in the frame and then fired away. The camera was set on high frame rate shooting (in my case 10 frames per second). You take a burst of images and then wait for the next flurry of birds to come flying by. With some luck and many repeated tries I got this bird nicely positioned within the moon's outline.
Since my camera is stationary I have the optical stabilization turned off. The shutter speed is above 1/1000th of a second to get sharp, in-focus birds. As with all movement, leave more space in front of the birds than behind them. They need space to fly into or else they will make the viewer's eyes want to exit the photo with the first bird.
Light levels were already low, but I like the atmosphere created by the last rays of the sun on the birds, as weak as it is. The low light levels did cause me problems as I was perched on a viewing deck. There were many people out coming to see these birds. Much foot-traffic on a viewing deck is a nightmare for photographers. The viewing deck vibrates as people move around. To eliminate camera blur with a 600mm lens attached requires a fast shutter speed. Low light levels combined with fast shutter speeds only means one thing, high ISO. As a photographer you need to do what you need to do to get the shot, even if you have to deal with noise afterwards.
Go out there and enjoy nature while you take a few images.
]]>
It was a wonderful experience spending two days with these birds. The noise is something to experience when they all come in to land or when they get ready to take off. During the day they spend their time feeding in the fields around the Platt river. At sunset they come land in the shallow river to overnight there. At sunrise they take off again.
They are tricky to photograph as they don't allow you close and it is illegal to approach them. The weather did not cooperate either. There just was not enough light. A long lens is your friend here. That means using a fast shutter speed to prevent motion blur caused by camera movement. You also want to turn on your image stabilization. Choose mode 2, the mode that cancels out movement other than panning; you want to be able to pan with the birds for some images. To get enough light in, you will want to use your largest aperture. This image was taken from my tripod.
I did not have much time to prepare for this shoot (with my move and all). In preparation for next year I am now tasked with learning the behavior patterns of these birds. The better you know your subject the better you are able to anticipate their next move which will make you a better photographer. With approximately 600,000 birds clustered together there is chaos. Isolating birds are near impossible. I plan to book space in a blind for next year.
Good photography usually is a result of good planning and preparation.
]]>In winter and spring the water is very cold. In the summer the water level can be higher and the current stronger. In the fall the river is the friendliest, but the number of people is still high for photography. The river plays an important role as much of the time you are hiking in the river.
The second challenge is presented by the round, lose river rocks you walk on. Where there are little rapids in the water you can't see the river bed. So walking in water and stepping on lose, round river rocks makes one prone to fall. Falling into the water with expensive photography gear is no laughing matter. I almost fell while my camera was out and unprotected. My wife did fall.
The third problem is that it can be windy and cold. Walking upstream can be a workout but then there are sections were you are out of the water. Then you get cold and then you get too hot. Dealing with layers is not so easy given the gear you wear. As with any hike you need to hydrate yourself. But that presents another problem. Were do you relieve yourself? Did I mention that there are people all over the place?
Wearing the right gear is important so as not to be miserable. The right shoes give you grip and keep your warm. The right dry suite pants keeps you dry and warm. A waterproof backpack protects your gear. Walking sticks prevent you from falling (hopefully). Always check the weather as flash floods can come out of nowhere and kill you. Be safe.
Enjoy your hike.
Please note that we have already roughly set the black point and white point of this image in Adobe Camera Raw (Raw developer software). Here is what I want you to notice about this image, the cliff face on the far left is brighter than the center of the image. The viewer's eyes will always be pulled to this brighter part. The cliff face at the center of the image is darkish compared to the rest of the image. The viewer's eyes will not naturally want to spend much time there. This can typically not be fixed with global adjustments. Now let's look at the finished file:
The lighter part of the far left cliff face has been darkened down. The center of the image has been lightened. Quickly alternate looking at the raw file then the finished file a few times. You should notice that the raw files has you looking at the edges of the image while the finished file has your view pulled into the center. So how do we edit an image to darken one part while lightening another part?
Once I have completed my global adjustments I go back into the raw developer (Adobe Camera Raw). I select the brush tool. Now simply set your exposure lower, pull back your highlights and set your shadows a bit darker. Paint over the left part of the bright cliff face. Also paint over the right side. Now create a new brush with the exposure and shadows up. Also add some contrast. When you increase exposure it comes at the cost of contrast, so we need to restore that loss by adding more contrast. Paint over the center parts. This is the secret source that directs the viewer to where you want them to look. All we are doing is changing the exposure and dodging and burning the highlights and shadows. This is exactly what would have happened in a darkroom in the age of film. No funny stuff. Even the purist should approve. Lastly, set your black point and white point again because those values have changed with your adjustments.
What do you think?
]]>Either way, this is not my topic today. Rather, I want to address the topic of how to get people-free images when the landscape is littered with people everywhere. What are we as photographers to do? Getting upset and feeling frustrated are normal responses but when we think about it, what makes us so special to want the place to ourselves? Why would these people not have the same right to enjoy the views? With that settled, let's get back to how to get people-free images.
Firstly, I simply asked people behind me to please kindly wait for 20 seconds while I am exposing the image. This worked very well and all the people complied with my request. However effective this may be it does not solve the problem of people further away, those already out there in the image. This image had no less than seven people in the image. Just to the left of this frame was the group that would stay in place for 30+ minutes. At times we may have to reframe our composition if there is no other way to eliminate the people from the scene. If people are ruining an image and just staying there, there is nothing much we can do other than recomposing and kissing that wonderful composition good buy. Waiting for them to leave is not always an option as, by the time they move the sun has set, the light is gone, the cloud has moved, etc. If people are on the move there is a great technique that works wonderfully to eliminate people from the scene.
Take two images 10 to 20 seconds after each other. Make sure that your expose values are kept the same between the two images (shoot in manual). Now bring the two images into your editing software as two layers, one image on top of the other one. Highlight both layers, click on edit, then on auto-align (I am using photoshop here, other software may be different). Now simply add a layer mask and paint over any person on the top layer. Voila, your image is perfect, without people.
The reason why this works so great and is so quick to edit is that the people in the scene are moving. In the second image shot 10 or 20 seconds later the person has walked to a different position. So when we paint over the person we are simply seeing the first image from the layer below. When that image was taken the person being erased was at a different place, hence the real imagery from the layer below replaces the person.
This is a fantastic method and takes but a few seconds to edit. Using the healing brush to get rid of people in our image works great when they are small in the image, but does not work well when the people consume a larger part of your image. This technique works regardless of the size of the person in our image as long as he or she is moving between the two images. If you want to be really safe consider taking three images to guarantee that one of the three images will be person-free at the spot where you need it to be.
So don't sweat about moving people, just use this method to solve the problem.
]]>
At ground level, the middle-ground boulders pierced into the sky making them the background. They would mesh with the mountain in the back and the mountain would lose any prominence. The sky did not have anything to offer the image so there was no point shooting up into it. So I decided to gain some elevation. I climbed up onto the boulders behind this image. The additional height created a scene with a clear foreground, middle-ground, and left the mountains with enough prominence to be the background.
Having a foreground, middle-ground, and background that is clearly distinct from each other helps to separate them from each other and creates depth. These elements almost act like stepping stones poking out of the water. They invite you to step into the scene. Without them, the water prevents the viewer from crossing it. So a foreground, middle-ground, and background act like stepping stones for our eyes, inviting us to step (visually) from one to the next and into the scene.
Yes, the light is not great which means that the image is not great. But it is not a terrible image either. What made it possible to get an "okay" image in poor light? The trusted formula did its work.
]]>
I got up just after 4 am and drove an hour to get here. The plan was to catch a sunrise and photograph backlit Chollas. A cloud bank decided that today was not going to be the day of the big one. Luckily for me, I was coming back here a week later so another opportunity was on offer. This is the nature of landscape photography. You don't always win. By the time the sun finally showed itself the light was harsh.
When fisher-people go out to fish unsuccessfully they may sit there and get no bites at all, not even a nibble (fish biting or nibbling). At other times, the fish mess with the fisher-folk by biting excitingly and nibbling often but without offering a catch. Nature messed with me on this day too. The sky offered something but I just was not able to catch a fish large enough to be proud of. The land part of the image just does not have enough in it to feed the family. Well, I would rather be teased by the sky than getting nothing at all.
You cannot stop going fishing just because you caught nothing this time as the promise of the big one lures you back. You cannot possibly expect to win every time. Just keep going back, being out there. One day may just be your lucky day but you will never see that lucky day if you are not out there when it happens. Don't give up, don't lose heart. Just keep trying, learning, and improving on the way.
]]>
Perhaps this image is not a good example as the middle-ground and background are not fully blurred. They are just softly out of focus. And so the line between genres becomes blurred (pun intended). I hope that you agree with me that this is still a landscape image. So why did I chose to focus it the way I did? Would you have wanted the middle-ground and background sharply focussed or does this work for you?
This is an ironic image in the sense I chose an image with sharp thorns to be soft (from the middle towards the back of the image). Yet, because of the sharp focus of the foreground, there is no doubt that these thorns are sharp. By the way, these Cholla thorns stick to everything. I left the middle to the background soft to create a more dreamy scene. I wanted the focus of the viewer to kind of stay with the thorns in the foreground yet I did not want to leave then stuck there. I still wanted to show the expanse and the number of Chollas. I still wanted the viewer to be drawn to the sun and the mountain in the background to a lesser degree. This tension creates a dreamy effect where the viewer's eyes move backwards and forwards all the time. I felt that the sun and the sky suited this kind of image.
So how do you create this effect? You can use a larger aperture but that would render the sun without the sun star. The best way to get this effect is to use a longer lens and to move closer to the foreground. Wide lenses by default have a deeper depth of field at the same aperture as what longer lenses have. Adjusting the distance between the foreground and the camera would change the depth of field. The closer we are to the foreground the more blurred the background would be and vice versa.
Therefore, use this to your advantage to create just the right amount of blur to suit the scene. I wanted to create a more dreamy image but I still wanted it to show the landscape. Hence the amount of blur in the image.
]]>The vegetation and direction of the little path worked together perfectly for the sun to more brightly illuminate the path which helped to really make it stand out. This path formed a very nice lead-in line in this otherwise chaotic scene.
My goal was to have the path take the viewer to the sun. I balanced the sun with the Cholla in the right foreground. You will notice that all my Cholla images were taken shooting straight into the sun. For a topic such as Chollas, this is important because backlighting suits these thorny friends very well and produces rim lights around them. This rim light is not only interesting but makes these plants pop out from the background. They just come to life in low angled backlight.
Once again, watch the edge of the frame to exclude any bright objects which can be difficult in a garden like this one. I liked the harsh-ish sun too as it helps to convey what a tough landscape this is, hot and dry. Our photographs tell stories. The better that story is portrayed the better the photograph, most of the time.
I would never have gotten this image if I did not explore the area. Part of landscape photography should be to walk around. Explore the landscape. Search for something different, something colorful, some pattern, some line, some interesting thing. I say this all the time, the difference between a good landscape image and a great one of the same location, in the same light, and taken at around the same time is what was gained by exploring. Exploration helps you to adds that something special. It helps you to nail the composition. Never be satisfied with what you have. Get your shot then explore the area for a better one, and repeat the process. Just explore.
]]>
A higher elevation also helps to minimize a boring sky. The lower down we shoot from the more sky is included unless cut off by high rising mountains. Images taken from a high elevation shooting downwards minimizes the importance of the sky. Such images enable the viewer to see far into the distance. It shows the vast scale of the landscape.
Many times such images do not require a strong foreground (that which is close, almost in reach). In fact, they often don't have what would traditionally be considered a foreground. People like such views so much that they are willing to hike up mountains just to see the view. A house built high up always makes visitors stare at the view. The same is true of images taken from a high elevation.
The image above was not taken from a high elevation, I was just elevated above tree level. However, it still has that elevated look that many like to stare at. So let's talk about what I tried to create here.
Even though I had the option to move to the rocks in front of me thus having no foreground, I opted to stay back to include them. I like for such images to have a base. A base provides a foreground which in turn provides even more depth. Foregrounds help to give a sense of scale. It looks more like a photographer's image than a drone-captured image. I also used the foreground rocks on the right to balance the sun, visually.
Regardless of having a foreground or not, I highly recommend shooting from higher elevations. Go out there and climb a few rocks and please stay safe. Remember, if you are carrying heavy gear on your back it changes your center point of gravity and can throw you off balance when you lean forwards or to the side.
]]>So we face a trade-off. Either we have a nice sky with a dark land or the reverse. Graduated neutral density filters are not always the answer unless the horizon is reasonably flat. The brightest part of the sky in this image is rather low down and close to the rocky mount. There is no way a filter can darken that part of the sky without also darkening the mount, which never looks natural or pleasing.
The best solution is to shoot two images and blend them later. It is really important to expose the sky properly. But what is a proper exposure for a sky such as this? I prefer to under-expose such scenes a bit, yes deliberately. It boosts the color and when I set the white point it pumps the contrast making the clouds pop and stand out from the background.
Even with a nice sky, still, pay attention to the composition of the land. I am using the footpath to lead to the brightest part of the sky. One is always tempted to boost the darks when blending multiple exposures. Don't fall into that trap. The sun is gone, so the foreground should stay darkish. For an image like this two exposures is typically enough. Now, you might look at this image and say, "the dynamic range in this image is not a problem for one image to handle, why blend two exposures." When someone says that your blending is believable. You have done a good job. The idea is never to create something that looks impossible (at least not for my style of landscape photography). If you are new to photography (welcome), please bear in mind that this scene in reality did not look like this to the camera (the human eye sees this scene as it is shown here but not the camera). Given how the sky looks in this image, reality would have had the foreground much darker. Or looking at the foreground, reality would have had the sky much brighter. It is the blending that makes it look as if it is one exposure. That is what we want to achieve.
The next time you face a scene such as this. Try shooting two exposures and leave the sky's exposure just a little under-exposed.
]]>
There are just too many of these Chollas in this Cholla garden to play with. They extend for some distance in any direction. How do we deal with a scene such as this when there are just too many Chollas? This is really a problem and it is not easy to deal with the chaos of a sea full of plants. It took a long time to nail my compositions down. Here is how I approached the scene:
I spent quite some time just walking around (pre-dawn). I looked for places where the density of the plants is less. I tried to find natural paths that can be used as a lead-in line or even plants that can form a chain leading to the sun.
I gravitated towards taller Chollas to either photograph the sun through one of them or as in the picture above I tried to find two taller ones that can act as a frame on either end of the frame.
Placing two anchor points on either end of the frame acts as a border and helps the viewer not to stray further to the left or right.
I deliberately framed the image in such a way as to do my best not to have a brightly lit Cholla cut on the edge of the frame.
I did manage to find some sort of "path" due to the shadows and sun-lit parts on the ground.
I arrived early, quite sometime before sunrise because finding a composition at a scene where there is just too much of something takes time.
Part of advancing our photography skills is to go against the grain, against expectation, and to break the rules. BUT please only break the rules like a pro! Rules are there because they work. Don't go breaking something that works, unless breaking the rule works even better. Learn when to break the rules and when not to. Break them with a purpose and deliberately. We can almost look at this topic from the perspective of nicking something on the edge of the frame versus cutting it deliberately and more purposefully lower down.
Here is an example. Most photographers would have stepped to the right and gone with the footpath as the main actor. After all, the footpath is strong compositionally and leads beautifully into the image. It also makes some turns which is more dynamic than a straight line. However, I chose to break the rules. I introduced the plants as the main foreground element and downgraded the footpath to the second fiddle.
What do you think? Are the plants a distraction or do they enhance the composition? To me, the image is much better taken this way than going only with the footpath. Here is why?
The plants create even more depth by showcasing the distance between the plants and the background.
They hold the viewer's attention for longer. The viewer looks at the plants and then later follows the footpath into the image. Without the plants, the viewer would have taken off into the picture straight away.
The plants create balance with the sun.
Moving to the right to eliminate the plants also changes the perspective of the footpath in relation to the sun. The path would then lead to the left of the sun even more, possibly even away from the sun.
So here is another picture take a little while later. I included the plants yet again rather than stepping a few steps forward to eliminate them.
This image still works well, but the strong sun is no longer there. The direction in which the footpath points is no longer that critical. Even so, without the plants on the left, this image will have a huge section on the bottom left as negative space. The plants play a vital role to eliminate the negative space. They add some visual weight to balance the image. One could argue that the photographer could have stepped to the right even more and had the footpath start on the left side of the image. However, in so doing we further separate where the path is leading from the brighter section of where the sun was, which still pulls the viewer.
Depending on the scene and if it makes sense after some analysis, go ahead, break the rules.
]]>
Let's hypothetically say that the brighter and nicer sky is found on the left side. The clouds to the right are nice but not as bright so the viewers' eyes will be drawn to the left continuously. What if I could not include more on the left of the image because the clouds on that side kind of stopped? I tried to bring some balance into the image by placing the tree on the right where it is. I shot from a low angle into the sky to include more of it but also to make the tree reach higher into the sky. That tree visually balances the brighter part of the sky.
We must always think about composition and balance. I can get so excited about the scene in front of me that I get too invested in a certain composition even if it is not the greatest composition because I have spent so much time on it. So I ask my wife what she thinks about the image and I change accordingly. If you are alone, just close your eyes, clear your mind and then look at the image in your viewfinder/screen. Does it still move you? Is it balanced? If not fix it or move on to another composition.
A strong sky that is one-sided has to be balanced with something at the other end of the frame. Since you cannot control what is where in the sky you will have to do it with the foreground. To give that foreground element more prominence and to make it stand out more, make it reach up onto the sky. Shoot from a low angle so as to stretch or enlarge it compared to the background.
]]>
So, which path did your eyes take when looking at this image? Were your eyes tempted to move to the total left or total right edge of the frame? Did your eyes circle back anywhere in the image? When I look at this image the sun draws my eyes since it is the brightest object to look at. Then my eyes stay between the highest peak on the left to the highest peak on the right, horizontally speaking. My eyes are not tempted to move to the left or the right beyond those two points. But why not?
Many landscape photographers use vignetting to move the viewers' eyes to the middle of the image and away from the edges of the frame. A vignette is where a photographer darkens the outside edge around the image thereby leaving the center of the image brighter. Our eyes always go to where it is brighter away from where it is darker. Just about all image editing software offers this feather. I never ever use it, never. Why not, you may ask?
Firstly, a round or oval vignette is a dead giveaway. Secondly, many photographers overdo it. If someone can see that you used a vignette, it is probably overdone. Thirdly, I believe that just slapping on a darker edge is not the best way of achieving the same effect. Lastly, I don't want to apply the effect equally everywhere around the edge. What if you already have a section on the edge with dark shadows? Making that section even darker can leave you with no detail. So here is what I do and advocate you do.
When we "developed" the raw image we set the black and white point (if you don't know what this is, just search my blog posts as I did write about that in the past). But then when we edit the image using our editing software and plugins these editing changes impact and move the black and white points. So before I am done with any image I take it back into the raw developer to reset the black and white points. While in the raw developer I select the brush tool. Rather than just lowering the exposure and painting in my vignette I deliberately fine-tune the brush settings to create a vignette that I believe is better than one simply created by lowering the exposure.
Yes, I do lower the exposure just a bit, but really just a bit. What I lower more are the highlight and white point sliders. We don't just want to darken everything, we want to lower primarily the lighter colors. Then with the brush set, I only paint the section that I want darker. I do not follow a round or oval pattern. I darken where the most brights are on the edge. Where it is already darker I leave untouched. Using this technique gives you more control and leaves your image with a more polished, natural effect.
]]>1. Look for secondary compositions. I always try to find two or three additional compositions. When the sun dips below the horizon there is still enough light to shoot for some time. That light fades fast, which does not leave enough time to find new compositions. With two or three more compositions already lined up (during the waiting time), I can move quickly and take those images thus converting a one image shoot into three or four images.
2. Look for future images. I spend some time looking long into the future. What if I could get the sun at this or that angle, months later? What if I could place the moon here or there. I start working on future possibilities because you have heard me say (often) that I go back to the same location over and over. Once I get home, I will open the Photographer's Ephemeris and work out when the sun and the moon will be where I need them to be in the scene (if at all).
3. I shoot. Yes, even in not-so-good light. Why? A number of years ago most cameras could only "see" 8 or 9 stops of dynamic range. But today's cameras can see 14 to 15 stops of dynamic range. Furthermore, today's HDR software is great. What this means is that we can get images that were just not possible (or nice) in the past. You can sometimes even shoot directly into the sun and include the sun in the frame in less than good light.
This is not a great image but it is not terribly bad either. I would much rather have this image than sit in the car and wait, doing nothing. You will be surprised to find out which images sell and which do not. I have given up predicting image sales. I have sold images like this and I have also not sold images that I thought were great and would sell well. Therefore, I don't want to lose any shooting opportunity by idly sitting waiting for time to go by and the light to change.
Now, this does not mean that I am willing to shoot horrible images due to mid-day harsh light. What I am referring to here is shooting starting perhaps an hour before that perfect moment. The light is already beginning to turn. The sun is already less harsh. The shadows are no longer pitch black. Just shoot and see what you get. I have found that in the process of so doing the creative juices start to flow. I start getting into my shooting mode. I start to see more images. On quite a few occasions I discovered better compositions that I had originally decided to use for "the" sunset image, thus changing my final grand attempt for the better.
In short, I very seldom just sit and wait. Get out there and practice our art.
]]>
This seems rather simple because a few steps to the left move the tree to the right in relation to the sun and a few steps to the right move the tree to the left. By changing my position I could literally move the sun exactly where I wanted it to be in relation to the tree, or should I say that I can move the tree in relation to the sun?
The problem is that we do this sort of scouting and planning when the sun is still higher in the sky. We line the tree up to where the sun is at that point in time (still higher in the sky). We draw a straight imaginary line down from the sun to the bottom of the bowing tree and set up our tripods at the right spot and we are set. Now all we need to do is to wait for the sun to set and we will get our shot, right? Wrong!
It is important to note that the sun does not drop down in a straight line, it drops in the shape of an arch instead. In the northern hemisphere that arch curves to the right when looking at the sun. In other words, the sun will end up to the right of its current position at sunset and not straight down from where it currently sits. The higher up the sun is the more to the right it is still going to travel before sunset. "Not a problem," you say, "I can obviously see where the sun is going and I can adjust my position during the last few seconds just before I take the shot."
First, please do not look straight into the sun with your naked, unprotected eyes. Looking at the sun through your DSLR is no better. You will damage your eyes. If you are using a mirrorless camera you can look into the viewfinder since it is a small TV screen and not reflected light from the sun. Either way, second, the sun will be blown out, the entire area surrounding the sun will be too bright to see any definition in or to pinpoint the sun's position in relation to the tree. So we close the aperture to darken the sun, but in so doing, everything else becomes so dark that you cannot see other things properly making composition difficult. The solution is to bracket. Shoot multiple images at different exposure levels. Then review them and pick one with the best balance between bright and dark areas. Then use that image as a reference to change your position. You might ask, "why take the shot, just look at the image in the viewfinder after you get the best balance between brightness and darkness?" I take the shot each time because if I first spend time to look if the sun is in the right place, realize that it is in the right place, and then decide to take the shot, the sun has already moved to a new place. I capture the shots because then I have them. If the sun was in the right position I have it. If not, I move the tripod and repeat. You will be surprised how much of a difference it makes to an image such as this if the sun is just a little to the left or to the right - it ruins the image. The second reason why I take the shots is that I am going to need a sequence of bracketed shots (most of the time when we are shooting directly into the sun). That "balanced" exposure still has clipped areas. If you need to change exposure to expose for the sun it is too late.
Here is how I bracket for sunsets. I always start my bracketing sequence exposed dark so that the sun is exposed right. Then I shoot the lighter ones. The reason I do it in this sequence is that the sun is moving and its position is critical to the composition. Therefore, my first shot is for the sun. Once I have that exposure I have a bit more time to get the lighter exposures because the trees and mountains are not moving and the lighter exposures are for the trees and mountains.
You will have to work quickly because you will be surprised by how fast the sun moves both to the right and down. You will also be surprised how much of a difference moving your tripod just a small bit will make to the relative position of the tree and the sun. This process needs to be repeated until you have nailed the composition at the right time and taken your images.
The moral of the story is that it is not that easy to predict the final position of the sun as it sets. Be ready and work quickly. Change your tripod position very slightly every time and repeat the process over and over until you get it right, hopefully at the right moment. May I challenge you to go and try positioning the sun at an exact point in your composition? You may just get a nice image out of it to boot.
]]>I went back to the same spot multiple times to photograph a tree. The idea was not to duplicate the same image during different conditions or seasons but rather to just capture different images of the same tree. All of the images were taken around sunset. By and large, the only object tying this series of images together is the lone tree.
Why not try a fun project like this?
Here are a few tips to help you make the best of these opportunities:
Timing can be everything. Wait for that big splash moment or for the water to start running back into the ocean. In this scene, I waited for a wave to run over the rock floor on the left.
Shutter speed is important. Watch your shutter speed as this is what you use to freeze the water splash in mid-air (fast shutter speed) or show the motion of the water running back (slow shutter speed). Play with your shutter speed until you get the effect you like. When you want water streaks you want a shutter speed that is slow enough to show the streaking but fast enough so that the water does not turn into silky milk without any definition.
Other than beach images or images that include more sky, the foreground is important. Make sure you find something of interest to place in the foreground.
If there are rocks that are exposed when the waves pull back but covered when the waves come in you can shoot with a very long shutter speed to create a cloudy, mysterious image, like this one below.
Do be careful of higher than usual waves. Watch your equipment. Constantly dry the front element of the lens. Put a filter on to protect your lens as it does not like saltwater.
Visit the ocean more and take some great images.
]]>There is just something magical about a LARGE print. They tend to draw people in. They have impact and punch. They command attention. As such I have always enjoyed large prints but never printed them myself due to the cost. However, this time around I decided to print a 30X45 (without a frame). When people saw this print they were very impressed. Multiple people wanted to buy it, without me even offering it for sale. This size print works very well above a couch in my office. I was in love with this print. This love did not last long because I decided to print a 40x60 and now anything smaller seems too small. Wow!
(Please forgive me, these images were quickly snapped with my cell phone.) Everybody who comes to my house stands in front of this print and just stares at it. This print gives me so much joy.
After I fell out of love with printing on paper, mounting, matting, and framing it, I just did not print for years. Then metal prints came out. The colors popped and they looked fabulous. However, they suffer from major reflection issues, so much so that it ruined the viewing experience. Their pricing is also expensive once you print large. I just printed four metal prints and quit printing. I never liked canvas prints because of the grain of the fabric. Their colors just seemed a bit muted to me. So on what is this print printed and what is it?
This print is from Xpozer. I am in love with printing! Here is why I love their technology and why I highly recommend these prints:
Print quality - This image looks great, even close up. There is no visible grain. The colors are true.
Zero reflections - Even when I tried to see reflections there are none to be found. I deliberately held it up to lights and large windows, yet there are no reflections. It is as if it is not a print and you are really standing in front of an open window looking at this scene.
Viewing angle - The print a viewable from almost 180 degrees with just about no degradation.
Shipping and transportation - This print comes in a triangular box. Gone are the days of expensive, heavy, and costly shipping crates. When I need to transport this print to my office or to an exhibition, it just rolls up in seconds.
Innovative frame - The framing system (behind the print) is ingenious. You assemble this print from unpacking it to ready to hang in one minute. Disassembly for transportation is just as quick and easy.
Service - One print had a few spots on it. Xpozer replaced it, done. When I ordered this large print my file size was too large. I emailed them and they sent me an upload link. I dealt with real people.
Lightweight - The printing material (it is thin, kind of a hybrid between paper and fabric without grain) and the framing system behind it are super light. You can hang it on just about anything.
If you want great-looking prints that are easy to deal with Xpozer is your answer. I highly recommend them.
P.S. This post is not sponsored in any way. I paid for my prints and receive no reward for posting this blog.
]]>
So how do we decide to go black and white? What makes for a good black and white image? The biggest lesson I can share with you is that black and white images only work well if you photograph what the name (black and white) suggests. In other words, there needs to be a lot of contrast that will make deep blacks and bright whites. Having just a gray image in the black and white medium is as dull as having a color image with no real color.
Post-processing is very important in black and white photography. We want to stretch the histogram so that both the bright side (right) and the dark side (left) are near the edges of the histogram. In fact, I have just a little of the black as true black. However, I leave no true white on any image. Rather, I pull pure white back a little so that there is detail in the white. This will make for nice prints.
So look out for contrasty scenes. I still shoot these scenes in full color. I prefer to convert the image to black and white in post-processing. Remember that composition is driven by contrast in black and white images. It takes a bit of practice but the photographer needs to start seeing the image in black and white. The visualization is important, for you need it in order to decide on your composition.
Oftentimes, high ISO images work well in black and white. For some reason, grain is not so offensive in black and white images as it is in color images. In color images, high ISO introduces noise which impacts color and introduces color artifacts. To me, noise is ugly (it may enhance certain kinds of images, but they are rare for me personally). When noisy color images are converted to black and white the color in the noise disappears and leave leaves only grain rather than color noise.
Take the challenge and experiment with some black and white images.
]]>Luminar started including portrait editing features in their software. The good news is that Luminar just released for sale their latest update - update 4. This update includes Bokeh AI, which instantly (almost) makes a 3d depth map, masks the person (automatically), and gives you the ability to change the bokeh in the background. The background can also be darkened or lightened. I have been on a webinar with Luminar where this was demonstrated, and it looks really good.
Combining all the portrait features now make for a compelling suite of tools. Luminar is also celebrating this new release with the best discount they have ever offered. With 40% off you can now get Luminar AI for just $47 (until August 4, 2021). Aurora HDR is also down to $59. In addition, you will get two bonus packs included for free.
To get these deals click here: Luminar You can buy the update 3 version now and get the update 4 update within the next few weeks.
P.S. I am an affiliate member of Luminar and get a small commission from sales. I personally use this software for every image I edit.
These images work well in good light, in soft light, or in fog.
Here are a few tips to help get the most from these scenes:
Use a longer lens. The first image's trees are not right next to each other. There are large gaps between them. Stepping back and using a longer lens gets rid of these gaps and makes the trees appear right next to each other.
Go back and reshoot the scene in different types of light. Look at the difference in mood between these two images.
Try to have the furthest part of the road as the brightest part of the road. This will help pull the viewer into the image.
Use a small aperture so that everything is in focus.
Watch out for wind and set the shutter speed to freeze the leaves and branches.
Enjoy tree-lined roads.
]]>
Which image do you prefer? One image was taken with a long shutter speed while the other was taken with a short-ish shutter speed. Because of the rotation of the earth, a long shutter speed shows the motion, hence the star trails of the first image. The short-ish shutter speeds leave the stars sharply in focus. So let's start there.
The wider field of view your lens has the faster shutter speed is needed to get the stars sharp. I am talking about getting your shot in one image rather than using stacking techniques. Try to keep your shutter speed at 30 seconds or below. Use your lens' fastest aperture. Jack up your ISO to get your exposure right.
For the long exposure (star trails) you can leave your shutter open for a long time. I mean a really long time, like half an hour or longer. If I recall correctly, this image was exposed for 50 minutes. But there is a problem. The camera's light meter does not work beyond 30 seconds. So how do you know that this image needed 50 minutes versus 20 minutes, for example?
Set the camera's shutter on 30 seconds. Now play with your ISO until you have the correct exposure. Since it is dark your ISO will be very high. Once you know what the correct exposure is we can now change how we get that exposure. Half your ISO but double your shutter speed. Keep doing that until you have a low ISO. You will have to double the shutter speed in your head because your camera does not have a measured setting beyond 30 seconds. Place your shutter speed in bulb mode. Use a remote shutter release so that you can lock it in the depressed position. Now use your watch or your phone's countdown to measure out the calculated time. See that was easy.
]]>
This image was taken outside in natural light during overcast conditions. I just held a black blanket behind the flower since the background was distracting. Even though we like to photograph flowers in this kind of light that does not mean that we can't shoot flowers and plant in other kinds of light. What about shooting when the sun is not diffused?
This image was taken just after sunrise. Once again, this image was taken outside with only natural light. When the sun is out make sure you shoot while the light is still good before it gets harsh. The low angle of the sun helps to make the leaves 3D rather than flat. Side lighting is always better to shoot in for this kind of image than frontal light. But what about shooting when the sun is already harsh?
This image was taken in the brutally harsh sun. However, rather than allowing the sun to wash out the fine details, this image was taken from underneath with the sun on the other side of the leave. I am shooting right into the sun - through the leaf. This brings out the veins and color. So the point of today's blog is that you can get reasonable images in almost any light. Just think about how to best use the light. Change your angle or position. Be creative.
]]>The city where I live now is in a flat valley. There is nothing to photograph (for a landscape photographer). Many nights I look at the brilliantly lit sky in frustration because there is nothing in the foreground to photograph with it. So the question begs, what do you shoot when there is nothing to shoot? You will remember from previous blogs that I advocate shrinking your world when you find yourself in such situations. Photograph smaller things.
Stuff like this is everywhere. Go to antique stores or stores that have old things on display. Shoot only parts of what you see. When you isolate things the background area is much smaller so you can hold a blanket or something behind what you are photographing. Drive through the neighborhood and look for beautiful gardens. Remember to ask for permission before you photograph.
Visit the cemetary.
It does not matter where you live, find small things to photograph. Develop a list of go-to places so that you are ready. Note which places need what kind of light. For example, gardens photograph best on overcast days, especially just after rain. You may not be the world's best landscape photographer if you only shoot at a photographically boring city, but you can get great imagery no matter where you live. You could even photograph still life images indoors. Just be creative.
With being out there I mean regularly and going to the same places, over and over again. I have been on this beach more times than I can remember. The reason I go there is not because of the beach. As you can see, it is just a beach. There is normally nothing about this beach that would get a photographer excited. There are no rock formations or logs, or anything of interest. In fact, of all the times I have visited this beach, this was the only time it was like you see it here. But that is the point. Other than this time I have never seen water on this beach. Going over and over resulted in this image and this experience.
So you might ask me why I frequent this beach when it has nothing to offer the photographer? I go purely because of the experience, to visit friends who live here. But, my camera is always with me.
The point of all of this is to show you that even the most ordinary beach (any place) can serve up something different and beautiful once in a blue moon when conditions work out. Now, of course, don't waste your time going back forever if the place has nothing to offer unless it is for other reasons like visiting friends. Go back to places that have something to offer. Just put yourself out there. Go when conditions are predicted to produce something special. If conditions can turn a totally boring beach into this then imagine what it can do at a more promising destination.
Do more photography and have more experiences.
]]>
Since I have written a previous blog on the slot canyons I am not going to talk about managing the experience and the photography here. When the crowds overwhelm the area it seems as though the only safe direction to shoot into is straight up. Try to avoid including the sky as the dynamic range will most certainly exceed what your camera can handle. You will either blow out the sky or have black sandstone formations.
This is a place to capture shapes, texture, and color. When shooting up into layers of rock it is difficult to create depth. The layers seem to be right on top of each other. We don't want our viewers wondering what on earth they are looking at. Another issue is not having any central focus of attention. We don't want the viewer's gaze to have to keep on searching unsuccessfully for an anchor point to come to rest at. So how do we create a bit of depth? How do we find a central focus point when it is just all rock? How do we capture the best shapes and textures?
We use light and darkness. You will remember from previous blogs that our eyes always go to lighter parts of the image and do not spend much time in the dark areas of the image. We can use that to lead the viewer. What we need is contrast, lots of it. We need dark areas and light areas. Ideally, we want the dark areas around the edges and bottom of the image and the lighter areas in the middle areas of the image. This draws the viewer into the image (depth). This keeps the viewer from wandering to the edges and out of the frame.
Also, understand that texture disappears with diffused light and lessens with light shining directly head-on. The best light for texture is light from a low angle or sidelight. Shapes also pop out nicely with directional light and diminish with diffusion and direct head-on light. Therefore, pick the angle you shoot at carefully to maximize texture and shapes.
Combining light and darkness with directional sidelight we can now pick out our compositions to create images that keep the viewer looking into the image for as long as possible.
]]>
In this Yosemite scene, El Capitan has a lot of visual weight. To bring balance to this image we need to have something strong in the foreground. I deliberately walked around looking at options and ultimately decided on the river grasses. In this case, the mountain is mostly in the center of the image from left to right. So I place the tufts of river grasses there too. The rule of thirds (vertical lines) is ignored. I just want to balance the scene.
Here are a few tips to help you deal with foreground-background balance:
You can regulate the visual weight of the foreground object by moving closer to it or further away from it. The closer you are to the foreground element the more it weighs.
You can also regulate the visual weight of the foreground object by using brightness to give more or to lessen its prominence. In this case, the foreground was in deep shade which rendered the tufts of river grasses very dark which lessened their prominence which lessens their visual weight. I brightened them considerably in post-processing. Yet, they need to look natural; people should generally not be able to notice what we did in post-processing without seeing the file we started out with.
Ultra-wide-angle lenses distort objects. The closer an ultra-wide-angle lens is to something the more it distorts the object by enlarging it in relation to the background. By using an ultra-wide-angle lens and going really close to foreground objects you can make small objects look big in relation to the background. You can use this technique to "enlarge" your foreground object in relation to the background and thereby balancing the foreground with the background at will.
Arrive well before go time. It is too late to search for and find foreground interest when the light is at its most beautiful and disappearing in a minute or two. Use your early arrival to scout for foreground elements to use. Plan and get a few compositions ready so that when go time comes you are ready.
As photographers, we can get overwhelmed by the beautiful scene and light in front of us that we just want to capture it quickly. Stop and think about your composition and the balance of the image.
]]>
The sun was getting ready to set. The light was still strong and lighting up the haze. In this particular image, I worked on the haze a bit. Firstly, I removed the haze from the bottom front section of the image. I want contrast and clarity there. Secondly, I added even a bit more haze to the top back section to enhance the haze already there. Creating areas of no haze and combining it with another area of haze can be very pleasing. Forget about all or nothing approaches. Part clear and part hazy images work well.
When conditions do not look favorable don't give up. Start by asking yourself, what can be made of this image in post? Is the haze stronger in some areas and weaker in others? Can I weaken or totally remove the weaker haze while strengthening the stronger haze?
Here are some tips for working with haze in post-processing:
Remember that the dehaze slider can also go the other way to add haze.
Play with the color temperature of the haze section only. If the sun is warm, then make the added haze warm. You may even want to warm up all the haze (natural occurring and added haze). When a colder mood is called for by the image then cool the haze down.
Haze typically gets stronger further away from us. So, remove the haze closer to you.
Give the haze a bit of a glow.
If the light is strong behind the haze you may want to add a bit of Orton effect (see one of my previous blogs).
Now, don't allow haze to scare you off. Work with it and see if you can use it to create a nice image.
]]>This was my first ever visit to North Lake which was made famous by the desktop image on Apple computers. What was I to do? How was I going to get an image without all the other photographers in them? How do you get rid of people in your view? After all, I literally had people's tripod legs intertwined with mine. Even though I got there early to reserve my spot, what are you going to do when another photographer comes and asks nicely for a spot?
Here are a few tips to deal with photographic crowds:
Arrive early, before everyone else. Arrive early even if you have to stand in the cold and dark for an hour or two waiting for the sun to appear.
Pick your spot carefully, anticipating crowds. Make sure others cannot get into your view, if possible. You can see in the images above that I positioned myself at the farthest point possible. The reeds to the left prevent others from getting into my field of view.
The best spot in crowded situations may not always be the best spot for the best composition. You may have to compromise here. The best spot is the one that gives you a chance to get an image without the crowds. What would you chose, the best-composed image with forty other photographers in it or the fourth-best composition free of other people? If you want the best composition without the people ... (read the third point down)
Stay at your spot. They say possession is nine-tenths of the law. Don't wander off as someone else will be sure to take your spot or encroach too much into your space.
You may have to use a longer lens to narrow your field of view down to eliminate people from your view.
If there are just too many people and the landscape does not make it possible to place yourself in the right spot you may want to consider going back when the weather is harsh or cold. That usually rules out the most photographers leaving you with more manageable crowds, if any.
You may want to consider avoiding the iconic shots. Oftentimes, there are great images to be had just a hundred yards this way or that way. Spend the harsh light hours of the day scouting around to find other compositions.
Be alert. Watch out for people walking into your image while you are making an exposure. Most people don't mind being asked to wait for 20 seconds, but you have to stop them before they walk into your image because once they reach their spot it becomes much more difficult to get them to move.
Dealing with these crowds not only poses photographic problems but relational ones too. There will always be the jerk who does not care about anybody else and ruins other people's shots and experience. Expect them. At times you have to mix a bit of firmness with your kindness. Most photographers though are nice people. Work together. Take turns. Remember, all of you have the same goal; to get that winning image. Use that common goal to negotiate the situation. Be nice and respectful. Share nature.
Enjoy your photography.
]]>
It just works this way. Placing it elsewhere would have created an imbalance. I could not have moved to the left for fear of falling to death down a cliff. There was no point in moving to the right as the cloud action in the background dictated my framing. Yet, I am not advocating that we break the rules simply because we had no other viable choice. The image still needs to stand strong on its own merit. Nobody is going to pay attention to a poor image simply because an attached note says, "sorry, I had no other options but to shoot it from here."
So what makes this image work in the face of breaking the rules? The clouds dictate this image. That is where the action is in terms of both color and light. I placed the top of the tree trunk right in the middle of the break in the clouds. This is a case where the sum of the parts is more than the parts alone. It just works when used together like this.
Don't be afraid of breaking the rules. Sometimes these can be striking images.
]]>
Okay, please stop looking at this image. Yes, I am asking you to do what I just told you we never want to do. Close your eyes. Now before opening your eyes please pay attention to where your eyes go when you look at this image. Ready? Okay, open your eyes, paying attention to where your eyes go.
If you are normal you will find that this image draws your eyes deep into the image. Your eyes hardly looked at the sides of the image. If you glanced at the darker areas of the image your eyes did not stay there for long and quickly returned to the lighter parts of the image. This is what I am talking about. Light can be used to draw the eyes into the image.
Photographers have for years slightly darkened the edges around the image to create the phenomenon of drawing the viewer into the image. Be careful not to overdo it. If someone can quickly tell that you used a vignette (darker edges) it is too strong. In this image above, the light was naturally this way due to a clearing in the forest beyond the image.
Control the light and you control the viewer's eyes. Use that power to draw your viewers into your images.
]]>Focus on the closest thing to the lens and take an image. Then focus just a bit further into the image and take another image. Repeat the process a few times. But how many times should you repeat the process? Macro photography may require a large number of images as the depth of field can be razor-thin in this genre of photography. For landscape photography, the number of images needed to produce a pin-sharp image from back to front depends on the focal length of the lens in use. Wide-angle lenses naturally have more depth of field at the same aperture than a telephoto lens. Therefore, wide-angle lenses require less images than telephoto images. With my 16mm to 35mm lens, used at the short end, I find that three or four images are enough. Just remember that you will need more images with longer lenses.
Shoot in manual and in raw. We want to shoot in manual mode so that the exposure does not change between the images. We shoot in raw so that we can make the ISO uniform during post-processing. In post, we will want to ensure that chromatic aberrations are removed and that lens profiles are applied. Now just merge the images. There are many tutorials out on how to do this so I will not cover that here. Once merged I take the image back into Camera Raw to start working on it.
You can see that my lens is right up against these rocks. Yet, they are sharp, so is the background. I used three or four focus stacked images to produce this final image. It is the only way to make sure that everything in the image is in focus.
Watch out for moving objects, especially close to the lens. Blending images where movement took place is a nightmare. If there is moving such as water flowing, make sure, if possible, that all the movement is sharp in one shot to make blending easier. With a wide-angle lens movement in the scene beyond a certain distance is not a problem provided your shutter speed is fast enough to freeze the action. Focus stacking with wide-angle lenses really only concerns itself with the first third of the distance into the image. The rest can easily be captured sharply with one exposure if a small aperture is used.
Use a tripod. Merging images where the camera moved in between shots is a problem you don't want to face. I also take the images in manual focus mode. The less fiddling you need to do in between images to adjust the focus the better. Happy focus stacking. Get those images sharp front to back.
]]>
Some parts of this image are in shadow while light falls on other parts of the image. At times the photographer just needs to wait for the sun or the clouds to move so that the right parts of the image are in shadow or lit up. Patience is your friend. Sometimes, as the time when I took this image, nature plays along but not fully. The light fell naturally where there is light and the shadows were darker than where there is light. However, the light value difference or dynamic range between the lit-up areas and the darker areas was not as much as you can see in this final image.
Typically, when we have an image with lit-up areas and shadow areas we rejoice because then we have a dynamic image. They are interesting. In the case of this image, I did a bit of work in post-editing to increase the dynamic range. In Adobe Camera Raw I used a brush to paint in more light here and darken parts there. I did not create anything fake as the image was naturally that way. I simply lightened the already lit-up parts more and darkened the already darker parts more.
Amateurs mostly do global adjustments to their images (adjustments that affect the entire image). Pros do local adjustments to affect different areas differently in addition to some global adjustments (such as setting the black point and white point). This livens up the image and directs the viewer's eyes to where the photographer wants the viewer to go.
As we saw a few weeks ago, balance is important. I tried to create some balance in this image by off-setting the mountains on the left with the three tall trees on the right. Putting it all together gives us a nice image.
]]>
The log on the right is pointing out into the image. Close to the end of the log, there is a branch that goes up. If that branch meets or goes into the treeline on the other side of the lake it will be difficult to judge distance or to see where that branch belongs on the other side. It is very important to always watch that two separate items don't merge. Images with such mergers seem busy and confusing.
Leaving a bit of distance between such elements in the scene creates space, separation, and distance. You can see that I also left a gap between the tall tree on the left and its shadow which gets close to the rock on the left of the line of rocks. These are small things but they make a big difference. They make an image look clean and neat.
So how do we control these gaps? We can't move the log or change the size of the lake. You may remember from last week that I mentioned that we can control the relative position between elements in the scene by changing our position. These gaps are controlled by moving up or down. The lower angle we shoot from the smaller the distance between the line of rocks and the waterline at the base of the mountain. The higher we go the more we increase this distance/space. By moving up or down we can fully control whether these elements touch each other or not.
Before you trigger your shutter have another look to make sure that each element meant to be separate is in fact separate and not touching.
]]>
The conditions were horrible. This image was taken amidst some of the worst wildfires in California's history. The air quality reached dangerous levels. Smoke filled the air. Rather than giving up and deeming the conditions not suitable for photography we simply look for opportunities to use the smoke to add atmosphere.
Atmosphere adds mood to an image. In landscape photography photographers often use the "dehaze" slider to get rid of haze. In this image, I actually moved that slider in the opposite direction and painted the effect to emphasize the atmosphere. Use it sparingly. The mountains in the distance now have just a bit of mystery and atmosphere. I think it adds to the image.
Composition will always stay important. Look for lead in lines or strong foreground elements. Thank about where you place what and remember that you can move things in relation to other things in your images simply by changing your position. The next time conditions do not meet your facny don't give up, work with what you have.
]]>
That lone tree on the left is very important to the balance of this image. The flying birds also help. Without them, this image is not balanced as too much weight is on the right of the image. Not only does size and distance impact the visual weight of an element in our images but so does darkness and brightness. Black weighs more visually than white. Therefore smaller dark areas can bring balance to larger white areas. Similarly, bright colors weigh more than dull colors.
Keeping all of this in mind we can place elements in our photographs to bring about a balanced scene. At times we need to move objects to the right position to create the needed balance. No, I am not talking about moving objects around in Photoshop. The photographer can move his or her position which in turn rearranges the elements in the scene. When we move around, closer elements' position change much more relative to elements far away. Do an experiment right now. Look at your computer screen and notice the position of an object on the other side of the room, such as a light switch or a door, or a piece of furniture. Now, move your head left and then right while noticing how much your computer screen's position move in relation to the other object you are also keeping an eye on.
By walking to the left or the to the right the photographer can literally move the position of that tree in the foreground relative to the mountain. So don't just plonk down your tripod and shoot right where you are at. Think where in the image you would like that tree to be to bring balance to the image. Then move the tree by taking up a position that has the tree where you want it to be. The closer you are to the tree the more it will move relative to your walking around. We don't only have the ability to move the tree to the left or to the right but we can also change the perspective of the tree vertically. The closer we are to the tree the more it will reach up into the sky or background. The further away we are from the tree the more its height will shrink relative to its background.
So don't just accept what nature gives you where you are at. Think about how the image will look the best. Then change your position to get that perspective. Always be safe. Cliffs, water, animals, and such may not make it safe to position ourselves where we would ideally want to be. No image is worth your life. Move around to get the image you want only if it is safe to do so.
]]>
My wife and I drove to the eastern side of the Sierras. That night the cloud of smoke moved over the mountains like a blanket. Here are a few more images:
These opportunities do not happen every day (for which we are thankful). Be on the lookout for such events. Perhaps unusual dust helps to create special atmospheric conditions for a great sunset or a storm or other event brings about extraordinary circumstances. Be out there (if safe) and grab these opportunities to not only record the events but to get something different and special.
Remember not to only spend all your energy on that which is brought about by the special event. We still need to capture a compelling photograph. So spend time on composition, finding a great foreground element, and making a great image. When people view our image a year or two later they don't remember the fire or the storm. The hype caused by the media coverage is long gone. Our images do not capture the sound, the smell, and other things that may tie us emotionally to the image. The image needs to be a strong image without any of these additional things that make it special for you. Whatever is special is just the cherry on top of the cake.
]]>
The woodpecker and log were right next to the road, so distance was not an issue. I had both my 70-200mm and my 200-600mm lenses with me. The bird seemed quite happy and not bothered with our presence. I believe it would have allowed me to get even closer if I needed to. Yet I opted to not fall into the trap of taking a portrait or cropping very tightly. I wanted to show a bit more. The log was littered with holes. The woodpecker had clearly worked the log. I wanted to show some of the holes. These holes tell a story. They show the bird in its environment. It shows what the bird does.
Too often we crop tightly thereby foregoing showing a bit more. Not every image of a bird needs to be a solo performance. In this image, the bird is still very prominent due to its placement in the image and its striking color. However, there is more to the image than just the bird. The viewer can start looking around at the texture of the log and the holes.
Don't be afraid to show a bit more.
]]>
This is not always a bad thing, especially if you are shooting stock images. Clients needing stock images most often need space in the image to place text in. For fine art photography, a blank portion of the sky can create imbalance. We cannot magically move clouds into the blank area. These days photographers use sky replacement offered by many image editing software such as Lunimar (click on affiliate links to get a discount). Software such as Luminar not only offers a sky replacement feature but also the ability to insert clouds into your existing sky. Other photographers don't want to replace skies. So what are they to do with a blank portion of the sky?
May I suggest having a person stand in the image? Get your spouse to take up a position in the image. Position your spouse in the right spot to bring balance and to add interest to that part of the image. Of course, you can use a fellow photographer if your spouse is not with you. I suggest that you never go out to photograph alone. You never know if you are going to fall and need help. Being there for each other brings peace of mind and provides someone to make your images more interesting. So don't be afraid to include people in your images if the sky does not cooperate with you.
]]>As you might expect from any respectable photographer, I arrived early to catch the good light. So what do you do when faced with a scene as described above? When the grand scene does not work out for you just shrink your world. Think small. Go for images of small sections of the scene. Eliminate that which does not work. So I forgot about the mountains and also eliminated wide shots of the water because, due to my personal taste, I am not a fan of a neighborhood in my landscape images.
Shrinking our world means that we go for a more intimate subject. Narrow the field of view. Rather than shooting the whole large expansive view, look for images within the expanse. This is what macro photographers do. They find an interesting subject which is really small. As landscape photographers, we can do the same thing just on a larger scale (but still much smaller than the grand view), like this little water feature. This water feature is not large but by isolating it I was able to get a reasonably nice image.
As discussed last week, we experiment with different shutter speeds to get what we think is the right shutter speed to show the water movement. I did not want a milky smooth water motion. So I opted for a shutter speed that left enough definition in the water while clearly still showing off the motion.
When the large expanse just does not work for an image, look for different images within the larger scene and focus on them. In fact, if you struggle to see expansive images, shrink your world. Go for this kind of small feature and before long your vision will expand. This helps photographers to get out of vision block (similar to when writers have writer's block).
]]>
This image was taken just as the splash is over and the water is now running down the rock. To show the motion of the water running a longer shutter speed is used. To get the best results you will have to experiment a little to get the most pleasing shutter speed. The longer the shutter speed the more motion blur you will get but at the price of definition. Choose a shutter speed that does not turn all motion completely smooth. We want to see lines of water not just a mushy, definitionless, blurry sheet of milky water.
The photographer's vantage point is important and should be chosen carefully. Leave clear gaps between the rocks to separate them. If I was positioned a bit to the left the main rock with the water running off of it would have touched the rock a bit further into the photograph. When that happens the two rocks look connected and become one rock in the image. Thus we lose depth. If I stood a little to the right the bottom middle rock would have merged with the main rock with the water running off of it. Pay attention to different elements in the image touching each other.
The way this image is composed creates depth. The viewer's eyes jump from rock to rock deeper and deeper into the image. This is what we want. The rocks form stepping stones for your eyes to walk into the image. If we can help it we want to keep every element in the image separate. Lastly, this image is well balanced. The main rock is balanced by the darker clouds. When moving around the scene to finalize the composition think about all the things.
]]>
Here are some best practices that you may find helpful:
Timing is everything. Treat wave action like you would fast-moving animals. Use a fast frame rate and fire away. This way you can choose the best frame. The best frame is often the one with the biggest splash caught at the point where it is at its biggest.
Use a fast shutter speed. The idea is to freeze the action in mid-air. We want to catch the dops hanging in the air. Smaller splashes can work with a slow shutter speed to show the motion but are not advised for large splashes unless you want to create an abstract image.
Strong backlighting or side-lighting works best. The lower the angle of the sun the better.
Leave some room in the composition for the wave to move into.
Use tide charts to maximize your chances of getting good wave action.
Be safe. Every so other larger waves can appear and sweep you into the ocean or crush you on the rocks. Make sure that your elevation is safe. Keep an eye on the waves coming in. Always keep alert and watch out.
Waves come in waves. Be patient. Good wave action will stop for some time and is then followed by many large waves. This cycle repeats itself. Watch for ocean spray. Saltwater or salty spray is not your friend. In fact, saltwater is hard and damaging to your equipment. So watch for the wind direction. Days on which the wind blows into the ocean are best and can add drama to the images. Have a soft cloth ready to wipe the front element of your lens and check it regularly. A drop of water on your front lens element will ruin your image.
Go out there and enjoy the experience.
]]>
This image just does not work with a blank blue sky. I have been to this location many times. At last, things came together. This image was only possible to get within a few short minutes since the sun only came out briefly prior to disappearing below the horizon.
Even with great weather reports, one cannot predict which clouds will be exactly where when you need them to be in a certain place. That is the joys of weather. The only real solution is to be out there often when the weather predicts a good outcome. Had the clouds not left the little gap for the sun this visit would have been a waste and I would have had to go again. With the sun and the clouds in the right place, the only other variable is the waves. I waited for some wave action to liven up the bottom of the image.
Being out in exciting weather is very exciting photographically speaking but less exciting experientially. The wind can pester a person. It can be cold, rainy, misty, wet, you name it. On the other hand, getting an image like this is worth enduring the joys of the weather to me.
]]>
It was interesting to watch the Oxpeckers interact with the Giraffe. I love how the water drain from their mouths.
Once again I am shooting at a fast shutter speed. I want to freeze the fast-moving head of the Giraffe and the falling water. The background is not distracting so there was nothing to worry about there. Its spread out legs was used to frame the image.
Be on the lookout for any opportunity to showcase animal behavior as such images are typically interesting. This would make a nice large print.
]]>A camera with a high frame rate - the higher the better.
A camera with great fast autofocus that can track subjects well and stick on them.
A longer lens (unless you use a blind/hide or feed the birds). Ideally, if you can afford one, this lens should be a fast lens (large aperture).
While on a workshop in Botswana I was shooting with a Sony A6400. I chose this camera for the wildlife part of the workshop because it has great autofocus and can shoot at 11 images per second. The attached lens was the Sony 200-600mm. The combination worked well:
The best settings are also very important. Cameras are not set up to perform the best for bird-in-flight photography by default. Here are some helpful settings to remember:
Chose a fast shutter speed. The bird is flying fast and the wings flap even faster. You are moving the camera to track the bird which will cause blur if your shutter speed is too slow. Ideally, you will want a shutter speed of around 1600/second or better. I prefer 2000 or above.
Use the largest aperture. This helps to give you the most possible light to enable that fast shutter speed. It also blurs the background, which is what we typically want with bird/wildlife images.
Use auto-iso. Let the camera pick the iso because your shutter speed is not negotiable and your aperture should stay on the largest one available.
Each camera is different so find out how to tune your autofocus to best suit bird-in-flight photography. I prefer a sticky autofocus for birds that grabs focus quickly.
Use a silent shutter, if your camera has one. We don't want to scare the bird away. Smaller birds are typically more skittish.
I highly recommend the mentioned Sony lens. The zoom ring moves the lens from 200 to 600mm with a very short turn. This is important, especially as you begin learning the craft. At 600mm it can be really difficult to locate your bird in the frame. With this lens, you simply look for the bird with the lens set at 200mm. Once you located the bird and placed it in your frame it only takes a short turn to zoom in quickly. Longer turns mean that you are not zoomed in enough to shoot fast enough. By the time you zoomed another lens with a longer turn the bird is out of sight, behind a bush, or no longer in an ideal position.
Be patient. Practice a lot. This is not easy.
]]>
We can wait for the growl, yawn, or aggression.
We can play with contrast and mood.
We can feature the tongue.
We can show age. This male looks fairly tired.
The point of these examples is that we should not be satisfied with a portrait or close-up of an animal simply to have a portrait. There are so many ways to make a portrait just a bit more interesting, more impactful, more story-telling, funnier, etc. Don't settle for the ordinary when you can get an image that is better. Be patient. Wait. Shoot much, but get something just a bit more interesting than a straight-faced frontal headshot that is boring. The only time where that kind of image really works well is when the face itself has something different to say, like this tired lion.
]]>
I and the people I show my images to tend to prefer the last image. But why? What is the difference between them? They were taken, literally, within a second of each other. Can one second or a fraction of a second make a large enough difference to make one image better than another? The mud being sprayed by the elephant is nicer in the first image. In the second image, the mud spray is less and already visible to the right of the elephant. The background and the grasses are just about the same.
There are two major differences between the two images:
There is a bird in the second image. It even looks as though there is some interaction between the elephant and the bird. This bird, its placement, and the direction of the elephant's look add interest to the image.
In image one, there is another elephant laying in the mud right in front of the mudslinging elephant. In this image, the second elephant happened to be raised up a bit higher whereas it is laying down totally in the second image. In image one, this second elephant is distracting whereas it does not really feature in the second image. Now, in reality, this second elephant was much brighter (in both images) in real life but I darkened it in post-processing in an attempt to lessen the distraction.
Small things like this can make or break an image. But how do we as photographers chose the right moment to press the shutter and make the shot? Yes, knowing the animal's behavior patterns helps since things then become more predictable. In reality, as far as these little small things are concerned, they are just not predictable. I wish I can tell you that I timed this image just right, but I can't. This is good news for you because it means that you too would have had this image if you follow my advice.
So how then do we chose when to press the shutter? We don't. To maximize our chances of getting that perfect moment we simply set the camera's frame-rate (drive mode) to the fasted speed the camera is capable of and just keep shooting. Discard the unwanted images and keep the great ones. Things like this just happen too fast for us to react with individual shots. You will be surprised how much of a difference a split second can make with the shape or position of the flying mud, a flying bird's wings (open or closed), etc. Use a fast frame-rate to your advantage to capture the right moment.
]]>The natural human response to someone looking in a certain direction is to also want to look at what he or she is looking at. This means that if a subject is placed near the edge of the frame while looking towards the same edge of the frame, the viewer's eyes will want to leave our image and look towards that edge and off of the print. There are rare circumstances where that might work compositionally like where an animal is being chased and needs to escape out of the scene to survive. Mostly though, we don't want the viewer's gaze to leave the image. Our goal is to have someone look at the image for as long as possible.
Therefore, if the animal or person is looking towards our left, we place them on the right side of the image and vice versa. We want the viewer to look into the image not out of it.
Think about composition and look-room. Be willing to swing the camera this way or that way depending on how the person or animal moves his or her head. Look-room is important.
These images were taken early one morning in Botswana. When getting to such a scene, there are a few things to look out for in choosing where to position yourself:
The direction of the sun. Remember that sunlight from behind creates a rim-light. Sidelight is usually dynamic with nice shadows. Frontlight, if early morning or late afternoon light, is warm and beautiful but can result in a flat image. Note that shooting into the sun can be challenging in terms of dealing with dynamic range.
The background. For animal photography, we want a distraction-free background. The more uniform the better. The more blur-able the better (the further away from the background the better). Avoid bright colors and detail in the background.
Reflections. If there is water in the scene, try to shoot from an angle where you can see the reflection nicely.
Always be thinking when shooting. Remember, amateurs take images, pros make images.
]]>Is there action begging to be captured?
Is the animal acting out some animal behavior that should be shown?
Is the surrounding landscape interesting?
Does the light scream for attention?
This image would just not have worked tightly cropped. We want to look to where the animal is looking. The light draws us into the image. The light would have drawn us out of the image had this been cropped tightly.
The larger view shows the animal working to get a meal. It is shown with its natural surroundings. Once again the light works with this composition whereas a tight crop would have had the brighter lit sand on the edge of the image. Don't be afraid to step back and show a larger view. These images are often just as interesting or more so than tightly cropped wildlife images. There is a time for tightly shot images and a time for wider framed images. Before you shoot, try to ask some questions to help you decide whether to zoom in tightly or not.
Although I make money with my photography I don't photograph wildlife enough to justify such an expense. Most of us use much cheaper lenses. My lens of choice is the Sony 200-600mm. It is a fantastic lens but at 600mm it is an f6.3 lens. So what can we do with more budget-friendly lenses (which are f6.3 at 600mm or worse) to get a creamer out-of-focus background? How does depth of field really work? What determines how much of the image is in focus?
There are four factors that determine the depth of field:
The f-stop of the lens. Use the widest aperture that your lens has.
The focal length of the lens. The longer the lens the shorter the depth of field. So shooting at the furthest end of your telephoto zoom lens helps to make your background more blurry.
The distance between your camera and the subject. The closer you are to the animal the more out of focus your background will be. So get as close to your subjects as you can. Use a boat or a blind (hide) to get close.
The distance between your subject and the background. The further your background is from your subject the creamier your background will be. Pick your spot to increase this distance.
It also helps to get down low. By shooting upward we can often exclude grasses and brush which are lower down. In the case of this image, the Plover was on a little mound. That helps to separate it from what would have been right behind it.
Remember that smaller f.stops have a bigger depth of field. If you cannot afford large aperture long lenses use these four factors that influence depth of field to your advantage to create that creamy background.
]]>
This image mixes the abstract with wildlife. I love the abstract part of the image; the ripples, the color, the out of focus sections. It is almost as if the bird is out of place. But that is exactly what immediately draws the viewer's eyes to the dove. it stands out. This mixture of the abstract with wildlife creates discomfort, contrast, and mystery (is it real?).
The light was flat. There is not much variety of color. There is not much difference as far as light and dark are concerned. It is the focus that calls your attention to the bird. It is the focus that creates the abstract side of things. Had this image been shot with a smaller aperture resulting in more of the image being in focus this image would not have worked.
There are five things photographers can use compositionally:
The obvious one here is the elements in the photograph and their placement;
Brightness versus darkness. The human eye will always go to that which is bright rather than the darker parts of the image. Photographers can use brightness to guide the viewer's eyes to where he or she wants them to go;
Color. Colors that stand out from the rest of the scene draws attention. We can use color to make our viewer's look where we want them to look;
Focus. The eyes will always go to that which is in focus and avoid that which is out of focus. By selectively focusing on our subject and blurring the rest of the image we direct our viewers.
The different. Whenever something is different from everything else that is where we will look. Our attention follows that which stands out. Take ten pens all lines up. They are all in focus. They are all the same color. However, one of them is significantly smaller than the others, or larger. This is what our attention will focus on.
In this image, the dove is placed in a strong compositional position and we used focus compositionally. Due to the circumstances, it turned out to be a mixture of abstract and wildlife. I think it came out nicely; a different kind of shot.
]]>Knowing the relationship between these animals comes in handy for photography. We know that this is not a chance encounter and that the bird will stay on the buffalo. If you have the time and patience to watch them you may be rewarded. I chose this moment for the photograph because of the closed eye. It tells the story. It may be comical. It evokes questions. Showing interaction between animals is usually more interesting than just having one animal in an image.
Be patient and wait for something special. Look for interaction between animals, especially interspecies interaction.
]]>
Why would you want to take this image more zoomed in? Framing it the way you see it here works well. Tell the story. Show their lives not just the animal by itself. Allow the atmosphere of the image to come through. Include nature.
I treated this scene just as I would any landscape scene. I waited patiently tracking everything that happened through my viewfinder, ready to click at any moment. I felt the moment was right when these two elephants faced each other. Having them look this way prevents the viewer's eyes from leaving the image. Pay attention to such details as they can make or break your image. For images of wildlife shot with a wider field of view, the composition is very important. That is why I view the composition the same way I would for landscape images.
]]>
How can we make life easier for ourselves and our cameras in situations like this? The setup of your autofocus system has a lot to do with your success. Your camera (if "pro" enough) will have different autofocus settings. For great wildlife photography set the stickiness of the autofocus system fairly high. This way branches or grass will not let your camera lose focus.
Secondly, when it is difficult to spot your subject, I prefer to take the camera out of the zone focus mode and I pick a specific focus spot. This tells your camera what you want in focus. You just hold the focus spot right on your target and then focus. Once focused your camera can lock onto your animal and the stickiness of the system will prevent it from being distracted by other things.
Know the different focus settings of your camera and set it up for each situation. This is easier said than done. Cameras are computers that happen to be able to take images. They have hundreds of different settings and combinations of settings and menu choices. How are we supposed to remember the right settings for each scene, let alone how to actually set it that way and where to find the right settings in the menus?
May I suggest a few helpful tips?
Having said all of that please know that not all autofocus systems are created equally. Some manufacturers shine at autofocus while others are slower and less sticky. Within each brand each tier of camera (consumer, prosumer, pro) will have different autofocus capabilities. Choose the right camera for what you want to shoot.
All the best.
]]>
In a split second, everything changed. The Leopard darted to a log on the ground like lightning. I did not get a shot of that because another very selfish vehicle drove in right in front of us. When that vehicle was passed this is what we saw.
The Leopard grabbed this African Wild Cat from the log. Dust enveloped them. Things happened quickly, very quickly.
It was over. The Leopard got up and left with its lunch. The sad part is that a few photographers did not get the action right away. It happened too fast. There was no warning, or was there? The body language foretold what might be coming. Knowing how to read animal behavior can be really helpful. It can be the difference between getting the shot or getting the aftershow.
Do a bit of reading prior to going on safari. Luckily for me, I grew up in Africa and have many years of experience in photographing wild-life. Just be prepared and being prepared speaks not just to your gear and travel arrangements but also of getting to know animal behavior and body language.
]]>The Leopard was exhausted and panting. It had just killed an Impala. There were no tall trees around to carry its catch into for safety. It had to rest up quickly and eat before other preditors arrived. After a few minutes, it got up and started working on its dinner. I did manage to get a few usable images of that too, but that was it. We had to leave and the light was no longer any good.
When we see something we don't often see and get to photograph it is important to work quickly. Just get the shot. Never mind a high ISO. Would you rather have a grainy or out of focus image because that is the only choice you have in situations like this? The noise cleaned up pretty well. What would you have done with your out-of-focus image? Shoot with whatever lens you have on. First, get the shot even if it is a portrait. Once you have an image or three it may be time to slap on a more appropriate lens.
This is when it is important to know your kit and bag well. You need to be able to find the lens you want with one touch. You need to be able to work as quietly as possible. This is not the time to drop things. It is a good practice to practice quickly and quietly exchanging gear.
We ended up getting our images that night. But being ready and able to quickly change lenses and settings is vital as you will see next week. The next day we met up with another Leopard and witnessed a kill. It happened in seconds, it took its catch and disappeared in the brush on its way to a hill. Many missed that opportunity because of missing these lessons.
The eyes or an eye needs to be sharp. Animals may have much longer faces than humans. To get the whole face sharply in focus wait a bit for a side profile. See point number 5. Sometimes our depth of field is shallow. A shallower depth of field requires a side profile to get everything sharp.
The face needs to be fairly large in the frame. The face is the image in portraiture, therefore show the face large.
There needs to be space for the animal to look into. In other words, there must be more space in front of the face than behind the head.
Wait for the right moment, the right expression, the right look.
Blur the background to prevent distractions. You do this by using a large aperture (a smaller number is a bigger aperture).
Overcast light is a very good light for portraits. This light is soft and often flattering.
Follow these guidelines to improve your portraitures.
]]>
The baboons came to drink. There may have been 40 or more of them. Which one do your photograph? In which scene do you invest to yield the best images. The rule of thumb suggests following the action.
I decided to focus on the two fellows who were fighting. The little guy tried to get away. The bigger one went on the pursuit and caught up to the little guy. He grabbed him to pull him back down. He is already looking down to orchestrate their fall. The little guy is not happy. He is hurting as he is being pulled. His face tells the story. This image is alive with the story. Would an image of these two same fellows just sitting next to each other have been this interesting?
Following the action paid off. Always ask yourself, what is the most interesting thing I can see right now? Photograph that. It may not always be the easiest thing to shoot. In this case, it was very difficult. The two are moving really quickly. Keeping up with them with a long lens is not easy. Keeping them fully in the frame is not easy. Keeping focus can be a struggle as they run behind obscuring objects. To make matters worse, most of the time there is an annoying stick, leave, branch, or whatever, in the wrong place to ruin the image.
Just persist. Keep on going. Follow the action. The moment will come when you get that shot with the story. It is because these images are difficult to get that make them so scarce (the good ones). That is the very thing that makes your images stand out.
]]>
Taking images like this can be difficult and frustrating. They require a lot of patience and trial and error. Most of your images will probably end up in the trash bin. But then again, you may end up with one or two creative images like the one of this elephant throwing mud on itself. Because we are zoomed in so tightly many images will have cut off the trunk. Or the nice mud pattern will be too high and out of shot.
Here are a few tips to help you play the creative game:
Zoom in tight on where the action is or what you want a shot of.
Set a very fast shutter speed and high frame rate. This is needed to catch that moment just right. A split second can make all the difference.
Shoot and shoot and shoot.
Quickly review what you got and make adjustments accordingly.
Shoot and shoot and shoot again.
This is a numbers game that just requires you to keep on going for some time. The moment will come when you get that perfect image. These kinds of images are very cool. People can just stare at them for a long time. They evoke smiles. They sometimes evoke questions. You are presenting something that few people have seen that way or even noticed before. You get images that are different, that stand out. These are images that are not only a recording of the sight everyone saw, but art. This is creative.
]]>
The best way to photograph these birds, when they seem to zip around without lingering anywhere long enough to acquire the bird in the viewfinder to photograph, is to put the camera down. Yes, put the camera down, stop photographing. The thing to know about these birds and many other species is that they are habitual. They have certain favorite perches and will always go back to the same ones. Spend some time to just watch them, take note of where they land, and sit. Once you find out their routine, where they always go, choose the perch that the bird actually uses that suits you best. Think about the distance between you and perch and how long your lens is. How does the background look? Are you at the best angle? What angle is the light coming from? You have time. Think about all these things and pick the best perch that will yield the best image.
Now, set up your view for only that one spot, and just wait. The bird will come back (if you picked one of the bird's favorite perches). The next time the bird comes to that perch you will be ready. Even if the bird only stays there momentarily you will be ready because your viewfinder is fixed on the perches and you have already acquired proper focus before the bird even showed up (or reasonably close to it). So be patient, watch the bird, learn its habits, and then prepare to photograph it accordingly.
An added benefit to this course of action is that it minimized your movement. Some birds can be very skittish. The slightest movement from you can spook them. Having picked one perched and being pre-setup means that you are not moving around. You are just sitting still waiting. This makes the bird more comfortable to stay there a bit longer.
Getting the know these birds can be the difference between getting the image or not. So spend some time watching them prior to photographing them if they don't sit still for long.
]]>
Here you can see that the face and eyes are sharp but the wingtips are not. This is due not to a focusing issue but the used shutter speed. The wings are moving faster than the shutter speed is able to freeze. Is this a problem? Does it detract from the image? I would argue that it artistically adds to the image. We sometimes do this on purpose to show movement, to create the feeling that the eagle is coming.
We do this by choosing a shutter speed fast enough to freeze the bird, helicopter, plane, etc. but slow enough to blur the faster moving objects (wingtips, rotors, props, etc.). We do the same with moving cars, bicycles, and so forth because their wheels need to show motion. Yet, the car or bicycle needs to be sharp.
Experiment with your shutter speed the next time you shoot moving objects. Try to get that balance that renders that which needs to be in focus, sharp while leaving blurred that which moves faster. Whatever you do, if there are a face and eyes they need to be sharp.
]]>Then there are those who enjoy photography (making images in the field) more than image editing. This group is not as well versed with editing software as the previous group. They are often frustrated because they see (in their imagination) what they want to do with the image in editing but they often don't know how to get the image there, in post-processing. They find post-processing overwhelming and limiting (by their limited skills).
I personally find myself somewhere in between these two groups. I love being out there making images but I also enjoy the editing part. I know my software reasonably well but have also been very frustrated that I just can't achieve in post-processing what I want to. I am just not good enough in PhotoShop. Let me put it this way. If I had to do a self-assessment I would rate my photography knowledge and skills much higher than my editing skills. I am a very quick learner but my schedule is beyond busy and I just don't have the time to get more proficient at PhotoShop. I heard someone say that many photographers have spent an average of sixteen years learning PhotoShop. I too have used PhotoShop for many years, but due to all the things I am involved in, I have not spent as much time as needed on it.
How will the first group of photographers get more time to be in the field as they are consumed with computer work (even if they love computer work)? How will the second group of photographers get their final image better when they either don't know how to get it better or don't have the time to properly learn all the software necessary for the job?
Artificial intelligence (AI) has matured to such a level that image editing software is at a crossroads. This is a crossroad I am very, very happy to stand in front of. One fork of the crossroad is using AI to make their software better and more precise. The processes and steps used are still similar or even the same but will yield much better results. AI is working behind the scenes. The other fork of the crossroad is using AI to make their software different and better. AI is not working behind the scenes on this road but is front and center. AI does for you what you don't know how to do yourself in the software. Now I remember people saying, in the mid-1980s, as autofocus was introduced that "the day I can no longer focus my own images is the day I quit photography." People might now feel the same way, if I don't process my own images it is not my image. I don't feel the same way. I have a vision of what I want the image to look like. As long as the final image reflects that vision I don't care how I get there - doing it myself (which I have already admitted I am not as proficient in as I should be) or letting AI do it for me. To me, it is all about the final image, not how I get there. I am an image person, not a process person.
This is why this second fork is what I am so excited about. Imagine loading an image into your software and the software's AI will analyze your image, measure depth, know what is in your image and recognize elements, then suggest just about perfect results to you. You pick from a few suggestions and with two clicks your image is transformed and you are basically done. Imagine if this software still allows you full control, should you want it, to refine their suggestions to closer align with your vision for that image.
We are reaching that fork in the road this holiday season. Skylum, the creators of Luminar 4, is coming out with a brand new product called Luminar AI. What you have just imagined is coming true. AI is here not just working behind the scenes but upfront. Have you ever looked at an image in your editing software and not known where to begin with the post-processing process? Now AI will take the lead and show you what it thinks. Soon you will have a vision of how you want that image to look like if you did not have one from the start. Two clicks and your image is transformed. Yet, you retain control so that you can change things so that it will be your image with your look.
To get a sneak peek at what is coming, have a look here:
Disclaimer: I am an affiliate of Skylum and have been on webinars about this software. I have been able to ask questions directly to Skylum. When you buy software from this link you save and I get a "coffee." I personally use Luminar software on 100% of my images and love it.
]]>When we have close encounters we should try to get intimate images. This Bushbuck came close to us. It helps make the animal feel safer if you avoid eye contact. Look to the side and keep them in your peripheral vision. Move slowly and keep quiet. This fellow and her mate cautiously came towards me. Here are the two images I took:
The first one was taken just before sunrise. There is something special to look right into her eyes. Lift your camera to your eye while still looking to the side then slowly rotate to face the animal. This is an intimate image. The viewer is connecting with the animal. We almost want to touch it. We are staring at each other. This is special.
The second image was taken a few minutes later as the sun came up. Try to get that warm light fall on the animal. Photographing animals like this with a short to shortish lens from close up is an experience. Try to give your viewer that same experience. The surroundings should not be totally blurred as that is what long lenses do and the experience of meeting the animal in the environment where they live is lost.
I know that this experience was probably more special to me that it will ever be to the viewer because of my encounter but I try to show that encounter to the viewer. I attempt to catch the intimacy.
]]>
Get down low. Lay down if you need to (as long as it is safe to do so). Such images have a unique perspective. Viewers love to be shown things in a way they have not seen before. Most viewers will never see a guinea fowl from this angle which makes the image more special. This perspective also makes the animal seem larger and taller than what it really is.
When shooting upwards make sure that your sky is not distracting or just plain definitionless gray. If the sky is not pleasing then don't include it. In an attempt to create a special connection with the animal it helps to shoot from eye-level or lower. It almost makes the viewer feel part of the scene instead of looking down on the animal. As photographers, it is our job to find intriguing and interesting angles to shoot from. For animals try shooting from low down.
This is not your typical landscape image. We don't have lead-in lines or much depth. Yet, I find this image appealing. I love the rays of light shooting out. I had the drive reposition us to allow me to get the sun star. The tree itself is full of character as Boabab trees usually are. The backlit foliage in the foreground is nicely lit and has a nice color to them. The sky is pleasing too with warm tones. It kind of all comes together.
I just want to remind us all not to be so focussed on the purpose of being out (in this case, wildlife photography) that we lose sight of other photographic opportunities. This image was just a quick take, but don't forget about the quick takes. Always be on the lookout of any and all opportunities. However brief, take the opportunity.
]]>
We are still at Victoria Falls but we are trying to get more and different images from the same shoot. So we lower our angle and move in closer. The ferns and flowers are what make the image but the rainbow and the falls behind it all adds so much to the image. As always, remember to focus on your composition. I moved around here to find this composition with the leaves at the bottom leading the viewer's eye into the image. Pay attention to small details.
Most of all, be on the lookout for images like this. The waterfall can be so dramatic that it demands our undivided attention but this is a trap, don't fall for it. Once you have the image of the main attraction start looking at what is closer to you. Start finding things to photograph while still using the falls and the rainbow as a background. Our goal is not just to enjoy the waterfall but to be detectives looking for every possible image we can find (assuming we are talking about good images).
So, in conclusion of the last three weeks, get the main attraction then get more intimate with longer lenses, and then use the dramatic landscape as a background to get even more images from the shoot. Concentrate on "seeing." Seeing the images to shoot is 80% of photography or more. Learn to get into the mode of seeing ALL the possibilities not just the obvious ones.
]]>
This image is still of Victoria Falls in Zimbabwe but I zoomed right in and took a more intimate image. We still need to pay attention to good composition. There still needs to be something prominent for the eye to go back to. I have chosen a shutter speed that shows the water flowing (by using blur) yet still leaving some definition so that the water is not just a blur. Just take a few exposures using different shutter speeds so that you can pick the best one. I cannot tell you to use a shutter of .... (insert value) because there are too many variables at play to determine that for every situation. These variables are the speed at which the water is falling and the focal length of your lens. The longer the lens the more blur there is (because your field of view is closer).
We can even go a bit more abstract. Just don't be afraid of shooting landscapes with longer lenses. Get a variety of images from the same shoot. I have chosen a faster shutter speed here because I wanted to freeze the water a bit more. I needed to do so, so that it is not just a blur. In the previous image, the rocks provide sharp focus but here I don't really have that.
Be creative. Get as many different images of a shoot as you can. Push yourself.
]]>
The mist is really important here as it adds to the mood of the image. It also helps the sun to give color to the image. Timing in these situations is important. Too much mist and you lose the detail of what is behind the mist. When taking a moody image of a swan for example you want lots of mist or fog because it gets rid of the background but in a landscape image like this too much mist ruins the shot (and your gear). With not enough mist the mood and atmosphere of the image are lost. The mist typically comes and goes with lulls in the wind. So just time it right and you have your shot.
This image helps us to compare the atmosphere and mood between the two images. Can you see that this second image just does not have the same atmosphere and mood as the first image? So go out and try to capture more mood and atmosphere in your images. Many sleep in when there is fog. Many put their cameras away when there is mist. Great images are often made when we don't do what non-photographers do. We should be out photographing when non-photographers are at home. We should probably be home when others are out. The reason for this is that others go out for the experience and the experience needs to be pleasant for them. Photographers go out to take great images and are very willing to have terrible experiences (wet, cold, early, etc.) as long as they get great images. Sometimes we get both a great experience and good images but most of the time you need to decide between the experience and the great image.
Great composition
Emotion
Much of the success of awesome people's portraits are in the eyes
Finding a great face with character
Good lighting
The composition of animal portraits is just as important as in portraits of people. However, some animals' faces are not as flat as ours. In fact, some of them can have very long faces which creates focus issues, especially when taken with a long lens (as you cannot get close to them). Long lenses have a shallower depth of field.
Emotion in animal portraits can be just as strong and important. Their eyes can also communicate a lot but they don't listen to your instructions so getting that moment is more difficult and requires more patience. The best lighting for good outdoor portraits is when the sky is overcast. I am not talking about gloomy skies. There should still be a good amount of light, the light just has to be diffused and soft.
Because of the crocodile's long face, it is probably best to take the image from the side to retain focus. You can see that the light is nice and soft. The focus has to be sharp on the eye. If the eye is not in focus the image is trash. What do that eye and face tell you? Do you trust this fellow?
Don't be afraid of going in really closely especially if the portrait is telling a story. The story here is the interaction between the bird and the buffalo. So that needs to be shown and it is best shown by getting in close.
This fellow is tired, tired of life. Once again, I am really in closely. Let your animal portraits say something, communicate emotion, and get close.
]]>
This image is so much more interesting than one where the baboon just stared at the viewer with an expressionless face. So how do you capture images like this? It just takes patience. You have to watch the animal through the viewfinder, finger on the shutter. It may take a long time to get an image showing action but that is the price you are asked to pay to get an image worthy of the animal it portrays.
Make sure to pick a large aperture because we want the background blurred. We want the animal to stand out, distraction-free. Most people have probably never seen a baboon's teeth. So when they see them in your image it makes them stop and look. It creates a central point of interest. As usual, frame the image right with more space in front of the animal than behind the animal.
So show life. Capture animals living. Show their behavior. Show their interaction with one another or with nature.
]]>
Here is a little one nibbling on Mom's nose. Would you prefer a shot of both of them just standing there looking at you instead? I doubt it. Animal interaction is interesting. It calls forth emotions within the viewer, perhaps a chuckle. Animal interactions make them more relatable to the viewer. It personifies them. The viewer's eyes are always going to go straight to where the action is which can be used compositionally. Here that interaction is placed where the rule of thirds lines insect, which is a very strong compositional position. Both the foreground and the background are blurred so nothings else competes for your attention.
Spend time with animals. Get to know their behavior. Capture their behavior and show them interact with each other. It just adds a bit of sparkle to wildlife images.
]]>
When a photographer sees something large and something small he or she would be well advised to try to place them both in one image. This is the time to practice patience. Wait for that moment. When one of the two objects interact or intersect with the other things can get very interesting. In this case, the baby is in a precarious position. Is Mom accidentally going to step on the baby?
I was camped in Mana Pools, Zimbabwe once. My only protection was a little two-man tent. An elephant visited my "residence." I stood watching from a distance. Not once did the elephant even touch one of the anchor ropes. This baby is safe! Still, the image makes one wonder, perhaps even hold one's breath.
In this image, we have a comparison of size and proportion, power and vulnerability, strength and fragility. This image brings emotion forth from the viewer. It is an image a person can connect with. It tells a story. It speaks of being tired. Mom's foot is in the air which adds to the suspense and questions. Where is that foot going to land?
Look for size and proportion comparisons. Use them to show scale. Better yet, attempt to let them create a bit of drama.
]]>
So how do we capture scenes like these? Today I am not going to talk about settings and autofocus and frame rates, and such. Rather I would like to share about being ready. This bird surfaced for just a few seconds and disappeared under the water, fish and all, as fast as it appeared. This is not the time to start asking which settings to use or worse yet, how to set the camera in the first place.
It amazes me how many people will spend a lot of money to come on a workshop with us without knowing their equipment. We really need to be better prepared. Before going on an important shoot make sure you know how to set the camera (not which settings but how to actually set it). Read the manual through again. Make sure you know which buttons do what and where they are. Make sure you know the menu system. As an instructor, I can give you the settings but it is really hard for me to help you set your camera because every camera system is different. Even if I happen to know your particular brand's settings well, by the time you have handed me your camera and received it back the bird is long gone.
The best advice I can give you is to practice. Go shoot regularly. Play with your camera. Preparation is the key to being ready to capture scenes when they present themselves.
]]>
Here are a few things I find helpful:
Get to know your bird's behavior. They often signal before they take off by lowering their necks.
Please leave enough room for large wingspans.
Having lots of megapixels are advantageous because you can afford to leave enough room and crop later while still retaining enough resolution to be useful.
Good light is still essential.
Use the fastest possible shutter speed to freeze the wings' movement. Remember the wings move much faster than the bird. At times one can get creative images of sharp birds in flight with blurred wings. Those images can also work.
The eye has to be sharp, period.
It takes a lot of practice and patience, don't give up.
Getting great images of birds in flight can be very rewarding. Even if you don't succeed, trying will make you appreciate good birds in flight photographs even more.
]]>
There are many nice images to be had by zooming in even more. Photograph just a part of the animal. These images can be very intimate and interesting. At times they ask, "what is that?" At other times they have people say, "wow, I never realized that elephants have hair!" Or people comment about the texture of its skin. For many people, your photograph may be the closest look they have ever had of the animal in question. These images make us see things we have never seen before. They amaze us.
So please don't stop zooming in. Find something interesting by zooming right in, get something intimate and close. For the most part, I like these images to still be recognizable, but that is just my personal preference. I also prefer that there is still something specific that draws attention for compositional reasons.
Challenge yourself. Shoot using different focal lengths. Go for the intimate. Give people something that they probably have never seen before. Zoom in. Remember not to get too close to wild animals, for their comfort and your safety. Use that long lens instead.
]]>During our recent African Safari Photography Workshop, we were in special photography boats on the river bank. Baboons were horsing around and playing with each other. There was no special focus. Then one of them got thirsty. However, every time they take a drink they are taking their lives into their own hands as crocodiles lurk beneath the waters. The only way to increase their chances of surviving drinking from the river is to be laser-focussed when they drink. They lean back to stay as far away from the water as they can. All attention is on the water looking for any sign of movement. Their muscles are ready to jump backward should a crocodile attempt to strike.
This fellow is right-handed as both right hand and right leg are closer to the water, ready to propel him backward at any time. He is ready for action.
Just look at those eyes. You can see that this is serious business. He is not looking at the water right in front of him where he is drinking but further ahead. There is danger and he needs to be on the lookout. As wildlife photographers, we want to capture such focus because it tells a story and creates interest. We want to know what happened. Did he survive? (he did)
When you see animals really focussing pay attention. Be ready for something may happen. Even if nothing special happens you still end up with a shot that shows the focus and tells the story.
]]>My wife looked at a few of my African images and exclaimed in horror, "oh no, don't show that ..." The reason for her plea is quite understandable as these images evoke emotions and reactions that are not pleasant. Yet, images that moved the world and stood the test of time are often images that showcase the harsh reality of life. I choose to show it, yet acknowledge that these images are not for everyone.
This Egret found a baby bird to eat. After a struggle to get it eaten it finally succeeded. This is that harsh life. This image makes me ask questions:
Did the baby die before the Egret found it?
Did the Egret kill it?
Where is the mother of the baby?
These questions keep me looking at the image as my mind thinks about them. The longer an image keeps the viewer's attention the better. Harsh or not, we just record life and show it.
]]>Capturing action, such as animals fighting
Animal interaction, like a mother looking at her baby or birds intertwining their necks
Typical animal behavior that shows their character
Running, jumping, diving, etc.
I say it again but the best advice I have for wildlife photographers is to keep following your subject through the viewfinder always being ready. Even slowish moments can happen too quickly for you to react if you are not ready. Be on the lookout for behavior that is repeated because that will tell you what to expect and warn you to be ready when it happens again.
Many elephants crossed the river to graze on islands because the grass there has not been eaten by other animals (they can't cross the river in fear of crocodiles). An elephant started to kick/push the ground with his foot to loosen the grass. He did it quite a few times which got me this image:
Would this image have been a capture of a special little moment if the elephant just stood there? These images are all about capturing the right moment. The right moment is when something special is happening. The right moment captures a slice of time that is more interesting than other times, a slice of time that asks questions, create wonder, that draws attention, and that makes the viewer want to look at your image.
Sure, I have many images of animals just standing there, but they are not that good and people don't get excited looking at them. To make your images stand out something in the image has to be outstanding, different, special, say something, evoke emotion, and generate curiosity. Capturing the right moment does that.
]]>
Here we have all the pieces of a good image. The late afternoon sun is nice and warm. The elephant is walking into the image, there is more space in front of it than behind it. There is nice color in the image. Yet, even so, this would have been just another elephant shot had it not been for the water splash. This is what I mean by saying we should try to capture special little moments. When these moments are added to your images they are much more interesting. They often evoke questions. They often freeze something different from what the next guy has.
So, how do you get images of wildlife showing special little moments? Here are a few tips that may help:
Learn to know animal behavior. The better you know the animals you photograph the better you will be able to predict when something is going to happen. I will write more about this in the coming months relaying how I got the image when I witnessed a Leopard kill.
Be ready. Yes, this can be boring but you have to be ready for when it happens it is too late to lift up your camera and shoot. Track the animal, expecting something, even if it is for a long time.
Set your camera to expect fast action. This means a fast shutter speed and focus tracking.
Position yourself in the best possible place. For wildlife, that means you need to be at eye-level or below. Be ahead, where the action is coming to.
Do your best to include something different, something special in your wildlife images. Make them stand out.
]]>Don't get discouraged. Just bring two boatloads full of patience and keep doing what you are doing. The key to great wildlife photography is to capture the right moment, that right expression, or that right composition. On our recent African Safari workshop, we were on photographic boats which make the task of tracking the animals with your heavy lens easy because the boat had professional gimbal supports built-in. Sometime before sunset we would search for elephants and position ourselves so that we are shooting into the setting sun. Here is that capture:
I really like this image. What makes it what it is, is also the composition. When do you take the shot? The elephant is constantly moving. You don't want the elephant to look to the right because then the viewer's gaze would also move to the right and leave the image. If I was lying I would tell you that I had to watch the elephant's movement closely and snap the image with him looking slightly to the left so that he and the sun complement each other. But that is not how you successfully get great wildlife images. So how do you get that right moment or right composition when photographing animals? Truth be told, things happen much too fast for you to snap at the right moment. So you shoot at the camera's fastest frame rate and pick the right image later. You shoot thousands of images and end up with just a few good ones. So the trick is not as much when you shoot, although you still do your best to frame it right, the trick is to select the right image out of the sequence. Pay attention to the composition and pick the image that works best as a whole. This requires even more patience because you are looking at sequences of 20 or 40 images of the same scene. Look at each one carefully because expressions, action, and composition can change with each image. Pick the best one.
Gather all the patience you can find and go out and find some wildlife to photograph. By the way, if you would like to join us on our next African Safari workshop in 2021 please contact me.
]]>
The "special" light just hits El Capitan. Nothing else in this scene gets good light. However, the light on El Capital is orange because the sun is really low behind us shining through an opening in the clouds. It draws the viewer to El Capitan. That small area of orange light is enough to add punch, something special to this image. Unfortunately, only two photographers saw this as everyone else left. What a pity.
Stay longer. Linger. Just wait a bit. Most of the time nothing will develop but from time to time something does and then it was very worth it to wait.
]]>
Half Dome is certainly not hidden. It is an important element in this scene. However, Half Dome is not where your eyes go immediately upon viewing this image. The sun star pulls the eyes first. The backlit foliage and trees are strong compositionally. Half Dome takes a back seat here. Everybody seeing this image will know where it is taken but the image is a bit different. This is not your standard iconic shot of the icon. These images are more difficult to get. They are also yours rather than taking an image that everyone else has also taken.
Think differently. Get more unique images. feature the icons but as a secondary interest.
]]> Rather than think according to the conventional wisdom that wide-angle lenses are better at landscape photography than telephone lenses take some telephoto lens landscape images. I really want to challenge you. Go out and shoot landscape images with a telephoto lens. Telephone lenses can be great tools to teach us photography. They help us to find the compositions, to think and see compositionally. They force you to look at large scenes in smaller chucks. They help us to spot great compositions easier. So practice with these long lenses.
This image was taken from a distance using a telephoto lens. I think it was taken at 600mm. Not all landscape images need to be of big, wide-open spaces. We do not always need to see in the distance. Try to get some more intimate images. Change things up, build a portfolio that spans a wide variety of images. The more we use long lenses for landscapes the better we will become at composition.
Do you accept the challenge?
]]>
The grasses in the foreground are on both sides with a gap in the middle which mirrors the mountains in the background. The two gaps are lined up deliberately to create the mirroring effect. You will be surprised at what a big difference a step to the left or to the right makes in terms of lining things up. Work the scene to make sure the elements are lined up and mirroring each other.
We need to think compositionally. It is our job to try to create balance, order, and to get the elements in a scene to work together (unless the purpose of the image is to show chaos). Here is the same scene composed differently:
The same idea applies. We just stepped back a bit and added some height. The effect of what we did here is that the viewer's eyes move through the gap to the gap in the mountains in the background. This is what we want. We want the viewer to be invited to look into the scene, to move from front to back.
Try to look for this kind of thing. Mirror elements. Arrange things in such a way to beckon the viewer into the image.
]]>
This was a difficult composition to spot. I had to work the scene to get this image. The far right of the image did not have much action as the sun monopolizes our attention on the left. I could not turn the camera to the left because the hill was in deep dark shadow - there was nothing there. At first glance upon arriving on the scene the rocks' positions seem random and uncooperative. However, by changing my position and going down much lower I was able to mobilize the rocks to greatly enhance my composition. They bring interest to the right side of the image. They lead to the sun. They have warm light on them.
Pay attention to detail. Move so that the rocks work together to make a nice image. Pay attention to the placement of elements in the scene. A few steps this way or that way can be powerful to turn and ordinary image into a better image. Look at everything in your scene. This is why every image I shoot is taken on a tripod. It allows me to pay attention to the detail, to examine the edges, and to precisely "place" objects where I want them by moving around.
]]>
Here is our example. You can see that I am not talking about a thin branch on the edge of the frame. Much of the image is taken up by the foliage. This frame keeps the viewer looking at the hill. The pathway helps to give the viewer directions to the mountain (lead-in line). To get the frame to be the size you want in contrast to the scene behind the frame simply move closer or further away. In this case the frame is the inverse of the hill so they compliment each other well.
Be on the lookout for good frames. Move around, higher up, lower down, to the left or right, closer or further to frame your scene the way you want to. Without the frame this image would not have been that interesting. Don't be afraid to use larger frames, as in this case.
]]>
This is a scene where I just felt that I wanted to create a peaceful landscape. I did not want crashing waves. I wanted to smooth out the water. I wanted to create a dreamy scene. To do that I needed to use a long shutter speed. However the sun is still up, in fact, I am shooting right into the bright sun. So how am I to get a long shutter speed?
Here is where the neutral density filter comes in. They are basically sunglasses for your lens. They do not alter the color of your scene, they simply allow less light through allowing you to use long shutter speeds even when the light is bright. You can also stack them to make it even darker should you need to. I have a three stop and a six stop filter. Together they give me nine stops of shade. The filter is placed in a holder in front of your lens. Your camera should notice the lower light levels and adjust automatically. However, your camera's light meter does not go beyond 30 seconds. I use an app on my smartphone (LEE ProGlass, it is free) that calculates the exposure easily and quickly.
If you are using a really long shutter speed you do not want to be holding the filter in front of your lens, rather use a GOOD filter holder because light will leak in and ruin your image.
So what do you think? It takes me all of a few seconds to screw the filter holder onto the lens and one second to drop the filter in. Had this image been taken with a short shutter speed and crashing waves were visible how long would it have taken to get that image to look like this one using Photoshop? Call me old fashioned if you please but I still use neutral density filters and I love them.
]]>
What does this "line" in the grass make you do? You see, it happens automatically, our eyes just follow lines. Here is another one from the same shoot.
Lead-in lines can be formed by almost anything that lineup and go into your scene. I want to encourage you to look for and utilize lead-in lines. Most people walk up to this scene, plant themselves at the very place where they meet the scene and shoot. If this is done most people would have had an image of the green pasture and the trees and mountains but they would have missed creating a stronger composition by just walking around a bit because that would have lead the photographer to this lead-in line.
Search for lead-in lines and use them to enhance the compositions you find.
]]>Reflection in water is one such case where it is perfectly okay to place the horizon in the center of the image. These images still work well compositionally even though we do have and are looking at two images; one of the elements and another of the reflection. Why then does this work with reflections and typically not well with other kinds of imagery? Well because the reflection is a mirror of the non-reflected part of the image which ties the "two" images together. The theme, the colors, the objects in the image, everything is similar so the viewer cannot help but see the "two images" as connected.
Does this image work compositionally? Yes, because the viewer's eyes keep on comparing the two halves of the image. This forces the brain to see the image as one image. Without the reflection, this does not work in the same way and we are usually left seeing two separate images. So don't be afraid of breaking the rules when you encounter a scene where breaking the rules still works. Reflections on water present an easy topic to start experimenting with. Give it a try.
]]>
Half Dome, (the granite rock just to the left of the sun) adds visual weight to the upper left of the image. If nothing is placed on the right side to offset that weight this image will not be balanced. Our minds will think that the image wants to tilt to the left and down because there is more weight there than to the right. Half Dome is also darkish which makes it weigh more visually. So how do we create balance? We need to juxtapose an object on the right that will bring about balance.
That is exactly what I have done. The bolder at the front right adds weight there because it is well sized. It also adds interest because of the green letchin on it. The juxtaposition of Half Dome with the bolder in the foreground makes the image look well balanced. It makes for a pleasing composition.
Think about visual weight in your composition and use the juxtaposition of weight to create balance.
]]>I arrived in Yosemite early, way before sunrise. But as usual, there were just too many trees in the way. I walked around, this way, that way, further down, higher up, and all over the place. I knew what I wanted but found it frustratingly difficult to find. Photography is not as easy as it seems. We often look at a nice image and mistakenly think that the photographer just walked up to the scene and clicked it. It usually does not work this way. On this morning I almost missed the sunrise because I just could not find what I knew I wanted. Be patient. Keep searching. Hurry if you must (remain safe). Eventually, I found the composition.
I found a clear shot of Half Dome with the sun peeking out next to it. Yet, I did not just want an image of Half Dome and the sun with no foreground. I wanted a foreground and I needed it to provide some much-needed color. This image combines both the foreground and the clear shot of Half Dome and the rising sun.
We have a tree that frames the left side and a tree that frames the right side of the image. The trees on the right form a line that leads the viewer to the sun. The image seems orderly. We don't just have trees everywhere without rhyme or reason. Everything in the image works together. We avoided chaos.
The next time you visit a scene like this keep looking and changing position and or lenses till you find what you are looking for. Try to get past the random chaotic placement of nature. Try to find order (unless your main purpose or subject is chaos). To illustrate how difficult this can be I need to tell you that I visited this same general area for five mornings running. I was getting out of bed at 4 am every morning. Hours were spent walking this way and that way. Eventually, I found what I was looking for and I really like the image. Hopefully, our efforts will pay off. We go the extra mile to get the extra smile.
]]>
The lit rocks in the top right of the image carry a lot of weight. If we have nothing on the bottom left to balance that visual weight out the image will just not be pleasing. The plants on the bottom left does a great job here of providing that sought after balance. They add color too. The viewers eyes go back and forth between the plants and the top lit rocks. This creates what we call flow. Great flow is where the flow leads into the image. Bad flow is when the flow leads the viewer out of the image.
Visual weight and flow work together to bring about harmony and to lead from one element to another or to lead your eye from one place to another. Think of an image as being on a judge's scale. The middle center of the image is pinned to the scale. If one side of the image drops down the image is not balanced. Obviously the lit rocks are much larger and physically heavier than the plants in the foreground. Visual weight does not care about physical weight. We use distance to cancel out the imbalance. Closer object visually weight more. That is why the plants can balance out the heavier rocks. The rocks are in the distance and therefore visually weight less.
Place your objects strategically to create balance. Look for things in the foreground that would balance heavy objects in the background. A balanced composition is pleasing to look at.
]]>
The background standout rocks are the same but the foreground is different. We discussed the first image last week so let's turn to the second image today. It also has loads of depth. It has dynamic lines. We also used a shape; the J shape. The bottom corners of the image have lines pointing into the image. Our eyes follow the J shape to the main standout rocks in the distance.
The foregrounds make these two images different. Yet, I am standing literally only a few steps to the left compared to where the first image was taken. I positioned the camera lower down towards the ground. I am shooting the same basic scene but I end up with two different images. I shoot stock. Having more images from the same shoot helps my business. Even if you don't shoot stock you still end up with two images rather than one. Hopefully they are both good, if not, at least you can choose the better one to use. Had you only taken the first image you would not have had a choice.
I also place these two images here to help you see what a huge difference just a few steps can make to an image. So walk around. Explore. Try things out. This is how we learn. This is how our compositional vision develops.
]]>
We once again have a foreground, a middle-ground, and a background. This time we have added a shape to the image. The foreground forms a triangle that points to the background. This helps to tie the foreground and background together. The rock shelf also forms a kind of triangle also pointing to the standout rocks in the distance.
Adding shapes to our compositions make our images more dynamic. Triangles that point to our backgrounds are powerful. S shapes and curves are even more powerful compositionally. The foreground captures our attention but then these shapes point us and move us into the image. This is what depth is. We always want our viewers to look into the image. It creates the feeling that we are there and can just step forward into the scene.
The art of photography is the ability to start seeing compositionally. We start seeing these formulas and shapes. We actively look for them and use them when we shoot. Really pay attention to your foregrounds when shooting landscape images that need depth. Moving just a little this way or that way makes a huge difference. When I arrived on this scene I knew that my main compositional element is the rocks in the distance. Now that I know that I start walking around looking for a foreground to match. I start looking for shapes, lines, and curves. When I find a scene that puts it all together I have my shot.
]]>This means that the field of photography also is not as simple as applying a formula that just works all the time. Just last week I wrote about breaking the "formula" of thirds when it works. Having said that, let's talk about an easy formula that creates depth. Like all formulas outside of the sciences this formula does not always work, but it works well most of the time. Look at this image and tell me if you feel that there is depth to the photograph.
So, does this image have depth? Does it pull your attention into the image versus making you look at it from side to side? Do you look at this image from the bottom going up into the image? Now ask yourself why? Why does this image have depth? If you where there with me when I took this image you will know that this is a small space, it is not a vast expanse and we do not have that much room to work with. So how did we create the depth that really was not there?
We used a wide angle lens. Wide angle lenses stretches things out. It creates distance between objects creating the illusion of distance and depth. But they don't do this automatically ...
I was close to the foreground plant. This exaggerates the size and importance of the first plant. It makes the viewer start here when looking at the image.
There is a middle-ground. Your eyes go from the first plant to the second and third plants. I lightened the middle tuffs of grass to make them stand out a bit.
The rocks in the background stand out. They form a strong and certain background element.
The easy formula for depth is to have a foreground, a middle-ground, and a background. When this formula is in place our eyes tend to move from the foreground to the middle-ground and on to the background. This makes us look into the image. This creates depth. Be warned, we do not want our images to all look the same, so the formula should not always be used. However, this formula does tend to work rather well.
P.S. This image also has lines to help create depth.
]]>
Does this image work for you? Does it have depth? I like this image and took it this way very deliberately. First of all, the plant growing on solid rock is amazing and it tells a story or asks questions. It is very different from the surrounding and therefore it stands out making it a strong compositional element. Yet, it is placed right in the middle of the image, laterally speaking. So why does this work compositionally?
The plant is balanced with the brighter rock standing out in the distance.
There is a line that connects the plant with those rocks. This line creates depth.
This line kind of goes at an angle making the image more dynamic.
I brightened this line somewhat in post processing to emphasize the connection.
The juxtaposition of the plant with those rocks also create depth.
So don't be afraid to break the rules but only do so if it works. We need strong compositions for compelling images. Don't break the rules just to break the rules. I often call my wife to my office when I process images and ask her if the image does something for her. I want to make sure that it is not my emotional attachment to the image that makes it work for me. It is easy to be emotionally attached to an image, after all I may have hikes miles to get there. The image needs to work well even for someone who has never been there. If it is pleasing to an outsider then you may have a strong image. We need to test our images in this way especially when we break the rules just to make sure that it still makes sense and is still a strong image.
]]>
Here we have a foreground whose shape forms a triangle which points to the main compositional element in the image, namely, the standout rocks. The foreground is interesting and adds color not found elsewhere in the image. The triangular shape leads the viewer's eyes into the image and to where we want them to look.
Don't just plonk down your tripod and shoot. Really look at all the foregrounds that are available to you. Move around and look at them from various perspectives. Find a foreground that really works well with the rest of the image. Move closer or father away to create the shapes you need to benefit the image. Foregrounds are often very important. Take your time to look around and to examine your foreground closely. Move into a position that makes the best use of the foreground.
]]>Elements - the placement of elements shape composition
Color - certain colors draw the viewer's eyes more so than other colors so where we place these colors impacts composition
Differences - anything different will stand out which turns whatever is different into a strong compositional element
Patterns - patterns and shapes lead the eyes compositionally
Light and dark areas - our eyes tend to go to lighter areas more so than darker areas. Even when we explore the darker areas our eyes will always return to the brighter areas. So we can place these lighter areas in our images to draw the viewer's attention to these areas.
Slot canyons make for great photographic material. Yet, they can be difficult to deal with compositionally because you don't really have different elements, the color is similar, and not much is different. You do have patterns and shapes to play with. The strongest compositional tool we have with slot canyons, in my opinion, is light and dark areas. Let's look at some examples:
Close you eyes. Now open your eyes and look at this image. Make a mental note where your eyes go and how they travel through the image. You will notice that your eyes go to the brightest part of the image.
Since we know that our attention is attracted by the lightest part of the image we can place the lightest parts of the image in strong compositional positions to create a strong image.
Let's look at another example:
The lightest parts pull the viewer up into the image. Think in terms of light and dark when you compose your images. Place the brightest parts of the image in good places for compositional value.
Try this, your images may improve.
]]>
This is Horseshoe Bend near Page, Arizona. This scene cannot be photographed from the ground without using a really wide angle lens (yes, I know about panoramic photography - I am just talking about with one shot here). It may seem as if you have a lot of distance to play with but you don't, it is only the wide angle lens that makes it look that way. While wide angle lenses do make it possible to include the whole scene they also create other problems. Yes, we spoke about photography being all about tradeoffs last week. Well, here is another tradeoff. The wider the lens the more perspective distortion we get. Horizons bend. Trees lean and buildings are falling over backwards. So how do we fix those issues?
Raw image developers (software) will know what lens was used and make corrections accordingly. However, it is just not possible for those auto corrections to restore everything. In this image I had issues with my horizon. I am going to share a quick and easy fix with you.
Open the image in Photoshop. Make the images a bit smaller because you need space around the image. Well, don't make the image physically smaller just view it smaller (Control or Command and -). Select the whole image (Control or Command and A). Click on edit, transform, distort. Now place your mouse on one of the corners, click and hold. Now drag up. Use this technique to easily and quickly fix bending horizons. You can move your corners to the side as well to correct buildings falling over backwards too. This is a wonderful little trick. Oh, by the way. You have to do each side independently (not all at once).
There you go, try it.
]]>The best way to avoid noise is to shoot at low (native) ISO and to properly expose - give enough light. However, noise is often unavoidable because of the situations we face. Let me show you:
While this image may look bright enough it certainly did not start off looking this way. There where parts of the lower sky that was rather bright compared to the dark water below (especially in the dark areas). I exposed for the brightest spots in the sky but that left many parts of this image very dark. Those dark sections naturally contain more noise. When you brighter those dark areas the noise also gets amplified, to such an extent that the image can be ruined. This is one reason why I left Canon for Sony. Sony's sensors are just better at dealing with noise when we push our darks brighter. Now Canon people (I was one for years) mock us and the tests we do to show how noise is brought out when we increase the exposure of dark spots by claiming that nobody shoots like that and that we should rather expose better to begin with rather than to underexpose. Well, simply put, you do not always have that option.
Photography is all about tradeoffs. If I gave this image more light, sure my dark spots would have looked much better but then again the bright spots in the sky would have been blown. You have to pick one or the other (either brights or darks) to correctly expose, it is not possible with one image to expose both the bright areas and the dark areas at the same time (if the dynamic range exceeds certain boundaries). By the way, this image is not a good example of extreme dynamic range as it still has some latitude.
Either way, I now have an image where the dark areas are too dark. To fix this I just make those sections brighter, but wait, there is a tradeoff as doing so elevates the noise levels. The image is now much better looking, the bright parts are not too bright and the dark parts are now brighter and pleasing BUT I have noise in the darker areas which I don't want. How can we best deal with the noise selectively (locally)? I follow a two step process.
Firstly, I kill the noise using a duplicate layer. Every image editing software offers this ability. Don't over do it because remember the tradeoff is loss of sharpness and detail. Move the noise removal slider only far enough to just, just get rid of the noise and no further. Adobe Camera Raw also let's you automatically mask only the darker sections so that the loss of sharpness and detail is minimized elsewhere. However, I want more control. I now create a layer mask and simply paint the effect in only where needed (or you can paint it out where not wanted).
Secondly, I now sharpen the image. Once again, certain software give you the ability to mask in the sharpening so that it only effects areas where you have detail. I still want more control. I create a layer mask again and either paint the effect in or out to where I want or don't want the effect. The trick is to selectively and locally apply the noise reduction only to the areas needing it and sharpening only the areas requiring sharpening. Why? Because sharpening also comes with its tradeoffs. Sharpening makes the noise look worse.
So let's look at the image of today. The water received noise reduction but no sharpening. The other sections received sharpening but no noise reduction. The secret is to apply what you need to apply ONLY to the areas needing whatever you are doing. Smooth water and soft clouds (with no detail) don't need sharpening so don't apply it there.
]]>
Before I tell you how I remove flare in Photoshop let me first tell you what the two problems are that we are dealing with when we confront flare. Flare chances both the color AND the brightness of what is behind it. That is a two pronged problem that requires to different solutions. Depending on the nature of where the flare is I always try Photoshop's healing brush first (on a new duplicate layer). Sometimes that fixes it and I rejoice. At other times it just does not do a good job. I am not hesitant to do it over and over again. Sometimes that works. It is also possible to manually clone it out but this does not always work well. If both of these tools do not help I do the following:
Open the image in Photoshop. Create a blank new layer on top of your image.
Color pick a color with the color picker that is just outside of the flare - pick the color that resembles what the spot's color would have been had it not been for the flare. Take the paint brush and paint the picked color over the flare. If the flare is large and has multiple different colored objects just pick the right color for each object and pain over that object in that color. You can use multiple strokes using multiple colors in this way. Change the layer's blending mode to "color." There, the color of the flare is now gone. However, you are not going to like the result because the flare also increased the brightness of that spot. So now that spot is way to bright and still equally visible, distracting, and annoying. Can you tell that I don't like flare generally speaking?
All you need to do now is to change the brightness to match the surroundings. The are many ways to do so:
Dodge and burn
Adjustment layers
Curve layers
And on and on and on
I typically merge the "color" layer and the duplicate layer and take them into Adobe Camera Raw where I use the radiant brush to fix the brightness. With this brush I can set exposure, contrast, and all sorts of things. This is my preferred method rather than the ones mentioned in this list.
Lastly, I do final touchups with the healing brush or cloning which is now easier to do and typically involve smaller areas.
]]>
This is what I encountered while doing my best to get decent images of Horseshoe Bend near Page, Arizona. Good luck with doing serious photography. Now before we lose hope let's think about things first. In my experience, I have found the general tourist to be a different breed than serious photographers. Serious photographers can be really hard to deal with because they want that shot! I can tell you horror stories of photographers blindly ignoring their fellow photographers and willfully and deliberately just walk into the scene in front of everyone else or take up a position in such a place that everyone else's opportunity is ruined. When dealing with them start talking to them early on. Build friendships, talk shop. Create camaraderie with them. This makes things easier if you have to ask them later to also give you an opportunity.
Then there is the general tourist. I would like to break this group up into two groups. There are those who would gladly cooperate with you and move out of the way. They may even be willing to move even after being there first. Just ask them nicely to help you and they typically comply. Be nice to them. Work quickly and move on so that they can have their spot back. Thank them. The second group of general tourists typically arrive by bus and originate from countries where private space is minimal. They do not seem to have concern for others in terms of space and who stands where. When I see these people I just leave, I get out of their way. The good thing is that their bus leaves after a few minutes so I come back in a few minutes. However, when the light is good pausing my work is not a good option. In this case, I wander off to one side and shoot from there. They cannot follow me because they do not have the time; their bus will be leaving shortly. If I photograph a spot where many such buses frequent I will set up apart, to the one side just far enough that they are out of my shot. It also makes it easier to clone people out if I cannot eliminate them totally from my shot. Since I am further along they become smaller in the image.
I also set up where most people are not willing to go (effort quickly persuades people to give up). I choose nooks and crannies where there is only space for me. I don't get upset, they help me find vantage points or a different look that may not be that obvious had I stayed where everyone stays. Here is the result:
You can see that I am in a spot where no one else can join me. I climbed down into a little tight space. I am shooting in the opposite direction of where the people are and I got the shot, at least I think so.
]]>The couple chose this destination because it is meaningful to them. They either find it beautiful or they have had great memories there. Perhaps this place has special significance to them. Either way, there is a specific reason why they chose this place for their destination wedding.
Destination weddings, for this reason, are not just about the wedding, they are also about the place. They love this place.
The couple seeks to memorialize and combine their love for each other with their love for the destination.
If this is all true then how will it shape your photography of the wedding? Let me give you a clue. Why is a landscape and wildlife photographer writing about wedding photography? By the way, I have shot many, many weddings. Given our assumptions above and given that I am a landscape photographer (I will not mention wildlife photography again just in case that would provoke a bride to through her shoe at me), here are the conclusions I reach:
The couple wants the images to show the destination
The couple wants the images to showcase them in and as part of the destination
Therefore, shoot the normal wedding images (rings, kiss, etc.) but:
Treat the shoot as a landscape shoot, just place them in the scene
Capture the essence of the place with them in it
Show what makes this place special to them (including them) and your images will be special to them
Don't be afraid to go wide angle - this is landscape photography with people in
Here are two examples:
Wait for them to look at you.
Wait for the trunk to be in the mouth, or grabbing something. Fill the frame.
Wait for animal interaction. Show their social behavior. Create a connection.
Show them doing something.
]]>
Did I mention that wildlife photography also requires persistence? Here is my advice. I do not look at the animal without looking at them through the viewfinder. I follow them through the viewfinder and will wait no matter what. Yes, get comfortable ... I am constantly looking at them through the viewfinder. I am ready at any moment, fleeting as that moment may be.
Just be ready. A camera on your lap is not being ready. Ready means eye to the viewfinder. You never know what may happen. Patience and persistence may pay off. At times they don't pay off because nothing happens but you have to be ready for when something does happen.
Which image would you prefer to be looking at, one of a Zebra just standing there or one of these? Have your camera up to your eye, watch and be ready.
]]>In the second case, the animal is the main thing. We fill the frame with the animal. We can even go closer and photograph only parts of the animal. The secret here is that the frame needs to be filled. Once again, have space for the animal to move or look into. Try to establish eye contact with the animal. Get action if possible. Shoot from eye level (the animal's eye level) if possible.
Either shoot option one or option two as in between options don't tend to work for wildlife photographs.
]]>
Before actual photography should take place, watch a few videos to setup your autofocus system for wildlife. There are all sorts of trade-offs. Setting this up usually involves menu-systems which you do not want to be reading as the Lion focused on its prey. Have your camera setup, before the shoot. Set your focus tracking, its stickiness, and so forth.
Camera
I just leave the camera's settings on the lens' largest aperture and a fixed shutter speed of around 1,600th of a second. I set my ISO on auto. This way, I am guaranteed to use the largest aperture AND fast shutter speed. I want to freeze the action in front of the camera, and I also want to minimize the effects of camera shake. Choose a frame rate as high as possible. Use a silent shutter so as not to scare off the animals. Set the autofocus to "tracking."
Lens
Make sure the stabilization system is on and set to panning horizontally. This setting will allow you to pan with the animals as they move. I set the longest lens' focus limiter to 3m and beyond. This makes autofocus faster as the lens does not have to search the entire focus range but only from 3m out. My second rig's focus limiter is set to focus a near as possible. Remember from last week, I use one camera and lens for reach and another for closer animals. The autofocus is turned on.
Cameras
There are two main characteristics we look for when selecting a camera for wildlife photography. Firstly, the autofocus speed is very important. Some cameras focus slowly and they do not have the ability to lock onto and follow fast moving subjects. Get a camera with a reputation of being able to autofocus really quickly. Secondly, look at the camera's frame rate; how many images per second can the camera take. The higher the better. With wildlife things can happen very quickly. To get the right moment one has to take pictures as fast as you can.
As a bonus, many wildlife photographers use APS-C cameras; crop sensored cameras. This gives you a narrower field of view. Since animals typically remain far away from us we need to be able to "reach" them to fill the frame with the animal. The narrower field of view gives lenses extra reach. A 400mm lens effectively becomes a 600mm lens on a crop camera. A recommendation for Sony shooters is the A6400. It is not stabilized but the long lenses have stabilization.
Lenses
One can never have too much reach for wildlife. On the other hand, large animals can come right up to you. Zooms can therefore be nice to have. Personally, I use two cameras when photographing wildlife. On one of them, I cover from 200-600mm, on the other one I cover 70-200mm. This way I am covered almost for anything. Placing the 200-600mm on an APS-C (crop camera) gives me the coverage of 300-900mm. Unfortunately, that leaves me with a gap between 200mm and 300mm which I just have to live with. Long lenses are expensive. The bigger the aperture the more expensive the lens (the heavier too). These large aperture lenses give you the ability to use faster shutter speeds. If you have lots of money and take photography seriously you may want to invest in a 500mm or 600mm f. 4 or f. 4.5. These large apertures blur your backgrounds much nicer to make the animal or bird stand out from a silky smooth background. For the budget conscious, a 150-600mm zoom or thereabouts does the job. Sigma and Tamron have well-priced models out in this range. If the rumors are correct Sony may have a 200-600mm f. 5.6-6.3 out or announced by the time you read this.
Memory cards and batteries
Take many memory cards. When shooting at 10 or so frames per second your memory cards will fill up quickly. A Lion or a kill can happen at any moment. Check how much space you have left from time to time. If you don't have 200 or more shot available before your card is full swap it out. The last thing you want is to run out of space just as the Lion grabs its prey. Also, check battery levels from time to time. Swap out your battery before it gets too low for the same reason as mentioned above.
We will talk about camera and lens settings next week.
How can we maximize the smoothness of color gradations? How does image editing affect the quality of color gradation?
Here are some tips to help you to get the most out of your color gradations:
Shoot raw. Raw files are taken at a higher bit depth than JPG which are only 8 bit files.
Covert your raw files to 16 bit tiff files. We do not want to be saving to JGP files to the very end.
Do all your editing work with the tiff files. Only save to JPG once you are done will all editing. I save both tiff and JPG files.
Give your exposure enough light (at least in the area where color gradation is). Color gradations become grainy when the exposure does not have enough light.
Feature color gradations as such images are often very pleasing and calm. Include a large portion of the sky. Make sure there are lots of color. Boost the vibrance of the image a bit to enhance the color.
]]>
This is the kind of image I am talking about. This kind of light and color is what I am willing to wait for; willing to walk back in the dark for. You can see that it is already darish (bear in mind that this is a longer exposure which makes it look lighter than what it really is; by now the foreground is getting quite dark). This is not a place friendly to night walking as there are rocks everywhere and often no clear path is visible. If I am not going to get nice light I would much rather head back right as the sun disappears. Here are a few things to look out for that persuade me to stay longer.
The presence of high cirrius clouds (not thick socked in clouds)
These clouds are fairly thin (sometimes thick cloud banks can also produce nice color but I prefer clouds like in this image)
No low clouds where the sun is going down (this is really important)
I like clouds that are between me and the sun (not behind me)
Clouds behind me can often light up nicely as well but they may lack the vibrancy found in clouds between me and the sun
Don't be afraid to stay longer if there is any promise of something special.
]]>Can you find the image that tells the story of the place? If someone wants to get a broad view of the place, know what to expect there ... can you make an image that conveys that? Yet, we don't want to end up with a travel log image. We are landscapers, fine art photographers. We want to capture an image that is still art. Is it possible to combine capturing an image that summarizes a place with one that is still art? Is such an image still able to capture and show mood, mystery, and beauty? Can such an image be taken on the fringes of the day when most people looking for such an image will not even be up to see?
To me this image is such an image. It captures what you will find at the Quiver tree forest. It summarizes the place. Lots of rocks and Quiver trees and nothing else. Yet the image is artsy, has some mood, and is still strong compositionally. Sometimes an image can be so artsy that it becomes abstract. People can look at an image and have no idea where the image was taken or which place it represents. An image that summarizes a scene is unmistaken of the scene. When it is seen by people who have been there they should smile and call out the name of the place. Yet, as stated before, it should still be a quality landscape image.
Such an image shows what is mostly there. It shows how the place looks. It usually shows a large section of the place, the terrain. They give you an overview of the place. This is the image that you will use to introduce a place with.
Try to also get artsy images that summarize a place.
]]>
If you remember from last week, I had no tripod. So I am shooting from a low angle once again. My camera is on a rock for stabilization. Let's talk composition. You can see that there are many of these trees in the distance. When there are too many of any element in the scene we have to find something different as something has to stand out. This tree called me over because It was by itself. It became the main element in the foreground. I created balance with it by placing the sun (or the brightest clouds just after the sun went down) on the far right. The color in the sky adds drama and beauty.
Every landscape image needs to have something stand out. Sometimes that means we need to go closer. At other times it means we need to move further away. Either way, make something stand out.
]]>During our 2018 Namibian workshop we started shooting at the Quiver tree forest. I noticed that one of our clients did not look too happy. Here we are standing in front of an amazing scene and the clouds seem to want to work with us and he looked sad. I asked him what was wrong, "I forgot my tripod on the vehicle which has left to go refuel," he replied. Without much thinking I removed my camera from my tripod and handed it to him to use for the sunset shoot. We had a happy client.
I however had a problem. We had a wonderful sunset that night. The clouds lit up and it was beautiful. I was experiening this gorgeous sunset in the Quiver tree forest of Namibia without a tripod. The light levels were low when the best color showed up. This required slow shutter speeds which in turn required the use of a tripod which I did not have. How was I going to shoot and get good images?
I had to shoot from a low angle. I started to look for rocks I can press my camera down on for stabilization. Rocks became my tripod that night. It made me look for and see different kind of images that I probably would not have been looking for had I had my tripod. This was a great learning experience for me. You should try it. Take only one lens or force certain limits on yourself to force yourself to look, see, and operate differently, out of your comfort zone. You might just grow and learn too.
Here is an early example, before the clouds got color. I am very low down shooting looking up. Try shooting from a low angle. Go right down, very low. Look at the world from down there and see what you get. Get into the habit of exploring all angles.
]]>Paths or roads
Tracks
Placement of elements where one leads to the other
Mostly though the depth that photographers create comes from below. The elements are part of the bottom of the image, they are on land or water. However, depth can also be achieved from clouds above. anytime we see any sort of lines in a scene we should use them to create depth. They are powerful to pull the viewer into the image.
The clouds help to take the viewer deep into the image. They point into the image. They lead to the back, center of the image. Shooting through the rocks on the near left and right also creates a "path" through the middle to where the clouds are going. We really need to think before we shoot. We need to forget about the scene in front of us and think visually. We should learn to see photographically. We need to look for and find what creates depths, bearing in mind that depth can also come from above.
When depth comes from above (due to cloud formations) we need to do everything in our power to make them stand out. The best tool is often a polarizing filter. Rotate is to make the clouds stand out and pop but do not over do it as we don't want the sky to be too dark (if we are not shooting a storm or a scene where a dark sky adds to the mood). We need to think about how best to combine everthing to create depth, harmony, balance, and a pleasant scene.
]]>
Here you can clearly see what I am talking about. The tree and the sun on the right are heavy visually. In order to achieve balance something has to be on the left, preferably in the distance. To give the plant on the left more prominence I went for a low shooting position which makes the plant look taller. The two trees are now more balanced.
You often hear me say the many good landscape images have depth. They pull the viewer into the image rather than looking at it from one side to the other. In this image we have what looks like a path going into the image. It is a patch of ground that does not have any growth on it and not many rocks either. This path is also bathed in warm light. To help ephasize this path I lightened it in post processing. The goal is to lead the viewer into the image. The viewer needs to want to stand there or walk into the image.
Where we have balance and depth we typically have a nice image.
]]>
The sun does not always have to be on the horizon to be included in an image. Place the sun on the edge of a branch or a building or any hard edge, stop down (use a small aperture) and you have a sun star. Be on the lookout to use the sun in your images. Pay close attention to the placement of the sun. Since it is so strong compositionally the sun needs to be placed in a good position. Here the sun was placed where the right thirds line and the top thirds line intersect which is a very strong position.
The rest of the image also needs to be well thought out. Watch the boundary of the image to make sure that it is clean, try not to nick anything. Notice that I do not have another tree touching the boundary. In this image, the trees on the far left bring balance to the weight of the tree with the sun. When the sun is included in the image, especially a low sun, we usually find nice warm light. You might want to warm up your white balance just a bit.
Pay attention to where the sun is and how it impacts your image. Consider placing the sun in your image.
]]>You have also heard me say that we need to look for that which is different, that which stands out and focus on that. In this scene, I opted not to make the Quiver trees my central point of interest. Rather, I focused on this plant:
It is clear what the central point of interest is. To make it clear these plants are prominently placed. I have created a sun star to draw the eye there. This is where the action is. Yet, you can also see the environment around the plant. The rocks and other trees build the scene. Now there is a second reason why I came to this particular spot to photograph instead of shooting closer to the Quiver trees; people. I was getting people walking into my image. I had to separate myself from the crowd in order to get a clear shot.
Isolating a clear center point of interest often defines a good image. Isolating ourselves from others often makes that possible. The exception is when you want to include people in the image. In my case, I don't often do that even though that makes great images (without model releases I cannot use these images). Another good reason to isolate yourself from the crowd is to get different images from what everybody else has.
The next time you get to a place where there are lots of people isolate yourself; get away. It may just yield images others don't have. Always remember to also isolate something in the image to make it stand out. People should not wonder what to look at when they see our images. Something specific should draw the eye.
P.S. I did other opportunities to shoot the Quiver trees and will talk about them in the next few weeks.
]]>
What also draws me to this image is the color. These walls and the door were painted nicely years ago but they still make the scene colorful. By far, though, the bright light on the sand does it for me. I increased that light's intensity in post. The white balance was warmed too, especially where the brighter light is.
In post processing it is often localized adjustments that separates the pro from the amateur. Clearly, we don't want to warm up the blueish wall on the left. We want that wall cold because it helps to create the mood and contrast with the brighter light of the sand. So we warm up the brighter light, and the door frame and the door and even the rest of the sand to varying degrees but we leave the blueish objects cold. This requires localized adjustments which are painted in using masks.
Much of the mystery of this image was exentuated in post processing. Play around with your images and see if you can add mood and mystery to those that lend themselves there to.
]]>
On the one hand we have this dry harsh desert scene which is visible through the window. The sun is threatening a warning. There is a sea of sand everywhere. The building has already surcomed. On the other hand there is the bath, perhaps a reminder of water, of life and sustenance. This is a scene filled with contrasting objects.
It is an interesting scene filled also with triangles. The ceiling forms a triangle and so does the sand. There is an implied triangle between the front of the image and the two walls forming two sides of this triangle. Lastly, the door, the sun and the bath also form a triagle. This is another scene where I deliberately used a sunstar to help drive the concept home.
When you find constracting objects start looking for ways to exploit them to create an image that tells a story or asks questions.
]]>Once in a while I look at a scene which just begs for some softness, some mystery and mood. This image called out to me asking me to apply the Orton effect:
This image has a lot of broken glass. Broken glass should be sharp; there is no way I am going to blur that. I also did not want to blur the floor, the ceiling, or the sand. However, the light entering the windows is where I felt I wanted mood, mystery, and softness. This is where I applied the Orton effect. In Luminar (software) they have a filter that does it for you. However, it will add the effect over the entire image, which clearly I did not want. Luckily, Luminar has the ability to paint it on just where you want it (masking).
What do you think? Does it add something to this image?
]]>
This image was created by simply moving around until the sun was behind a hard edge. However, as you can see only a few windows are clear (or clean). My options were limited. I chose this window because to me what makes this image is the other clear window through which you can see the desert landscape outside. Photography requires that we are always aware of even small details. This is one reason I always use a tripod. It slows me down and since the camera is not moving it affords me the opportunity to really study the image before taking it.
Always move around. Check out different perspectives, different heights, closer or further away - just explore. Sunstars can be created indoors very successfully. You can use any hard edge and buildings offer many hard edges such as doors and windows. Be creative.
]]>
There are a few ways to deal with images such as this one. Firstly, use a modern camera with a newer sensor as their dynamic range are superb. I use a Sony A7R II and love the dynamic range I get. Just two days ago I was photographing next to another photographer and comparing the historams on our two cameras. She has an APS-C camera (crop sensor). Her histogram was showing clippings on both the dark and light sides, in other words the scene was too contrastly for her camera to handle. Mean while my camera still had some space on both ends of the historam for even more contrast. Secondly, learn how much data can be recovered while processing raw files specific to your camera. By knowing this you will have an idea what is still shootable and what is not when things get blown a bit. Lastly, you can always use HDR (taking a few images at different exposures and blending them in post). Remember, light is not as bright on the fringes of the day, so you might what to shoot then if the contrast is too much during the rest of the day.
What is crucial is that your final images cannot clip whites or blacks. There has to be detail at both ends of the spectrum. How about another example?
Here we have multiple door frames creating the repeating pattern. To get them to draw the viewer into the image strongly we use light. Light is coming into this scene through a window on the left in the last room in the distance. That room is out of sight but the light it spills into the scene is just what we need.
This light was not as strong as it appears in the image. I lightened that light to draw the viewer into the scene. The combination of the repeating pattern with the brighter light in the distance seems irresistable to the viewer. This is what we want, pulling the viewer right into the scene. The repeating pattern is what gives this scene interest.
So always look for and use repeating patterns. You can also find them in nature.
Here is another example:
Just look at the light coming into the room on the other side of the doorway. This place is ful of great textures everywhere. Many walls have multiple layers of paint on or wall paper.
As usual, let's talk composition. The bright light in the other room through the doorway is visually very strong, it pulls the viewer's eyes into the scene. However, we want to balance that with something on the right. The door and window frame in the sand does the trick. Notice that the light section is mostly higher up in the image while the door and window frame is in the lower section of the image. This composition creates balance and flow without being in competition with each other.
I have not included direct sunlight in this image as that makes things difficult to control. We will look at other images in the coming weeks that contain very strong direct sunlight, but more about that later. Make sure to use a smallish aperture as everything needs to be sharp. Always be careful when exploring sites like this, there may be splinters, broken glass, and other objects waiting to injure you. Wear good shoes as you do not know what is lurking under the sand. Clean your equipment every day out here since deserts and wind are friends and where there are sand and wind there is a lot of dust. Dust is no friend of your equipment.
]]>
Also pay attention to the composition. The sea plant is compositionally stong. The bright sunlight on the top left is also strong. Both of these objects were frames in such a way to offset each others and to create balance. The sea plant introduces some color on the bottom section of the image. Speaking of color, I love images where there are warm colors and cold colors in the same image. This sky really creates a nice mood in my mind.
In Luminar (software) you can boost both warm and cold cold colors at the same time. Don't be afraid to make your warms a bit warmer and your colds a bit colder. With modern camera sensors you can often shoot into the sun without clipping the image (never look into the sun).
So go ahead, don't just shoot, first walk around and see what you can find to add interest. Once found think about your composition. Most of all, go right up to it. Put a wide angle lens on. Shooting in this way makes your foreground object look bigger compared to the background. It gives the image interest and adds prominence to the foreground.
]]>
This foreground gives the image depth. The two rocks form lines that leads the viewer's eyes to the sun. They tie everything together. I would have wanted to move to the right just a bit so as to make the point where the rocks meet to be right under the sun. However, I could not because I was one of the instructors and had to consider other photographers. We always give our clients the best spots and would not hesitate to move if one of them wanted a certain position.
Always think composition! Use elements in the scene to connect, to lead to each other, to point in a direction, to form lines. Be on the lookout for lines, for anything that can direct the viewer's eyes where you want them to go. Moving to the left or to the right, even for some distance, is not going to change the background too much. So once you have your background forget about it and go looking for a matching foreground. It is often the foreground that provides the balance, the lines, more interest, and ties things together.
Do the scouting before the light gets nice. When the sun is about to set is not the time to be looking for a foreground. Line up a number of good foregrounds when the light is still harsh and then use them all when the light gets nice.
So why do lines work so well in landscape photography? In nature we look at the scene in a three dimentional evironment. We see depth. When we look at an image of the same scene we are looking at a flat two dimentional image. We do not see the depth that was in the scene. In order to dupe the viewer to see the depth (that does not exist on a two dimentional medium) we have to create the illusion of depth. One of the best ways to do that is to make use of lines. The human brain sees the lines and interprets them as depth.
When you see lines, jump all over them and include them in your shots.
]]>
The little space I am in is very small. I am right at the end of the arch. My tripod legs are totally flat and my camera is only a few inches above the rock. I am shooting at 16mm on a full frame Sony A7R II. Most people shoot through arches, so do I. Once you have that image why not try something more creative?
As you can see from the composition I choose, I did not allign the camera with the center of the arch (right underneath the center). I wanted the arch to form the anchor on the right side. I liked the way the light is still hitting the arch higher up. The arch takes the viewer into the scene. Various other less important lines help move the viewer into the scene. Firstly, we have the line in the rock about a third from the right edge. Secondly, we have another less prominent line moving into the image starting just above the left bottom corner of the image. This composition just works well for me. It is different, more creative. Even with this composition the arch is still used as a frame for the image.
Do your best to find different perspectives rather than just shooting through arches.
]]>
This is not my favorate image but it will serve us well to teach us about balance and weight. The mountain peak in die distance on the right is obviously much larger and heavier than the rock in the front left of the image. Yet because of their distance to us the rocks on the left balance out the peak on the right. This image is balanced both by objects and the weight they carry.
Had the rocks on the left not been there this image would have been a failure. It would have been unbalanced. Too much weight would have been on the right hand side. Similarly, had the rocks on the left been there without a peak on the right the image would have been too heavy on the left. I used the rocks on the left to bring about balance and to distribute the weight.
Be on the lookout for balance. Place something in the foreground to balance something in the distance. Think about visual weight and go for balance.
]]>
Yes, the sun was really down. All the photographers were shooting from a vantage point on the ground (where the lighter colored soil is)(they are just out of the image on the right). I did not want to loose the sun. So I grabbed my gear and started running up the rock. It does not look it but I have gained quite a bit of elevation here. The trees in the image are not very tall trees but they are certainly taller than people. That will give you a bit of perspective as to how high I walked up on the rock.
By gaining decent altitude I changed my angle to the sun, or more importantly, to the horizon. This enabled me to see the sun again and I could continue to shoot. No other photographer got this shot. Before the sun is low and light gets nice look around. Are there any safe ways around to gain altitude? If so, plan your shoot so that when the sun sets you elevate your position in order to make the sun reappear again. I may just give you another few minutes of light.
I think the image was well worth the effort. The night before I did the same thing on another rock formation. I run up the steep rockface with my heavy gear. When I reached the top I was exhausted and panted heavily. I moved quickly to setup and shoot. There were a number of French tourists sitting around on the same rock admiring the setting sun. Apparently my heavy breathing was disturbing their tranquil moment for they complainted to each other bitterly about my intrusion and panting. Well, I am sorry that I ruined their moment but perhaps the image will make a few other people's moments when it appears in a travel magazine, a bill board, or brochure.
]]>
Typically I want to go with the color and where the action is. In this image the action and color is in the top third of the image. Why then would I devote more than half of the image to the bottom part of the image? Before we explore the answer to that question, does the image work for you as it is? I actually like the image a lot, for me it works rather well. Why do I think so?
Had the rock in the foreground been just one rock with no lines or interesting shapes or textures this image would have been a total failure. What makes this image work for me and the reason why I was drawn to compose the image as it is are the lines and the texture. Curved lines are dymanic and interesting. The horizontal line curves up pointing to the sun. The line coming in from the right also stops underneath the sun. The lines work together with the sun. The lines break up the vast rock section. They add interest.
The second reason I was drawn to this composition is the texture. The rock in the foreground has lots of course texture. It creates an interesting base for the image. The viewer's eyes are lured back to the foreground to explore the texture and the patterns in the rock. The sun pulls the eyes back up to itself, and so the viewer's eyes go back and forth. This is what we want to create. We don't want the viewer to leave the image. We don't want the viewer to only look at the image from side to side (flat image). We want them to look into the image, to be drawn into the scene. This is exactly what this image does. The foreground and the background pull the viewer's attention back and forth.
As landscape photographers we should play with lines, shapes, and texture more often.
]]>
Other than the tree on the right there does not appear to be much life around in this place. The tree on the left has already given up the fight to survive in this harsh environment. Having both trees in the scene tell a story and speak of life and death. But what if there is no visible life in the scene to capture? How do we then show life?
Movement shows life. Movement speaks of change. Movement brings the dune to life because the dune is walking. Slowly the dune is marching along from left to right. Movement adds action, drama and life. The very conditions that make it unpleasent for us to be there and witness this change is what makes for better photographs. Sure the wind was howling. Yes we got sand blasted. Oh, did I mention sand in our eyes and in our gear? The wind is cold. Events such as this can be outright miserable.
But this is the very time to be there, to photograph. This is when we get to see moving dunes rather than dune statues posing as dead objects just sitting there. Brave the elements because it is then when our images show movement and life (always be safe and place safety first). Even when shooting dead sand try to show movement because movement shows life.
Perhaps show some tracks on the sand
Photograph a tuft of grass sticking out of the sand
Work with the ripples in the sand
Rejoice when the wind comes up and capture movement
Go during windy times, stormy times (as long as it is safe to do so)
Movement and life lights up most dead scenes. Look for it and show it.
]]>This is a great pitty because people add so much to an image.
People help to provide a sense of scale
People can add emotion and mood
People can communicate so many things (triump, not giving up, being challenged, perserverance, joy, peace, etc.)
People in the scene can help you to imagine the experience and in a vicarious way to be there and wonder about being there
Would this image be anything without the person in it? It is the person that makes the image. He helps talk about the wind, the blowing sand, and the struggle of scaling a sand dune. He speaks of human endeavour. He tells us how high this dune is.
In an image like this his placement in the image is important compositionally. Here are a few suggestions on placing people in your images:
It is usually better to have them move into the image rather than moving out of it (direction of movement)
It is better to have people look into the image rather than out of the image
Follow regular compositional guidelines (I have placed him on the rule of thirds)
Know when to break compositional guidelines and when it will work (if he or she is running away from danger it is perfectly fine to have the model running out of the image; we will all pray that he or she makes it)
Try to capture action, emotion, or drama, or a sense of imense scale. In other words, just having a person in the image for the sake of having one in the image may not add much to the image photographically. The person's presence needs to add value and interest to the image.
Try to tell a story
If there are multiple people in the image do your best to include an odd number of people (unless there are many people in the image)
So let me talk to myself - photograph more people in landscape images!
]]>Here is an image that I have used before in another blog on another topic. For today, though, look at the curved line the river makes. Note how your eyes follow the river to meander through the scene. How much more interesting is this image because the line is curved versus if it would have been a straight line?
In this scene the river is a major component of that which makes this image what it is. The river is indeed a major component of the scene. But what if these curves are not so obvious?
On a recent workshop in Namibia we were on the famous Deadvlei pan. This place is famous for the dunes and the Camel Thorn trees. There is no river or other obvious curved lines in the foreground going into the image. The point of this blog is to remind us to always be looking down, not just up and around. Always be aware of the foreground, of anything different. As I was looking down, searching for something in the foreground to add interest I found this curved line:
Most people who come here for photography just do not look for these foreground elements. We are often absorbed by the grandeur, the major elements of the scene, and what the scene is famous for that we forget to look down; to scour the foreground for interest. When you look at this image you clearly see the curved line which makes this image more dynamic and interesting but if you were there with me you would probably not have seen it or noticed it. It did not stand out quite this much. The curved line's brightness was just a tad darker than the rest of the foreground. I lightened the whiter crust and darkened the darker crust to emphasize the curve, to bring it out.
Whenever you see any curved lines in the scene try to work with them in your images as they add a lot to most images. Use post processing to make them more visible.
P.S. Consider joing us on a workshop. You may just learn a lot, take your photography to the next level, visit a wonderful place and come away with awesome images. Click on workshops on the menu bar for more information. I work with the famed photography Don Smith in these workshops.
]]>The scene is dark because of omonous storm clouds. The sun is shining on a patch of cloud because of a hole in the cloud cover. That patch of lit cloud is blown and the dymanic range of that spot and the rest of the scene is too much for the camera to handle. The clouds are moving reasonably fast as this is a storm. In cases like this I have successfully used a long shutter speed to solve the problem. A long shutter speed allows that patch to move during the exposure so that the bright spot's exposure is lowered (it moves so the bright spot's position changes so that the same position in the frame is not bright throughout the whole exposure time).
A thin layer of nicely colored cirrius clouds are starting to rise above the mountain I am photographing. This is the perfect case for using a neutral density filter to get a long shutter speed. As the clouds move up into the frame during the expore they create streaks of clouds pointing right to the mountain. This needs to be pre-visiualized and created with a very long shutter speed.
A small stream is gushing over some rocks or a waterfall creates a bit of mist. We want to axagerate the flowing water or the mist. So we use a long shutter speed to allow more time for the camera to capture the flow or the moving mist. The longer the shutter speed the more exagerated the effect will be.
Sand is faintly blowing and you want to show the effect and exagerate it. A long shutter speed does the trick.
Here is an example. The wind is blowing the sand. The sun is coming up and shining through between two sand dunes and lighting the blown sand up. The longer I leave the shutter open the more blown sand the camera will capture - thereby exagerating the effect. Nothing else in the image is moving so a long shutter speed is not going to effect anything else in the image.
Think more about the shutter speed and using it creatively in your landscape imagery.
]]>How do you get an image of a place that captures the essence of that place? How do we make images that scream out the place it is from? These are images that are typical of the place, of its character. Yet, as photographers, we need to be creative. We do not want to display and image that has been shot to death, the same old thing. We want to capture the essence of the place while yet being fresh and new. We also need to capture images that scream out our own personal style. Just like someone should be able to look at any picture that captured the essense of a place and know where the image is from our images should also be recognizalbe simply because of our own developed style. A winner is an image that captures the essense of a place creatively and also places our style on display.
Here are a few tips to capture the essence of a place:
Look around and observe the place
Ask yourself what the place is famous for
Ask yourself what about the scene screams out the answer to the previous question
Find a composition that captures or amplified the answer to the previous question
What is the essence of a desert? Sand, dry, hot, parched, lifeless or struggling life ... Now find a composition that showcases that ...
To me, this image just screams everything we just discussed. Yet it is not the typical image of Deadvlei, Namibia. It is unique and different. It conveys what the desert is all about.
The essence of a place is that which summarizes it in one image. Grab that.
]]>
My camera is at a low position again to show of the crust and the cracks. I position myself in such a way that I can take advantage of the tree's shadow. The shadow is what gives this image its dark and hopeless mood. It leads to the tree and the sun. It starts spread out at the base of the image but then aims straight for the tree.
I want to encourage you to look for shadows, to play with them, and to use them creatively. Even look for faint shadows. The shadows in this image were not this dark. I darkened them in post processing to make them stand out. I wanted a constrasty image. Darkening the shadows did the trick. We often look at the features in the landscape to determine our composition but have you considered to use shadows?
]]>As much as I hate flare, flare has it's place in some images and may actually add to the image. I find, for me, such images are desert and dry images. The flare empahizes the heat and the harshness of the landscape. The flare almost makes you see the sun burn down. For these scenes I want to create flare deliberately. To do so I use a wide angle lens and place the sun to one side so that it angles across the scene. Here is an example:
I like the color spots the flare makes with the other beams of light. It adds drama and the other elements already mentioned. Compositionally, I used the tree's shadow as a lead-in line that goes right to the sun. The other trees and clouds offer interest to look at in the rest of the image. To create the feeling of harsh, dry, hot, and almost lifelessness I placed my camera at a low angle to exaggerate the dry and cracked up desert crust. I wanted to feature the crust as it helps tell the story.
Read your scene and think about what look and mood you want to achieve. You may just need to remove flare when it does not suit the scene but you may want to include it when it adds to the scene. You decide ...
]]>Have you thought about featuring the sun? No, I am not talking about the classic image of a huge red sun at sunset taken with a long telephoto lens. How about featuring the sun in landscape photography using landscape lenses rather than very long telephotos. Yes, yes, I know people shoot a lot of landscape photography using those very long lenses; I do as well. Here is our image of today:
What do you think? The sun is a main feature of this image. Because it is a large sun star it impacts a large part of the image. You may notice that even though the sun is featured I still applied last week's recipe of obtaining depth. You have a strong foreground, a middle-ground, and the dunes and the sun in the background.
Last week I mentioned how to control the size of the middle-ground by moving your camera up or down (height). In this image, there is a lot of space between the log and the background. If I moved the camera lower that space would have been less. I chose this height to shoot from for two reasons. First, if I lowered the camera to cut down on the middle-ground space the branch on the log which points up would have gone into the background and even into the sky. That is something we want to avoid. Second, the rays of the sun star really work well with this empty space. The space is not really empty, the rays fill the space. Everything in this image complement each other.
I have written a lot about sun stars lately but for those of you who are new, I will just say shortly that a sun star is created when the sun is behind a hard edge (halfway behind it) and you shoot using a small F.Stop.
Don't be afraid to make the sun the main attraction of the image. Keep safety in mind. Never look into the sun, not even through a DSLR's viewfinder. Doing so will damage your eyes. Mirrorless cameras have no such issues because you are looking at a screen.
]]>
The foreground in this image is very strong. The log has a lot of character. It is also large in size. In fact, it takes up about 50% of the image (bottom to top). It is worth it because it is so interesting. Next, we have additional trees forming the middle-ground. Lastly, there are the dunes and the moon. The sky is also a nice color.
What we want to achieve is for the viewer's eyes to start at the bottom and work their way up the image to the moon and back. Ideally, we want the viewer to repeat this pattern over and over. The longer we can keep the viewer cycling through the image in this way to better the image. If a viewer just looks at the image in one glance and is done, the image is poor. Amateurs mostly take images that are lateral, the viewer looks at it from one side to the other and they are done. Professionals make images that draw the viewer into the image from the bottom to the top.
Not all landscape images follow this recipe and such images can still be great. However, this is a simple recipe that works like clockwork. It is simple and just works. So how do we make such images?
Find a nice location
Search the foreground for something different, something that stands out
Walk around it from a distance so that you do not put any footprints in any potential image. We walk around it to see which angle will work the best.
Pick an angle of attack and move in closer
With a wide angle lens get right up to the foreground element
Move the height of the camera up and down looking at how that impacts the middle-ground. Lower angles minimized the middle-ground while more height maximizes it. Please your camera at a height that works well with what is in your middle-ground.
Make sure that your background balances well with your foreground
Watch your edges to make sure they are clean. We do not want bright things on the edges if we can help it
Follow this recipe and your landscape images will probably improve.
]]>This is difficult to do because it is a fairly small area and you only have to work with what is there. It is not as if you can walk this way or that way and dramatically change your vantage point. It is not as if you can find wildflowers or something strong in the foreground to create something different. This foreground does not change. Others have already shot the little differences in the crust of the ground. Let us look at an image:
This image classically represents Sossusvlei. Yet, there is something about this image that I have not seen in many other images from Sossusvlei. This image has a distinctive mood that creates a sense of wonder. The image is very simplistic. So, what makes this image different and what is it about the simplicity that gives it some wonder?
Firstly, this image was taken in August, the windy month. This adds to the mood. Just look at the sand being blown around in the background. Many people do not go to Sossusvlei in August for photography but I like the effects the blown sand makes. Being sandblasted is not a pleasant experience but it is worth it for the images you can get.
Secondly, the timing of the shot is really important. The wind blows in gusts. You want to time the taking of the image so that there is a strong gust in the background but prior to the gust getting to you. You want to take the image right as the gust begins in the distance. If you wait too long the sand just saps all the contrast out of the image. It looks like a dirty rag was in front of the lens. So, you want the action of the sand in the air in the background but you also want your foreground to be clear.
Thirdly, and as usual, go early. This image was taken before sunrise. The faint clouds in the sky make this image. It adds to the mood. It adds color.
Lastly, place something strong in the foreground.
When you get to the place you want to photograph look around. Spend some time just studying the place. Look where the action is (wind, color, interesting objects and elements). Shoot the action, even in landscape imagery.
Go for simplicity but create some sense of wonder.
]]>Towards the end of the tour, the guide took out his scoop to throw some sand into the air. Yes, that is how those light shaft images are made. A beam of light shines but it can be fairly faint so sand is thrown into the beam of light which makes the beam a lot more dramatic. He was so excited about the beam of light. The other photographers also enjoyed photographing it as much as the guide did enhancing it with the sand. My eyes went up higher to see if I can spot where the beam of light was coming from. I changed positions a few time until I could see the sun peak through a crack. There you have it, the sun on a hard edge. That is the recipe for a sun star. Yes, lately I am shooting a lot of sun stars. However, you do not ofter see slot canyon images with sun stars, so I just could not resist the opportunity.
The guide and the other photographers could not understand why I was not shooting the beam of light and why my camera was pointed as it was. Once I showed them my image on the back of my camera they were amazed. The guide remarked that he had never seen an image of a slot canyon with a sun star. Well, here it is:
The canyon itself is not so great here but the sun star came out very nicely. I was going for something different, a little unique. Everybody shoots the shapes, the shades of color, and of course the famous light beams. Why not try to get something different? Be creative, play around, have fun, try something new. You never know if it will work or not till you try it.
This is not my favorite image but I still like it.
]]>First order of business is to walk to the edge of the crowd where there are fewer people. It does not help to walk too far away because then you also walk away from the scene that you want to photography, the very scene that the crowds have come to see. Next, I look around in search of a way to get a clear shot without people in my image. I look for height, a little mound, anything that will enable me to shoot over the people. When that does not work I look to go where others are not willing to go or where just one person fits in. I found this spot and jumped down a little cliff where I knew no one could join me.
I set up my tripod and gear. Hoards of people were constantly walking by behind me. A keen person stopped to look at what I was shooting. He waited and waited for me to take the shot, but I just stood there. About 8 or so minutes went by until he eventually asked, "is there a right time to take the shot?" He could not understand why I was waiting. The light was nice, the scene was great, what was I waiting for? I explained that I was waiting for the sun to touch to the horizon so that it will make a sun star (just use a small F.Stop).
That moment eventually came but now there were what seemed like millions of bugs flying around. With the sun right behind the bugs, they lit up and were going to ruin my shot. To make matters worse I was struggling to get rid of flare. A lady took a position in, just a few feet from me. She was just sitting there and watching the sunset. She must have sensed my frustration. Perhaps I was mumbling to myself about all the challenges. She looked at me and asked, "it is a beautiful scene, what is the matter?" I was frantically at work trying to putt it all together for I had but a few moments before the sun would disappear. I told her briefly about the annoying bugs and the flare. She smiled, took a deep breath and with a lot of satisfaction said, "some scenes are just not meant to be photographed, they are just meant to be enjoyed." That is not what a photographer wants to hear, at least not this one. Here is what I putt together:
As you can see, I am taking this image from a place where no one will join me. The sun is rather bright, so I bracketed to blend images in post-processing. I had to spend a lot of time getting rid of bugs in post-processing too. In the end, I feel that it was worth the work; I like the image a lot.
So what makes this image a nice image? How do you put together a complete image that seems to have it all?
Try to get away from crowds of people. Including a person or two in your image may be a good thing. Having loads of people in a landscape image just does not go over to well; unless the people are part of your story.
This image has a strong foreground that helps to give depth.
The V-shape of the foreground is exactly what the river and the scene needs; they complement each other.
The river forms an S-shape which is always very dynamic in photographs. The viewer's eyes will follow it through the image.
The sun star is placed in a good place in the frame compositionally and is aided the space the bend in the river makes there.
There are a few clouds in the sky so that it is not a boring sky.
The image has some drama with the high cliffs.
There is a lot of thinking that goes into putting an image together. It took me over an hour of walking around to find this spot. I had to find a spot that would not only shield me from having people in the image but that would also work well compositionally. I waited for the sun to be at the right spot to create the sun star. Lastly, it took a lot of photoshop work to exterminate the bugs and to get rid of the flare.
Sometimes it just takes a lot of hard work to putt it all together. Was it worth it? I think so, what do you think?
]]>When I shoot this kind of panorama I do not bother to use any special panoramic equipment. I just get the tripod as level as I can without spending too much time on doing so. The software these days do such a good job at stitching the sequence together that I do not want to carry the extra weight of panorama equipment. I will state that I do pay a bit of a price sometimes for my lack of using special pano equipment in that I need to crop the image a bit because that is what happens what the camera is not really level. I have thought of buying a panning clamp because that way I can use my ball head to make my camera level in a few seconds and then use the panning clamp for panning. In this way, my panoramas will always be taken from a level platform. The reason why I have not bought one, and probably won't is because I typically want to point my camera up or down when taking landscapes. The minute you want your camera pointing up or down when shooting panos you need much more than just a panning base and a rail ... I am just not going to go there for the few occasions that I actually take panos.
So far my panoramas have turned out just fine. However, recently while at Horseshoe Bend in Page, Arizona I needed to take a vertical panorama. I quickly learned that that is really difficult using a ball head. When I turned my camera vertical I still could not get in what I wanted to get it. I was on the edge of the cliff and had to frame the shot from all the way down in the canyon to high up into the sky because the sky had something to offer. My 16mm lens on a full frame camera still was not wide enough. I had no choice but to shoot a vertical panorama.
With the ball head you have no way of panning vertically but to loosen it, recompose facing the camera more upwards, tighten it and shoot. This needs to be repeated a number of times.
The problem is that when you loosen the ball head it is impossible to match your previous shot in the area that you are overlapping. The camera's level does help but your camera is moving horizontally too.
I got home with three images that I wanted to stitch together but PhotoShop was not up to the task. No matter what I tried I just could not get it right. As you can see from the image I found a way to combine the images that worked. Let me share with you what I did because you may need this technique some day.
All three layers were brought into PhotoShop and placed on a blank image that I created to be large enough. Since the land area could not be matched for stitching I deleted all of that area from the second and third image. Therefore, the second and third image contained only the sky. The base layer contained just enough sky to work with for matching with the other images. I turned the opacity of the top layers down enough to where I could see all three layers. I then moved the top layers around to manually align them as best I could visually. Once the three layers were lined up as best as I could their opacity was restored to 100% and then I selected all three layers, clicked on "edit" and then on "auto align layers." While all three layers were still selected I clicked on "edit" again, and this time followed up by clicking on "auto blend layers." That did it. There were a few spots where it did not do a great job but those were easy to fix using either the healing brush or the clone tool.
The layers were flattened and the image was then processed as usual. As usual, the image was taken back into camera raw when done to set the white and black points. There you have it. Don't be afraid to do it manually if you have to. Do not give up on a shot that you really want.
]]>I have had cameras break just at the wrong moment (if there is a right moment when you are the wedding photographer)
I have run out of film at the wrong time and had to load the next film in a flash (yes, I know, I have done photography for a long time)
Speaking of a flash, I have had those go out on wedding shoots too
A wedding party partied too long and arrived at the photo shoot location after dark (even after my pleading that we should go hours before)
I have had mothers fight ("you told me your dress was going to be this color ...") - ready, smile ...
I have had mothers come more than an hour late (I will not even mention brides)
I have seen the flowers arrive more than an hour late
I have seen the father of the bride drop his camera and if this was not enough his lens rolled off of a table and smashed into pieces on the floor
I have seen many just faint and a groom fall over backward like a log
There is probably not much I have not seen at weddings
Because of my love of landscape photography I gave up doing wedding photography some years back. There is just a very slight difference in stress level between the two genres. Recently I was at a wedding of wonderful friends of mine and an awesome family I have known for many years. The wedding was at the famous Horseshoe Bend in Page, Arizona. When everything was over and everybody was loaded up and ready to roll out I saw the photographer finishing up her last few shots. Only she and the couple were still out there. The light was almost gone. Then it hit me and I just could not stop myself. I hopped out of the vehicle, pulled my cell phone out, rushed over to where they were shooting and took a few images.
Yes, for the first time in my life I was that guy who wedding photographers love to hate. She probably rolled her eyes and thought something like, "what is this idiot doing shooting 'my shoot' and that with a cell phone no less; how insulting." I really enjoyed taking a few images. Since I was not the wedding photographer I had no stress. I was not shooting a wedding, I was shooting landscapes with a wedding party in the scene. I could really get into this way of shooting.
Most of you reading this blog are probably landscape photographers like myself because that is what I write about. That means that you will probably not need any tips on wedding photography. I could certainly share a few tips on wedding photography as I was very successful as a wedding photographer, but I am not going to do that today. Please allow me to just share one point that perhaps you can apply the next time you attend a wedding as a guest. To get you interested let me share one of the images I took at this past wedding.
When we think of traditional wedding photography we tend to think more of the couple than of the scene. We shoot tighter because it is all about them. Since you are attending as a guest forget about the couple and look at the scene. Shoot the scene, go for the landscape but just place the couple in the shot. Follow standard landscape photography compositional rules. Show where it is at. Capture a feeling, the sense of the place. If your friends are getting married at some special place show that place, that is why they are there.
Yes, the couple wants some closer images but I am sure they would also love a few images of scenes like this. At least this couple did. When they saw this image they really wanted it, and I gave it to them.
The moral of the story is, don't forget about the landscape even if you are photographing people.
]]>Shoot the icon but from a different vantage point
Use a wide angle lens (really wide) and place something different in the foreground
Frame the icon with branches, cliffs, rocks, whatever you can find
Shoot from really low down
Explore the area
Here is an image of the famous Horseshoe Bend:
If you know anything about photographing the American Southwest you will know about Horseshoe Bend. It truly has been shot to death but let me ask you, have you seen an image of this place framed this way? This image is just a bit different because of the framing. There is the cliff on the right and the ledge on the left that bends with the river. How did I get this image?
I simply applied the tips mentioned above. I got into this position away from the crowds (thanks to a wedding at this place) which is why you don't see many images of this place with this composition. I explored the area and played with a few different possible compositions till I found this one. A wide angle lens was used which exaggerates the size of the ledge on the left. The framing of the horseshoe complements the image well.
Arrive long before the light gets nice. Use the time to walk around and to look for something different. Scout during this daylight time for positions that can be taken up tomorrow morning. Scouting does not work well when it is dark.
Obviously, this image is still about the horseshoe but the foreground is different. People who know this place with instantly recognize the image but then wonder where it was taken from because of the foreground. Foregrounds can make a huge difference in the composition of your images. Always remember to be safe.
]]>The best images, for landscapes anyway, are to be had in low light conditions. They are taken in difficult to shoot light. Your camera does its best but the image always looks disappointing when you open them up on the computer. All raw images need post-processing to look good. They need to be sharpened and tweaked. What makes matters worse is that we often shoot straight into the sun. Your camera's sensor has a difficult time to handle that - yet it does a beautiful job if you know your post-processing.
Enough said ... let's look at an image to explain what I am talking about:
The left dark side of the image is how my camera's sensor saw this image. If you do not know your post-processing you may be tempted to through this image away. You may even want to scold your camera and think about dropping photography because what you saw was something similar to the right side of the image. Why then does your camera capture what is on the left if it looked like the right? Well, you are shooting right into the sun, which is very bright. So your camera thinks that it is too bright and darkens the image like on the left. Now you will tell me that as the photographer I should be shooting in manual and that I should take control and set the camera to take the image to look like on the right. Let me call your bluff! I challenge you to go and take this or a similar image to look like the right with just one image (no HDR or blending). It is not possible.
I was in control of my camera and I deliberately shot the image to come out like on the left. Why? Because the sun is too bright; if you give the image more light you will blow the sun. Sure the left side will look nice but where the sun is will simply be a white blob of nothing. In situations like this, you deliberately expose for the sun so as not to blow/clip it. However, that will leave your image looking like on the left. You just don't have any other choice if you want to capture this image in just one exposure.
If the image then has to look like the left how on earth did you get it to look like on the right? I am glad you asked. What if I told you that I post-processed this image in less than one minute taking it from how it looked on the left to how it looks on the right? You may not believe me but here is what I did:
Open image in PhotoShop (as a raw file)
Place a check mark on remove chromatic aberrations (lens icon)
Set your white and black points (alt and slide white till you see coloration and pull it back just till it disappears, repeat with black slider)
Open image (to take it to PhotoShop)
Open Luminar plugin
Move Accent AI (artificial intelligence) to taste
Move AI Sky Enhancer to taste (BRAND NEW FEATURE)
Use Mild Image Enhancer preset and move slider to taste
Apply
Open in Camera Raw again
Adjust highlights, shadows and recheck white and black points
Done! Since you are working with sliders it is all very quick. You don't need to learn fancy techniques and complicated steps. Your image is ready. I do one more thing in Camera Raw before number 11. I use a brush to dodge and burn (make lighter and brighter locally - only certain spots) but this is also a quick and easy few seconds.
I have to say, I really like the Luminar software. The new AI Sky Enhancer does a really good job. It picks up the sky through the quiver tree's branches automatically. My post-processing time has been cut dramatically by using this software and I love the results. Give the software a try.
You can get a discount if you buy the software through this link: https://macphun.evyy.net/c/404711/320119/3255
Full Disclosure: I am an affiliate of Skylum Software, the makers of the Lunimar Software. I get a small kickback if you buy the software through my link. However, I personally use the software on every image and love it. I am not telling you about the software to make a penny. This is my software of choice.
]]>Since I am an affiliate of Skylum I decided to give the Aurora HDR 2019 software a test drive. First of all, I like how the program is so similar to Luminar. If you know the one you can basically work the other one. I like the simplicity that Skylum software is known for. I also really like the results. Let's talk about an image:
This is a difficult image to shoot in terms of exposure. The rocks (hills) in the background have parts that were in deep shade - black). But then you are also shooting right into the sun. Typically, the difference between the black shadows and the bright sun is too much for the camera to deal with so you either have to settle for a nice sun but black shadows or nice shadows with a blown sun. I bracketed three images to make sure that the sun is not blown and the shadows are not pitch black.
I then developed just one exposure as I usually would. Believe it or not, one exposure was all I needed. Yes, the sun was blown a bit and the shadows were black. In post-processing, I was able to correct both and nothing was clipped any more. However, the sky was just whiteish. Then I took all three exposures and processed them with Aurora HDR 2019. I did not change any settings. Once done I processed the file as usual with Luminar. The image was a lot better than the single exposure. Judge for yourself.
Now, if I may complain! I checked "remove chromatic aberration" but it just did not do a good job at all. This image had rather terrible chromatic aberration. This added a lot of work. I had to open the images in PhotoShop to remove the chromatic aberration there, save each file as a tiff and then open them in Aurora. I wish they would work on this aspect of the program a bit. However, I really like how the program dealt with the HDR side of things. The price is also right. So overall I can recommend the program.
You can get a discount by buying the software from my link (click on "affiliate links" on the menu bar). As I have mentioned, I am an affiliate which means that I also get a small incentive.
]]>Another obvious solution is to take a flash light. Illuminate the scene, compose, turn off the light and shoot. I do not particularly like that solution because the light closes down your eyes' pupils so that when you turn the light off you can't see well. In fact, it may take your eyes upto twenty minutes to readjust. To circumvent this problem many photographer use a green or red tinted light which do not seem to affect the eyes that much. This may work for you. In my case it often does not work well because when I am in a workshop there are multiple photographers present which means that you cannot turn your light on when you want to (others are shooting).
Take a loot at this image and see what little trick I use that works for me:
Do you see what I do? Most people will look at this images and say, "no, I don't get it." Remember we are talking about composition so look at the position of the camera ... My little trick is to shoot from low down. There are various reasons why I prefer to shoot night images from down there:
1. By pointing the camera up and shooting from low down the silhouettes of whatever is in the foreground becomes more visible which helps me to compose better. It helps you to see the shapes which you will not see if not in front of the brighter sky.
2. I don't do that much night photography so I do not own a lense wider than 16mm. By placing my camera really low down I get to include more of the sky. In this case I get to include more of the milkyway, which is really the point of night photography - it is all about the sky. The foreground simply gives you scale, interest, and perspective. The foreground is supposed to be fairly small in the image. You really maximize the sky by going down low and pointing upwards.
The next time you are out shooting at night. Go low down as it helps you to compose and it may just give you a better image.
]]>
This is not the time to be fiddling with settings. This is not the time to wonder if your autofocus is set on single point or whether your drive is set on single shot. Oh wait, you are only getting 1/15 of a second shutter speed with your 600mm lens? Now, where do I bump up my ISO again? Look, if you want the shot you have to be ready. Imagine taking the first two images (which are still out of focus as your camera is getting the focus down) only to find out that your memory card is full.
Here are a few tips to help you to be ready. Please implement these tips prior to the shoot:
Make sure you have a fresh battery installed
Make sure your memory card has much more storage space available than you plan to need, or better yet, insert an empty one
Anticipate what you are going to be shooting and set your camera accordingly before the shoot (AF mode, Drive mode, Aperture, Shutter Speed, ISO)
Put the right lens on for what you are about to encounter
Set your lens up right (stabilization, panning mode, etc)
Clean your sensor
Once you get on the scene, prior to the action starting, evaluate what the best position is and get there quickly
Pay attention to your background and move if you need to eliminate something
Have your camera out and ready
Be aware of what is going on around you, focus your mind and get into your shooting zone
Focus your lens on a spot at a distance where you anticipate the action to take place
Take a light reading and make sure that you are satisfied with your settings
Now you have fewer things to worry about and you can calmly shoot the scene without panic or drama. You want to focus on your shooting not all of these things right now.
]]>
As you can see, the valley (and higher up were most people photograph this place from) has no vegetation other then low shrubbs. After all, this is a desert. So you can include a moon to add a little something. Everyone and their uncle has this image. Now how about looking around. Try to find something different. Find anything that stands out.
I started walking a bit (to the left). I found something that would really help the composition, add something different and break away from the typical death valley images. What is more, is that it introduces some character into the image. So, here we go:
As you can see the sun in now very low. This dead tree trunk adds so much to this image. As usual, we are not satisfied with just one image. Walk around, attempt another angle, refine the composition, and shoot, shoot, shoot. Shoot difference images:
Never be satisfied with what you see. Always be looking for something different, something that stands out. Do your best to get an image of an iconic place that is as powerful as the iconic images, but that nobody else has.
Look around, explore.
]]>I used to shoot canon for years. How many years? Since 1987! When the Sony A7R II was anounced I switched to Sony. I switched for a two reasons. Firstly, their sensors are great, including their dynamic range. Secondly, mirrorless cameras offer a number of advantages which I will talk about a bit later. Sony was the only player (I am not even going to credit Canon's initial mirrorless offering) in the full frame mirrorless camera market. Canon and Nikon, it seems, did not believe in mirrorless. However, just in the last month there has been a major shift.
Nikon released a full frame mirrorless camera, complete with a new mount. The camera seems like a well balanced, all round offering. Canon then also released their full frame mirrorless camera (about a month later). Canon seems to have focused on the autofocus system as that appears to be their standout feature. It also appears as though Canon is taking the value option. The surprise thought was that last week Panasonic anounced the development of their full frame mirrorless camera (two of them). Two months ago we basically only has Sony full frame mirrorless cameras. Now there are four major players. Panasonic's entry into the mirrorless market is rather interesting as their current four thirds mirrorless (small sensors) cameras are really good with video. More so, they have partnered with Leica and Sigma on the same mount. That means that you will be able to use Leica, Panasonic and Sigma lenses natively. It also means that together they can build out the lens system for their mount much quicker.
What this means is that we now have a war on our hands between these companies. This is good because it will push the cameras to new heights. Prices may come down. Why did all these other companies jump into the full frame mirrorless market? Well, Sony just anounces last week that they are the number one seller of full frame mirrorless cameras in the world. They have taken sales from Canon and Nikon. This is rather remarkable since Sony almost came from nowhere in this market just a few years ago.
Here is what I personally glean from these anouncements:
Canon may choose the value option which may help drive prices of the competitors down. Yay!
Nikon may keep on offering good balanced cameras, but they may not necessarily be on the front lines of innovation.
Panasonic, from the looks of things, may get new lenses out quicker, push good weather sealing and may opt for a value position too.
The megapixel race may start up again, soon. Sony's, Nikon's and Panasonic's cameras' sensors are all in the 40+ megapixel range. I just cannot see similar future cameras offering less than that (except for niche cameras like Sony's A7S)
Why the change to mirrorless?
Mirrorless does not need any micro focus adjustments to the lenses
You see the effects of your camera settings right through the viewfinder
There is focus peaking and focus magnification
You can see zebra lines on bright or dark clipped sections of your image right in the viewfinder before shooting
You can display your live histogram in the viewfinder and see it prior to taking the image
You can review your images right through the viewfinder
New features like eye AF is a game changer
It seems as if at least Sony has solved the poor battery life issue
These cameras weigh less
Now you may say that many or most of these features are on DSLRs' live view. Yes, but try shooting sports/wild life using your live view and changing settings at the same time. Try seeing what is going on, on the back screen of your camera when the lighting conditions cause glare.
I predict a photographic gear revolution is coming in the next five to ten years. These are exciting times for photographers.
The sun on a hard edge (clouds can work)
A small F.Stop (large number)
Since I have written about sun stars before I will not talk about them again here, rather I want to share a simple thought that people often do not think of when they are in the field shooting. Most people use the horizon as the hard edge to get the sun star. You can move your tripod lower and get it again as the sun rises. You can do this a few times. However, once the sun is up a ways people stop shooting sun stars. But, why?
Most people will answer, "well, because the sun is no longer cut by a hard edge. The sun is too high off the horizon." This is the mental block that some photographers struggle with. The simple thought is that the horizon is not the only hard edge you can use. How about a tree?
You can use any hard edge. How about a vertical cliff or rock formation?
Yes, there are many hard edges, we are not stuck with only the horizon. The sun can be as high in the sky as you want, you can still achieve a sun star using any hard edge with your small F.Stop. The next time the sun is above the horizon start thinking about using other hard edged to get your sun star.
Get out there and try it.
]]>The brighter light and more vivid color in this image is all on the right. Because the canyon in the valley was dark (much darker than what you see here) this image lacked balance. The viewer's eyes kept on going to the bright and colorful right of the image. Viewers would ignore the left of the image after just a quick glance.
The edge of the canyon has this white crust but it was much darker. When I took this image I knew that I was going to lighten the white crust to give the left side of the image more visual weight which would bring balance between the left and the right. Every image-editing software has a dodge and burn feature. Perhaps the technique I use is old fasioned but it works for me. Once I am basically done editing my images I take the image back into Adobe Camera Raw. I use the adjustment brush in ACR for dodging and burning. I do not like other dodge and burn features because they just dodge and burn. Dodging tends to lower the contrast which makes the area look washed out. With ACR's brush I can adjust multiple things at the same time. I increase exposure and contrast. In this case I also increase highlights and whites a bit. Then I just paint away. Once again, I do not paint in what is not there, I am simply making what is there brighter.
The last thing I do before leaving ACR is to recheck my white and black points as any post-processing adjustments may have changed these values. Without dodging the canyon's edge this image was visually heavy on the right with little interest on the left; out of balance. Post-processing brought the left back into play and brought balance to the image.
Think post-processing when you actually shoot and compose for what you can do.
]]>
Cover up the foreground elements of this image and look at it. Now uncover the foreground elements. Does it make a huge difference to you? Follow your eyes' movement with the foreground covered and uncovered. Do you notice what I am talking about?
The foreground elements add color and lost of interest. It pulls your eyes back and the looking process starts over. This helps to arrest the viewer's attention for longer.
The foreground element also helps to create a lot of depth for this image. The plant and the brightly lit rock cliff create a lead-in line which just transports your eyes into the image.
In this case, the strong foreground is not just based on interest but brightness and color. Find some colorful flowers, a little bush, or where the sun lights up. Compose your image with these elements in the foreground and your images will improve.
]]>
The harsh light was softened by using a neutral density filter (which does not change the color). This image is taken from low, low down. I have the wide-angle lense on. I am really close to these foreground rocks. Shooting with a wide-angle lense from this angle and distance makes the space between these two rocks look much larger in the image. The green color of the letchin comes to life. The space between the two rocks creates a lead-in line. This is just a different perspective that adds drama, punch, and a little x-factor.
Depth of field becomes an issue in landscape photography when you are really close to your foreground element. Luckily, wide-angle lenses give you more depth of field to compensate. You still need to use a small f.stop to get depth of field but as you can see, it works well. I say this often but it is important. Look around for an interesting foreground element. Slap on a wide-angle lens. Get really close to the element and viola.
Try it ...
]]>
This image was obviously taken at about the same place as last week's image but this is a different tree. The light is also very different. We can start to see some glow but full sunlight is not out yet. This made the tree trunk dark. Since the background does not have the punch that last week's image has I wanted to focus more on the tree. I remind you that it is best that the tree does not touch the river.
So how do I place more emphasis on the tree, especially since the tree was darkish? My whole foreground was darkish. I decided to really highlight the tree in post processing. The two weapons of choice were light and texture. I brightened the tree and foreground considerably. I wanted to draw attention to the tree and the trunk. Next I used texture. Luminar is my photo-editing software of choice, yes, I still use PhotoShop for certain things but most of my work is done in Luminar. There are a few sliders that really bring out the texture of images in Luminar.
The first one is called "Detail Enhancer." Please do not over do any post processing. We want to let things look natural. We do not seek to place in an image what is not there. We just want to highlight what is there by making it more visible. The next slider is "Structure." The last one I use is "Micro-Structure." I just play around with these sliders to see which one does a better job specifically on the area I want effected. The nice thing about Luminar is that you have layers. So then you just paint the effect in on the tree trunk and branches. The character of the tree just comes to life.
To me this image is all about that tree (the green) and the texture of the trunk. Learning better processing skills is necessary in today's world if you want to compete. Give Luminar a try. The software is cheap and amazing. Click on Affiliate Discounts (top right of screen) for a discount (and I also get cup of coffee - not that I drink coffee).
]]>
The little tree stands in contrast to the rock landscape behind it. The background seems void of trees. The color of the tree does not appear in the background. Both the background and the tree is catching some nice light. You almost get the feeling that the tree stands against the mountains. This is a really strong composition. The tree is powerful in the foreground, yet the background is also strong; pulling the viewer in.
I placed the tree in such a way that it stands in contrast to the background mountains while at the same time providing balance. The tree is visually strong and balanced with the rock cliffs on the right. I also made sure that the tree is not intervering with the river down below. The trick with this kind of image is to place objects in such a way that you create contrast without also creating imbalance. We strive to have contrasting elements that balance each other.
When you are out photographing look for contrasting elements then walk around, examine the available angles and place things to maintain balance. Juxtapositioning elements often works well.
]]>
Just to the right of this image is a ledge. All the other photographers where shooting from that ledge. All of them were photographing from eye level. I decided to climb down from the ledge to this position. I lowered my tripod and shot from low down. Why? This is where the color is. I wanted to show the bank of Iceplant. The colorful Iceplant gives some wow to the image. By getting close to the Iceplant they become magnified compared to other objects in the image. This adds importance to them.
This foreground is interesting and beautiful. Always be looking to get a better foreground, it will really improve your photography. When you lower your position it lengthens your foreground and shortens your middle-ground. Compared to the middle-ground this foreground is much more interesting so why not stretch it by lowering your position? I find that I shoot from lower down more often than shooting at eye level. Try it.
]]>
As you can see, this image was taken well after sunset. It is actually the longer shutter speed that makes this image. That longer shutter speed is what makes the streaks of water pulling back. Those lines just beg your eyes to follow them and thereby to go into the image. They create depth. It is this time of day when the sky turns warm. The sky has nice color but it is not that bright to claim all the attention thereby pulling the viewer away from what we are trying to create on the beach too quickly. The movement of the water on the beach makes this image dynamic.
I like the way the rocks on the left is balanced by the foreground foilage on the right. Together they balance with the shoreline. The rock stacks are separated just a bit which strengthen their compositional value. What do you think, was this image worth waiting another twenty minutes for? Stay a bit longer and shoot after sunset. Arrive a little earlier in the morning and shoot just prior to sunrise.
]]>
The foreground is slim but enough. The green foilage creates a base from which to start looking at this image. The brighter rocks to the right start pulling the viewer's eyes further into the image. The little river takes over and pulls the viewer even further into the image. The rock stacks pull the eyes further into the image yet. Lastly, the orange cloud begs for the viewer's attention. We clearly have a foreground, middle-ground, and background. They all work together to direct the viewer's eyes into the image. They invite the viewer to move into the scene.
In this case, I really liked the reflection where the little river meets the ocean. I deliberately waited for the wave to be completely back before shooting to maximize the size of the reflection. I have said this many times in previous blogs but it is important enough to repeat. When I post process my images I regularly close my eyes and then open them again to consciously make a mental note as to where my eyes go and how they move through the image. I then use dodging and burning to darken and lighten certain place to make sure the viewer's eyes will go where I want them to go. Remember that the human eye goes to light and colorful places first.
Now, have you thought of doing exactly that when you are out in the field? Take the shot. Close your eyes and then open them again looking at the image consciously being aware of where your eyes go. Do your eyes go where you want them to go? Is there anything you can change about the composition that would make a positive difference?
]]>Let's look at this scene:
The major features are the little river, the rock stacks, and the cliffs (shoreline). A little ways to the right is a bridge that connect the cliff I am on with the cliffs on the other side (in the scene). So, I could move to the other side and along that cliff. I could also move to my left and right. Given that I could position myself almost anywhere in this scene, why did I chose this particular spot to photograph from?
What makes this photograph compelling to me (compositionally speaking) is the balance, the flow, the complementing features, and the harmony. Let's start with the foreground. The little river takes the viewer's eyes and let's them move toward the rock stacks. The ocean and the cliffs take the viewer along the shoreline, into the image. The cliffs and the rock stacks balance with the little river.
I wished I could move slightly to my right to get the rock stacks to separate from each other just a bit as that would have made them a bit stronger in the composition. As you can expect I tried that but the shape of the cliff I was standing on interfered with the image there.
I used a long shutter speed to get the spooky look in the ocean water. Get yourself into the habit of thinking before you shoot. Really look at the scene. Walk around. Plan your composition. Think vision.
]]>Please do not leave when it rains if you can see that the rain is from a cell or two. If the whole area is socked in with thick cloud cover you may consider leaving. Staying paid off because I got to photograph in different kinds of light. Look at the next three images. They were all taken within a half an hour or so from each other. They are all from the same scene. The only real difference is the light. I want you to see the difference light makes:
Here is the first image. You can see that the light is flat (actually, the light was flat. I added a lot of contrast to get the image to where it is). As you will remember from last week's blog, I used a slow shutter speed to show the wave pulling back. Now the clouds move away and the sun comes out:
Just look at the difference in the light. This image is much more alive. The light is warm. I still used a slowish shutter speed and still shot as the wave pulled away but you can see that the "lines" the water makes pulling back does not show as much motion. Because the sun is out my shutter speed is faster thus not showing as much motion. Here is the last image taken just before sunset:
Since the sun is almost set and behind thick clouds this image is colder. The beach's light is colder. The warmth is gone and the rocks that form this little bay are darker (even though I lightened them in post processing). Light can change the entire mood of an image. Always focus on the light. Shoot in different kinds of light.
]]>Please consider the image below. Look at movement and think about the shutter speed in use:
If there is wind then we need to consider any movement caused in the foreground vegetation. In the case of this landscape image I want the foreground to be sharp. So if there was wind I will use a fast enough shutter speed to free the motion. Then we also need to consider the clouds in the background. Are they moving and if so how fast are they moving? Typically, their movement is not going to be much of a problem because they are far away. The distance of objects from the camera impacts how obvious movement is in the images. The closer objects are the stiller they need to be to be sharp.
Lastly, the waves are moving. So I ask myself: "Do I want to show their movement or not?" I decided that I wanted to show the movement to draw more attention to the small waterfall. I needed something strong on the left to balance with the strong bright sky on the right. Since there was not much wind I chose a slow shutter speed. I waited for the wave to start pulling back and then took the image.
Now if there was wind I would have taken two images, one with a fast shutter speed to freeze the foilage in the foreground and one to show the motion of the wave. It is really easy to blend the two exposures together with an image like this because no foilage is in front of the moving wave. The next time you are out to shoot, think about movement and shutter speeds. Why not show some movement more often? Everthing does not always need to be sharp.
]]>
It was rainy and threatening. The white balance is fairly warm. The ocean's color looks very nice. Obviously the next image's sky will change rather dramatically. What I would like you to notice however is the color shift in the coastline and the plants/grass on the right. Compare these two images:
Yes, the color of the ocean is very different too, but that is simply due to the time of day and the direction of the light. In the first image light is shining on the water revealing its color. In the second image the sun is long gone, so there is no direct light on the ocean. The white balance on the coastline and the plants/grass on the right is much cooler in the second image.
Now compare the mood between the two images. Take a minute, I will wait for you ...
Even though the composition is very similar we have two very different images due to light and mood. The mood between these two image are radically different. This is an illustration that the same scene, even the same composition can yield very different images. This is why it is a good idea to go back to the same scene when conditions change. Do not be tempted to say, "oh, I have already been there." This comparison also shows you the big difference white balance settings can make. Play with your white balance to tweak the image.
Sometimes I use dual white balance settings. In the second image I warmed up the sky to bring out the orange glow, but because the sun was down the water was colder (color temperature). I did not want to warm up the water. It would just not look right in this image. Therefore, I actually cooled down everything below the horizon as bit. This image thus makes use of two different white balance settings.
There are many ways of achieving this effect. I will only mention two here. When I "develop" my raw file I do not touch white balance at first. Once the file is open in PhotoShop I duplicate the layer. You can now take each layer back into the raw developer and change their white balances; one layer for the sky and another for everything else. Once back in PhotoShop you simply place a layer mask on your top layer and paint out where you want to see the background layer's white balance. This is easy to do but a bit more work than I care to do, not that I am lazy, I just have too much to do to waste time if there are more efficient ways of doing things.
The method I prefer to use is a split filter in Skylum's Luminar (click on affiliate links for a discount). With this filter you simply slide two sliders; one to change the warmth of warm tones and one to change the warmth of cold tones. This effect is like stretching your warmth dynamic range (if you understand what I mean). You can make your warms warmer and your cools cooler with no masking or duplicate processes. You simply slide two sliders and you are done. I love what that filter does to my images. Of course it works best with an image that has both warm and cold tones.
Light and white balance can dramatically impact the mood of your images. Many photographers these days seem to have forgotten to play with white balance because the newer cameras do such a good job with auto white balance. Do not fall into that trap. Take control of the mood of your images.
]]>
This image was taken at Big Sur, California. The God-rays just draw you to the background. Yet, it helps to have a strong foreground. The ice plant in the foreground adds color and interest. There are rock in the middle ground. When we have a strong foreground, middle ground, and background you typically have depth in your image.
God-Rays can be very difficult to photograph. The are typically very bright compared to the rest of the image. This makes getting the best exposure tricky. Make sure your camera is set to display blinkies when either the dark or brights are blown. Use your histogram. Remember that the right side of the histogram represent your brights while the left side represents your darks. Set your exposure such that the histogram is just, just not touching the right side. This may mean that your darks may be too dark. Your photo may not look nice at all. As long as your blacks are not touching the left edge of the histogram wall you are fine.
In post processing just bring your darks back to life by sliding your dark slider to the right. It may also be beneficial to get to know your camera's sensor. I sometimes shoot even though my blinkies blink on my highlights. I have learned how much I can recover in post. Now I never do this if I don't need to. How do you know when you need to? You need to if your blacks are clipping. Another way is to bracket and blend. Personally, I will always do my best to get the image in one shot if possible.
Do your best to work fast as you may loose the God-rays at any moment. This is way it is important to know your gear. This is not the time to figure out histograms or settings. You need to be able to control your gear without thinking so that you can be fast and so that you can concentrate of composition.
]]>Would this image have the same feel, the same impact without the lighthouse? Does the lighthouse not add a human element that is interesting? Does the lighthouse not help to make the viewer raise questions such as; how does a person get up there? To me the lighthouse, though be it man-made is a valuable part of this image.
So what did I think through when photographing this image? Firstly, the cloud above the lighthouse moved reasonably fast. Secondly, the cloud bank in the background also moved, just slower. I waited for the clouds to move into such a position as to aid the composition. When clouds move wait for them to end up where you want them (if they are moving in the right direction). Sure, make your image before the clouds get to the ideal location just so that you have the image in case the clouds do not cooperate.
I included enough of a base in the foreground to anchor the image and not to have anything distracting on the bottom edge of the image. You will also notice that bright light is hitting the ocean. When clouds move the intensity of that bright light will change. If it is too bright just wait a bit as the clouds may get in front of the sun a bit to take off some of the brightness. However, we are now watching the movement of three things: the cloud above the lighthouse, the background cloud bank and the bright light on the water. Nature very seldom does exactly what you want it to do and the chances of that happening when there are three variables is rather slim. So you may need to compromise with one or two of the elements. Just do the best you can. Take a few images because you never know when the bright light will totally disappear.
The point is to really watch your scene and to pay attention as to what is taking place. Anticipate what is going to happen and wait for it while you take the odd image here and there just for in case things do not work out.
]]>
This Cala Lilly was shot at Big Sur, California. When I am out photographing landscape images I often find wild flowers. When conditions are right I include them in my landscapes. Conditions are right when I do not have a lot a wind as to render the flower out of focus (after I acquired as fast a shutter speed as I can by utilizing a high ISO). The light must also be right.
On this particular day the sky was just drab and gray. Since this is at the ocean there was no way to photograph the landscape without getting a lot of sky in. We had also had some rain. Now when you combine drab gray skies with flowers after rain you get conditions that really suit outdoor flower photography. I forgot about the landscape for a bit and focussed on the flower. Flowers just love soft defused light (the clouds acts as a huge defuser). Rain drops add a lot of interest.
Here are a few tips on shooting flowers in nature:
Wait for drab gray skies
If it did not rain, spray the flowers and leaves with fine mist till you get nice drops
Fill your image with the flower and or leaves
Pay attention to any lines the leaves make and use them to lead into the image
Since the light is flat add good contrast in post processing
Use a small f-stop to increase your depth of field if you cannot isolate the flower from the background
Use a large f-stop to blur the background if you can isolate the flower from the background
Pay attention to your composition as you would with a landscape image
Let's talk about composition for a minute. We have a strong rock foreground. There are other rocks that make the middle ground. The sun and clouds make up the background. Pointing the camera right at the sun can create some challenges (never look into the sun without wearing suitable protective gear). Firstly, it is very bright which makes exposure values an issue. Either the sun blows out (no detail just white), or the dark rocks turn solid black (no detail), or both. This is why I changed from Canon to Sony. This image consists of just one exposure. I used no bracketing, no HDR, no dual processing of the same file. The dynamic range of the Sony sensors are just wonderful (Nikons are also that good, even a hair better).
Secondly, when shooting into the sun, dark solid objects will turn very dark. In post processing they need to be brightened just enough to reveal detail. In post processing I also pay attention to the water. Certain sections of water are a bit brighter than other sections. I make the lighter sections even lighter as long as they lead into the image. There is also a faint light streak caused by the sun which I brighten a bit because it too draws you to the background.
Lastly, when shooting into the sun I love to get sunstars. They just add to the image. You get sunstars by waiting for the sun to pass behind a hard edge (in this case the horizon) and by using a small f-stop.
Having the sun shine on the foreground brings attention to it which helps to grab the viewer's attention right from the start.
]]>
I can show you the images I took of this scene without the filter but I am just going to explain it. A neutral density filter does not change the color of the image (if it is a good one, cheap ones tend to have color casts). It simply let's less light through to the lens. This allows you to use slower shutter speeds. In this case my ISO was already low and my f-stop was already at sixteen, yet my shutter speed was too fast to show the motion I wanted. A neutral density filter allows me to get lower shutter speeds. The shutter speed in this case created some movement. The water is flowing into the scene which makes the viewer's eyes do the same. It also creates the dreamy, mystical, cloudy effect you see. This image is just so much better than the images taken without the filter. It is more artistic.
Here are a few things to consider when you buy such a filter system and of course the filters themselves:
Buy good quality filters. Color casts are nasty. The longer the exposure the worse they get. Yes, I know about post processing, but I believe the better the image is to start off with the better the end result will be and I do not have time to waste on problems that could have been prevented.
Buy good quality filters. It is just a matter of time before your filters will fall. Trust me. It is when they fall and when something wants to scratch them that you will be glad you have good quality filters. In fact, when I gave the demonstration to the group of my system a filter fell. It hit the side of the table, fell down and hit the leg of a chair and then on to the ground. It made a loud noise and everybody thought that the filter was toast, but no, not a scratch, not a mark. Just in that moment they were worth every penny I paid for them.
Buy good quality filters. Forget the resin plastic ones; I have had those ... Get good Scott's glass. Resin can warp, they do not always stay perfectly flat, glass stays perfectly flat.
Make sure the filter cannot fall out of the holder system. They should not be able to just slide right through. Over time they start sliding through easier and easier until they fall.
Light leak is a really big problem when you get to really long exposures. Believe me, that is not something you want to deal with in post processing. Make sure your system does not allow any light leakage.
Rear reflections on the filter is just as bad. Once again, make sure that your system does not allow stray light or reflections into your lens.
Special coatings on the filter are very important. We shoot in bad weather. There are coatings that make water just slide right off. There are coatings that make it very easy to clean. When shooting in rain, always make sure you wipe the filter before you take the image because a rain drop on the filter ruins your image.
You may want to know which filters I suggest. Firstly, let me state that I am not affiliated with nor do I profit in any way from making these recommendations. I make these recommendations purely based on my experience. In my opinion the best filter holder system comes from Wine Country Camera. Be warned, I almost needed heart medication when I looked at the price. However, this system is built like a tank and well thought through. I also highly recommend their filters. Another company whose filters I really like and use is Break Through Photography (out of San Francisco). I use some of their filters on my Wine Country Camera system.
I used to use screw in neutral density filters, but I will never use them again. Sure they have no light leak issues or outside rear reflection issues. But they are a pain to use. I often also use a polarizing filter with my neutral density filters. The screw in filters make it too dark to compose, focus and tune the polarizing filter. Now you can compose before screwing the neutral density filter on, but I have found that when I do I tend to touch the focus ring and my polarizing filter also gets rotated as the neutral density filters rotate in. Then I want to recompose for another image but cannot because I cannot see well - it is too dark. Now you have to remove the neutral density filter, start over and put it back on when ready. The Wine Country Camera System just does not work that way. You just slide them in and out in one second. I truly love this system. They could make it lighter as it is heavy. The price has much room for improvement. In my opinion it is still the best system out there. The glass filters from these two companies are just awesome.
Although I am not going to talk about these filters in the upcoming posts, many of the images that you will see where taken with these filters on. I plan to briefly explain the benefits with each image.
]]>As mentioned in another blog, I go back to the same scene often because things change. Recently, I went to a beach where I reasonably often visit. I found conditions that I had never seen there before. Instead of the usual sandy beach there were streams of water in various places. Let's look at a few examples:
This is a very simple image. It is more of a skyscape than a seascape. It is the color and the reflection of the color that make the shot. Make sure to place your horizon well off center. Here is another one from the same night:
A theme that I often repeat is to work the scene. I want to get a few different compositions from the same scene. Shooting the same composition over and over to then pick the best one works well if you are satisfied with getting only one image from your shoot. That is just not me, I want to maximize conditions and get as many different images as I can. Therefore I move around quite fast. I am always looking for different foregrounds to place in my scene. I composed this image so that the foreground water points to the sun. We seek to have the viewer look into the image which is what this composition does. That makes this a strong composition. Even though the foreground is strong, I still gave more space to the sky. As you can see, the vast body of water is boring, so I minimized it. By getting down low the distance or space taken up by the body of water shrinks. Here is the last one from that scene:
I moved around again which changes the foreground completely. We love lines going into the image because the viewer's eyes will follow them into the image. Lastly, look at the scene and plan how you are going to walk before you start walking. Remember, in sand and snow you leave footprints. You don't want to walk in a following composition and ruin the next shot (unless you want to use footprints compositionally, but even then they need to lead somewhere, you do not want random prints all over the place). To summarize:
Visit the same scene multiple times when the conditions are right
Work the scene by moving around quickly to get multiple images
Always think composition and color
Yes, the image has nice color and good light. There is drama between the light part of the dune and the shadow side. The real drama is the interaction between the tree and the harsh desert. The desert speaks of death. There is no water. Yet, the tree seems to survive. This kind of drama poses questions such as:
How does that tree survive?
Where is the tree getting water from?
How long is it going to survive?
What made this tree survive when two others have already died?
How did the tree came to be planted there?
The image is simple, yet thought provoking. It is the drama that makes the image what it is. Drama is always in play when life and death are juxtaposed. When you see death everywhere, start looking for life to juxtapose with it. When you see an abundance of life, look for death to juxtapose with it. These two contrasts often make for great images.
]]>
It is the proportions of the dune in comparison to the trees that makes you realize the true height of the dune. Do something to show the scale when shooting something large. Place a person or something in the scene that people know the size of so that one can compare the difference.
Also play with lines. They are always great for composition when used correctly (you don't want lines to lead out of your image). Curved lines are always better than straight lights as they just tend to be more dynamic.
Play with light and shadows. Lastly, the tip of the sand dune also catches some sun light. That light helps to draw the eye up there adding to the sense of scale and height.
]]>
Go in close (with your lens, lest you wake the creature). Fill your image. Do your best to isolate your cute sleeper from the background to minimize distractions. Show off the animals features such as whiskers. Just keep moving around slowly and softly until you find the right angle where it all comes together. Here is another example:
This Rock Hyrax is also enjoying a good late afternoon nap. I applied the same tips shared above to make this image (no distractions in the background, good light, showing off the animals features, etc.). The cuteness factor is a bit higher in this image because of the paws. It looks out stretched. Is it not cute? When photographing animals try to get something different than an animal just standing there looking at you.
]]>Stabilize your camera by resting the camera of something (on safari this means on the car door or window)
Use a bean bag or something that helps to absorb vibrations
Turn the car's engine off to minimize vibrations
Plead with your fellow travers not to move when you shoot
Use high ISO to get a faster shutter speed (auto ISO works well here)
Even when using all the right techniques animal images can still be boring. To jazz things up one has to add some interest. Look for animal movement. Show animal behavior. Find animal interaction (especially between different species). Time your shots to capture something extra. In the image below I noticed that the flamingo constantly put it's head under water to forage. When the head came up again water drops would fall from it's beak. Just those droplets help to add interest:
Shooting animals or birds require patience. Learn to anticipate their behavior. Wait for movement or interaction or something that adds a bit of interest. Here is another image of the same flamingo. This time it's mate is also in the image. Once again, having two flamingoes in the same image does not necessarily make it a better image. One has to add interest by showing their interaction. It just gives life to the image:
Don't they just look in love?
]]>When photographing people, mood most often comes from the subject's facial expression or the situation he or she finds himself or herself in. Landscape photography is a bit different. Mood is most often created by atmospheric conditions such as fog, haze, dust, rays, mist, etc. Just like people images the landscape subject itself can help to provide some mood. The trick is to match the mood that the subject provides with that of the atmospheric conditions. In other words, when you see moody conditions start looking for matching subject matter. Great moody subject matter are things like a hanging willow tree, a fence in poor condition, a tree with no leaves on, and so forth. Telephoto lenses are often helpful to create great mood. Here is an example:
You can see that the tree on the left is pretty dreary. The atmosphere clearly helps. Everything is covered in dust. The mood speaks of hardship. The composition of this image is balanced. The tree on the left is balanced by the sun on the right. The layers formed by the sand dunes in the background helps to transition the viewer's eyes up and down in the image. We almost always prefer vertical eye movement than horizontal eye movement of our viewers. We want them to look into our images (depth) rather then from side to side (flat view).
When conditions do not match your desire for beauty go for mood. Look for it. Isolate it. Capture it.
]]>
The plant introduces life into a scene that seems to suggest that life has left. It brings interest, questions, and mystery. In this scene it bring color to the colorless background.
The same idea can be used on many other fronts. When everything is frozen find something that is not. When everything is flowing find something that is not. Show contrasts. Try to find that which seem impossibly opposite.
Here is another scene that would suggest death except for the contrasting evidence of life. The life makes the image dynamic. It raises questions: what made the tracks? Did the animal belonging to the one set of tracks go after the other? Did it survive? How does it survive in this place? Am I safe standing here?
When we add life to the dead we end up with dynamic imagery, imagery that is evocative. Always be looking for contrasting opposites and attempt to capture them.
]]>To do this we carefully compose our images and we employ techniques that are inviting, calling the view forward (not sideways). As mentioned in the past some of these compositional tricks and techniques are:
Using lines that lead into the image
Using color
Using brightness
Placing objects strategically
Having a strong foreground element
Today I want to zoom in on using light to invite the viewer in. As I was walking in the sand invested building in the ghost town of Kolmanskop in Namibia I paid attention to light and dark areas knowing that the eyes will always be more attracted to the light areas than to the dark areas. Finding compositions were the light areas are where you want the viewer's eyes to go is our goal. Here is an example:
When you look at this image you will notice that it is not of a vast expanse. I do not have much depth to play with in this particular scene. By finding a spot where the brighter light is where I want the viewer's eyes to go I am creating a bit of depth because the inviting light is deeper into the image near the back of it. That light invites the viewer there. Just ask yourself, when you look at this image, where do your eyes go? Where do your eyes keep going back to? We can use light to lead peoples eyes just as well as we can use any other object or method.
In post processing make sure to darken areas slightly so that they will not compete and be a distraction. Placing light compositionally is just as important as placing objects, in fact, it is probably more important.
Here you have two doors to go into. To which one do your eyes gravitate? If that light in the door to the right was the same as the light in die door to the left these two doors would have competed for your attention. Due to the light they are not competing. The door on the right wins hands down. Once again this example shows clearly the power of light as a compositional tool that can be used very effectively to direct the viewer's attention.
Don't be afraid of using light and brightness to invite people to specific spots in your image. Composition is not just about placing object in the right places and using lines and foregrounds effectively. Composition can also be a function of light and brightness. Be on the lookout for brighter spots and ask yourself how you can make use therefore compositionally.
]]>
Colors can be very nice before sunrise. The closer you get to sunrise the more vibrant the colors can become. When you shoot in the direction of sunrise the clouds can get really bright.
Here is another one:
Since there is not much light on the ground shoot upward. Include lots of sky as that is where the action is. Wide lenses often work well this time of the day because they help you to include lots of sky.
The moral of the story is that we do not have to wait for sunrise to shoot. Get up early. Be on location a half hour before sunrise. Shoot even if it looks a bit dark to your eyes. As an added bonus, you will probably not be bothered with tourists in your image.
]]>You can also use lines to create balance. In addition to balance they may also create depth if they run into the image. Let's look at an example:
Here you can see that the mountain on the left is heavy but that weight is balanced by the rocks in the foreground. There is more rock on the right bottom to balance out the weight of the mountain in the top left. The line (crack in the rock) leads the viewer's eyes into the image thereby creating depth. Leaving a bit of space between the foreground rocks and the mountain in the background also helps to create depth. Remember, we want viewers to look "into" our images rather than just looking at them from side to side.
In this image the stack of rocks on the left balance with the big rock on the right. The rock table in the foreground brings balance with the mountain in the background. The line on the left leads to the rock stack on the left, but there is a second line between the rock table and the big rock on the right that leads to the mountain. These lines take you eyes into the image. They help to create depth.
When you are out looking for great landscape images look for balance. Find things in the foreground to balance with things in the distance. Look for and use lines, they are often powerful in aiding compositions. When on location, pay attention to where things point. Pay attention to balance and weight.
Oh, and remember not to only be focused on one thing (if you have time to change your compositions). Look around you. Shoot both left and right. Shoot behind you. Be aware of what is happening to light and clouds. By doing so on this occasion I got two images instead of just one.
]]>Another constantly changing element that keeps landscape photography exciting is the light. Near sunrise and sunset the light changes very fast. A few minutes can make a big difference. Nice warm light can get harsh quickly. At the other end of the day nice warm light can get dark very quickly. During the fast changing light sessions of photography many aspects of the light can change rapidly. The quantity of the light changes. The quality of the light changes. The color temperature of the light changes. The intensity of the light changes. The mood of the light changes, especially when things like fog and clouds play along.
On a trip to Namibia I was photographing the Spitzkoppe (see my workshop offerings if you are interested in shooting them with me). I saw these two rocks that drew my attention. In a matter of minutes I took a number of photographs of the same two rocks. Look at each one of them and compare how different the light is. The light changed very quickly.
When the light changes quickly like that you do not have time to start looking for a good foreground. Before long the light is gone. Long before the good light comes scout and plan where you are going to shoot from. Pre-visialize your compositions. Be ready. Unless you have a number of compositions scoped out and ready, and unless these different compositions are really close together so that you can quickly move to each of them BEFORE the light is lost you are better off to just stay put with what you have. The light is too precious to waist on trying to find something now. This is crunch time. This is the time for shooting. Preparation work has to be done before the light starts to change rapidly.
Although all four images are similar in composition the light is very different in each. The color and mood is even different. Just keep shooting. You might just end up with a nice series of images.
]]>Here is an example:
The sky above the mountain in the distance is just plain empty and void. There is not a cloud in sight. Using the rock arch as a window to shoot through solves the problem and provides a wonderful window frame for the mountain. The rocks in the arch (bottom right) help to balance the mountain in the background and it gives depth too boot.
Here is another example, but this time the arch is kind of the object and what you see through the arch simply adds to the scene:
This is the same arch as in the previous example but I have moved to the other side and am now shooting into the opposite direction. Without the rock arch I could not have gotten a nice image of those three bolders as the sky above them is dead and offers nothing. Shooting through the arch removes the sky and replaces it with a nice window.
Now we don't always have rock arches around begging to be used as windows. We just need to be creative. Tree branches and leaves work equally well. When the sky is boring eliminate it. Shoot through something or frame the object with something interesting.
Make sure to be on the lookout for windows and frames and be sure to use them creatively to turn something boring into something nice. One last tip, it is important that the background objects of interest do not touch or make contact with the edge of the window. If the bolder in the background touched the edge of the arch there would be no separation and it would be difficult to see the different elements of the image as different elements; they will want to look as part of the same structure.
]]>
One such situation was found in the ghost diamond town of Kolmanskop in Namibia (please see my workshop offerings if you want to go shoot with me there). The desert won the battle and overtook the town as there is no water. There are many buildings still trying to battle the sand. This place is just wonderful for photography. No matter what the light looks like outside you can still shoot many images inside.
Just look at this scene:
I am in love with this image. I can just stare at it. There are plenty of lines that draw the viewer into the image. The light of the window on the other end of the passage is also a strong compositional element that draws the viewer's attention there as bright spots always draw attention. Due to the mystic of this place I wanted to add just a hint of mystery. This is where the Orton effect comes in. The light in that far window was just plain outside light shining in. The light was harsh and not very flattering. So in post processing I changed the white balance of just that area somewhat to make the light a bit warmer. Then I added the Orton effect to make the light softer, dreamy, and a bit more glowing.
There are many ways to add the Orton effect. The one that I prefer and find the easiest to do is by using Luminar. Luminar is a photography editing software that is cheap to buy, easy to use, and yet powerful. With just a few clicks you are done and you can even just paint it in or out so that the effect appears only where you want it to. If you would like to check this program out click on affiliate links on my site.
What do you think, does this effect add just that little something to this image?
]]>
You have to look for them. They take time to see. They require you to slow down, to forget about where all the action is. At other times, you can be in a place that does not offer anything photographically, but then the minimalistic image is the only "action" there. Here are some tips to help you make the most of these opportunities:
Shoot your action and color first; then just pause and look around
Look for anything that stands out from monotony
Break the rules, sometimes these images work well with the center point of attraction right in the middle of the image
Look for images where there is only one attraction
Find balance as these images often work best with balance
Get a feel for the place as that is mostly when you actually see these kind of images
Sometimes using a telephoto works well to get minimalistic images
]]>
Here is an example of an image that will work well for advertising. The sky contains space for text. The focal point of the sun star will not loose its power when text is placed above it. The reason is simple; the sun is powerful because it is bright in a dark scene. It just stands out. It is still a strong composition even if it is shot for advertising. The sun is well placed. The dark left will balance with text to the right.
Advertising imagery needs to be simple. The image needs to be strong but its detail should not compete with the text. Busy images typically does not work well for advertising. The place where the text goes should be as free from distraction as possible. Majestic clouds in this image may have made it a great fine art image but would have ruined it for advertising. Having the sky blank but colorful is what advertisers are looking for.
Sometimes we are tempted to go tight. In this case going tight may have resulted in a nice fine art image. However, for advertising it may be best to pull back a bit. The wider shot is better suited for advertising.
Once you have your fine art images, think about advertising (that is often where the money is). Ask yourself how to approach the scene for that market.
]]>
This kind of image gives you a few moments to get it right. You can move your position up or down (depending on which way the sun is going) to reset the sun for a second or third attempt. Get something interesting in front of the sun. Arches work well. Trees also work well, as do horizons. Since you are shooting right into the sun beware not to look at the sun with your eyes (not even through an optical viewfinder). Mirrorless cameras work well here since you are looking at a screen (monitor viewfinder) and not the sun itself.
Exposure of sun stars are tricky. You are shooting right into the sun which is very bright. If you set the camera on a small f stop to create the sun star and you use a fast shutter speed (because the sun is really bright and you do not want to clip it) then the foreground is typically very dark. Graduated neutral density filters will only help you if the sun is on the horizon. If the edge you use to create the sun star is a tree or an arch like this image graduated neutral density filters don't help because they just turn half the tree or arch dark.
You may have to bracket at different exposure values to blend your images later. I prefer not to do this if I don't have to. I still bracket my exposures. Then I open up my images on the computer and choose the best exposure that allows me to recover the clipped highlights AND push the shadows brighter. This typically works very well especially if your camera has good dynamic range. This image is processed from one single raw file. Shooting images at settings where you have no clipped highlights may not work because the dark part of the image may just be too dark to work with. So some clipping is okay as long as you have bracketed images to choose the right one from.
I hope you go out and try some sun stars.
]]>Waves of sand blew all around. Luckily the wind was not constant, it blew in spurts with gusts. That presented the opportunity I was waiting for. In the lull of the wind I would get ready. When the gusts started again I would take a few images before the sand gets to me. Then I would turn around to protect myself and my gear (I stood in front of my gear when the sand reached me). Nasty conditions may often present opportunities that others who are not willing to endure the conditions will never have. Here are two images I got of sand blasting along:
Images such as these only present themselves when the conditions are nasty. Position yourself to get the best possible light. In this case I wanted the sand backlit so I positioned myself in the right place to get this effect.
The next time the conditions are not pleasant stick around (provided that it is safe to do so). You may just end up with images that are a bit rarer than what others have. These are the images that immediately get people to ask you questions. These images speak to people.
]]>
Last week I wrote about this image. Windy gusts blew the sand into the air allowing the low sun to backlight it. The moment lasted about 3 to 5 minutes. During that time I followed my rule: shoot what changes first. In this scene the light was changing so I got this image. I am happy with this image, in fact, I really like it. However, I noticed that these gusts of wind got stronger and stronger. It was not pleasant as the wind would blow sand into my face, on my gear, and everywhere. Every so often the gust will take place where the sun lit before it reached me giving me an opportunity to get the shot.
I waited for the right moment. I just watched, observed, and waited. The wait paid off as a stronger gust of wind blew the sand forming a little swirl. These are special moments. They do not come often. They do not last long. You have to be ready and patient at the same time. Here is the shot:
You can see that the sun is a little bit higher now as it's light is traveling all the way down the dune. To me, it is the movement of the sand that just tells the story; makes the shot. Yes, there is a right moment, wait for it.
I have a rule I strictly obey; shoot that which changes first. Things that do not change can be shot later. If you miss that which changes it is lost forever. Change also typically means action. "Action" in landscape photography does not necessarily refer to movement. It can refer to bright color, bright light, and so forth. When you can combine color and bright light with movement that is real action. When you see that happening in the scene shoot it. Go where the action is. The other images can be taken at any other time.
In this image I saw action. There is bright light and color with sand movement. Shoot it before the sun gets to high and the action is gone. The trees down below are not going anywhere anytime soon. You can shoot them later. Focus on that which changes first (color in clouds, cloud formations, rainbows, etc.). These are fleeting moments.
Be observant and look around. Wherever the action is, shoot there first.
]]>Pin stars - short shutter speeds of 90 seconds or less (preferably less than 60 seconds). The stars show no movement.
Milky-way - short shutter speeds as above but showing the milky-way.
Star trails - long shutter speeds allowing the stars to rotate.
That is about it. Needless to say, I don't shoot these kind of images much. Furthermore, pin star and milky-way images require fast lenses. Being a landscape photographer does not require fast lenses. So I don't want to invest in fast glass just for the odd image once in a blue moon. Having said that, I shoot star images every so often when the blue moon comes around.
Using a tripod is a must. Keep lights totally out of the image. Do not even use lights yourself before the image is taken because your eyes will take 10 or 20 minutes to adjust. Focus before it gets dark and then turn your lens to manual focus so that it will not change when you fiddle with the buttons on your camera. Use the biggest f stop you have. Jack up the ISO till your shutter speed is around 60 seconds. Beware of other photographers as their cameras may give off a red light during their exposures.
There you go. Try teaching your camera this one trick.
]]>
Here is the twilight wedge image. I wanted to include some foreground interest leading back to the twilight wedge.
Here is the sunrise image. Half dome and the sun was quite heavy on the left so I included the rock on the right to create some balance. Remember to shoot both ways. Look around. Shoot behind you and what is in front.
I just love how the flowing water catches my attention right at the edge of the image and then how it just pulls me into the image. So how did I create this image? First of all, the stream of water right at the edge is not that big but I wanted to give it prominence. Using a wide angle lens and going right close to it exaggerates it size in comparison to the rest of the image. Secondly, play with your shutter speeds until you get the right amount of flow that you like. You will need a tripod for this kind of photography as your shutter speeds can get quite low. Lastly, create lines that go into your image so that viewer will look into your image. This is what gives images depth.
Windless days are best for this kind of photography. Since you are using a slow shutter speed any movement in the foliage will be out of focus. The less wind the sharper your image.
]]>During the last six months I have been using Luminar extensively. I could not be happier. This program is cheap, easy to learn, and yet very powerful. For the person that just wants to use a few sliders here and there to make a huge difference, Luminar is for you. For those of you that want to play with layers and masking, Luminar is for you.
I use Luminar for 90% of everything I do to an image. With Luminar it takes me 90% less time to process than it did using PhotoShop. I highly recommend you look into this software.
]]>I have been shooting with Canon since 1986 or 1987. There was a brief period where I also shot with Minolta. I owned many different Canon bodies and finally ended up with the Canon 5D and the 5D Mark II. Since I came to digital from the film world I was slow to learn Photoshop. Needless to say I am no Photoshop expert. To this day, I do not blend images. I do use luminosity masks to bring in or to take out some brightness zones but I am not good at that either. In the Canon days I used to have to use graduated neutral density filters to curtail the dynamic range present in high contrast scenes. The Canons just could not handle many of the scenes I asked them to capture.
Then I made the switch to Sony (A7R II). Oh my, I cannot believe the difference. I no longer use neutral density grads. I get my shots in one image - no blending, no grads. Let's look at an example:
It is after sunset. The sky is bright but the foreground is dark. The side of the rocky hill on the left that faces me is dark to begin with, but now it is totally dark because it is in shade and after sunset. This images is just not possible to shoot with the Canon (without the use of grads or blending)(to my limited knowledge). So how do you get this image with the Sony?
With the Sony I simply expose for the sky and the let the blacks fall where they may. In post processing I just lift the blacks right up with the shadows slider and the black slider. I move those to sliders and the detail just magically appears. It does not take hours of Photoshop work; you just move two sliders. I am truly happy with my Sony (for landscape photography).
I am not saying that you should go and buy expensive gear or that it will make you a better photographer. However, plan your savings and gear purchases well because it does make a difference. The detail in this sensor coupled with the ability to lift the blacks make this camera ideal for low-light landscape photography.
Rather save and get the right gear than buy something you later need to replace, and then replace your replacement to eventually end up with what you need. Save up and save yourself the replacements. Good gear is not just import for your images but it is important for you too. Get yourself good gear to hike in, to keep you dry, to keep you warm. When you are not comfortable it impacts your creativity.
]]>
Now let's talk composition. As I often say, once you have your basic composition please resist taking the image. Look at your foreground (if you have one). Can you find something better? Walk around, start looking for lines, anything that stands out, or is different. Once you find something then recompose and shoot. Here I found the flow of the water intriguing as it formed two lines from the side that joined together leading into the images. The slow shutter speed evened the water out and helped to create the "white" water flow.
Make sure that when you sharpen images like this that you do not sharpen the water as you want it blurry and sharpening it when it looks this dreamy just creates a grainy look. In PhotoShop or LIghtRoom hold down the alt key while sliding the masking slider. Black means it is not sharpening there, while it sharpens that which is white.
The old masters did a lot to their black & white images by dodging (lightening) and burning (darkening). We can do the same with our digital tools. So I lightened the white water flow just a bit. I also darkened some of the rocks slightly to create a contrast between the rocks and the water. I am very pleased with the images given the horrible conditions.
]]>
It is the backlighting that gives prominence to that fish. It is the backlighting that gives it its color. It is the backlighting that gives the fish that wow factor. The backlighting makes that fish stand out.
Experiment with light from different angles. Take some images bathed in front light, then shoot using side-light and backlight. Look at the different effects that result from the direction of the light. Learn which kind of light is best for which kind of image. For example, backlighting is great for leaves. Remember what you have learned and apply it when you are out shooting.
]]>
Images do not have to be used in isolation. You can use a few still images to tell a story. The best stories to tell are those with some kind of action or implied action. Once again it requires patience to sit there and follow these birds (or animals) until they do something. Shoot a number of shots that show the different phases of the action.
In this sequence we have the bird watching to water for any fish. Image two shows the bird after having just caught the fish. In image three the bird is now ready for dinner.
I want to encourage you to shoot and to present your images in sequence to tell a story (kind of like a mini-series).
]]>It makes the images more personal.
When you are at the animal's eye level it just provides a different perspective because we are not always at eye level with them.
Your background can be more uniform because part of your background is not dark and part of it light because of the sky. Shooting from a low angle when shooting animals or birds helps you to illuminate the sky from your background.
Because of my location relative to that of the elephant I am at eye level with the elephant. The foreground grasses show that I am quite low down. There is no bright sky in the background. We can see the water falling down from its trunk and mouth. It just would not have been the same had this image been taken from a higher elevation. Higher elevation works wonders for landscape images, not so much for most wildlife images.
Although I am not quite at water level, I am shooting from a reasonably low angle. It makes it look as though we are almost with the animals. A low angle provides a certain level of intimacy with the animals.
As always, be safe. Animals can be very dangerous. I have almost lost my life on two different occasions due to interactions with hippos. I have been charged and almost trampled by an elephant while on foot. I have been attacked by two badgers. I have even had the displeasure of having an extremely dangerous encounter with a black mamba (snake). Please believe me, no image is worth your life. Always keep safety first. Respect the animals and keep your distance.
]]>
But how do you get a good background and what makes a great background? How do you get it blurred? Let's start with the easiest part first. Long lenses by the nature of their physics have less depth of field. So when you use a long lense with a large F.Stop you get your background blurred easily. Having said that there are things you can do to get that background even nicer.
Increase the distance between the bird and the background. The more distance between the bird and the background the more blurred your background will be.
Choose a background that is darker than the bird. The human eye tends to go to bright objects. We want the viewer's eyes to go to the bird, not the background.
Long lenses have a narrow field of view, so by just moving a few feet in any direction can radically change your background. So we need to pay attention not just to the bird but to the background. Move to change it if needed. Remember that you can also move up or down and that can make a world of difference.
Get close to the bird. The closer you are to the bird the more it will blur the background
The background on your left is just perfect. The background to the right of the bird is a bit distracting. It was very distracting to begin with. I just could not move to get a better angle. So I darkened the bright parts of the background to the right substantially in post processing. The idea is to get as much separation from the background as possible.
The object is to not have the viewer ever notice any background. Your eyes should not be tempted to ever even look at the background. Having pleasing colors in the background may help to compliment the object you are photographing but it should not compete for attention.
Just move a little and see what a big difference that can make. Think about your background not just about your subject.
]]>
You have to separate the animal from its background to make them stand out. Use the largest F.Stop your lens offers you. Use a very fast shutter speed if possible as these animals can move quickly and you are working with a long lens which requires fast shutter speeds to get sharp images (to cancel out camera movement). You want the background blurred.
Making eye contact with the animal can add interest to the image. Work on the composition as has been discussed in previous blogs. As you drive around looking for animals always keep an eye on the camera's battery level. Once your battery is near exhaustion replace it, don't wait for it to get too low. You just never know when a rare animal shows up, or a kill happens. That is the last place you want to be stranded with no juice. By the time you replaced your battery it may be over, the animal may be gone. Change that battery when nothing is going on and it is approaching low levels.
Just like I mentioned last week, get to know the animal's behavior to better equip you to get good images. Work with the group of people with you so that they will be quiet. Get them not to move around in the vehicle as that will make you loose the animal in the viewfinder. Shut the vehicle's engine off when you shoot as engine vibration ruins your sharpness.
Always respect the animals and try not to disturb them.
]]>
Be willing to stay with the animals for a long time. Keep that camera following the animals (have I said that before?). Once again, use a large F.Stop and a fast shutter speed.
We sat watching these birds for a long time. Just the female leaning up towards her mate greatly enhanced this image from the others showing them do things without interacting with each other.
These elephants were not trying to kiss. How do elephants kiss? They were getting themselves involved in a little tussle. It is their interaction that makes this shot what it is. Without their interaction this would not have been an interesting image. Do your best to show animals interacting with each other as those are the images that often stand out.
If you are new to bird in flight photography you may want to know how to ease into it. It is always easier to start with larger birds. They move slower for you to follow. It is easier on the camera to keep focus on them and to track them. This will give you some experience. It just takes lots and lots of practice. Here is an example:
This bird (vulture) just took off. It is not moving that fast yet. It is large, so it is slower anyway. You are also warned prior to them taking off because they take a few steps to get airborne. You have another opportunity to take photographs of them in flight when they come in to land because you know approximately where they are going to land (at of near the kill).
Let's talk composition. Birds in flight are moving, so it is important to give them space to fly into. They need more space in front of them than behind them. Make sure we are not clipping their wings. Truth be told, all of this is happening so fast and it is so difficult to follow these birds with long lenses that composition cannot always be planned well. The solution is to shoot rapid fire. Set your camera to take as many images per second as it can take. Then keep your finger on the shutter and just shoot, doing your best to follow the bird. The most of your images will be a disappointment. Either it will suffer from focus issues or you will have clipped part of the bird. That is okay, because somewhere in that burst of 10 or 20 images will be one that is just right. The way to end up with a few good images of birds in flight is to start off with many images (shoot fast bursts).
Aren't you lucky that you live in the digital age? Shooting bursts at a high frame rate are free, think what film would have cost you. Just practice and you may just find that it becomes addicting.
]]>
Just like taking photographs of people we need to make sure the eye is sharp. Other parts of the body can be soft and even out of focus, but the eye needs to be sharp. It is always nice to include some action in the image or to show their behavior.
Settings wise, a large F.Stop is usually preferred as that will blur the background and make the bird stand out. We don't want anything distracting the viewer. Secondly a large F.Stop gives us a fast shutter speed which is necessary to get sharp images with long lenses. You may need to elevate your ISO to get a fast enough shutter speed. Typically you will want a shutter speed as fast as the focal length of your lens. So if you are shooting with a 600mm lens then you will want a shutter speed of at least 1/600th of a second. Modern lenses have stabilization built into them (or into the camera itself) which enables you to get sharp images with slower shutter speeds. This technology works well, but I would still advocate a pretty fast shutter speed.
Get to know the bird's behavior so that you can predict what it is going to do so that you will be ready. You will need a lot of patience. Good light is still important. Go out there and try some bird photography.
Here are some tricks and tips to help you make some impressive sand dune images:
Sand dunes need to be shot when the light is really at a low angle (early morning or around sunset). This makes one side of the dune bright and the other side dark (in shadow). It creates contrast. It creates a sharp ridgeline (the human eye always follows lines). If you are close to the sand, low light brings out the texture. It makes the ripples in the sand more pronounced. This kind of light brings out more of the color in the sand. Your number one thing to remember when shooting sand dunes is low angled light.
Include something for scale. Without the fully grown and reasonably tall trees in the foreground you would not have any idea how tall this dune is. It is the trees that give you a sense of scale. The scale provides the wonder because this is a tall dune.
The ridgeline is usually where it is at for photography.
Flat diffused light does not flatter sand dunes.
Sand can ruin your gear. Be careful changing lenses. Keep your gear covered when not in use. Also take care of yourself, take and drink lots of water.
Be careful. These sand dunes may look lifeless at first glance but beware, there may be snakes. We encountered a sidewinder on these dunes.
Equally dangerous are people. They may not be dangerous for you but they are for your photography. Including a human in your image may enhance it but bear in mind that humans leave footprints and too many footprints ruin sand dune images. They tread a sharp ridgeline into a flat one very quickly.
How about getting some great sand dune images?
]]>If you look at my images you will also find that most of them do not include man-made objects. I guess some habits die hard. I do not consider myself a "purist." In fact, I want to encourage you today to include some man-made objects in your landscape image. I want to encourage you to include a very obvious but often overlooked object in your landscape photography. Thus I ask the question: "What about the road.?
We typically travel on roads to the desired location but we seldom look at the road as an object to be photographed. Yet the road can make some nice images. They can create depth. They can wind and make an image dynamic. They can lead to where you want the viewer to look. They offer many advantages and plead to be included in your shots. They don't move and are easy to photograph. Once again, please be safe.
Perhaps we should pay more attention to the road. Roads can play an important role in making an image great.
Remember to leave more room in front of the animal to walk into than behind it. You want the animal to walk into the image rather than leaving it. The animal does not have to be that big because we are still shooting a landscape image. In fact, hiding an animal in there somewhere may create a nice surprise for the viewer.
I had a 150-600mm zoom on a crop sensored camera with me when this hyena came on the scene. I could have filled the scene rather nicely with that setup. Instead, this image was shot with my full frame Sony and my 70-200mm. It stays a landscape image but it tells a story. The animal is not the image, it is just a part of it. If the animal is moving make sure to use a shutter speed fast enough to keep it sharp. Now if you want to show action (if there is action), you can use a slower shutter speed and pan to show movement. Just know that such an image is going to be a wildlife image and not a landscape image because panning will take the focus away from the landscape (it will be blurred).
For something different, just place the animal in the scene as part of it.
]]>
The image to the left (or top depending on the size of your screen)(the first image) represents a poor image because the viewer just looks at it as a flat image. They look from side to side. They are looking at an image. The picture to the right (the second image) represents a good image because the viewer is looking into the image. This image is not flat as their eyes are drawn into the image. Viewers do not look at an image here they are looking at a scene. It is as if they are there. The image has depth and the viewer almost just needs to take one step forward to be in the scene; they are invited to look deep.
In many past blogs I have shared some secrets to help you create the illusion of depth. I say the "illusion" of depth because they will be looking at the image on a flat medium (flat print, flat screen). We employ depth creating secrets to create the illusion of depth. We want the brain to think there is depth. Some of those secrets are (although I am only mentioning a few here; please see many previous blogs for more):
lead-in lines
placement of brighter objects
enlarging foreground objects
Going wide
Balancing a foreground element with a background element
Using a strong foreground element, a defined middle-ground element, and a drawing background element
Today I want to introduce another one of these secrets not mentioned before. See if you can find it in this image:
What makes you think there is distance or depth in this image? Yes, I am using two foreground objects, but that is not what I am referring to here. Yes, the clouds lead to the mountain in the distance, but I am thinking of something else. When you get to a place where there are many of the same sized objects throughout your scene you can rejoice because you can use that to create the illusion of distance and depth. These tufts of grass are scattered throughout the scene and they are all about the same in size. When the human brain looks at them it sees them getting smaller and smaller as you move into the scene. Your brain knows that they are actually the same size. Your brain then comes to the conclusion that there must be distance to account for them getting smaller and smaller.
Whenever you find many same sized items scattered throughout the scene use them proactively to create the illusion of depth. The may be rocks, grass, anything really. The red clouds went over me and continued behind me. Yet I deliberately shot into the light to get the grass backlit. This emphasizes them and makes them stand out from the similarly colored ground. Had I shot the other way the grass would hardly have been visible in this light. I am also shooting from a very low angle to help emphasize them.
This image then uses a few compositional elements to draw the viewer in. To summarize: we have two foreground rocks, the clouds leading to the mountains, and these same sized tufts of grass all working together to make you see distance. We want the viewer to look from front to back rather than from side to side.
]]>
While the sky is busy lighting up and you know where the action is going to be start looking for something of interest to place in the foreground. I went with this green bush. I broke the rule by placing it in the center (horizontally). Now how do we emphasize the sky to maximize its impact?
Shoot from a low angle. I am shooting at knee height here. You want to be shooting up to include lots of sky.
Leave space between the top of your foreground object (if possible) and the background objects or the sky. If I had gone much lower the green bush would have not been separated from the mountains in the back. Without that separation you loose depth.
Go wide to create a big sky and to shoot almost above you.
Get really close to your foreground object to make it seem larger.
I regularly see people shooting at eye level. Try lowering your angle, especially if you want to feature the sky. Think skyscape, not landscape. Go where the color is. Go where the most interest is. Angle that camera upward with a really wide lens and you can get some really nice images.
]]>
This image was taken well after sunset. The foreground was pretty dark by now. Yet the sky was still quite bright, at least to the far right of the image. The light falling on the rocky hill is reflected light bouncing off of the clouds. With my Sony A7R II it is easy to lighten the dark shadows and black to recover the detail. Now let's talk about how to post process an image like this to maximum impact. Please see the blog on good equipment (two weeks back) on recovering the detail in the dark parts of the image.
Make sure that the darks are recovered to where there is detail in the darkest parts of the rocks.
Now just look at the image and identify the parts of the rocks that are already brighter (getting the most light).
Lighten those sections even more.
Warm the light on those sections just a bit.
That is it. It does not take much. Don't be afraid to shoot when the foreground is already dark or in shadow. Today's cameras are just fantastic; you may be able to "see" in the dark.
]]>Others in the group started talking about napping as we drove to our accommodations. However, photographers are always looking at the sky, looking at the sun (not directly into it), always looking at the clouds and to our surroundings. Photographers need to develop the ability to forecast good shooting opportunities. We need to be able to anticipate when things are looking good for photography.
I stayed up, grabbed my gear and went walking. Just after sunset I grabbed this image. So what do we look for specifically to anticipate a good photographic opportunity coming our way?
Storms and rain (not being socked in) are usually exciting times for photographers
Clouds (not being socked in) everywhere except where the sun is setting; where it is better to be a bit clearer
Detail in the clouds
High cirrus clouds often light up
Clouds forming lines and or nice formations
Always look around, assess the light, examine the clouds to help you better anticipate what it is going to be like at and just after sunset.
]]>Recently I discovered new software that I am just in love with; Macphun's Luminar. For just $69 (no subscription required) you get software that can be used as a stand alone package or as a plug-in for PhotoShop. The power and simplicity of this software amazes me every time I use it. For the first time a beginner can edit like a pro. You don't need years of experience and complicated techniques and tutorials.
Let's not talk about it, let's let an image do the talking ... First of all, here is the unedited raw file:
As you can see from this file, this is almost an impossible image to shoot. The contrast between the darkest parts of the image and the the lightest part where the sun is beginning to peek out is way more than any camera can handle. You may be tempted to say that this is a file deserving of the trash bin. The whites are blown and the blacks are blown. No, this is not photographer's error. There is no other way to shoot a scene such as this. You cannot use a graduated neutral density filter because you have mountains and the brightest spot is well beneath some of the mountains. So you expose for the brights only (I actually clip the brights just a bit as I know my camera very well and know how much I can recover in post; this allows just a little more detail in the blacks).
Now let's give Macphun's Luminar a try ...
Need I say more? With this software you just move a few sliders and apply a few presents and you are done. You can use layers, masks, and therefore localized adjustments all with easy. What used to take me a long time in PhotoShop now takes me a few minutes and I am done. I can do with this program what I was never able to do with PhotoShop. Now I am not dissing PhotoShop; I am just not good enough with PhotoShop.
If you want to edit like a pro but am not an expert with PhotoShop or Lightroom you may want to look at Luminar. I use it for every image I process now. The results are just fantastic; as you can see for yourself.
Here is a link to the software and if you type in STEENBERG as a coupon code you get another 10% off:
Disclaimer: I do get a small referral fee from Macphun if you purchase the software. Whether I do or not, I still stand behind what I said here. This software has really changed my entire editing process. I love the results more than ever before and I spend much less time editing.
]]>
This image was taken from the same general location as last weeks image (rainbow blog). You can see the banding start to form in last week's image. The sun came out as the clouds moved and bathed everything in this bright orange / yellow light. What I cannot explain is the special streaks in the sky. The sun was behind me to my left.
I cannot remember if my polarizing filter helped make the phenomenon more visible or not. This is the kind of image that makes people say; "That was PhotoShopped." These images are different and rare. To maximize your chances of getting such images it may be helpful to understand what causes them so that you can be out there when causal factors are present.
People often use neutral density filters to get slow shutter speeds. If the clouds are moving they may cause streaks like this. However, I was not using a neutral density filter here.
My take away here is what I always say - you have to be out there to get the shot when it happens. You cannot expect to get great images if you hardy ever go out to photograph.
]]>
It is the rainbow that makes this image. I have said this many times before; when the storms come everyone goes inside but photographers grab their gear and go shoot. You have to be out there to get the image. Think safety first as storms can be dangerous. Please follow governmental guidelines for safety. Rainbows are typically seen when the sun is behind you and the moisture is in front of you. As always, composition and placement are important.
In this image, I ran a bit to get to the right spot. You have to be quick because you don't know how long the rainbow will stay visible. Find something interesting to place in the foreground. I like how the rainbow echoes the curve of the rocky hill. If you are lucky you can even see double rainbows. For some scientific reason, the band between the two rainbows are always a bit darker than the rest of the sky.
Please use a polarizing filter when shooting rainbows. Make sure to rotate it till the rainbow is at its best. Polarizers make a big difference with rainbows. The second rainbow was barely visible without the filter. Choose the right lens to make the rainbow large enough in the frame. In this case, I was using a wide lens. I permanently carry a dry sack in my camera backpack to cover my gear should it begin to rain. I also have a small umbrella in my backpack permanently so that I can shoot during the rain, if the rain is not too bad.
Go grab some rainbow images when the storms come.
]]>
You will actually be surprised by how many times lightning strike multiple times at the same time (within a second). To maximize your chances of getting multiple strikes you have to keep your shutter open for just a bit longer than you otherwise would. Once again, I use a three stop neutral density filter to help get the shutter speed where I want it; for multiple strikes between 1 second and 1/4th of a second (you may be lucky with 1/8th of a second.
If you use a ten stop neutral density filter you can get nice long shutter speeds, but you will pay a price. In this image you can clearly see the pocket of rain in the back left of the image. That pocket of rain is moving quite rapidly to the right. If your shutter is open for too long that pocket might have moved all the way to the mountain or further. The sky becomes uniform. You will also loose the nice color to the right of the pocket. What is more is that storms usually go hand in hand with wind. That wind tugs at this tree in the foreground. Now how do you keep the tree sharp with a long exposure if the leaves are being blown around? That is why I assess the amount of movement and choose a shutter speed fast to enough to get a sharp tree, but slow enough to increase the chances of getting multiple strikes. When shooting this way during the day you can get wonderful detail in the clouds which will be lost with too long of an exposure since the clouds are moving.
You get the desired shutter speed by playing with your ISO and your 3 stop neutral density filter. I also add a polarizer which can add another stop or two if needed. That gives me some flexibility to get to my desired shutter speed. To trigger the camera at the right moment I use a lightning trigger (by Stepping Stone Products). Now I know this lighting trigger is expensive and I also know that there are many competitors that are much cheaper. The competitors may work reasonably well at night but firing your camera during the day is another story. Don Smith teaches a lightning workshop in the Grand Canyon and has seen all these triggers in action and concluded with certainty that this one is simply the best.
Make sure your camera's focus is set to manual. You don't want the camera to check focus when the lightning trigger wants to fire your camera. By the time your camera confirms focus the lightning is gone and you just missed your shot. Lastly, check your camera shutter's delay. Only cameras with lightning fast delays are suitable to capture lightning during the day. The Sony mirrorless cameras are very fast and work well.
Be safe! Always follow governmental guidelines on lightning and safety.
]]>
This vantage point did not have the greatest amount of height but it was enough. Height enables you to see far. But please, don't be satisfied with just height. Please still apply everything we have been talking about in this blog. In this case, the sand forms a road that leads into the image. The sand has ripple lines that add to the encouragement to look into the image. Be on the lookout for these things as they make a huge difference.
I repeat the words of Ansel Adams which I posted once in another blog: "The difference between a good image and a great image is often just a few feet." (paraphrased) So walk around and find that which adds to the image. Look for subtle things to invite the viewer in. A few feet this way or a few feet that way can make a big positive difference. Lighten these paths just slightly in post to emphasize them.
If you have a choice mostly decide to shoot down for deep landscape images. Get some height, elevation typically adds depth.
]]>Make sure your image has a strong foreground, a defined middle-ground, and a drawing background. Most landscape images that follow this recipe are very pleasing. This rule is almost a fail-safe default that you can follow. Let's look at an image:
The first grasses and the ripples in the sand are the foreground. It adds interest and helps to create depth. I like to make the foreground stand out a bit by just lightening it a bit in post processing. Then there is a defined middle-ground right in the center of the image (little hump, dune with grass). You don't have to place the defined feature in the center. Lastly you have the background formed by the large dune.
Why does this recipe work so well for so many images? A good strong foreground anchors the eye, grabs the viewer's attention at once, and creates depth. Then your eye is drawn into the image by the middle-ground. It just brings your attention in with a small jump from the foreground to the middle-ground and leads you on to the background. This is what good landscape photography seeks to do; draw the viewer into the image rather than seeing a flat image from side to side. These "grounds" almost act like stepping stones for your eyes, creating a path to walk on into the scene.
Try this recipe for yourself and see if it makes a positive difference.
]]>
This was taken late one afternoon. This was a fairly fast moving storm. The rain and lightning just took place in one area. Behind me was clear and bright. It was equally bright and clear to the left and to the right. Beyond the storm, straight ahead was also bright. So how do you control the ambient light since it is bright daylight? How do you get your camera to fire when the lightning strikes? Since it is bright you cannot use long exposures.
First I used a three stop neutral density filter to bring the shutter speed down. Please note that you cannot make it any darker to use a longer shutter speed and still get this image the way it is because the clouds and rain are moving. You need your shutter speed at about 1/8th to 1/15th of a second. Set your ISO very low to enable you to reach this desired shutter speed and of course use a small F.Stop for the same reason.
Next I used a lightning trigger to fire my camera. Go wide because you don't know where the lightning is going to strike. I was hoping the strike was going to be on the left as that is where the majority of lightning activity took place when I setup my gear. That is way I place the road where it is placed. I wanted to road to lead to the lightning. As you can see it struck elsewhere, but that is okay. It is still a nice image with a nice strike, even two strikes.
I will share more about lightning shooting in the weeks to come.
]]>In the coming weeks and months I am going to write a few blogs on shooting lightning during the day. In my recent travels in Namibia, Africa I got many lightning strike images during the day. I will be sharing some secrets to help you get such images too. The image I am going to share today is not that great. The lightning strike is too small. There is not much going on. But I am sharing this image to make just one point. Please look at this image and just ask yourself how much interest lightning adds.
Once again, just like last week, we are in the Kalahari desert. The foreground does not offer anything of interest. I am using a wide lens hoping to get a massive strike that will fill the frame. That did not happen. So we not only have a boring foreground, but we also have a boring upper sky. The whole middle section of the sky is just without detail.
The only glimmer of hope is the sun itself, but its presentation is not great either. Without the lightning strike I would not even have bothered to process this image. There is just nothing there for me. Now look at that lightning strike. Is that not interesting? Even though it is not large it adds a lot to the image. It gives you a center point of interest, something to focus on and study. It keeps your attention as you look at it.
The sole point of today's blog is that lightning strikes add a lot of interest to just about any image. Why not try to incorporate them into your images? Why not try them in the day?
]]>When you see the makings of good light forming know that you have an opportunity for good images - regardless of where you are. Just find something to go with it. Even if you find nothing of interest, just do your best, because good light usually makes good images.
A storm was brewing. I found myself in the Kalahari desert, in Namibia. The detail in the clouds were interesting. Rain started to fall in the distance. The color was nice because of the setting sun. But as you can see, nothing was going on in the land part of the scene. The horizon is so flat you can almost use it to see if a ruler is made correctly. What do you do?
Try to find something different, anything that stands out. Nope, all the trees are the same here. Find a road that leads into the scene. No, the roads are all parallel to the horizon here. Okay, nothing works. Just get a bit of hight and shoot. Hight helps to give depth. Now this image is not the best image out there, but it is interesting. The only ingredient you have is really some color and some good light in the distance. Sometimes that is all you need to get something.
This experience just taught me once again that light makes or breaks an image.
]]>It depends! Is the cloud-cover flat and even or is it broken up? Are you on the edge of a storm or is the cloud-cover vast in every direction? Are the clouds moving and if so, at what speed? You are trying to assess your chances of getting good light as time changes things. If the clouds are broken up or if I am on the edge of a storm I simply wait. If the clouds move, especially if they move fast, I simply wait. The light will change, in fact, the light may become very good.
In this scene the light did not offer much at first. The whole image suffered from flat light similar to that in the foreground and to the right. Patience often times pay off. After some time the broken up clouds moved in such a way that an opening in the clouds appeared in front of the sun. The sun shone through and fell just on the right place. It is that very light that makes the image what it is.
Landscape photographers need to be able to assess what the weather (and the light) is going to do. If the assessment holds promise then wait it out, if not, come back tomorrow. There are many smart phone apps that can help with that. Unfortunately, there is no app to make you more patient. Why not use the waiting time to scout? Yes, go look for more and better compositions.
]]>Let's look at an example:
As you can see, we find ourselves at Deadvlei in Namibia, Africa. It is a fairly large dead pan. There are fairly vast areas of this salty crust and there are many dead trees. Since we have a lot of space to work with and since you can place yourself anywhere in this scene, why pick this particular spot? As we stand to look around we first of all look where the good light is. That is the direction we want to shoot towards.
Now we begin to walk around looking for foreground elements and or good lead-in lines (that lead to the good light). What we want to achieve here is to find a good foreground element that can be placed in front of the scene with the good light or we need to find good strong lead-in lines that lead to the good light. In this way, we are combining two techniques that both draw the viewer into the image. It makes the image really strong compositionally.
After we walk around a bit we find this spot. The lead-in lines are strong and they lead straight to the good light. We lower our vantage point because that makes these lines appear longer and it minimizes the space between where the lines stop and the trees begin. That space is dead, there is nothing happening there, so we want to minimize it. We take the image at a small F.Stop to get everything in focus.
There you have the process that goes through my mind when I walk into the scene. By combining good strong lead-in lines with good bright light we end up with a winner. When we use two elements to lure the viewer into the image rather than just one, the image is just that much stronger.
]]>I was lucky enough to be there recently just as a storm broke up. I took my gear and rushed to this spot. I just made it in time to get this scene. After a bit, the sun was lower and created some more nicely lit scenes. Here are the two images I got.
As you can see these images are difficult to expose right because of the huge difference in exposure value between the very bright parts and the dark parts of the image. Most cameras cannot take such images and retain detail in both the highlights and the dark spots. Both these images are from just one shot each; no HDR, no blending, and there is detail in the brightest and darkest spots. I just love my Sony A7R II.
The best way to get such images exposed right is to use your historgram. Even then, you will have to learn to know your camera's sensor. You need to know how much you can recover from blown highlights and shadows because there will be clippings with images as this. With the Sony, I have learned how much of the Zebra lines to tolerate. These images had some clipped highlights, but they just disappeared with a quick adjustment of the highlights slider. I did not even have to play with the white slider.
Since the histogram did show clippings and there was no way not to have clippings (in either the white or black side of the histogram), I had to bracket. When you are facing a scene such as this you cannot take the risk of missing it. So please bracket. Make sure you came home with a file you can work with. Most of all, you have to be out there when this happens to get the shot. Most people just stay at home because it is still cold and windy from the storm. Please get out to capture these images.
]]>
You may not actually see what I am referring to because you are looking at a small version of this image. Imagine this as a rather large print. Look at the bottom left ... Let me show you what I am referring to.
Sometimes an image may not be good, but yet there is something about it that just surprises you. That little spec adds drama, scale, size, and surprise. Why not shoot the odd image here and there with the unexpected? I have a feeling that I am going to have a lot of fun with this image printed really large. It is going to spark more discussions than many other images much better than this one.
]]>When the water is brighter in certain parts than in other parts, lines tend to form. Yes, those lines are most often with or against the flow of the water, but not always. Regardless of the direction of flow, a photographer can use rapids, bubbles, and bright areas to create lines that lead into the image, because depth is great for many landscape images and lines help to create depth.
Here is an example of an image where I chose to shoot across the flowing water instead of with or against the flow. I believe that I still created a line using the brighter parts of the water flow rather than using the directional flow of the water. This bright line leads right into the image. Shooting with or against the flow of water here would not have worked because there was nothing great in those directions to shoot.
What do you think, did it work? We can often times be so trapped in convention that we only follow convention. Break convention if needed. Photographic rules (such as the rule of thirds), generally work very well, that is why they exist. However, there will always be exceptions to any rule. Please do not let the rule make you miss the exception. Be able to spot when to break the rules. Go against convention. Be brave to do what is different.
So how do you spot the shot? When looking a flowing water, just look for the whiter parts. They may not be much brighter, but remember your sloooow shutter speed will help to exaggerate that water flow. The image will be much more exciting than seen by your eyes because of this effect. Now play with those brighter areas compositionally. Do you see any lines forming? Use them if there is something good behind them.
]]>Life, however, is not always that simple. What do you do when there is movement in your image and you want to show some of the movement but freeze other parts of the movement? When shooting a moving bicycle you can show movement by using the panning technique. When shooting a prop driven airplane you can choose a medium shutter speed because the props are moving much, much faster than the pane. A medium shutter speed is fast enough to freeze the plane but still show the movement of the props. But what if things are moving at about the same speed and you want to freeze some movement AND show other movement in the same image?
Let's look at an image. The water was obviously flowing and I wanted to show that water movement. So naturally I needed to use a slow shutter speed. However, the wind was howling (I mostly hate wind when I shoot landscapes). The wind was howling so badly that the trees were shaking. Shaking trees and slow shutter speeds typically do not go together (there are exceptions, like wanting to show a major storm), because you end up with out of focus trees (branches and leaves). So I needed a fast shutter speed to freeze the branches and leaves; to get them sharp and in focus. Well you really cannot use a slow and fast shutter speed in the same shot.
The only way out is to blend two different images. In this example, I shot one image using a slow shutter speed to show the flow of the water, and another exposure to get the trees sharp. It was an overcast, dull day, so I could not get a fast enough shutter speed without cranking up the ISO beyond where I am comfortable doing, but I got it close enough.
Now you have two images to blend in post processing. Please do not wait for the post processing process to begin before thinking about that process. You need to be considering things for the processing process while at the scene composing your image. You need to make sure that you have things that are not moving between the moving water and the moving trees so that you have a clear path to blend your images well. You do not want moving leaves and branches in front of moving water because how then will you freeze one and show the movement of the other?
So I positioned myself in such a way that there are rocks (not moving) between the water and the trees. You need to make sure that your tripod is rock solid and that it does not move between exposures because you will need to line things up in post and how are you going to line things up if the same object is in two different places in the two different images?
In post you simply place the images in two layers. Using a mask you now delete the moving parts you want sharp. In this case. I deleted the moving leaves and branches to show the sharps ones from the second exposure with the faster shutter speed. In this way I kept the moving water AND the sharp leaves and branches. Since the rocks were not moving they were used as the buffer between the water and the trees for deleting / masking purposes.
There you have it. Shoot multiple images using different shutter speeds and blend them together.
]]>Main attractions are often shot to death. Yes, even so, it is still nice to have those images yourself. Today, I want to encourage you to look around, in directions others are not looking. Just be aware of what else is available. Go for the simple images. Perhaps there are some flowers that you can focus on, even thought you may not have come for floral images today. Perhaps you can isolate some flowing water over just a few rocks instead of shooting the river. Always ask yourself if there are any images within the image. You are there and the conditions may never be the same again, so you may as well get as many images as you can. Now, I am not referring to getting fifty images of the same thing composed in the same way. Go for what is different. Go for what is simple.
On my last trip to Zion National Park I was shooting the fall colors, the river, and those magnificent red rock cliffs. They are so impressive that it is difficult to see anything else. One is just enamored with the scenes around every bend. My time there had come to an end; I had a plane to catch, even though I would have liked to stay another day - and then probably another after that. I was walking back to the bus stop, still looking, searching for anything I can photograph quickly; for a photographer never stops looking.
This scene is right next to the pathway. Millions of people walk right by it every year. I have seen many, many images of Zion, but I have never seen this image. It is so simple. Many people walked by while I was shooting this image, they looked at what my camera was pointed out, and where not impressed. Yet, I like the image.
How many images do we loose because we only see what the main attraction has to offer? Perhaps the lessor offerings may be worth a look as well.
]]>In the image below the multiple lead-in lines are not long. Height becomes imperative to try and make them look just a bit longer as that creates more depth. Let's take a look at this Zion National Park image.
I had to gain elevation to be shooting down to make the river go longer. Remember, lower elevation minimizes the middle-ground. There are a number of lead-in lines in this image. From right to left: the brighter riverbank makes a line. I brightened the end of that line ever so slightly to draw the eye in that direction. Next we have the darker riverbank. That part is darker because it is wetter. The water must have receded recently. Then we have the river itself. I darkened the river to differentiate it from the darker riverbank. No, in this case I did not darken it much in post processing, rather, I darkened it in the field while shooting using a polarizing filter. Then we have the riverbank on the other side of the river. So there are four lead-in lines working together to move the viewer into the image, thus creating some depth. More subtly so, the trees on the right of the brightest riverbank also form a lead-in line.
This image, although it has strong multiple lead-in lines would not have worked as well if I did not combine it with more height. The lead-in lines are short as it is and shooting from lower down would have shortened them even more.
When at a scene, look at the lead-in lines you see. Look at whether or not height is required. Sometimes, an image just requires combining both height and lead-in lines.
]]>
There are three lead-in lines in this image. The major or dominant one is obviously the flowing river. The main strand of flowing water is brighter than anything else in the image so it is going to draw attention first. We also have a little river bank line on the right leading into the image. Lastly, we have a weaker lead-in line on the far left with the deeper water forming a line leading into the image. All three lines work together to move the viewer into the image.
In post processing we need to make sure these lines are prominent. I brightened the main river lead-in line somewhat. I darkened the small river bank line. Things do not always need to be brighter. The key is that it should stand out. It just needs to be different from the surroundings. In the case of the river bank, it was darker already, so I darkened it even more (just a bit), to help it stand out more. The river-line on the far left is also darker than the sand on either side of it, so making it brighter is not going to help as it will then just blend in better with the sand. I don't want it to blend in because then I loose the line it makes. So I darkened it a little to make it stand out from the sand, thus forming a more defined line.
Once again, look for and use lines in your landscape images. In post processing, work those lines so that they can better do what they are intended to do: lead the viewer into your image.
]]>
There is no huge or prominent S-curve. Yet, due to where more light fell, the depth of the water, and the appearance of rocks there is a subtle and subdued S-Curve (or more accurately, a reverse S-curve). This curve plays an important part in the composition of this image. It leads your eye into the image, curving on the way there.
When you are out in the field shooting, always look for curves, they make most images more interesting and pleasing to look at. In post processing, do not be afraid to bring out the curve a bit more. In this image I brightened it just a bit more. It was already brighter than the surroundings, but I just helped it ever so slightly.
]]>
The foreground detail is very strong. The rocks and water are interesting to look at. I can just sit here and look at the interaction between the water and the rocks for ages. I used a slow shutter speed to enhance to flow of the water to create a strong foreground. This foreground also leads the viewer into the image. The trees on both sides seem to be leaning inward. The rock face works to also pull the viewer to where the water is going.
Yes, it is a nice scene, but what makes this scene really nice is the strong foreground. Once again, when you get to a scene, look around and choose your vantage point carefully. Ask yourself, which vantage point is going to give me the strongest foreground? Look for rocks or plants that are different from the surroundings. Look at the water and ask yourself which area has more little rapids than another and how can I use that to create a strong foreground?
Really pay attention to your foregrounds.
]]>The other image was of the inside of an old workroom / factory. The photographer had to put a great deal of work into making this image as it was a very challenging scene to shoot. It was dark inside. There were hundreds of things around, from hessian bags to machinery, to brooms and everything in between. The photographer handled the difficult lighting masterfully and even worked the composition to create a good image. It had to be to make it thus far in the competition.
Which image was I going to select as the winner? I was torn! The first image of the quad was good but it was photographically speaking such an easy image to get. The second image of the factory was technically extremely difficult to pull off but it was just too busy. There were just too many items in the shot that competed for the viewer's attention. It was not a cohesive whole. Yet, there was nothing the photographer could have done about it; he could hardly have moved the heavy machinery around. My brain told me that the more difficult image shout win because the photographer obviously exhibited more skill than the quad image's photographer. My heart told me that the quad image just worked better as an image as the overly busy factory. I choose the quad image as the winner.
Perhaps the better photographer should have known that although it was a good image it was not a competition winner because not all the elements in the image worked well together. It was as if these elements fought with each other for your attention. The best images are often those where all the elements work together and support each other to make the image.
Although this image below is not the greatest image, I choose it as my "quad" image to demonstrate that although it is not the greatest image out there, it is pleasing to look at because all the elements are working together.
The river leads one into the image and adds some foreground interest. The darker water from the right front of the image forms a line with the lighter rocks to also lead the viewer into the image in the same direction. Both background cliffs meet in the same area as the river is pointing, working together. The image is not too busy with competing elements. All the elements seem to be working together to just create a nice image. One should not wonder what to look at. One should not look at this thing for some time and then the other and then move back and forth between elements without seeing the whole. Elements should be complimentary instead of competitive.
Simple is often better.
]]>Lowering your camera:
Exaggerates elements in the foreground (they become more prominent). With a wide angle lens and lower elevation, foreground elements even look much larger than they would have looked shot from a higher elevation.
Minimizes the middle-ground. You can actually see less of the middle-ground the lower you go. Sometimes a middle-ground just does not offer much and can even be boring. By lowering your elevation that middle-ground becomes smaller and less impactful on the image.
Compacts the foreground and background. Because the middle-ground becomes less significant a lower elevation may compact the foreground and background. This does not mean that you cannot create depth but the elements used to create such depth need to be strong.
Tends to make more sky visible because you are shooting upwards. Now if the sky has something interesting to offer, great, but if the sky is dull and gray you may want to avoid shooting upwards.
Raising your camera:
Minimizes foreground elements a bit because you are moving further away from them.
Maximizes the middle-ground as you can see much more of it.
Creates more depth because of the long middle-ground. You just seem to be able to look into the distance.
You can better minimize the sky if you need to because you are shooting downward. You may not always want to do this as the sky may be great.
So when should we shoot from lower down or higher up?
Evaluate your foreground and ask yourself if it has anything you would like to give prominence to.
Evaluate your middle-ground and ask yourself if you would like to show it or minimize it.
Evaluate the sky and ask yourself if you want to include much or little of it (or even exclude it).
Evaluate your ability to create depth. Are there strong lines, or elements that can be used from shooting lower down or do you need height to create that vista feeling of looking into the future?
I climbed onto a large rock to gain some good height. In this case, it gave me great depth because now you can follow the river into the image. Height makes it possible to show more of the river. Shooting this image from lower down would have minimized the river and thereby I would have lost some depth. Furthermore, the sky starts just out of the frame and it was bright and overcast. There was no way it should have been in the image; it would have ruined the image.
Elevation also makes it possible to change the height of foreground and middle-ground elements as compared to the background. If I shot this image from low down, the trees further back would have appeared much taller. To not include the sky I would have had to cut right through them with my frame. Height makes those trees appear shorter compared to the rock face in the background.
The next time you put your tripod down, why not think about the height you choose to shoot from more deliberately?
]]>
Here is the basic scene we are looking at. It has a lot of mood already but that mood is not all over as it lacks in the foreground and in the sky. Now notice the fog rising from the water towards the horizon. Also notice the low clouds at the tree line. The trick is to notice these things while still at the scene. The scene can be so nice that we only want to capture the majestic scene without paying attention to what else we can find. Remember, that there may sometimes be photographs within the photograph that has a totally different mood than the rest of the photograph. Since you are already there and photographing, why not get as many different images as you can?
Let's zoom in and go for that mood:
This image is taken a little while after the first. The sun is now out and bathing the mountain in warm light. I have zoomed in quite a bit. The fog rising from the water is now more pronounced. The fog or low clouds over the trees are more pronounced. The whole image is now more moody. It is a very different mood from the first image.
When at a scene, look within the scene for additional images. Look for mood and attempt to capture it. Moody image can be very captivating to watch. Why not add some mood to your images?
]]>Many times we overlook the man-made lines. Have you thought of using the footpath you are walking on to the scene as part of your scene? That footpath can be a powerful lead in line.
Would this image have been as impactful without the footpath? Would the brush in the foreground have been interesting by itself and would it have created depth that lead the viewer's eyes into the image? When you see lines, rejoice and shoot them, man-made or not.
This technique has one obstacle; how do you get a sloooow shutter speed when your lens is already using a small F.Stop and your ISO is already set on the lowest setting AND you are still getting a shutter speed too fast for the effect you desire? Perhaps the clouds are moving too slowly and you need an even longer shutter speed. Perhaps you want to go over the top with the effect and create mega movement; as in this image below:
Here is where a neutral density filter comes in. It simply steals multiple stops of light thereby increasing your shutter speed. Since you are now using very long shutter speeds you will really need to use a tripod as I suggested. Simply install the filter and shoot. Make sure to compose and focus prior to using the filter as you may not be able to see your image on camera as it will be too dark. Shoot away. Experiment with shutter speeds to get the desired effect you want. Have fun trying this.
Once upon a time, people used to invest a lot of money to get the equipment to do panoramas properly. Purist will still argue that it is necessary to get the best result. I guess they may be right, however, with today's software I am getting incredible results with no special equipment. Before I share some tips on how to do this, let's look at an example:
This is a massive file which can be printed very, VERY large. I cannot remember how many images make up this final shot. One limitation to making panoramic images without specialized equipment is that your narrow side will be limited to your camera's resolution because you really need the equipment to shoot multi-row panoramas. If you are satisfied with a limited narrow side, go for it without fancy equipment. Here is what I do:
Shoot vertically. This will increase your resolution on the narrow side from the default narrow resolution of your camera to the horizontal resolution of your camera.
Use a tripod.
Get it as level as you can. If it is not level you will have to crop out valuable resolution. Yes, I know that PhotoShop has a new feature to fill the empty sections rather than to crop it. If the areas that need filling are just sky or water, that is just fine. If it is rocks or contains lots of details you will rather want to get it right with a level tripod to minimize any content aware fill.
Make sure to overlap a decent amount to give your software the best chance of doing a good job.
Make sure that you expose the sequence of images the same; use manual mode.
Make sure that both white balance and tint is set the same for each image in your raw processor.
Load all the images into your raw processor simultaneously (I use PhotoShop). Make your minimal adjustments to each file (I really do very little here as I will work on the DNG file (which PhotoShop will generate) in the raw processor again once the files are merged.
Now select them all (click on the first one, in the film strip to your left), then hold down the "shift" key and click on the last image. Now right click and go to merge.
PhotoShop will now do its magic and spit out a DNG file which you can pull into the raw module to start your processing. Enjoy shooting some panoramas, it really is not difficult.
]]>
The mood is great as created with the fog and mist rising from the water. How do we make the best of the colors in the sky? We do not want to play with global saturation as that makes images look unnatural. When I process a raw file such as this one I use the grad option in PhotoShop. In addition to playing with the exposure on the grad settings I also use it to bring out the colors that are already there.
Give it a try; use the grad option to bring out more of what you already see. It adds much to the image.
]]>
The road plays the major role in making this image what it is. It leads the viewer into the image. It takes you to where the color is. Perhaps some will argue that this is not a landscape image; I may not care how other classify it - I just like the image.
Over the years I have learned not to listen to "rules" that are presented as absolute. I think beginners need rules to help guide them and to improve their photography. However, as you advance feel free to break the rules as long as it works. Include human elements into your landscape work if they increase the effectiveness of your photographs.
The human element may actually add interest. It may help to tell a story. If that disqualifies an image from being a landscape image, so be it. Call it whatever you want but I make art, how about you?
]]>
The trees on either side of the snow capped mountain help to create a frame. The viewer's eyes will want to go through that gap to the background. There are many layers to this image. The foreground has grayish brush as layer one. Layer two is the grass. Layer three is formed by the framing trees. Layer four is made up of the second layer of trees further back. Layer five is created by the mountain. Such layers create depth leading the viewer into the image.
The frame (trees on either side) helps guide the viewer into the image to the snow and prevents the viewer from straying off to the edges and from leaving the scene.
How about framing your images?
]]>
I attempted to create a bit of depth and add some interest by dodging and burning the foreground. The lighter sections were lighter in the scene but I brought it out quite a bit more by dodging the ridge. I also burned the non-ridge areas a bit to make the effect a bit more pronounced. So what does that do to the image?
The viewer's eyes go to brighter objects first and tend to follow them. The brighter ridge creates a line that the viewer can follow into the image. Without the dodging and burning the whole one side of the image is rather boring and ruins the image. The brighter ridge now actually adds a lot to the image. Dodging and burning saved this boring scene and made it at least fairly interesting.
Look for areas that are already a bit brighter and dodge them a bit. Look for areas that are already a bit darker and burn them a bit. See if this helps to improve your images.
]]>
This location offers a bit of moving room (if it is not lined with other photographers). I have seen and taken images of this scene from a few different angles. Of all of the images I have of this location, I like this composition the best because it is harmonious. The trees on each side of the frame are the tallest and frames the image nicely. The trees also gets shorter towards the center of the image, thereby getting the viewer to go to the mountain. The grasses in the foreground does the same thing, mirroring the trees.
Both the trees and the grasses have a gap in the middle to lead the viewer through and on to the mountain. The fall colored trees in the center also draw the viewer's attention into the image. Every part of the image seems to be working together to make the image harmonious.
Perhaps we should look for harmony more often to get cohesive images.
]]>
So how do we maximize our chances of getting a great image when storms threaten? Firstly, place safety first and follow the safety guidelines given by the national weather service. Here are some tips to help you get exciting rain and weather drama images:
Make sure you and your gear are safe. I use an umbrella that is permanently in my camera backpack. When the rain is more dangerous for my equipment due to coming down too hard with wind I use a waterproof dry sack to place over my gear while I wait it out. I also make sure that I stay dry with waterproof rain clothing.
Use a longer shutter speed to accentuate the rain. The rain shows better with longer shutter speeds.
Use a wide angle lens to include more of the sky; that is where the drama is.
Use a telephoto lens if the storm is further away. The storm needs to fill the image.
If there is foliage close to you or featuring in the image and there is wind (which you usually have), you may need to back off on the slow shutter speed. Choose a shutter speed fast enough to freeze the movement of the foliage. Do not be afraid of noise, just push your ISO higher. Even if there is a bit of grain in your image, grain does not look as bad when it is with stormy clouds.
Enjoy getting rain and weather drama images.
]]>
Here you have an image without THE barn, without the mountains lit, taken during the "wrong" time of day for that image. This image was taken after sunset. Yet I like the image. I like the wooden fence, the trees, mountains and clouds.
Many times we are so excited and caught up with the main feature of the iconic image that we do not see anything else. Look around. Find something else in addition to the iconic image. Maybe you can find another image that is so appealing that makes you ask; what iconic image?
]]>The image of the T.A. Moulton Barn on Mormon Row in the Grand Tetons National Park is just such an iconic image. I have been there numerous times. Each time there yielded the same situation; many, many photographers lined up to get that image. I have been there with some 100 or more other photographers. We all go early in the morning because that is when all the elements tend to work together to produce a nice image. On a recent trip there we decided to check things out at sunset; the "wrong time" for the barn. It was wonderful in the sense that we did not have to contend with other photographers. We could freely move around. There were but one or two other people.
This was the first time we were able to move forward and around without risking to be stoned by others. Yes, the great mountains in the background were now in shadow, but the clouds made up for it. It afforded me the opportunity to play around and to try something a bit different:
I really enjoyed the experience. The next time I am here I plan to go again for sunset. Get something a bit different; in different light, perhaps from a different direction. Yes, get the iconic image but then go at a different time and see what you get.
Here is an image with reflections. The light is nice and so too is the color. The colorful tree on the left serves as the first anchor. The viewer's eyes then go deeper into the image to the bright reflection just to the right and to the back of the image. This helps to create depth. The bright tree on the left is balanced with the tree and its reflection on the right.
This scene is quite intimate. There is no open wide space. There is no clouds or sky. The whole scene is based on reflection and composition. Let's not just look for the classical landscape images. There is much that can be shot using reflections and composition.
]]>
This image was taken long after the good light time expired. We hung around a bit longer. The clouds broke up a bit. The sun came through, although be it ever so slightly. I like this image as it is filled with drama.
The lesson is to be out there, no matter the time of day, when storms break up. This is the time when exciting things can happen. Let's not be rigid about not shooting during this or that time of day. Let's determine when to shoot based on the conditions and the light instead.
]]>This was the image I wanted:
Yet, I did not leave after getting this image. I waited even longer and this was the result:
Was the wait worth it? I would like to think so. The scene gave me two images with different moods and atmospheres. Wait just a bit longer. See what the conditions are doing. You never know what can happen and you may just end up with two nice images rather than one, or one rather than nothing.
Be out there and stay out there until the show is really over.
]]>Shooting into the sun can be difficult. Many camera sensors find it hard to create good images while pointed directly into the sun. The problem is that those images typically have too much dynamic range (see a previous blog on dynamic range). If you expose for the sun, the rest of the image (or much of it, at least), will be too dark, or shall I say black. If you expose for your blacks then the sun and the surrounding area will be blown (white with no detail). So exposure is a challenge.
To solve this problem photographers have used graduated neutral density filters for a long time. However, these filters help most when the horizon is flat as the neutral shading is also a flat line. Taking an image of the setting sun on the ocean is a great example of where such a filter works best. When taking images of landscapes, however, the filter is not that effective as mountains are rarely flat. Where this filter cuts across the mountain it will darken that section of the mountain which of course is a telltale sign that you used the filter and it really does not look pleasing.
With the advent of digital photography and more specifically, more sophisticated post processing photographers began to prefer blending multiple files. They would take a number of images at different exposures and blend them together to get a good image. HDR (high dynamic range) photography became the hot topic, but early on those images were not natural as especially the clouds turned into an HDR gray. Many photographers turn to 32-bit processing today to achieve a more natural look.
The sensors in today's modern cameras have also gotten more sophisticated as they can deal with more dynamic range by themselves. Nikon and Sony, in particular, have cameras that shine when it comes to dynamic range. Since I have turned to Sony I rarely use any graduated neutral density filters or 32-bit processing because the sensor can deal with a stunning variance between very dark and very bright. So how does one shoot and then process an image taken into direct sunlight?
Using my Sony A7R II I simply expose for the sun. I have learned through experience and experimentation how far I can push the highlights beyond 100% (blowing the highlights) while still retaining the ability to pull it back in post processing. So when I say I expose for the sun, I don't mean that I expose for it unclipped (not blown). I do blow it out just a bit because that gives me a bit more light in the blacks all the while leaving me the ability to recover what I have blown. I gauge my blown highlights with the Zebra lines and not the histogram since I am blowing them and I have become proficient at reading the Zebras to achieve recoverable blown highlights. Yes, the dark areas of the image look black with no detail, and I don't care (provided my histogram is not touching the left edge of the histogram box)(see a previous blog on histograms). Having said that, I do shoot multiple images at different exposures just for in case I have blown my highlights too much or in case my blacks are just too far gone; just as a precaution. When this is the case I turn to 32-bit processing or luminosity masks to help out.
The reason why I do not care where my blacks fall (mostly), is because the Sony just does a wonderful job of capturing details even where it looks just black. Hidden somewhere in there lurks a lot of detail. By now, I hope you know that I only shoot raw when I shoot landscapes (for the purist out there wondering why I qualified the statements with "when I shoot landscapes," I will gladly admit that I actually shoot jpg's when shooting sports)(I think I have written a blog on that topic, please check previous blogs).
Open the raw file in your favorite raw processor. Recover your blown highlights with the "highlight" slider (by moving it to the left). Now push your blacks by sliding your "darks" slider to the right. Magically, your blacks start revealing detail, in color and with little to no noise (generally, obviously this can be overdone and more noise will appear). If this does not do the trick you can bring up your darks even more, using the curves adjustments. Now remember to set your white point and your black point and continue with your workflow.
If you do not believe me, look at this image above. Look at the Sedona images (Arizona section of the portfolio). Look at any other image with the sun in it. Almost all of them are from one single exposure. For more tricky images I double process a single frame and use luminosity masks to blend them (please see a previous blog on luminosity masking).
There you have it. Be brave and shoot into the sun. Remember, always place the safety of your eyes first.
]]>
Look at this image. Did you look at it from side to side or did your eyes move into the scene from front to back? We draw the viewer into our images by using lines, balance, composition, light, strong anchors (foreground, middle-ground, background), and such. Firstly, we attempt to create depth by composition. This image starts with a strong foreground (cactus). It has a strong middle-ground in the water, and the peaks make for a strong background.
We also use post processing to enhance the depth because we want to draw the viewer into the image. I lightened that cactus quite a bit to make the viewer start there (our eyes go to brighter parts first). The edge of the "pool" forms natural lines that lead into the image. Although this edge was lighter than the rest of the rock, I lightened it even more and darkened the surrounding rock to make the line more pronounced.
The goal with such an image is to draw the viewer into the image. Now not all images has a strong foreground (and not all images need one). But you have to pull the viewer in. Use light, use focus, whatever, but invite the viewer into the scene instead of leaving them to watch a flat print / screen.
Once again, I made the lines that go into the image more pronounces (darkened the dark and lightened the light). Go ahead, invite your viewers in, draw them in.
The reflection in this image is placed on the lower third of the image rather than cutting through the middle of the image. Here are a view other tips to help you get better reflection landscape imagery:
Have more of the image in either the reflection or in the real scene. In other words don't just mirror the scene. It is not that interesting to see two of the same thing. If you have more in the reflection then show less in the real scene and vice a versa. In the image above there is more in the scene than in the reflection.
Use a polarizing filter to get the reflection just how you want it.
Shoot from low down.
Watch your post processing. I have seen many images where the reflection is every bit as bright as the real scene. This is not reality. The reflection should always be darker than the real scene.
Use a longer shutter speed to smooth out the water if needed.
I hope you get better reflections in your landscape images.
]]>
This place just called for a panoramic image. The light on the left mountains were nice and warm. Cathedral Rock is on the right. This image is just asking to be printed very large. To do so requires lots of resolution which this image has. Here are some tips to get great panoramas:
Find the right scene that is well suited for a pano
Make sure your tripod is level
Shoot vertically
Overlap at least by 1/3 to allow your stitching software to the best possible job
Shoot in manual so that your settings do not change
In post processing, make sure your white balance is the same for each image (check tint too)
Photoshop has recently introduced a new feature use content aware fill to fill in the gaps that usually result in cropping with panoramic images (thereby loosing resolution). Try some panos and print them large.
]]>
I was dreaming of the shots I was going to get here (and it certainly was worth my while; at least I think so). I was so excited that I walked briskly, I just wanted to get there. Bear in mind that just like any respectable photographer would do, I was hours early (for the good light). So I had lots of time to my disposal to look around. I was thinking to use that time to look around "on location". I made the mistake that many of us make, I did not think of the way there as a location. Yet, any place can be a location for photography.
How about taking your time (if you have the time to spare), looking around while you walk out to the spot? Is there anything there of photographic value? Don't make the mistake of thinking that if there were good shots on the way there they would have been shot because other may have also just rushed to the location thinking only about the location instead of thinking that the way there can also be a location.
This is what I found on the way (I wish I can say that this image was found on the way to the location, but sadly, I only found this image on the way back as I wanted to still get to another location):
I like this image as much as the ones I went to the location for in the first place. Please look around, be aware and on the lookout. Never only think of the location as the only location. The way there can also yield respectable images.
]]>
I knew based on my search criteria that this image was of Cathedral Rock in Sedona, Arizona. I was busy planning a photographic trip to the area and wanted to find this location. I contacted other photographers who had images taken from this location on their websites to inquire where the image was taken. Some of them did not answer (I understand this response as we work hard to find locations and we are not about to just give up all the secrets)(although, this blog is giving up a lot today) others gave me directions and maps to a different place miles from here. I did not get any helpful responses. So how do I find this place?
I did what any respectable person would do, I asked Google maps to find Cathedral Rock. Google gave me this map:
If Google give you just a map simply click on the left bottom (where it now says "map" in the green box), it will say "satellite". Next click on "3D" (icons right bottom). That gives you this screen:
You will notice that Google tells you to hold the ctrl (pc) or command (mac) key and drag with your mouse to move the landscape in 3D. So let's do that. Before we do, go back to the image I began with. Look at the peaks. Now move down and rotate the image until the peaks look like the peaks in the image:
Surveying this image you will notice that the peaks now look similar to the ones in the first image. So now we know that the image was taken from this angle. We now move the scene backwards and forwards to look for the foreground, which I identified as the dry patch just off center to the left bottom. I went back to the 2D mode and zoomed right into this area to find out if I was right:
This confirmed that I had the right spot because I can even see the cactus. Now I followed the various footpaths visible in the image to the nearest road. Click on the "map" (bottom left) to see the map better and plan your drive.
Voila, I had the spot. Some people may use what I shared here to find iconic locations to go and copy the famous images already in existence. If you want to be a trophy hunter photographer, fine; those images are good as they have not become iconic for nothing. However, if you just copy the images of others you will never learn and grow and develop your own style or vision.
Try to find your own shot. Get your unique take of the place. Stretch yourself. Here are two images I made:
This image was truly of nothing. The sky was definitionless and uniform. The mountains appeared flat because of the light. Then, as the sun was setting a few sections of the mountain got kissed by a little light. I was the only one left to witness it; all the other photographers (and there were many to begin with), left giving up too early. I cannot tell you how many times this has happened to me. Stick it out, just wait. It does not always pay off but you are there anyways ...
It is certainly not a great image, but I like it. It is simple, minimalistic and there is no doubt where your eyes should go when looking at this image. To liven up the sky I just used the radial brush in Adobe Camera Raw to dodge and burn in some interest. Make sure that even with this kind of image that you place the bright spots strategically to craft the best possible composition.
Stay a bit longer and see what happens.
]]> Here are two images that were captured:
Always think composition even though you may not have lots of time at your disposal. I quickly found a plant that was different from the other plants to anchor the foreground and to balance out Cathedral Rock in the background. The rainbow just adds color, excitement, and interest. In the next image there is not much to speak of in terms of composition. The rainbow is the shot.
In post processing I darkened the left and right edges somewhat. Where light fell already in certain spots in the middle of the image I lightened to lead the viewer into the image.
To capture rainbows even better, remember to use your polarizing filter. Be ready with protective gear to cover your photographic equipment in case of sudden rain (watch behind you).
]]>The storm and rain were moving from left to right. The sun was setting. Warm orange hues colored the sky. I shot right into the setting sun and captured this image:
In post processing I lighted up a few spots in the clouds (choose spots that are a bit lighter already, that way you are only bringing out what is there already). Experiment with shutter speeds; sometimes longer shutter speeds may help accentuate the rain falling. It may be helpful to position yourself on higher ground (please follow safety guidelines of the national weather service) to get this kind of view.
To get a star burst use a small F.Stop such as 16 or 22 and wait for the sun to move partly behind a hard edge (mountain, tree, building, etc.). Exposure can be tricky and light meters are not always good at figuring it out on your behalf. In images such as this the best means of getting the best exposure is to rely on your histogram. Make sure that you are not clipping (blinkies may appear on your screen) your whites (right side of histogram graph may not touch the right edge of the histogram box). Forget about the blacks at this point. If you clip just a small section of the sun itself, don't worry about it. Just shoot to get the whites right.
Now in post processing you can lift your blacks. You can also see if moving the highlights slider or the whites slider may get rid of the clipping of the sun. If it does, great, if not, simply clone (opacity on 5 or 10%) a little of bright orange right next to the clipped section into the clipped area.
There you have it. I hope these tips and techniques will help you successfully capture images such as this.
]]>The secret lies in the post processing. When the clouds have some gaps here and there the light comes through and lights up certain patches in your landscape that can be very interesting. When the clouds don't have gaps the lighting tends to be flat and boring (and so is the sky). However, what stops you from creating that effect in post processing? It is not cheating, the only thing that you are doing is playing with light (dodge and burn; just like the purists did in their darkrooms).
Take a look at this example which I shot during a recent trip to Sedona:
This scene was as flat and boring as you can imagine. I added some brighter and darker spots in the sky to create the illusion that the clouds are patchy. Now the color in the sky is still not there. To create interest I used the radial brush in Adobe Camera Raw to lighten and darken various parts of the image as if the light was shining through some of the gaps in the clouds.
Please don't just randomly throw light and dark patches on your image. Think composition. Remember that the viewer's eyes move to the lighter parts first. Therefore we can use these lighter spots to pull the viewer's attention there. In the image above I lightened the front left grass (the patch in the stream) to grab the viewer's attention. Next, I lightened Cathedral Rock so that they balance each other out. Now I want the viewer's attention to move from the lightened grass to the peaks. So I lightened the greenery between the grass and the peaks to create a light path. Then I also lightened a few smaller patches upstream in the river to pull the viewer's attention that way too. Now the lighter parts form a triangle (patch of grass in the water, upstream, peaks).
The make the scene look right I also darkened sections I want to subdue and to make it really look like patchy light. The next time the light is not the greatest don't just see the lighting conditions as it is, think what can be made of it. Now, this image is not the greatest, but it is MUCH better than what it was at the time of shooting. The light adds interest and drama.
]]>The sun adds interest of can often add drama. I know people advised you to shoot with the sun to your back, but please do not listen to them. The light can really be nice if you were brave enough to try shooting into the sun.
Because of all the cloud cover the light on the landscape is dull and defused. Such light is great for shooting flowers and forests, and such but not always good for landscapes. What is one to do? Turn around and shoot into the sun. Yes, the dynamic range (difference between the brightest spots in the image and the darkest spots) of the image may cause problems. To solve those problems just bracket (shoot multiple exposures at different settings) and then blend them. Just look at that drama.
Challenge yourself to shoot into the sun more. Once again the best light is still going to be near sunrise or sunset. Shooting into the sun at midday may not solve anything.
Other than the storm clouds this is an image of basically nothing. If most people were to walk there they would never see this image and they would think that there is nothing to shoot. We have sand with with no interesting dunes, or lines, or such. There are grasses but no patterns and anything interesting presents itself. As I have said before, when you are confronted with such a scene look for something that is different, something that stands out. After some looking and walking around I found this tiny bush of Verbena. Next I look at the clouds and choose where they are the most interesting. With a wide angle I now go right up to the plant and I make this image. The wide angle and closeness to the plant makes it look much larger and more prominent in the image than what it was in the scene. If you were there you may not even have noticed it, it was insignificant. Yet, the wide angle and closeness gave it prominence.
Go ahead, try this technique and see what you come up with. You may just find that it gives you images you would never otherwise have had.
]]>
Sand ripples can also be used differently:
I just love playing with sand ripples:
Here are some tips to get nice sand ripples:
Go after storms. Going after wind blew greatly increases your chances of finding nice sand ripples
Get away from people. Footprints all over the place just ruin your images. You either want clear footprints leading somewhere or none at all.
Look around and take your time before you start walking around. People often put footprints all over the place only to regret it when the footprints are in the image. Do not put footprints in an area you want to photograph. Look around, find your points of interests, look for more images and now plan your route taking footprints into account.
Shoot from a low angle. Get right up to them
Side lighting is best for sand ripples as it creates contrast and makes the ripples much more pronounced
Make sure they are leading somewhere or point into your image
Be safe. Sand dunes typically find themselves in harsh conditions with little water. It saps a lot of energy to wak in sand. Hydrate and take a lot of water with you. Sand dunes may all look alike, so it is really easy to get lost. Use a cell phone app to track you or some other means of not getting lost.
Be careful changing lenses. Where you have sand and ripples you either have had or have wind. Where you have wind and sand you are in danger of damaging your equipment. Learn to change lenses as quickly as possible and as safely as possible. Have your camera pointing down when you change lenses. Thoroughly clean your equipment when you get back to your base.
Go get some great images with sand ripples in them.
]]>When a rainbow shows itself:
Act quickly
Think about composition
Use your polarizer to maximize the colors
Changes your lenses to get different images (watch for rain)(be safe, lightning can kill you)
Wait. If the rainbow lingers, just wait. Clouds will change and present you with more images
This rainbow appeared and stayed for just a few minutes. I shot wider, I zoomed in. I included clouds as they changed. Three different images were captured.
How did that get up there?
How did that happen?
Where did that come from?
That does not make sense; what is going on here?
Please note that I am not talking about trick photography here. Here is an example:
This is a reasonable landscape image. There is texture which ends in desert grasses which ends in sand dunes. The furtherest sand dunes are brightly lit so they will draw the viewer into the image, thus creating depth. The images has various layers to it; textured sand, a grassy section, and sand dunes.
Yet, what vastly improves this image are the footprints. They create a lead in line to take the viewer's eye into the image. They go off to the one side, then the grass takes your eyes further to the other side (the grass become brighter from right to left thus taking your eyes in the same direction), then your eyes follow the brightly lit sand dunes. This image has a zig zag movement to it.
The footprints really help, but they also ask questions. Are they coming or going? Why do they stop where they stop? Where did the person go because the footprints just stop? How did the person get out of the image? Did he or she backtrack on the same footprints?
When an image leaves the viewer wondering about it, it also makes them look at it for longer in an attempt to figure the questions out. This is what we want. These questions or mysteries seem to imprint the image on the viewer's mind and they tend to remember them longer.
How about looking for and shooting more images that ask questions; particularly that ask questions without any obvious answers.
]]>People help to create a sense of scale
People act as a point of interest to anker the viewer's attention
People add a sense of adventure and exploration
People are inviting
So now I include people in some of my images:
In other images I make them the main object of the image within the landscape:
With yet other images I forget about the landscape and just capture the person:
When making images of people I still follow the same ideas regarding composition. People need to be looking into the image and not out of them. There needs to be more space in front of them than behind them (unless they are moving backwards). They still need to be placed at good compositional positions such as on lines of thirds (see previous blog on composition). Show them doing something.
Remember your manners. Ask permission before you take their image. If you are planning to use an image of someone please get a signed model's release. Give them a copy of the image as a courtesy.
Consider adding people to your images from time to time.
]]>
This image of Gypsum taken at White Sands National Monument might not be that great. But I like the shadows and light, the patterns, and the texture. This is not the obvious shot to take when you are at a place such as White Sands. Being on the lookout for this sort of image can present great images.
The light is low and much different in this image than in the image before. Once again, we have texture, interplay between light and shadows, shapes and patterns. What makes this image better than the one preceding it?
Clear point of interest. A good image usually has a clear point of interest; a place that draws the eye. In this image the viewer's eyes are drawn into the image by the triangle shaped dark dune deep into the image. The eye keeps on going there. The viewer does not have to wonder what he or she is looking at; yet further interest is discovered when looking at the image more intently.
The shadows and light compliment each other. It is as if they are working together to make this image come to life.
The lines and shapes are dynamic. Diagonal lines and curved lines seem to be more pleasing that plain horizontal or vertical lines.
The image has depth. Abstract images work very well without depth, but landscapes with depth mostly seem to work better than those without any depth.
A sense of mystery and or discovery. The image evoke questions and begs to be explored.
Try a few images using shapes, lines, textures, light and shadows, and patterns.
]]>The best shadows are from early sunrise or sunset light. They have detail in them and are not just black and dark. Harsh light causes shadows that are heavy and dark with no detail in them resulting in negative space.
The best shadows come from something prominent in the foreground. Something prominent in the foreground is going to grab attention. There is no better place to start than where the viewer's attention already is. The shadow now helps the viewer to direct his or her attention further into the image, thereby creating depth. Shadows that do not come from a prominent foreground element may compete with this element rather than flow from it.
The best shadows point into the image rather than out of it. The flow of the image needs to be taking people's attention into the image. We never want viewers to leave our image, so it does not make sense to point them out of the image thereby losing their attention.
Slanted shadows are generally better than shadows that are horizontal or vertical. They are more dynamic and do not tend to divide the image into two parts as horizontal or vertical lines may sometimes do.
Let's look at a few examples:
The shadow contains detail. It slants into the image. It starts from a prominent foreground element.
Look for shadows and use them compositionally to strengthen your image and to create more depth. Beware of your own shadow. Sometimes it may add interest in the image; at times it may distract.
Another method of framing is to place objects on either side of the image to help keep the viewer looking at what is between the frames. Here is an example:
A Yucca was placed on the right as an anker. Two Yuccas were placed on the left to prevent the viewer's attention to wander farther to the left. The Yucca on the right and the two on the left act as a frame to bring attention to the brighter and warmer sky in the middel. The Yuccas themselves are interesting in and of themselves but their main function is to frame the brighter sky. They are designed to keep the viewer from leaving the image on either the right or the left. We want to keep the viewer's attention fixed on the center of the image.
Pay attention to what is in front of you and look for frames that can be used.
]]>I have mentioned in a previous blog about lenses that wide-angle lenses create space and if placed close to an object, it exaggerates that object. It also makes objects in the background appear smaller. It was also mentioned that telephoto lenses compress objects. Conversely to a wide-angle lens, a telephoto lens makes distant objects look larger. Now that we know that we can use different lenses to change the apparent size of objects in the frame. Do you want to make a closer object look larger? go for the wide-angle. Want to enlarge a background object? grab the telephoto.
Here is an example of the difference in the size of an object lenses make:
This image was taken at 200mm. Note the size of the moon in relation to the foreground Yuccas. Let's say we want to make the moon look larger. We attach a longer lens and walk backwards so that the Yuccas are similar in size between the two images. Now look at the difference in the size of the moon in the next image:
The moon is more prominent in this image. It was taken at 334mm compared to 200mm of the previous image. How about playing with perspective in your images? Make different elements look larger compared to others by using different lenses. Forget about just using different lenses to fit more or less scenery in the image. Think perspective, think relative size of objects compared to others.
However, here we where at the gate. Don and I brainstormed what to do because there is really no other place to take the workshop participants in the area. Even if there were the sweet light was coming and we did not have enough time to drive elsewhere. We made a quick call to park the cars and hop over the gate (we had a permit to be in the park that time of day). We did not wonder far because we wanted to be respectful of the park and we wanted to be close to the cars in case someone came to open the gate. Although this gave us a shooting opportunity there really is not much beyond the gate to shoot. The sand dunes are not accessible from there. What were we going to shoot?
The sky started to show color. There were some nice clouds in the air. We wanted to be in the park so badly, but when life throws you lemons, as the overused idiom goes, make lemonade. What would you do? There were nothing but little shrubs in the foreground. Well, I simply did what I advocate so many times in my blogs. Scour the foreground since you already have your background (nicely lit clouds). Find something different. Find something that will stand out. This is what I found:
The lesson is simple. When you don't get given what you want, work with what you have. Search your foreground; find something, find anything. Slap a wide angle lens on and move right up to what you found; this will exaggerate its size and prominence in the image. You will be amazed to find out that you really don't need much to make good images; all you really need is good light.
Always watch your foreground (if there is one in your composition).
]]>When we see storm clouds we go shoot (keeping safety in mind and keeping safe), while others run for shelter. We get up early. We stay late. We shoot at night. We chase the light.
At this past White Sands workshop we arrived a day or so early, as usual. We do so to run our locations and check on things from the time before. We find foregrounds. We time drive time. We check in with the park's people. Then we want to rest a while before the hard work starts. However, storm systems where moving through. We stayed to shoot. Almost everyone else left the park because the clouds looked very threatening; and they were. We sat in the car when it was not safe to be outside; lightning can kill. When it felt safe (we use lightning finder apps, doppler radar apps, read the weather, etc.) we got out to shoot.
This is when the drama happens. You cannot wish for dramatic images if you are not out there when it happens. Just look at these clouds:
The more you are out there the better your chances of getting drama. Plan ahead. Watch the weather reports and go on the edges of storms, but stay safe.
]]>The wonderful: If the sun shines directly into your lens you may get flare and or a washed out image (no contrast) or even an ugly color cast over parts of your image. Believe me, top photographers love shooting into the sun. Whenever the sun is at a lowish angle you may encounter this problem and when the sun is at lower angles is when we prefer to shoot; that is the good light. The lens hood is designed to shield the lens to prevent these problems and that is a very noble cause. They generally work very well.
The hatred: I have a polarizing filter on my lenses most of the time (I will take the filter off when shooting straight into the sun to get a sun star or such as the filter may cause additional flare). Lens hoods prevent me from getting my fingers to my polarizing filter to turn it (especially on longer lenses because the lens hoods are longer too). Invariably I poke the filter with my finger when trying to rotate it through the front of the lens hood; placing a smudge on the filter. With some lens hoods I just cannot reach in far enough to have adequate control of the rotation of the filter. When I do manage to get my finger in there and rotate the filter, my hand is in the way and just about all I see in the viewfinder. This can be frustrating and has often led me to ill feelings towards the poor lens hood. The obvious solution of taking the lens hoof off, rotating the filter, and replacing the lens hood is often not a workable solution. Sometimes there is just not enough time to do so because the rainbow may be gone by the time you are ready.
Therefore I have given up on using lens hoods for the most part. In fact, I no longer even carry a lens hood with me for certain lenses. Yet, I do not want to incur the problems of shooting without one. So what do I do to prevent the issues caused by a lack of a lens hood without using a lens hood? Firstly, I always take every landscape image by using a remote trigger device (timer, wired cable release, cell phone app, whatever works). I do not want to be touching my camera when it fires because that introduces movement and results in images not tack sharp. This also means that I can position myself anywhere close to the camera and still fire it. Once my shot is setup up and I am ready to take the image I take hold of the shutter release and I stand to the side of the camera. I place my head or my hand between the front of the lens and the sun, making sure that the front of the lens is in shade. Now I shoot. In most cases this works very well and solves the problems of not having a lens hood and it allows me to rotate my polarizer to hearts content.
Disclaimer: there are situations where the sun may reflect into your lens from different places (snow banks for example) where this technique will not work. In such cases use a lens hood. For those of you who use DSLR's please cover your viewfinder when you step away as light may get in there and impact your exposure and image. When I was using a DSLR I would hold one hand to cover my viewfinder and the other or my head to make shade for me lens.
In this image the sun was low on the left. There was severe loss of contrast without shielding my lens. Using the technique mentioned above solves this issue. Yes, I use polarizers when not including sky as well.
I hope this little trick helps you.
]]>While I shoot I am not only thinking about what is before me, but about what I plan to do with the images in post processing; I shoot and do things with post processing in mind from the get go. I decide while shooting and shoot for blending images. I decide why I want to blend multiple exposures to achieve a set goal and then I shoot to get each of the exposures for the blend.
Let's say I am making an image of a forest stream. The wind is blowing. I have a problem. I want to use a long shutter speed to show the motion of the water flowing; that milky look. However, a long shutter speed will render the foliage out of focus because the wind is blowing them around and they need to be sharp. Only a fast shutter speed is going to freeze their motion and give me sharp leaves. I have not yet figured out a way to use a slow shutter speed and a fast shutter speed while taking one single image. So I make two images; one with a slow shutter speed for the water and one with a fast shutter speed for the leaves. By the way, I get different shutter speeds by using ISO not F.Stops because I don't want to effect my depth of field.
Similarly I may shoot a sequence for focus stacking (I have a previous blog about this), or an image for the sky and one for the foreground, and don't forget the sequence for a panorama.
Here is the problem, when I am out in the field shooting, I shoot - a lot. I may come back with many, many images. When I look at them on my computer I see hundreds (sometimes a thousand or two) of thumbnail images. Now remember, some of those images are simply single images to be processed while others are part of a sequence for blending. When I look at these thumbnail images I cannot figure out where a sequence begins and where one ends. I cannot remember which images where taken for which purpose. To enlarge every image and to look at all the surrounding images that carefully to figure this out will just take too much time. This leaves me frustrated and weary.
The solution - I do my little thing while shooting. For panorama sequences I always shoot them left to right. I place my finger in front of my lens and point to the right and take an image; yes, with my finger in the image. I then remove my finger and take the real shot, and the next and the next, until the sequence has been captured. Now I shoot the last image again, this time with my finger in it again, but pointing to the left. Now when I see hundreds of thumbnail images on my computer I know that the images between my fingers are for a pano. Similarly, I point my finger down for the foreground image and after I also took the sky or background image I point my finger down. When I see these thumbnail images I know that they are intended to be blended bottom to top. For focus stacking I point into the scene for the first image and back towards my camera after the last image.
I know this sounds strange and people who see me do this think I am crazy. Please consider the following example:
Looking at thousands of images trying to figure out what I had in mind when I took them is no longer a problem for me. Here I wanted to capture the Yucca plants with the moon. Using a wide angle lens would have left the moon too small for my liking. So I used a longer lens to get the moon a decent size. Longer lenses have shallower depth of field. If I focused on the Yuccas the moon would not have been sharp and if I focused on the moon the Yuccas would have been too soft. Two images solve this problem; one is focused on the foreground and the other on the moon.
When I see fingers in my images I know the images between them are intended to be blended. The first one after my finger is the one with the sharp plants (the finger points down to the foreground). The second one has a sharp moon (the finger is pointing upward). Seeing my fingers and knowing what that means saves me from inspecting every image, enlarging them and trying to remember what I was thinking at the time.
Here is the result:
The goal was to get sharp foreground plants and sharp a moon without spending hours painstakingly examining thousands of thumbnail images trying to find the right sequence of shots amongst hundreds of others. So there you have it; a little technique that works for me.
What little things do you do that just works for you? Please let me know.
]]>The first step was to use Google Earth. I looked at the satellite images of San Francisco. After spending some time browsing around I noticed that Market street formed a nice line into the city center. Next I started to look for a place from where to shoot. Was there a high building that I could shoot from? Once again I looked around using the internet, maps, etc. I found Twin Peaks.
Next I consulted the Photographer's Ephemeris to find out if the sun or moon can be in the composition. Unfortunately this was not going to happen on the dates that I was going to be in the area (but I know when to go back). I looked at the sunrise time and worked backwards to figure out how long the drive would be from the hotel. Lastly, I looked at the weather.
The day came. My wife and I got up real early and headed for Twin Peaks. The wind was terrible and quite cold. Here is the shot:
I also used the opportunity to look for future images. The next shot is in my mind already, I am just waiting for the next time I will be there. Some images just happen, others require you to plan and make them.
When last did you plan a shot and made it happen?
]]>
Using filters in White Sands National Monument can be tough on filters as this is a harsh environment. Drop a filter on the sand and it can get scratched. The wind can blow sand onto the filter. The first two days were characterized by storms systems going through the area. The wind was furious. I was sand blasted and so was my gear. This can be as brutal on filters as it gets; sand blasting, dropping a filter, and then rain.
I really like these filters a lot. Neither the sand nor the rain stuck to the filters. They are easy to work with and the groves on the edge really help to rotate them and to remove them. Lens caps stick nicely to the front and does not fall off. The image quality looks very good. The colors look good and I could not detect any color cast.
It is much to early to know if these filters will last or whether the company will pass the test of time, but if you are in the market for filters I can recommend them thus far. I am rather impressed.
]]>The first three filters I bought was from B+W:
I am very happy with these filters. They check all the boxes that need to be checked when looking for good quality filters. Here are some pointers to consider when buy filters and yes, I use them for digital photography.
Brass rings: cheap filters usually use aluminum rings which tend to bind to your lens. This makes it very difficult to remove them from your lens, especially if the filter is a polarizer because the front part rotates independently from the back part and it can be difficult to get a good grip on the back part to remove a stuck filter. Brass rings are more solid and don't get stuck so easily as aluminum.
Schott glass: this glass is some of the best glass in the business. I want to put the best glass in front of my lenses so that my lenses get the best light to work with.
16 Layers of coatings: the magic is in the coatings. Coatings can be harder than the glass that helps prevent scratches. Coatings prevent ghosting, flaring, reflections, and so forth. Certain coatings bead the rain so that it just runs off. They can repel dirt and dust and they are easy to wipe clean. This last point is a big one as some filters are notoriously difficult to clean.
Filter profile: the filter ring profile needs to be slim when you plan to use them with wide angle lenses (please read one of my previous posts on being really careful to use a polarizer on a wide angle lens when including the sky in the photograph) to prevent vignetting. Please make sure that your slim mount ring can still take your lens cap. Some filters cannot take a lens cap and provide you with a cap that fits over the filter - they fall off and get lost; stay away from these (even some previous versions of B+W filters).
The filters above are Kaesemann polarizers which give you extra weather sealing (although this is not always necessary).
Price / Performance ratio: Singh Ray makes great polarizer filters but I just cannot bring myself to pay that price when all tests show that these are just as good or very, very close to as good.
I needed two more filters to complete my filter setup. As usual I wanted to buy B+W filters (I have also owned Rodenstock and Heliopan filters and have been happy with them) but I stumbled across Break Through Photography filters. They make some rather brave claims on their website: http://breakthrough.photography/ I got close to pulling the trigger on them but I did not. They were a bit more expensive than the B+W filters and they were a new company. I spend a few weeks dialoguing with them till I decided to be brave and test them. I was assured that I could return them if I was not satisfied. After all, these filters also checked all the right boxes for me: brass rings, Schott glass, 16 layers of coatings, slim profiles, weather sealed, etc.
Here they are:
Although one of the filters showed on back order when I placed my order both of them came together and within a day or so. These filters present the best of any filter I have seen in terms of packaging. The boxes are quality. The authenticity seals are a nice touch, although I am not sure how secure they really are as they come off easily and can be reapplied. The presentation is Apple style and quality.
Inside is a nice plastic filter holder and a micro fiber lens cleaning cloth; a nice touch once again. There were two cards in each filter case about registering the filters. Each filter's serial number is engraved into the ring (I Photoshopped mine out in these images for security reasons).
Once you take out the plastic filter box and open it you find once again that it is really well done. The B+W filter holders just has the filter laying on white foam rubber. This filter box has a cutout for the filter and impressions to easily remove them.
Once suggestion (or complaint) that I have is to label the plastic filter holders. When I have a few of these I cannot tell which one is which filter without opening them up. Perhaps a nice sticker can be made to identify what is inside. I have five of these white filter holders and I would hate to have to open each one of them to find the one I need and as Murphy would have it, the one I want will always be the last one you open.
Please look at this filter. A stand out feature of these filters are their rings. They are designed with traction in mind. You can grip these in the cold. You can work with this filter even with gloves on. You will notice that the ring that connects with the lens also have small traction slots for easy removal. They just feel quality.
You can see a similar traction design on the ND filter. These filters are presented as upmarket filters with nice touches and quality.
So far I am really impressed. Everything looks and feels really good. The presentation is just in another class.
I just returned last week from New Mexico where I co-instructed for one of Don Smith's photography workshops. I thoroughly tested these filters. Stay tuned for part two of this review were I will talk about performance. See you next Sunday ...
]]>The trick is to find rocks that stand out, that are different. Walk around and find a rock or a few rocks that are larger than the other rocks. Perhaps a few have moss on them while the others do not. Look for patterns in the rocks that lead somewhere or that we can use to frame the image. Forget the river for a moment, forget the trees; focus on finding something different in the rocks (of course we will also look for something different in the river such as rapids, turns, and so forth and we can also look for logs; anything that stands out). Once we found something that is different we can work on composing the image:
In this image I saw the larger rocks which stand out from the smaller rocks and I saw a pattern as they form a line leading into the image. So I went with it in an attempt to draw the viewer into the picture. You will remember that I always advocate looking for different compositions from the same location. A few weeks ago I wrote in a previous blog that we should use our feet to move here and there to change the composition. Looking at this image above; what do you see in this image that you can walk to, to create a different composition. Here is what I saw:
The rocks on the left was used to frame the image but they also form a little arch that curve into the image slightly. These are subtle things but they add to the composition.
Use those river rocks compositionally. Study them. Look for what is different, what stands out, where you see patterns. When you find such, work with them to compose your image.
]]>Because it is fairly dark the water becomes even colder (color temperature). Yet the sky is very warm because of the setting sun. Look at this image and evaluate the difference in color temperature between the sky and the water.
Here is another one:
These images create tension between the cold and warm colors. Carefully look at the composition where I used the water to lead the viewer into the image dynamically (because it uses a curve).
Using a small F.Stop makes for a long shutter speed needed for this kind of effect. Use the lowest ISO your camera has to help you get that long shutter speed. Lastly, if this is not enough for a long shutter speed, use a neutral density filter.
When you can find green moss to top it off it just creates a bit more interest.
]]>
Yes, it is the bright green in the background. Now this scene was naturally lighter there than elsewhere in the image. What if the next image did not have nature's help? That is why you are there, of course. Look at the next image:
Here too the background was a bit lighter. However, it was not that much brighter. I brightened it even more to pull you into the image. The tracks lead you to where they disappear. By lightening that part we now have two compositional elements working together to do the same thing thereby making its effect even stronger.
When you process your images look at what is the most important and make sure that you lighten that part just a bit. Please be aware that when we lighten an image you loose some contrast. So always add contrast as you lighten. Conversely, darken sections to direct the viewer away from those areas. Have fun editing your images.
]]>I looked at Tony Kuyper's luminosity masks. His masks are wonderful and very well priced. Yet, I never took the plunge because one look at his action pallet had me petrified. I was not in the mood to get another Ph.D. to learn how to use this pallet nor did I have the time to devote to learning how to use this system. I understand now that it really is a bit simpler than it looks.
One day I stumbled upon Jimmy McIntyre's free easy panel. I like free! I like easy! I downloaded it and watched a short tutorial. Wow! What have I been missing all this time. After using this panel now for a month or so I am no longer intimidated by the other luminosity masks out there. By the way, Jimmy has a more advanced panel for sale if that interests you and of course Tony's panel is one of the best.
So what are luminosity masks used for? Let's look at this image below:
You have very dark parts in this image (dark trees) and you have very light parts in the image (brightest clouds). Graduated neutral density filters would not have helped here. This image comes from the same single raw file. It was developed first for the image without considering the brightest clouds. Then I developed the same raw file for the clouds. I layered both files in Photoshop and used the panel to select and feather just the brightest sections of the image. By painting on the mask it combines the best parts of both images without spending hours to do anything manually. Your painting strokes will only affect the brightest parts of that layer. Without luminosity masks your painting affects any area you paint over - no more, you can now affect only certain brightnesses if you want to. How awesome is that?
You can download the free panel here:
http://www.throughstrangelenses.com/easy-panel-download-for-photoshop/
I have really enjoyed editing images using this panel and it makes many tasks easy. Give it a try.
]]>Today I also want to encourage you to slow your shutter speed down when facing the right conditions for slow shutter speeds. Look at this image below:
I deliberately used a slow shutter speed to get the wave action moving; to create a mysterious effect. You can also use a slow shutter speed to show water running down. Look on the left bottom of the left stack in the ocean below ...
I waited for a wave to come through and then used a slow shutter speed to catch and show the water running down the rock. I think it adds interest for the viewer to look at. We want to keep the viewer looking at our images for as long as possible. Giving them more interest to look at, more things to discover the longer they will keep on looking.
We can also use a slow shutter speed to blur the water to form lines which a viewer's eyes will follow. In this way we can create lines where there are none. Learn to see what can be created because your eyes do not see what a camera with a slow shutter speed sees. Envision what could be by using a slow shutter speed. Play around and try different shutter speeds just to see what you can come up with.
Please watch out for wind. Wind will move your plants, leaves, etc. which with a slow shutter speed will be out of focus. We want the water to be out of focus but not the plants. You can get these kinds of images by waiting past sunset or when the light is low or you can use a neutral density filter.
Slow down, experiment with slow shutter speeds.
]]>When a foreground compliments a middle-ground the viewer's eyes are pulled from the foreground to the middle-ground, right into your image which is what we want. When the middle-ground compliments the background the viewer's eyes once again gets pulled further into the image which is great. When all three "grounds" work together like that it creates depth. We want the viewer to be transported into the image; we want it to seem as though they are there looking at the scene instead of looking at a flat screen or print.
Here we have our foreground of green plants and white flowers. The viewer's attention is drawn there right from the get go. Then we have the rocks in the ocean that lures the viewer deeper into the image. Then way in the distance there are some "God-rays" that beg for the viewer's attention. Our goal is to have the viewer start at the bottom of the image then to study the middle-ground, then to go to the distant background AND then come right back to the foreground to start the viewing experience all over again.
Having a definite foreground, middle-ground, and background can really help to create depth. Try to find images that are strong in each area.
]]>
Here is an image taken at Big Sur, California. Unfortunately the flowers were beyond their peak. Now let's move our feet just a little ...
I don't know which image you find best, but there is certainly quite a difference in the composition between these two images. Yet, I only moved a little. You will also notice that with this image my camera is much closer to the ground. It gives more prominence to the Ice plant. When we consider our composition we should move around in the scene and we should also brave shooting from low angles. Now let's move again ...
I walked forward, turned the camera to shoot vertically and waited a bit. The clouds changed and I waited for a breather between wave action. Once again, I don't know which image you find better but the point is that changing one's position can greatly impact composition. You don't have to walk a mile to change the image significantly; with a wide angle lens just walk around a little and attempt difference compositions.
Let's NOT fall in love with the first place we place our tripods or with the first glance of the scene. Work the scene, move, go high - go low ...
]]>
I used the water to form my foreground in this image. Now if the water where to create a line or lines leading the viewer's eyes into the image it would be better. So I went looking, just walking up and down this same stretch of landscape. This is what I found:
The water now leads into the image creating more depth, pulling the viewer's eyes into the distance. When the rain falls clean your gear. When the rain stops get out and shoot.
I also used the opportunity to scout for future shots. The light was bad but rather than go home I drove around to see where the water is going to be the next time there is much rain. In this way I will be prepared with a new spot when the next rain comes. This is a spot I found.
The light is not good, neither is the shot, but I shot it to prepare for next time. Whenever I drive anywhere new I am always on the lookout for images. I am thus always busy with photography even when I am not shooting.
Get out there, scout, and be ready. Guess where I am going when it has rained a lot in future?
]]>
I liked this tighter image and the placement of the tree. As you know by now I also like depth and I love to use foregrounds to get that depth. So I went searching for some foreground objects. This is the result:
Which one do you like most? Does the lighting work for you (soft and defused)?
The technique used with the rocks is once again a wide angle lens with me going right close to the rocks to exaggerate their size. With luck your image will be better if your foreground leads into the image. Secondly, defused images can appear flat, just because of the light. To fix that I apply a healthy dose of dynamic contrast to the image in post processing (I use Nik Software's Dynamic Contrast and On1 Software's Dynamic Contrast). In case you wonder, I did not sharpen these images much as the On1 filter seems to make the images look sharp enough for me.
How about going out for some spring shots?
]]>
Here we are not really shooting upstream or downstream, although you do look downstream as the water turns back into the image (top left). This is an image where we shot more across the stream, just with a little angle applied to it. I really like this image because it combines a lot of elements.
We have a nice strong foreground. The foreground points into the image. There is a bit of color in the moss on the log. There is texture. The main part of the foreground is placed strategically on a third (rule of thirds).
We have a strong middle ground of flowing water. There are patches of sunlight, but the light is not too strong as we often find in forest scenes when we encounter patches of light. The water is moving (slow shutter speed). The white sections of the water nudge the viewer's eyes across the stream to the other side.
The far side of the river is very interesting with intertwined roots and moss. Thus we have a good foreground pointing into the image, a middle ground that pulls the viewer's eyes further into the image, and a colorful, interesting background. Then we follow the river and find that we can explore beyond the background to an even further background that turns back into the image. All the elements work together. This in an image that I can just look at for a long time.
Images that work well are those that combine elements that fit together and complement each other. There is balance. There are distinct phases (foreground, middle ground, background) to the image.
When we walk alongside a stream, be on the lookout for the things we have been talking about during the last three blogs. Think composition when you shoot. Think about depth, attempt to create depth.
]]>
Here are a few more. Look how these foregrounds strengthen the images:
These foregrounds attract the eye and help to create depth. They add interest. They help pull your eye back once you have followed the stream. In this way the eye moves back and forth in the image. This is what we want rather than having people's eyes' moving just laterally. Another technique is to use a side wall to create the same effect:
Be sure to add something of interest, something to draw the eye.
Go in the wet season. We want the greenery to be green. We want to find vibrant green moss. We want a stream rather than a trickle.
Go when it is overcast. Overcast weather diffuses the light and gives you soft light, devoid of harsh shadows. When the sun shines brightly you often get bright patches of light in a forest which makes the situation very difficult to deal with.
Just like footpaths (discussed last week), winding streams are better than straight running streams.
Find something different, perhaps in the foreground.
Show water movement by using a slow shutter speed.
Use a tripod (slow shutter speeds).
Get some waders. For some reason the best composition is always where you can't get to unless you want to get wet or have waders.
Lastly, use a polarizer filter to remove reflections from both the water and the leaves.
Enjoy those streams
]]>What do you do if your forest footpath was used to make rulers with; as straight as can be? This is where we have to look for and add interest from other sources. Is there a wooden bench we can add for interest, or what about a little bridge? No? Look some more as the interest we are looking for may not be that obvious. Remember, that if we get really close to something with a wide angle lens attached that object becomes exaggerated in size compared to the rest of the image. That means that the interest we are looking for need not be that large.
Look for a different plant, like a fern, a mushroom, or any plant that is different and that will stand out from its surroundings. Now use that plant compositionally to add interest. Here is another image shot a little further back.
By looking for and adding interest our images becomes more, well, interesting. Remember that the human eye always tends to look at that which is different. Let's use that to our advantage when we compose our images.
Enjoy your forest hikes.
]]>Yet, I do like the scene. I have interesting rocks in the foreground. There are rocks leading into the image in the middle ground. The grass is nice and green. There are trees and a mountain in the distance. The scene has the makings of a good image. Remember, that a great shot has more to do with light than a scene. That is why I will go back to this scene over and over again until I find great light.
What is one to do in a situation like this? How can I add interest? How can I make this image better? Perhaps I would not have attempted this shot with my Canon, but since I am now shooting with my Sony (with great dynamic range), I decided to shoot directly into the sun. Please note that this is not a mild setting or rising sun; this sun is already up for a while now. Here is the image:
It was amazing to even get a sun star. Well, there you have it, why not add the sun? See if it can add value to your image. I have a feeling that I will be shooting into the sun more often.
Photographers must somehow help viewers to also see the depth that we saw when we made the image. We must attempt to make the viewer look into the scene rather than at a flat scene. As we have stated before, one method of achieving the illusion of depth is to have lines in the images because the human eye tend to follow lines. Be following the lines they are looking into the image, to wherever the lines are pointing. Here is an example:
Firstly, the larger rock on the bottom right form a line to the logs and secondly, the fallen logs form a line pointing into the scene. Thirdly, the flowing river forms a line that now takes the viewer's eyes way into the image. Even though this is a flat image it appears as if there is depth because of the lines taking the viewer into the image.
Once again the water forms a line that takes the viewer's eyes way into the image. The log also acts as a pointer to suggest to the viewer where to look. At the same time the log creates foreground interest.
The next time you are in nature, just forget about the grand scene in front of you for a little while and look for lines. Water, rocks, and logs often work well. Do your best to create depth. Here is a line of rocks:
The shoot these scenes the photographer will need a tripod as we are working with rather slow shutter speeds here. Watch for wind as the wind will cause foliage to move which in turn will render them out of focus. Secondly, a polarizer filter may also be helpful to cut out reflections on the water. Let's look at an example:
This is a typical shot of water flowing either away from the photographer or towards the photographer. This river just takes your eye into the distance. Obvious compositions like this are easy to spot and they are safe compositions as they mostly tend to work well. Having said that please bear in mind that photographing in or near water, especially moving water can be dangerous; so be careful.
A more advanced method of composition is to use the water to point in a direction other than the flow of water. These compositions are more difficult to spot because our eyes do not see the same way as a camera does at slow shutter speeds. Look for calmer water. See if there are any little rapids that can be used to form a line. Here is an example:
You will see that I am at the same location on the same day. The water is flowing just the same, but this time I have used a little rapid to point to my scene. It draws the viewer's attention because it is brighter than the rest of the water and because it forms a line. Compositionally I placed the brighter line on a third. This adds interest to the foreground and serves the purpose of showing your eye where to look next.
Look for these little rapids and use them compositionally to benefit your image.
]]>
Never be satisfied while the light is still good. Check your histogram and your composition to insure that you have nailed the shot. Quickly shoot a number of images. Finish up! It does not make sense to shoot another 50 images of the same composition. Time is of the essence when the light is great. Either find different compositions to shoot or move to the next location - provided the next location is close because good light can often be fleeting and you don't want to be on the road for long when the light is wonderful. Please don't fool yourself thinking that you will continue shooting the same scene over and over with minor changes in composition. You composition needs to be very different to work. Let's face it, if you shoot 50 slightly different images you are just going to keep the best one. We don't want to waste good light shooting 49 more images of the same composition. That being said, I do believe and advocate working the scene to get many shots of the same place PROVIDED the compositions are different enough to count as a totally different image. If that cannot be done, move on and move on quickly.
So after shooting the image above I knew the good light was going to linger for a little while longer as the sun still had to dip beneath the clouds. I knew the area well; I believe in scouting to prepare for times like this. There is no time now to look and search for a secondly shot. Second locations need to be known ahead of time if possible. I jumped into my car and moved on to the next location only three minutes away.
Clouds move. The sun is setting. Things happen quickly now. There is no time to figure out from which angle the scene looks best. These are things that need to be worked out when the light is terrible. That is the time to walk this way and that way to explore the scene. Now on the scene I know where to stand because I have already figured all that out on previous visits. Within a minute I am setup and ready to shoot. This is good because just then:
Between the movement of the clouds and the sun I had but a minute to shoot before it was all over. Working ahead of time and having second locations ready pays off. I got two nice shot within minutes of each other. Each shot is totally different in composition. I do photography even when I am not shooting. I scout, plan and get ready for when I actually shoot.
Do the work ahead of time and you too will be rewarded.
]]>You have also read regularly that I said that you have to be out there when it happens to get the shot. That means that I often go out and come back without even getting my camera out. When the magic does happen however, I want to be there to capture it. That being said, I don't want to waste time in miserable weather when it is reasonably certain that conditions are not going to be conducive to good photography.
That is where anticipating great light comes in. Firstly, I watch the weather regularly to see when storms are forecast. Secondly, I make sure that I know from which direction the storm usually comes and goes. Then I go out to shoot ahead of the storm (as the storm rolls in). Since the storm is still coming please be reminded that bad weather is on its way; so keep safe and get away from the storm early to be safe. I typically sit tight at home or work during the storm. As the storm clears I go out again to shoot just behind it.
The weather does not always cooperate but from time to time either the entrance of the storm or its exit is timed with sweet light (close to sunrise or sunset). That is when things get interesting. Go scouting for good locations when the weather is harsh or drab for shooting so that you are ready and know where to go when the storm comes. Hopefully it all comes together:
I was visiting in Hollister during just such a storm. It was raining and drab for a number of days. I kept watching the weather. I followed the rain patterns on my phone's doppler radar app. The storm came to an end and moved on. I watched the movement of the clouds and I knew where the sun went down. Seeing that those broken clouds were moving to where the sun goes down at the right time of day excited me. All the ingredients where there to anticipate great light. I grabbed my gear and headed out.
It was still cold. The wind still blew. It was not pleasant to be outside, but hey, thats when we photographers roll. I knew where to go since I scouted this area many times before. Everything came together; at least I think so.
]]>Yet, much beauty can be found in the small:
Just look how proud this little guy is. Look at his color. How about also paying attention to the small? Seek them out, because they too can be beautiful. Be on the lookout for a wide variety of subject mater, and remember the small ...
What drew me to this composition is the s-curve in the river. If I was shooting only fine art photography I would have cropped a little tighter on the left and on the bottom. Since my images are for sale as stock I often leave a bit of room for text as the image will likely be advertising something or some experience. Now you may think that I have my shot, but no ...
I have future plans for this area. While there I still explore further. I now know the movement of the sun relevant to the area. I want to shoot from a position of greater height. More water would be nice. Greener color would be nice to. As the rainy season just started I will go back when conditions are better.
The message is simple; work the area, plan, refine, go back, find more compositions and get better images. While driving there and back I continue to search and look for other images. The same process will be followed and I hope it will yield more images.
]]>Firstly, I start looking for compositions; elements to place in a shot. I look for mountains, water, foreground elements, etc. I may take a few images, yes even in poor light just so that I can plan better for the real shot which I may take months later. When I find what I think to be interesting elements I shoot it for reference and planning purposes. I make notes of where these shot are so that I can come back when the light is good.
Secondly, I use The Photographer's Ephemeris to plan (Just Google the program). I now consult this software and drop a pin where I found my image. The software now tells me where the sun will rise and where it will set (it also provides the same information for the moon). You can change the date to see on which date the sun's angle or position would be where you want it to be. I make a note of the dates that would work best.
Thirdly, I visit the site again. This time I know where the sun or moon is going to be on the date I plan to come shoot. I now refine the composition. I start figuring out exactly where I need to be to get the shot I want. Do I need more height or must I be lower? I may seek out property owners to get permission to shoot from their land. If I need to hike or climb I do it to find the best route. I search for the best place to park as many places where I want to shoot just has nowhere to stop and park.
Lastly, as the date draws near I start watching the weather. I love shooting on the edges of storms. Often the exact date is not that important, a day or two on either side of the best date will also work (when shooting the moon you do not have this luxury and the right date is often the only opportunity for that month). When the weather is good and it is close to the magical date I go out to go shoot the shot.
Here is an image taken on one of my exploratory trips:
Next weeks' blog will show an image taken when going back to this area. Go out and find the shots, plan, revisit and then go get that image you saw in your mind.
The viewer's eyes first go to the light. They bounce between the spots with light. Later on they start seeing things in the shadows. This helps to keep the viewer's attention. The longer someone looks at an image the better the image.
There is no doubt what draws attention. The dark shadows help force attention where it belongs. There are no distractions. The light stands out the shadows hide distractions.
Once again only the ridge has light on it. The shadows are not dark but still they offer no competition to the lit ridge. There are many shots out there that can be had simply because of the interplay between light and shadow. Here is the last example for today:
Enjoy playing with light and shadow.
You can shoot in more difficult lighting conditions;
Your files don't have clipped highlights or shadows as much as before;
You can shoot right into the sun with deep shadows elsewhere and still get a good shot;
It saves time and requires less skill to post process (no blending, using only one file);
I don't have to use graduated neutral density filters anymore;
I love these kind of images
Here is an example:
The sun is obviously bright. The depths of the canyon is in total shadow. With loads of dynamic range I can bring up detail from the black shadows. I would have never gotten this shot with my Canon. Dynamic range is a good thing for landscapers. Be creative and shoot in more challenging light.
]]>
This image is a nightmare to photographers. The waterfall is in direct harsh sunlight while the cliff on the right is in deep shadow. Bright white water in direct harsh sunlight coupled with much darker cliffs in very dark shadow is just about impossible to shoot without blowing either highlights or shadows or both. With the Sony A7R II you can expose for the highlights and almost forget about the darks.
In post processing I simply drag the shadow slider to the right and set the black point correctly. In this case I also moved the highlights slider to the left allowing me room to move the exposure to the right. With only these four sliders the entire image is transformed. Look at the original raw file below; you may not even believe what you see!
This sensor is simply amazing. It allows the photographer to get images that I would have never attempted using the Canon system. The processed image is from this raw file: no HDR, no double processing (processing the same raw file twice - once for the highlights and once for the shadows). I am very excited about my new system and glad I switched to Sony.
Many people will say that I should not be shooting in this kind of light; I agree. If you want to know what I need this kind of dynamic range for come back and read next week's blog ...
]]>
So how do you shoot sun stars? It is actually really simple and easy to get sun stars. Sun stars occur then the sun is being cut by a hard edge such as a horizon or a tree, cliff, etc. To get the sun star simply shoot at a small F.Stop (F16 or 22). Let me share a few tips on getting better sun stars.
Certain lenses produce nicer sun stars than others due to the mechanics of their aperture. Test your lenses and know which one works best.
Take off your polarizer or other filters. When you shoot directly into the sun filters add another surface which can cause flare. Besides, polarizers don't add anything when shooting into the sun.
Take the shot early. Shoot just when the sun appears over or besides the hard edge. Shoot many shots, but start shooting early. When more of the sun is exposed the more your chance of getting flare.
You can have multiple opportunities to shoot sun stars by simply lowering your position. When you lower your position the sun will once again be behind the hard edge and will reappear again presenting you with another shooting opportunity.
Enjoy getting great sun stars.
]]>The only problem is that you are the only one with that experience and emotional attachment to that image. When others look at that image they do not necessarily feel the warm and fuzzies that you do. Even if you tell the viewer the story, which they may enjoy and they may appreciate your dedication to go through the effort and cold to get it, but it does not make the image any better to them than what it is standing on its own merit without the story.
Just a few weeks ago Pro and veteran photographer Don Smith and I were out at Bryce Canyon. As die hards we got up early and went out to shoot despite the weather man's warning that conditions were not going to be favorable. Sure enough, we got to our destination amongst snow and wind. The wind was so severe that we could not take it any more. The wind cut through us. It was so bad that we had to leave for fear that the trees were going to fall on us. Having invested so much in getting this shot I was excited to process it because I was emotionally attached to it:
Now, does this image move you? When I look at it I remember the cold, the wind, and the snow. But let's be honest, it is not a great shot when viewed only on its own merit. Now let's look at another image:
This image is a great image on its own merits. It matters little whether I had to hike a hundred miles to get it or what I endured for it versus sitting on my back porch shooting it. The image is appealing regardless of any story behind it or lack thereof.
It is best to ask others what they think of the image if you are emotionally attached to an image. It can also be helpful to wait a month or two before processing an image to help those memories to fade somewhat. Ask yourself to look only at the image forgetting the back story and what you endured to get the image. When I am in doubt I call my wife, without telling her anything, I ask her if the image "speaks" to her. If the image does not move her I let it go; however painful that may be.
Every image has to stand on its own merit.
]]>
The warthog is slowly moving forward and thus needs space to move into. We don't want him to walk out of the image because the viewer's eye's will then also leave the image. So make sure that animals have space in front of them to move into (whether they are actually moving or not).
The background was terrible so I could not include it. Why not shoot something different? Remember the rule of thirds? Yes, it also applies to wildlife photography. So notice where I placed the eye which is the main point of interest. It is right where two lines of thirds intersect each other. That is the strongest compositional place. So place the eye there. The eye is looking towards the bottom right. So even though the eye does not move there needs to be space for the eye to look into (in the same direction as where the eye is pointed)(this also applies to a pointing finger or anything pointing). Therefore we are not going to place this eye, as it is currently looking, on the bottom right because they it is looking out of the image rather than into it. We will always look where it is looking. So we don't want the viewer's eye's to look out of the image. Place the eye so that it has space to look into and preferably so that he is looking back into the image.
Once again the eye is placed on the top third line. The background is blurred to help the animal stand out. There is space for it to walk into. We have not clipped the horns. When cutting an animal or object make sure to cut it boldly, we never just nick something; it just does not look right. Try to get light on the area that is important (face and eye in this image). We always focus on the eye. Other parts of the animal can be out of focus but the eye should always be sharp. The eyes need to be clearly visible; watch for twigs or grass or anything in front of the eyes.
The shot either needs to be a landscape image with an animal in it or it needs to be an animal shot where the animal is large enough to dominate the frame. People do not want to look at a tiny object in the distance and wonder what it is. The animal needs to be large enough to be easily recognized and it should play a compositional role in a landscape image. If the animal is the main object in the image please get it large enough to dominate the frame or that image will not be appealing.
I hope this helps you to get better wildlife images by using good composition.
]]>
The water running out of the bird's beak adds interest. It shows that it is busy doing something rather than just sitting there smiling at you.
Get close or use your long lens, but fill your shot. Shoot when that tong is moving. Do your best to get a spark or highlight in the eye.
Show them eating. Show them intimately. Show them so that your viewers just want to reach out and touch them.
Here we have a scene of an Impala drinking water. Two birds are spectators. As you can see the animals are static; there is not much movement. Now what shutter speed do you think is appropriate to shoot this image with? Many novices would say: "well, if there is no movement you can shoot with a fairly low shutter speed." While it is true that the animals are not moving it is not true that there is no movement. Long lenses are heavy and therefore your gear is moving. It is not possible to hold heavy long gear still. Remember that just a little movement from your camera may shift your field of view by many feet where the animal is. So unless your gear is on a tripod or secured to something solid assume that there is always movement; your gear is moving. So make sure that your shutter speed is always faster than the focal length of your lens. In this case I used a 150-600 zoom, therefore I need to insure that my shutter speed is at least 600th of a second.
Typically we want the animal or bird to stand out from the background. We blur the background by using a large aperture (F.Stop). This also helps us achieve that fast shutter speed we need because a large aperture allow more light in which means we can use a faster shutter speed; just what we need for wildlife photography. Sometimes long lenses do not have a large enough aperture to allow you to get a fast shutter speed. If this is the case you may need to also raise your ISO.
Most of the time animals and birds are on the move. They can move quickly. Shooting moving subjects successfully requires your autofocus system to be able to track their movement thereby keeping them in focus as they move. To achieve this set your autofocus on tracking (sometimes called servo). When these animals move around you will find it extremely easy to clip a horn or an ear or an eye. They jump this way and that way making it hard to track them. Your solution is to shoot at a high frame rate. Set your camera to shoot at the highest frame rate your camera is capable of. Shoot in bursts. You will delete most of your images but this is the only way to secure a few good ones in between the bad ones.
To summarize:
Use a fast shutter speed (faster than the focal length of your lens)
Use a large aperture
Raise your ISO if needed
Set your autofocus system on tracking
Use a high frame rate (for example 7 shots per second)
Lastly, things can happen suddenly. You are driving in the car and all of a sudden a lion appears. When that happens you do not have the time to fiddle with your settings. So just check your exposure settings from time to time as you notice the light change. Just point your camera at the grass or trees, press your shutter half way and see what your shutter speed comes out to be. If it is too low, raise that ISO. In this way you are always ready for the unexpected.
That is basically it.
]]>May I suggest that we also spend a bit of time to research the trip there, the surrounding area, and other possible photographic opportunities. Look, it costs a lot of money to take a safari you may as well get the most out of the trip. With very little additional expense you may find great possibilities en route. During this latest trip to South Africa I spent four days in a game park called Pilansberg and another day in the Kruger National Park. Now these two parks are far apart and traveling needed to be done. In stead of racing from one park to the other I contacted someone who lives in the area for advise. Before I knew it an itinerary was ready.
Look at what we saw. Think of the photographic possibilities. Before you judge these photographs please note that due to certain circumstances I was at these scenes at the wrong time of day (as far as good light is concerned). All of these images were just snapped with my iPhone (no other lenses or anything; just point and click right from the phone). What could you do if you had the time to be at these scenes at the right time with enough time to really photograph them?
Since you are going on safari and your way there is already paid why not spend a bit more time and shoot some landscapes, yes even while on safari?
Here are some ideas to get you going:
Yes, animals fit very nicely into landscape photographs. In fact, showing animals in their environment can make for better images than a headshot with that long new lens. These rinos were far out. My wife had a 70-200mm on the full frame Sony A7RII. I rather like this "animal landscape".
This might not be the greatest landscape as it is more of a skyscape than anything else. However, be on the lookout for bad weather and storms. Shoot those rainbows. Now it would be best to find something more interesting to place in the foreground, but nevertheless, shoot landscapes when the animals are hiding from the rain.
Once again, follow the action. If the action is not with the animals shoot wherever you find the action. Follow color and light.
Remember sunrises and sunsets. The light is often not good enough to shoot moving animals during this time anyway. Look for good spots for the next day and be ready when the sun shows or exits.
Look for something interesting like multiple bird nests in a dead tree. Look for something that tells a story; perhaps that it is really dry or new life springing forth in spring.
Light is always very important. When you find good light shoot landscapes to. On safari? Look for animals and photograph them, that is why you are there, BUT please remember your landscapes as they may be a nice little bonus.
There are lots to like:
The price is very reasonable at just below $1,100.00
Under good conditions the lens is very sharp
The range from 150mm to 600mm is ideal especially coupled with a crop camera (I used a Canon 70D)
The lens is manageable, yes it is heavy but not as much as you would imagine
A tripod collar is included
Subjectively, it is a beautiful lens
As you can see the lens is sharp.
There are a few things that I don't like about the lens:
F6.3 on the long end is often problematic. Now I know they had to compromise to get the price, size, and weight down. The best light to shoot in is often just after sunrise and before sunset. This kind of light is generally not as bright as the light later on in the day. When light is already low and you have to shoot at F6.3 with a long lens you run into problems. Firstly, your shutter speed is too low. Remember to get sharp images your shutter speed generally needs to exceed the focal range of the lens; in this case 1/600. Secondly, to get to 1/600 you now have to increase your ISO which introduces noise. F4 would have been much preferred. Thirdly, this kind of lens is going to be used to shoot moving objects more often than not. To freeze moving object faster shutter speeds are needed. Lastly, see the next point ...
I find that the backgrounds are often not blurred enough. That can be attributed to the small F.Stop, but keep in mind that long lenses generally just don't have much depth of field anyway; yet with this lens it was really difficult to get the background smooth. I just don't like the bokeh of this lens.
Focus! On the Canon 70D the focus is fast and I have no complaints - generally speaking. BUT, then there are times when it just will not focus; even when there are good contrast areas in the image. It just hunts without even coming close to focus. It then gives up. I press the focus button again and I get the same result. I have to go through the process three of four times before it locks on and then it works fine again; until it happens again. I had this happen about four times per day (shooting all day from 6am till 6pm). I never turned off the camera or changed lenses. Speaking of focus, I hate the small focus right; the one on the Sport model is much better (off course I don't want to pay twice the price and carry double the weight).
Ghosting or image stabilization issues abound. I found disturbing ghosting in the background of many images. At this point in time I am not sure if the ghosting is due to internal reflections (which I doubt) or due to the image stabilization system (which I suspect). Further testing needs to be done to difinitively draw a conclusion. I did not use a tripod (they don't work well inside a car) so I don't think the issue relates to image stabilization on a tripod.
Look at the top left of the image. There is clear ghosting going on.
If I can get the ghosting sorted out I am generally happy with the lens for the price. I hope my impressions help you to figure out which one of the three models (Tamron 150-600mm; Sigma 150-600mm Contemporary; Sigma 150-600mm Sport) is best for you.
]]>
Tip two: Fill the frame. Having to ask for binoculars or a magnifying glass to look at bird images probably mean that the subject matter is just too small in the frame. An empty frame with a little bird taking up 3% of the image is no good. That is why a long lens is needed and why a crop camera is probably better for taking bird images. Get as close as you can. Zoom quickly. Sit in a blind, do whatever it takes (without harming the birds), but fill the frame.
Tip three: Practice. It just takes practice. My hit rate started climbing as I got to know the birds' behavior better and as I shot for hours. Julie did not become the bird photographer she is today be spending one afternoon shooting. She has been shooting and practicing and shooting for a long time. She does not even have to think about what she is doing anymore which helps her focus on the birds and getting the shots. Shoot regularly. Shoot for long periods of time.
Tip four: Shoot much. No, this is not the same as practicing. What I mean with shooting much is that in order to end up with a few good bird images you have to start with many. Even a seasoned pro will end up with a lot of images with clipped wings and the sort. Shoot in bursts at a high frame rate and take thousands of images. From the thousands you may have a few really good shots. Don't be afraid of shooting by the thousand. This is the beauty of digital, shooting does not cost much once you have your gear.
Tip five: Use a camera support system. Even a monopod is helpful. My arm hurt after a while. Long lenses are heavy. The bigger the F.Stop the heavier. Using a support for your gear will help you to focus on the birds rather than on your discomfort.
Enjoy the birds.
A polarizer filter would have taken away the water reflections. That in turn would have darkened the water and helped the bird to stand out better. The next mistake bird photographers make is not showing a bird's eye. Some times the color around the bird's eye is dark and since the eye is also dark it just seems to disappear. People and animal images need a good visible and sharp eye. Better yet, catch a sparkle in the eye. Here is an example of an eyeless bird:
Now sometimes there is nothing that can be done about an eye not showing. Most often, it has to do with the angle of the photographer in relation to the bird and the sun. So make sure that you shoot at such an angle that you can see a clear eye.
Julie spoke of bird landscapes that show birds in their habitat. She also spoke about image worthy shots. There are shots that are nice and pleasing but boring. They don't tell a story or show action. The best shots are those that show action or tell a good story. These shots are also more difficult to get than shooting a bird just sitting there. Don't spend your time getting images that are not image worthy; action and story are the key words. Here is an example of an image that is a bit boring and static:
Now there is nothing wrong with this image per se, but does it wow anyone? It is pleasing and nice but it does not show any action and it does not really tell a story. Go for the action to get an image that is truly worthy of being taken. Compare the image of the static bird above to the one below that shows action:
What do you think? Now here is action. Water droplets are flying around, a fish has been caught and the wings are in motion. This shot sure beats the shot of a static bird.
Next week I am going to share some tips that may be helpful to get better bird shots.
]]>
Not any old camera is best suited to bird shooting. A crop sensored camera is preferred over a full frame camera. The crop sensor provides a narrower field of view which gives your lens extra reach. Most birds are small and they usually don't pose nicely for us. Getting close to birds are difficult. So bird photographers need a lot of reach in order to fill the frame. For this purpose a crop sensor is often better.
Birds move fast; they dart around. A camera with a really good autofocusing system is needed. More specifically, focus tracking is important so that your focus can follow the bird as it moves. Once again crop sensored cameras work best because their focus points are often more spread out across the frame allowing wider focus tracking. I was shooting with an inferior camera (which I had to borrow because I only own a full frame system) than Julie. She was able to set her camera to track the birds much better than mine.
Speaking of speed again, a camera that can shoot at a fast frame rate per second is also very important. When shooting birds we shoot in bursts as the bird flies. Many of the images have clipped wings and other problems. To get the right shot you have to shoot many frames per second. Shooting at slower than seven or so shots per seconds is just too slow.
Since these birds move fast we will want to use a fast shutter speed to be able to freeze their action. Sometimes the only way to get the shutter speed high enough is to crank up the ISO. Having a camera with good clean high ISO can help. On this day the light was terrible so I was shooting at 3200 ISO and I really struggled in post processing to clean up the noise; it was not pretty.
Next a good lens is needed. The long telephoto lenses work well. The bigger the F.Stop the better because it allows more light in which means higher shutter speeds are possible. As an added benefit it also helps to blur the background nicely. Unfortunately, long lenses with large F.Stops are not cheap. I was shooting with a Sigma 150-600mm. While the zoom range was wonderful for birds the biggest F.Stop on the long end is 6.3 which is not the best. I would have preferred F4.
When shooting water birds a polarizer filter is also beneficial. I will talk more about this during the next few blogs. Next, a large memory card is needed because you will be shooting hundreds and hundreds of images within no time.
Get your gear ready and shoot some birds. Next week we will be dealing with some mistakes bird photographers make.
]]>
Now the following dialogue box shows up:
Click on browse and select your images. It is crucial that you check the first box (Attempt to automatically Align Source Images). Your camera may have shifted just a bit during focus or between shots. This feature fixes that problem. Click OK. The following box shows up:
Choose the "Stack Images" option and click OK. Here is what you get. If you look to the right you will see the images loaded as a stack. If you look at the edges of the image you will also see different layers and how Photoshop aligned them. Either way, don't bother with anything now. Click on Edit > Auto-Blend Layers ...
Photoshop will now does its magic. Once done, you will see the following:
In the layers section you will now see the layers each with a mask. Simply flatten your image: Layer > Flatten image. Crop as you desire and you are done. See it is easy. Now you may notice some out of focus areas (on the lens on the right where the focal length is marked). The reason is because I did not shoot enough shots and I shot at F4. Shooting at F8 and taking more shots solves this issue.
So you may say; "what is the big deal?" Let me show you the first shot and the last shot and you will see how amazing this really is. Just look at these two shots:
This first shot was focused on the first lens to the right (on the lens cap that says Sony). Look how out of focus the camera's logo (Sony) and the back of the neck strap is. Here is the last shot:
This image is focused on the back of the neck strap. You can clearly see how out of focus the front lens now is. I shot five images, focus stacked them and in a few seconds got the final image:
Now I call that remarkable. Apply this technique to macro photography or to landscape photography and you can get pin sharp images, front to back.
This does not always work simply because the front object is too close to the lens. Next we focus using the hyper-focal distance of the lens and camera (see a previous blog on this). What if that too fails? Yes, the image is sharp but everything is just not pin sharp. Perhaps diffraction (using too small of an F.Stop) eroded a bit of the sharpness. Perhaps the breeze is blowing a bit and your front object's leave are moving slightly. The small F.Stop results in a long shutter speed, so now your leaves are not that sharp. You are already using a good tripod and camera technique to eliminate vibrations and camera movement. Now what? Yes, a tilt and shift lens may help, but let's be honest, how many people own a tilt and shift lens?
Have you ever considered using focus stacking? Focus stacking is a technique whereby you take multiple shots each focused at a different place to later combine in software only using the pin sharp part of each photograph. Focus stacking is used to great effect by macro photographers, but it works just as well for landscapers. Look, the best lens performance typically takes place a F. 8. This F.Stop also allows in more light to allow for a faster shutter speeds or a lower ISO than do F. 16, for example. The faster shutter speed solves your breeze problem and a lower ISO gives you a cleaner images from a noise perspective.
So set your camera on F. 8. Still use the good camera technique to get the sharpest images (mirror lock up or live view; remote shutter release, good tripod, etc.). Now focus right on your interesting foreground element. You will always get your best focus (for non-moving landscape images) using manual focus and by magnifying the area you are focusing on by 10x (use live view or a mirrorless electronic view finder). Take your shot. Now just turn your lens' focusing ring a little towards a slightly greater focusing distance. Take shot number two. Repeat the process until you get to infinity. Take five to eight or so images.
Now you have an image with pin sharp focus at every depth in your image from the very first element in your shot to the last mountain peak in the distance. The only thing left to do is to erase the out of focus parts of each image and to combine the in focus parts of each image into one single image. You may think that, that is impossible or difficult to do. Come back next week! If you have a late version of Photoshop you too can do focus stacking to get pin sharp images, front to back. I will teach you to do it in mere seconds.
Here is a classic example of an image with a foreground that was very close to the lens. The foreground is sharp and the sharpness goes fairly deep into the image. However, the last sand dune is not that sharp and neither is the mountain range way in the background. Had I done focus stacking here I would have been able to get the back mountain as sharp as the foreground (other than the negative effect of atmospheric conditions).
Go out and shoot your focus stacking series of images so that you are ready for processing next week.
]]>When you return from your workshop it may also be tempting to process all your wonderful images from the workshop. Please go ahead and do post processing. You need to practice what you have learned at the workshop regarding post processing as well. However, balance your post processing time with shooting time. As you post process you will become better and better at it. So spread the post processing out, only process a few images at a time; but work on post processing regularly.
Which images do you post process first? Most people browse through their new portfolio from the trip and select the best images; the images that excites us the most to process first. Is this a good idea? Are you already an expert in the new processing techniques you just learned? Why not start with your mediocre images first? Practice on them. Then when you are good at implementing what you have learned you can process your best images. This will make your best images even better because they will be processed better. When we learn new post processing techniques we often tend to overdo or overuse them at first. It may be better to save your best images to process once the infatuation with these new found processing powers have been tempered somewhat.
After allowing the instructor some time to process his or her images from the trip it is invaluable to visit his or her photographic website. Go look at the instructor's images. You were both at the same scene at the same time. Compare your work. Learn what you can from the instructor. Most people think the workshop is over when the workshop is over, but it does not have to be. There is much to learn from examining his or her images from the trip. Perhaps he or she will write a few blogs from the trip; read them and learn. Many photographers allow viewers to comment on their images and blogs, so use this opportunity to ask question? Ask about his or her post processing; but please do not hound him or her.
Please remember your boundaries. Once the workshop is over the instructor is not indebted to you and he or she does not owe you anything. So please do not ask him or her to review your edited images after the workshop is over. Keep your questions to those that can be answered quickly without needing a written dissertation.
Go out and teach others (friends and family who may be interested) what you have learned. By teaching you yourself embed the concepts into your mind; it helps you to understand it even better. Show your images as others' comments will keep you inspired to go out and shoot more.
Keep your shooting and post processing up.
Insure that you have the right gear for the workshop you have selected. If you are going on a bird photography workshop it might be helpful to have a long telephoto lens. If you are going to Antarctica you may want to consider more than your photographic gear; what are you going to wear to be comfortable? This is the time to make sure that you have enough camera batteries and memory cards, etc.
Study your camera's manual and know how to work your camera. Every camera is different (even within the same manufacturer models differ significantly) and there are hundreds of different models out there, so it is not likely that your instructor knows the in and outs of every camera model out there. Knowing how to change your camera's setting will help you to focus on what is being taught rather than figuring out your camera. You are paying to attend a workshop; now is the time to learn photography not the layout of your camera.
Clean and test all your equipment. Know where everything is packed in your photo bag.
Research the location. Find out what the weather is like that time of the year. Get ideas of what kind of images are available in that area. Go to a photo stock agency and just search for the location of the workshop and see what images come up.
Come rested if possible. Good workshops (landscape workshops anyway) will have you out on location way before sunrise and you may be shooting past sunset. You also need to drive to the location and return. You are going to have very long days with little sleep.
So now you are at your workshop. Ask questions. This is how you learn. Never mind that others may think you are a total novice; ask, ask, ask away. Watch what everyone is doing. We can get so focused on what we are doing that we never see what others may see. Look at what they are shooting. Look how they shoot. Look at others' workflow. Many participants of workshops are very good (remember, they only use us as photographic tour guides) so learn from them too. Ask them questions too. Most of these photographers want to share. Many of them are part of photographic communities and are used to being in groups and sharing their knowledge.
If there is a photo critique session or two please participate. I know you may be embarrassed and you may be tempted to think that your work is not good enough. Why are you there? Did you come all this way to impress people or to learn? In fact, don't even show your best images, show the images that your really struggled with and then ask the instructor how to make it better. Ask him or her what he or she would have done. Also pay attention when the instructor is critiquing other photographers' work as you learn just as much as you would have had the image been yours.
Take notes. You will not remember everything when you get home. If appropriate share contact information so that friendships can develop and you can continue to ask and learn (be careful not to overstay your welcome or to encroach on civil and decent boundaries). Continue to practice after the workshop is over. It is by repetition that we improve.
Your attitude is the most important of all. Be humble and ready to learn. Go with the flow, things do not always work out as planned. We have had the national park shut down due to the government shut down; we just found different locations in the area, but participants certainly did not get the same shot they might have come wishing to get (they did get other great shots that few others have of that area). We have been snowed on, rained on, hailed on, you name it. People, please understand that the photographer cannot control the weather. He or she did his or her best in scouting the area, the weather, the best time of year for that location, etc. there is nothing more he or she could have done. Be flexible and just trust your instructor. If you selected the right instructor he or she knows what he or she is doing and will do his or her best for you. Be patient. We have gotten some great shots even though things look bleak (due to weather, clouds, etc.) to start off with. At other times, the weather did not get better and we lucked out. Be patient for tomorrow may yield better results and if it does not you may spend more time in the classroom learning. Your attitude is a large contributor to the success and enjoyment of the workshop, for you and for others.
The experience is worth it, why not attend a workshop?
P.S. I attend some of Don Smith's workshops and I am a co-instructor of some of his workshops. See you at the Bryce and Zion workshop from Oct 30 to Nov 3, 2015. http://www.donsmithphotography.com/Workshops
]]>
Most photographers wanting to go on a photographic workshop start by researching the different workshops on offer (and there are many of them). May I suggest that you rather start by doing a self assessment of your current skills, your weaknesses, and your needs. If you are an expert already, you may be more interested in the location of the workshop than in the instructor simply because you are not really in serious need of an instructor; you are in need of getting to the right place at the right time to get the best shots. This may sound strange to you, but I see a lot of people on our workshops that basically use us as photographic tour guides and that is okay if your skill level is really that good.
Based on your assessment of your photographic skills you have a choice to make. Do you want to take your skill to the next level, or do you want to tackle a weakness? Do you want to learn something totally new? For example, I am a landscape photographer, do I want to grow in that area or do I want to learn more about and try my hand at bird photography? Once you have picked the kind of photography you want to improve, pick a workshop that focuses specifically on that kind of photography.
Now it may also be helpful to do an assessment of your physical abilities. Can you hike long distances? Can you tackle strenuous hikes? Do you mind getting wet? Perhaps you do not want to hike or even walk far. Either way, rest assured that there are workshops for every need and taste, but you have to know what you are looking for before you start looking. The last thing that may be helpful to do before starting your search is to determine your budget.
Now start searching for the workshop as specified above. Narrow them down by eliminating those that do not fit within your budget. Many people examine the itineraries and locations of the workshops next. May I suggest you wait before doing that. Next, consider going to the instructor's website; not their workshop brochure, but their photographic website. Look at his or her images. Are they appealing to you? Are they of high standard? Are they unique? Does it look like he or she can teach you a thing or two? Next it is very helpful to find out if the instructor has a blog; if so, read them ... Is he or she clear? Can you easily grasp what is being said? The instructor's ability to teach is as important as his or her skill as a photographer. There are some great photographers who are loners and who cannot teach to save their lives. Read the viewer's comments at the bottom of the blog and see if the photographer answers these posts. Is he or she personable and approachable? Read between the lines when you read the blog entries:
Is the photographer keeping locations secret?
Is the photographer sharing and teaching you his or her "secrets"?
Is the blog offering something of value to you?
If the photographer does any of these things he or she is probably going to be the same way during the workshop. I have seen many workshops and have heard about many more where the instructor does not engage with anyone; he or she is just shooting for themselves rather than teaching you what they know.
It is also very helpful to know the ratio between instructors and students. There should not be a bigger ration than one instructor for every eight to ten participants. The more participants per instructor the less help you will get. Read the workshop's terms and conditions (or handbook and policies) to insure that you are comfortable with them and that they are reasonable and fair. Look at what the workshop offers. Does it just include shooting in the field or does it only offer classroom work, or both field work and classroom work? Does it include post processing? Does it include critiquing your images? Once again, choose a workshop that meets your needs.
Lastly, see if the itinerary and location interests you. Many photographers make the mistake of buying into the itinerary and location when you are actually buying into the services of the instructor. Picking the right instructor is more important than the itinerary or location. Matching the workshop to your needs are more important than the itinerary or location. Now if you can match a great instructor with a wonderful itinerary with your own needs you have it made.
P.S. Ask the instructor what percentage of his or her customer are repeat customers as this tells you how happy they are with his or her workshops.
Go on a workshop ...
]]>
Where did your eyes go in the image on the left? Where did your eyes go in the image on the right? So your eyes chose to focus on the far back and right object in the image on the left but on the near right object in the image on the right. Your eyes went where they went simply because of what is in focus. All the objects are the same, both in color, size, etc, and brightness; so these things did not play a role in directing your eyes in these images. Focus can be used very powerfully to direct the viewer's eyes. Notice that these images have a line of grout going into the image. Our eyes also follow lines. You may have noticed a little bit of a competition for your attention between the lead in line and the in focus object (image on the right).
To get only part of an image in focus we use a large F.Stop. Two weeks ago it was mentioned that our eyes also go to that which is different. Let's now combine using focus and difference to direct the viewer's eyes. Where do your eyes go in the next image?
So here we changed the objects' color to make one different from the others. We also focused on the different colored one. In so doing we are combining two techniques to more powerfully draw the viewer's eyes. We changed the position of the different and in focus object to take advantage of the lead in line, which will also help to take the viewer's eyes to the red object.
Lastly, let's take the same image and brighten the red object. Now I just pulled the image into PhotoShop and selected a rough circle around the red object (lasso tool). I then right clicked inside the selection which brought up a dialogue box on which I clicked on feather. I then entered a number of how feathered I wanted my brightening effect to be (I chose 250 in this case). Using a mask I just increased the brightness. Please forgive me for overdoing the effect (I also darkened the rest of the image a bit to overdo the effect); I just want you to see what it does (in landscape photography I use this effect much more subtly). Here is the image again:
There you have it. We are using three things to draw the viewer's eyes. Firstly, the object is in focus whereas the other object are out of focus. Secondly, the object is different (color) than the others. Thirdly, it is brighter than the other objects. Composition is not just about where we place what in our images; we can use focus, difference, and brightness to greatly enhance composition.
When I process even my landscape images I selectively, but subtly, brighten object to create a stronger center point of interest. We carefully pick where we focus (depending on what we are shooting). We also frame our images very carefully looking for and using things that stand out because they are different. Learn to "see" and use these three compositional aids.
Be creative ...
]]>
Where do your eyes go first? Once your eyes have wondered around, where do your eyes come back to? The brightest color and light are the yellow leaved trees. That is the spot that commands our attention. So we get this kind of shot by waiting for the light to shine where we want it to be bright; cloudy days are best since you can wait for the clouds to move around. As you can see the light shone there the brightest. You will also notice that the green trees in the middle ground are brighter in the center and darker to the sides of the image. That helps to keep the viewer's eyes from going to the sides. It also helps to pull the viewer's eyes deeper into the image once he or she is done looking at the bright yellow trees. The white snow in the background is also brighter than the rest of the mountain, so that pulls the viewer's eyes even deeper. So our eyes go to the bright yellow trees first, then to the middle ground and then to the background, and back to the yellow trees. We want people to repeat this pattern of looking at the image. We want the viewer to look "into" the image rather than looking at it as a two dimensional flat image. We want depth. In this case the different levels of brightness provides that depth.
Now we are not always so lucky to have the light cooperate with our desires. What if a scene is evenly lit? What if the light is soft all over the landscape? Do not despair, we can subtly make our center point of interest brighter when we develop our shots. There are many techniques to do this. I often use Nik Filters' Viveza to achieve this effect. The next image was made during overcast conditions. To pull the viewer's eyes into the image, thereby creating depth I brightened the part where I wanted the viewer's eyes to go. Now the image was a bit brighter there anyway, but not enough to do the job I wanted, so I boosted the brightness only there:
The two lessons we can learn from today's blog is:
Attempt to get brighter light on your center point of interest. Wait for the clouds to move and the sun to cooperate. Use a flash. Use reflectors. Do light painting. Do whatever you can to get light where you want the image to be brighter.
Brighten your center point of interest in post processing. Remember that making object brighter often results in less contrast. So also increase the contrast a bit to compensate for this loss.
These two lessons can add a lot to your images.
]]>First I tested the camera with my older Canon 70-200mm F4 L (non stabilized). The lens was mated to the camera with a FotodioX adapter rather than a Metabones adapter. Having seen the previous A7R and Metabones adapter in action with Canon lenses, I was expecting a small to reasonable improvement. The manufacturer claims a 40% improvement in auto focus speed, but 40% better than pathetic (with the adapter) is still not going to be good enough.
My socks are blown off. I will have to go an buy a new pair of socks. The auto focus was very fast indeed. There was no hunting at proper focusing distances, even while photographing the darkest parts of the store. The only time I experienced focus hunting was when I was attempting to focus on an object that was too close (probably due to the lens' minimum focusing distance). The camera and lens combo worked perfectly.
This is really good news on two fronts. Firstly, it worked so well that I bought the camera on the spot (I did first study the various reviews that are already out, including a mini image review from a good friend and veteran pro Don Smith). Secondly, I did not have to buy the Metabones adapter. This adapter is super expensive. I bought the FotodioX adapter right then and there as well. It works like a dream and is just $109.00 (a real bargain when compared to the Metabones). I did not bother to test the Metabones adapter even though there was one for me to test. I was so impressed with the FotodioX's results that that was it.
I will be spending more time this weekend to do further testing. Perhaps I will post another blog on the topic by Sunday night.
Enjoy your photography ...
]]>
So, where did your eyes go right away when you opened them? Most viewer's eyes will go straight to the red dot. It goes there right away because it is different. Your eyes will explore the rest of the image and look at the other dots, but somehow always tend to come back to the red dot. That red dot is the center point of attention simply because it is different. In this case it's color is different, but the same would be true if it's shape was different, or it's size; it does not really matter what the difference is; human eyes always focus on that which is different. Let's look at brightness:
Where do your eyes go? Human eyes tend to go to that which if brighter. Similarly our eyes also go to that which is in focus, ignoring that which is out of focus. Here is an example (image credit: http://ljadt102011.wikispaces.com/Depth+of+Field):
The reason your eyes go to the closest clothes pin is not because it is the closest but because it is in focus whereas the others are not. So here are three things we can use very powerfully to direct the viewer's eyes; Focus, brightness, and anything different. We can use these things in most kind of photography to enhance the composition greatly. Composition is not always about what is placed where in the image, these three items also greatly impact "composition." Now, if we combine elemental composition (where things are placed) with these three tips you can end up with super strong composition that pulls the viewer's eyes right to where you want them to go.
We will talk about how to use these three tips next week ... In the mean time remember to incorporate these three tips into your composition and post processing work flow.
Look for anything different. Look for brighter parts of the scene (or create them). Pay attention to how you use your focus (I have a previous blog on depth of field and focus).
Enjoy creating stunning images.
]]>With the introduction of the new A7R II everything changed. This camera now works efficiently with Canon lenses via adapters. Now with previous A7 series cameras Canon's lenses also worked via adapters BUT they focused really slowly; so slowly that it was only good enough for landscape photography.
Since the introduction of this new camera a few photographers got to play with them fitted with adapters and Canon glass. It is claimed that they focus as fast or almost as fast as on Canon cameras. This is huge; we can now use Canon lenses on the Sony cameras and get the same (or almost the same) focusing speed as we would have had on a Canon Camera.
Canon photographers love their lenses. Many stuck with Canon only because of the lenses. Now they get to use their beloved lenses on the Sony sensors without sacrificing focusing speed. With this camera Sony has effectively transformed Canon into a lens manufacturer for Sony. Canon has become Sony's Sigma or Tamron; a third party lens supplier.
When camera manufacturers claim such important break throughs we have to wonder if the product will actually live up to their claims. In this case there are many videos on video hosting sights that demonstrate the camera's ability to focus quickly with Canon lenses via the adapters. This is not hype; you can see it for yourself.
The biggest hurdle to switching camera brands has always been the lens system. When a photographer has invested thousands of dollars to get an arsenal of lenses which must be sold for a hit, then requiring substantial investment again to replace the sold lenses with new lenses from the different brand, switching does not look very attractive. With this new camera Canon photographers can keep their lenses, buy a $100.00 adapter and use them on the Sony. The hurdle to switching has just disappeared.
Ironic that Canon must not have loved Sigma and Tamron for selling lenses to Canon users for a fraction of the cost of Canon lenses, yet now, Canon has become a third party lens manufacturer for Sony. Canon has truly become Sigma and Tamron for Sony!
For now I plan to keep two of my Canon lenses to use on my Sony. If professional testing proves the auto-focus speed of Canon lenses on the Sony to be as claimed, I suspect that many Canon users will buy Sony cameras.
]]>When that camera was announced I was disappointed at three key features (which are important to me; I realize they may not be important to others). Firstly, Canon themselves admitted that the dynamic range of the camera is not improved. To me this was a huge problem because Canon's sensors are already far behind the competition and with no improvement in sight I was disheartened. For my style of shooting and processing images, dynamic range is really important. Secondly, I was disappointed at Canon's statement that the high ISO performance also is not improved. This may not effect many photographers as we tend to want to shoot at low ISO for landscapes. However, when the wind blows you need good high ISO performance in order to get good shots while using a faster shutter speed to freeze the wind blown objects (like foliage). Lastly, I felt that the price was very steep at $3,699.00. For these reasons and the fact that I had a rather terrible experience with Canon's service (which was not an exception, apparently it was their official policy), I decided to move on. I got my first Canon in 1987, and have had many since. I am hopeful and cautiously optimistic that Canon will, in time, catch up and perhaps again be the leader in sensor technology they once were. Competition between the camera manufacturers are good for consumers.
Now I have started to make the switch to Sony. Why not Nikon? Nikon makes great cameras and excel in dynamic range. Of late, there has been huge issues with quality control at Nikon, and their handling of these issues did not inspire confidence. I must say in all fairness, that they eventually came through and did what was right to replace the D600. Nikon is also dependent on Sony sensors (who owns roughly 50% of the sensor market). I am not sure I am willing to invest a lot of money with Nikon due to this dependence. The minute the relationship between Sony and Nikon sours, Nikon will be lost up the creek. A few years ago Nikon would come out first with the Sony sensor. A year or so later Sony would bring out a camera with the same sensor. Now the tables have turned. Sony came out with their own camera using the new sensor before Nikon. Are things changing; I don't know. What I do know is that I really like what Sony is doing with their gear lately. I also like that Zeiss is coming out with great lenses for Sony; some of the best in the world. Just recently they announced a new Batis series of lenses boasting auto focus and stabilization.
So here is what I like about the new Sony A7R II:
42 Mega pixels; yes, I know many do not want or care for more mega pixels. I do! For landscape work it brings out more detail and I can print larger. Yes, I know many will challenge me and ask, "well, how large do you print?" Just for the record, I just completed a shoot early June for yet another bill board. I have shot for 6 meter (yes, 18 feet) banners and print large banners all the time. Lastly, mega pixels are also good for cropping.
Dynamic range; we don't know yet how good this camera is going to be at dynamic range but I have read that Sony claims it to be better than the old model. The old model has wonderful dynamic range.
High ISO; we will also have to wait for tests before jumping to conclusions, but if the highest ISO setting of this camera is anything to go by it should be good. The Canon has a highest setting of 6400 while the Sony goes all the way up to 102,400; that is 4 extra stops! The question now is how good will the Sony really be at 6400?
IBIS; in body image stabilization is huge and works well. It allows stabilization with lenses that are not stabilized. This is a wonderful feature, especially for those who do not use tripods (shoot topics for which tripods are a hindrance).
Lenses; as mentioned those Zeiss lenses are awesome and Sony's are good also (16-35 F4 OSS; 55 F1.8; etc). The biggest benefit is that with adapters you can fit almost any full frame lens to this camera. The auto focus with these non-Sony lenses have been greatly improved with this new camera.
Shutter vibration; an issue that plagued the previous model and the Nikon D800 has been solved with this camera and they gave us a silent shutter to boot (great for wildlife and weddings).
Auto focus is now claimed to also be fixed and fast.
4K video; makes this camera future proof for some time. I do not use video much, but have found it to be handy from time to time.
Better viewfinder; there has been some debate between optical viewfinders and electronic view finders. This view finder offers great features such as live histogram, focus peeking, magnification, review of images, etc.
Customization; you can customize buttons to setup the camera for your own style of shooting and comfort.
Stronger lens mount; there were reported issues with the previous camera's lens mount to the point where a third party mount replacement kit was sold. This camera seems stronger and appears to be better weather sealed.
There are still some unanswered questions such as:
Genuinely uncompressed RAW; I have spoken to friends who have been using the previous model professionally who claim that this is a non-issue.
Tested dynamic range and high ISO. When a company says something is not improved you can believe them. Whey they say things are improved vastly, one has to take that with a grain of salt until verified independently.
Negatives ...
Price! I was expecting this camera to come in at around $2,400 to $2,500. At $3,200 it is rather expensive. On paper the specs look really great but the price ... The only thing that pacifies is that the Canon is even more expensive with less features.
Touch screen; how a camera cannot have a touch screen in the year 2015 boggles my mind, especially at that price point. Touch screens are awesome for video focusing - you simply touch the spot you want in focus and there it goes ... It is also very nice for still photography because you can zoom in with a pinch of the fingers and swipe to move around the image. We need to check every body's eyes, we need to check critical focus at specific points. A touch screens makes doing so a breeze.
USB 2; where is USB 3; although this is not a huge problem for me.
1 Card slot; peace of mind requires dual card slots for backup. Having said that, I have found memory cards to be very reliable. I have had multiple cards go through the laundry and they still worked.
I will wait for the professional tests of the camera to come in, make my evaluation and act accordingly. On paper, it sure seems like a winner.
]]>This image was taken at one of my old favorite spots. I can show you many shots taken there over the years. For today I would like to show you only three of these shots. Two of them were taken on the same evening, about 30 minutes or so apart. Look how much difference the light makes:
Here is the first shot. It was taken in the dry season as you can see from the color of the grass. I like the rolling hills just rolling into the distance. By themselves these hills do not make for a great image. Being there when the light is great is what makes it work. Remember that photography is all about light. Now let's wait 30 minutes or so ... You see many photographers will take this shot, like it and move on. I prefer to wait until there is no more hope for the light to get better. Yes, many times the light does not get better. On the other hand, I have many shots that I would never have had, had I not waited. Ah, the light is changing, let's shoot:
So we change the angle of the camera. We get a slightly different shot, but it is essentially the same. What is very different is the light. This shot has a very different mood and feel to it than the previous one. Light makes all the difference. Many photographers would take their two images and never return because they have already been there and done that. However, this same scene might look very different in a different season with different light. So I return in the rainy season:
Yes, this is the same tree with the same hills. This time the grass is green and the light is different. Once again I change the composition to get a different shot. It is really amazing how different you can make a scene by changing your angle. Move around. Look at things from many different angles and see what you can come up with. I am at higher elevation in this shot than at the previous two shots. A higher elevation brings out the rolling hills in the background. Walk around and find different views.
Can you see the different light makes? That is why I go back to the same scene, I want to see it in different light, in different seasons. I need to be there when the light is nice. Yes, it happens too often that I am out there to shoot when the light does not cooperate, so I leave without even getting my gear out. If you get to know the area well (by coming back many times) you will start to be able to read the weather and predict whether or not you should wait or leave.
Light changes everything.
]]>Have you ever thought of shooting them from the inside? These buildings are just as interesting on the inside as what they are on the outside. I prefer shots that do not attempt to include the whole view. Eliminate a lot of the scene. Find photographs within the grand view. Focus your attention on parts of the whole. See shots that others do not see.
I watched many people in this building that day. To get the large view (that attempts to include everything), people would squeeze themselves against a wall to get as far back as they can. I witnessed a lot of frustration as people were not able to include everything they wanted to include. I could not help but wonder why they wished to include so much. Yes, of course, they want to include everything as a keep sake of the place. However, these kind of shots are not always good photographically.
Rather than shoot the grand scenes (which had just too much on offer) I selected shots like the example above. I used a tripod (nobody bothered me because they did not "get" what I was trying to shoot pointing the camera the "wrong" way). Yet, photographically speaking I liked my shots more than even the post cards being sold in the visitor center. I am not saying that there is anything wrong with the images being sold; they certainly served the purpose of capturing where you just visited. From an artistic point of view though I think this image is far stronger than the grand scenes.
When shooting inside buildings it helps to think compositionally; forget where you are - have your spouse capture those kinds of images as they are important too. Look for detail. Look for repeating themes like arches or many doors or openings. Look for patterns. Find a strong center point of interest that is different from the rest of the image. For example, there may be many closed doors; so pick the only open one as your center point of interest. In this image above I used the window as my center point of interest. It works well because it is different (not brick), it is brighter (the human eye will always go to what is brighter; use that compositionally), it is well placed (rule of thirds; see my previous blog on composition), and the arches kind of lead the viewer to the window.
The next time you see an interesting building, please try shooting inside as well. Find shots of interest within the bigger scene. "See" shots that others don't look for. Find shots that others don't have.
]]>
A reflection helps to add a little bit of interest. So how do we get this effect (no, I do not use Photoshop for this purpose)? You take a black blanket and place it over your table or stand. You place a sheet of glass on top of the blanket. Next we lift the far end of the blanket up to form the background. Put your lights in place. Put your lettuce (or whatever) down on the glass. There you have it, a nice reflection to add to your shot. Make sure that you do not get any other reflections in the glass. Change you angle to eliminate other reflections. If you have to, make the room dark (except your lights on the subject matter) to eliminate other reflections.
You can use this method to shoot anything. You imagination is the only limit. How about jewelry, flatware, glasses, eye glasses, electronics, ...
]]>Many of these birds are small. They are wild and do not let you come close to them. So you are shooting from a distance (as close as you can get). If you are serious about shooting birds getting a blind (hide in Europe) is a good investment. Since you are father than you want to be from your furry friend you need reach. You get reach by using long telephoto lenses. They are very expensive! That is why many bird photographers use a crop (APS-C) camera rather than full frame cameras. Crop cameras give you a narrower field of view for the same lens on a full frame camera. To summarize: your camera will need very fast auto focus and tracking; shoot at a high frame rate; and you will probably want to use a crop camera. Examples are: Canon 7D II, Sony A6000, Nikon ... hmm, not sure right now).
Your lens, as we have already said should be a long telephoto. It does not stop there. The bigger the F.Stop of your lens the better for birding. A big F.Stop will allow you faster shutter speeds and it will help to blur your background beautifully. Most importantly, image stabilization is important for you; not because of the bird because image stabilization does not help for moving objects, but it will help because your camera is moving. Now, it is important to get a newer lens that has image stabilization that allows you to pan (move the camera to follow the bird while you shoot). You do not want the stabilization to attempt to counter act your intentional movements. Have I mentioned that these lenses are really expensive?
If you don't have the resources to invest in such lens there is a "sort of" solution. Shoot bigger birds; get a blind; or shoot hovering birds like this one:
The same rules apply as with most other photography. Shoot in nice light. Have more space in front than behind. Get to know the animal's behavior. The better you can predict what they are going to do the better you can anticipate and be ready. So study them. Plant a perch and watch; do they always fly in from the same side? If not, can you place something in the way to persuade them to come from where you want them to come? With this kind of photography it just requires a lot of shooting and practice to become good (not that I am a good bird photographer). Persevere, take courage and shoot, shoot, shoot.
Enjoy those furry friends.
]]>
Jets do not have propellers and they fly much faster than propeller driven planes. So when you shoot them you have to use a very fast shutter speed. I typically will shoot at about 1/2000 or even faster. Set your auto focus mode to track the plane so that it is kept in focus as the plane flies bye. If you have enough light, it may even be helpful to increase your depth of field (the distance or range which is in focus) a bit by using a medium F.Stop. Try to get something more than just the plane. In the shot above the white helps.
Once again, leave room for the plane to fly into. Get more than just the plane. Here you can see some more white and even after burn glowing. Your camera's light meter may want to make the plane too dark because of the bright sky behind it. Override you light meter by adding a stop of light (or however much is needed). You can do that by shooting in manual or by adding +1 exposure compensation.
It is sometimes nice to get some landscape in the shot just to show some perspective. Remember the rules governing your composition. Slow your shutter speed enough to show the prop moving. Make sure the plane is large enough (or include some other compositional element; such as last week's blog's shot).
By FAA rules the planes cannot fly over the audience (when doing tricks). All the tricks will be done laterally in front of the audience. So make sure that you position yourself so that you can see well to the left and to the right. The jets move so fast that you need to start finding them in your view finder well before you are planning to shoot. Start tracking them from a distance so that everything is ready to shoot when they are optimally placed. If there is wind, position yourself upwind rather than downwind. Most of the planes will use smoke. That makes for interesting shots, but it can also be a problem if a lot of smoke builds up between you and the action.
Enjoy your next airshow.
]]>
Include more than just the plane. So sometimes you just do not have a long enough lens (they do not come cheap). This plane was just too small in the frame to make a good shot. The solution is to include more than just the plane in the shot. Here I have used the smoke to create movement. You can see what route the plane traveled. It tells a story rather than seeing a plane hang in the air with a boring blue background doing nothing.
Watch your composition. Place the plane well if it does not fill the frame. There needs to be room for it to fly into. It must fly into your shot, never leave your shot. We do not want the viewer's eyes to leave our shot while it follows the place out of the shot. It is the composition that makes this shot what it is.
Choose your shutter speed wisely. Shutter speeds can be a challenge during airshows. When we shoot jets we need to use very fast shutter speeds in order to freeze them in the air. So we bump up our ISO slightly, choose a large F.Stop and fire away with our fast shutter speed. Then come the propeller driven planes. If you shoot them using the same settings you are going to have a problem. The propeller will be frozen (it will not show any motion). In fact you will see the propeller's blades standing still. This does not look right. So the trick is to choose a shutter speed fast enough to freeze the plane BUT slow enough to show the propeller's motion. Luckily the propeller is moving much, much faster than the plane. So we choose a shutter speed of a 60th of a second or perhaps 80th of a second. Now we have another problem; shooting with those shutter speeds using a long telephoto lens is not a good idea because camera shake will cause blurry shots. The best lenses to use for this purpose are lenses with image stabilization (Nikon calls this VR, Sony calls it OSS, and Canon calls it IS). This allows you to shoot using slower shutter speeds and still get sharp images. Note that this technology does not help with the moving plane, it only helps with your moving camera. So your shutter speed still needs to be fast enough to freeze the plane.
Use a monopod. Let the monopod take the weight and help you stabilize your camera somewhat. Holding a heavy long lens for hours on end is tiresome.
How about attending an airshow?
]]>
How do they shoot those scenes to look so real? How do they get the impact? How do the actors survive being so close to the explosion? The answer is rather simple. We discussed this briefly when we talked about composition (see older blog). Wide angle lenses (small numbers such as 24mm) create space and distance. Telephoto lenses (large numbers such as 400mm) compact things. When you use a telephoto lens it makes objects appear much closer to each other than what they really are. If you were to see the same scene of the actors running with the explosion behind them from the side view, you will see that they are far apart. Shooting them behind each other (bomb right behind the actors) with a telephoto lens magically makes the distance disappear. It looks almost as if they are in the flames.
Telephoto lenses are not just used to get close to your subject, it also changes the perspective by compacting them. You can use this knowledge to get a variety of shots. Look at this helicopter crash:
It seems as thou the crash is imminent. In reality they are some distance from each other. The long telephoto lens compacts them together so that it appears as if there is no distance between them. The idea is to use the right lens to achieve the effect we want. The choice of lens is not just based on how much field of view you need but whether you want distance or compacting.
Play with your lenses. Shoot the same field of view twice; once from close bye with a wide angle lens and a second time from a distance using a telephoto. Look at the difference in perspective. Now use that perspective to your advantage in future.
]]>Today I would like to talk about juxtapositioning. Juxtapositioning is where you juxtapose two objects; you place them to show contrast (not light contrast but "story" contrast) between them. You can juxtapose a dilapidated shack with a rich large house for example. Using this technique you get to tell a story and show the vast difference between the two juxtapose objects. In the case of Bodie I used this technique not to show contrast but to create depth and to tell the story:
Placement is really important in this type of shot. You want to place objects in such a way so that the viewer's eyes move back and forth between them. Perspective is also important as you can size one object small and the other large. It is fun to make the smaller object (wheel) appear larger than the large object (house). This creates depth (distance) because the human brain knows that the house is bigger than the wheel so the only logical conclusion the brain comes to is that the house must be really far away. To get this effect we use a wide angle lens and move in really close to the object you want to appear larger.
Use a small F.Stop to get everything in focus. Hyperfocal distance focusing is a good technique to use to control your focus. Once again, the idea is to tell a story, to make the viewer question what happened and why. Placing objects apposed to each other aids good composition. Go ahead try some juxtapositioning.
]]>
In this image I have left three parts as the camera wanted me to take the shot. Can you see the gray snow? Go to the right bottom edge of the image, now move up a bit to where the water starts. See that blotch of gray snow to the left. Follow the water to the left and you will see some more gray snow. Follow the water into the image and you will see more gray snow to the right. I left this on purpose to demonstrate the way the camera wanted the snow and how I wanted the snow. I don't like gray snow, I much prefer white snow; how about you?
It is best to shoot RAW because you can just set your white balance when you develop your shot. To set the white balance of snow pictures is as easy as one click. You select custom white balance in your software and simply click on any snow. Voila, your white balance is now correct (your blue cast should be gone). Secondly, set your camera's exposure compensation to +1 stop (or if you shoot manual just overexpose by one stop). This will force your sensor not to put sunglasses on your image. Your image will be brighter now. However, we do need to be very careful not to blow the white. Always watch the histogram to insure that the right edge of the histogram does not make contact with the border. Also set your camera so that the "blinkies" warn you is your image is blown.
Watch where you walk so that you do not introduce footsteps into your shot, unless you want them there. If there is water in the area, watch where you step because you might step right throw the snow and into freezing cold water. Step on rocks, tufts of grass, etc. When we work in cold temperatures your hands can get cold. Yet gloves can make it difficult to press your camera's buttons. There are gloves with tips that peel back or get thin gloves that allow more dexterity. If you use an aluminum tripod you have another problem; they get very cold to handle. A quick trip to a hardware store solves this problem by getting pipe insulators that you can put on your tripod. They are really cheap and work well with the added benefit of providing padding so that your tripod is comfortable to carry over your shoulder.
Speaking of tripods and snow, push your tripod down into the snow until it makes contact with solid ground. Failure to do so will result in blurry images (at best) or a tripod toppling over and smashing to the ground (at worst). Dress warmly and be safe.
]]>
You see, when we think of Fiji we see images of tropical islands, grand resorts, and perfect beaches decorated with coconut trees and all. That is in fact what I saw. I have images of those coconut trees and beaches. When I look at them I have happy memories but the emotion evoked by them are not nearly as strong as when I look at this image. When people look at my beach shot they often ask where that is but that is usually where the conversation ends - just another tropical beach (and "oh, I which I can go"). When people see this image they seem to look at it for a long time (something we photographers aspire to achieve) and start a long conversation about the place, the people, and everything else.
Here are some tips to get these type of shots:
Be safe. Find out where you can go and what places you should avoid. Better yet, try to get a local to go with you.
Ask about the culture and if it is acceptable to shoot, how to deal with people, etc.
Go for more rural places (cities have great photo opportunities too).
Walk into the area instead of staying on the main roads.
Ask people about common life and where to witness it.
Include people in the images. Place them well in the frame.
Make them feel safe, ask their permission, explain your intentions.
Go back to the same place multiple times. Allow the people to get used to you, to accept you. This will get them to go on with life as if you are not there, something that does not happen when you first appear. Remember, you are trying to shoot their lives.
Enjoy your emotion filled, story telling shots.
]]>Right after a Yosemite fire I went to Yosemite to see what I can find. The image on view today does not show Yosemite per se even though it was taken in Yosemite. Here is an example from that shoot:
I choose to make this shot black and white because I think it fits the scene and there was not much color in the image anyway. There were lots of smoke in the air. I shot into the sun. Notice that the light is brighter on the left rule of thirds line (see my blog on composition). This draws the viewer's eye there. It pulls the viewer's eye into the image to help create depth. There were many trees to shoot, so why choose this shot? I did not want all the trees to just be level. The left leaning tree makes the shot more dynamic and adds interest.
I don't know if this shot speaks to you or not. It might not be the sort of thing that you hang in your home, but it tells a story and makes the viewer ask questions. We want viewers to wonder when they look at our images.
The main lesson today it simply to be out and shooting when others are not (just be safe). Look for events that do not happen regularly.
]]>Although I have seen great shots using this technique, this kind of photography is not my cup of tea. What I prefer (please find your style, your niche, what you prefer) are more boring images; images where the technique is more subtle. Here is an example:
For this kind of shot you will want to wait until it gets dark, but don't wait too long if you prefer a blue sky over a black sky. Place your camera on a tripod. I use a medium ISO as it helps to lift the background sky a little (it makes it lighter rather than darker towards black). A smallish F.Stop is desired because we need a long shutter speed. Light painting requires time, so I prefer a shutter speed longer than 30 seconds. To get a shutter speed longer than 30 seconds set your camera on "bulb". This setting allows you to keep your shutter open for as long as you want. Touching the camera and holding your shutter release button down for as long as you want will result in camera shake. We typically do not want to touch the camera when we shoot, not even to press the shutter release button because touch introduces camera shake that negatively impacts your image's sharpness. So you will need a remote release. With a remote release you can trip the shutter and lock it in the tripped position for as long as you want without needing to hold the button down all the time. When you are done light painting, just release the lock and your shutter will close.
Everything ready, camera set? The last thing you will need is a hunting light. I use a 2,000,000 candle light hunting lamp. Since the human eye tend to prefer warm colors to cold colors I use an old fashioned one that still gives off the yellow light. I do not like the new LED lights because they shine with a white light that tends to make the images look fake (the colors just do not look right). Trip the camera's shutter and lock it in the open position with your remote shutter release. Switch on your hunting light and start painting your building, car, chair, (whatever you want light painted).
In the scene above, you will notice that I did not give the whole scene even light. I gave more light to certain sections that others. This was done because that is where I wanted to keep the viewer's eyes. You can paint your scene whichever way you want. When you are done, just close your shutter. Ensure that you paint from next to your camera and not from behind it as we do not want light from the light source to enter the camera through the view finder (mirrorless cameras do not have this problem).
Your camera may take a long time to process this image because of the length of the exposure. You camera is doing what Canon calls "black frame subtraction" to reduce noise. If you camera does not take long to process the image, please consider turning this feature on. Once you can see your shot and inspect your histogram for exposure you can determine if you need to re-shoot. You may need to keep your shutter open longer and paint longer (if you shot is too dark). You may need to shorting things if your image is too bright.
These shots have a lot of impact and people may ask how you shot these kind of shots because not to many people know about light painting (I am speaking of the general public, not photographers). These shots are a bit different. Play around and be creative. This technique can be used to create all sorts of shots.
Have fun trying this out.
]]>
This church was in the process of printing church bulletins and other brochures. So I decided to shoot this image for them. Shooting a shot like is very difficult. The night sky is dark. The roof is dark. The stain glass window is dark. This final image is a blend of five shots. This image is simply not possible to get in one shot (without spending a lot of money and time). When I turned the lights on inside the church the windows were just too bright (the highlights where blown). The church sign (far bottom right) also blew out, and as I mentioned before the other parts were too dark. To solve these problems I blended five images together.
We started out by parking numerous cars in the parking lot just out of sight to the left. They had their headlights turned on to help illuminate the building. We placed spotlights out of sight to light up the front of the church. I shot a long exposure while I light painted the roof and the spire. That was exposure one. Exposure two was for the windows. It was shot right after the first shot but with a faster shutter speed so that the highlights were not blown. Shot three was the same shot again, but this time exposed for the church sign. Shot four was for the lawn as it was way dark. This was a very long exposure while I did some light painting. The fifth shot was exposed for the stain glass window. So as you can see, I did not alter the shot, I only altered the exposures for different brightness levels.
The five shots were then blended together in Photoshop to render this final image. Was I cheating to get this shot? Well, this is what the human eye saw looking at the church that night. Because the camera is not capable to capture what the eye saw does not make it cheating if I restore what the camera lost. When shooting topics of this nature for clients, do not be afraid to be creative as long as this is what the eye saw. In other words, if after seeing this shot you went to this church at night with all the lights on and cars with lights on are parked in the parking lot will you see the same image or will you feel cheated? This is in fact what you will see.
Get creative to create the shots that your clients want, but stay true to reality.
]]>So how do we get sharp images?
Use good lenses, they impact sharpness very much
For landscape images use your lens' sharpest F.Stop (typically F8 - F11 for a full frame camera)
Use a sturdy tripod (please read an earlier blog on tripods) and a good tripod head - make sure your tripod is well placed and steady
Use mirror lockup or shoot in live view - when the mirror slaps up for your camera to take the shot it causes internal vibrations and the minute your camera moves or vibrates you loose sharpness. Remember, when shooting landscapes we are typically shooting in low light and using small F.Stops, so our shutter speeds are really slow to allow the camera enough time to gather enough light. Slow shutter speeds necessitate that the camera does not vibrate if you want sharp images.
Use a cable or wireless remote release - we do not want to be touching the camera's shutter button when we shoot (for the same reason mentioned above)
Hang your camera bag or a weight on your tripod on a windy day so that the wind will not shake your tripod
Once nothing is touching your camera anymore wait a few seconds for any vibrations to stop before shooting (via your remote release)
Focus on the hyper focal distance to get everything sharp from foreground to background (assuming you are shooting a landscape) (read my blog on 5 must have apps; yes there is an app for that)
Post process for sharpness
Use a mask in Adobe Camera Raw when sharpening so that you only sharpen detail and not where there is no detail (sky, water, etc.)
Sharpen your raw file sparingly - over sharpening ruins your image
Once your image is fully processed in PhotoShop sharpen it for final output (sharpen for screen use or print use) - this is the last thing I do when I process files. I use Nik Software's Sharpener Filter. I also use a mask here to only sharpen the elements in the image I want sharpened.
All digital files need sharpening. Let's get those shots sharp.
]]>We need to insure that our computers' calibration match the lab's computer's calibration. Yes, I know they are three states away. However, we still have access to their printer's calibration. Visit the lab online and search for their printer profile. If this lab is any good they will offer a little file for you to download that contains their printer's profile (this is the same type of file that the monitor calibration colorimeter software created for your monitor and loads every time your computer boots up). Download this file ...
Done? Okay, now make sure you know where on your computer that file is saved (downloads folder may be a good place to look). Now open PhotoShop and install the printer profile (you may need to search PhotoShop help on how to do this as so many people are working with some many different versions, but a good place to start is in the print dialogue box).
Voila, you software will now match the color of the printer in use. Your prints will look just great. Enjoy your color calibrated prints ...
]]>I soon learned that the color on my monitor was off. When we process images we process them from what we see on the screen. We tweak colors and settings to get the image to be pleasing to us. When our monitors are not calibrated we are actually messing up our images because we are shifting the colors based on what we see on an uncalibrated monitor. When such a processed file is then displayed on someone else's screen (that is correctly calibrated) the colors will be off. In this case, the print was off because I processed the file on a monitor that was off color.
That was many years ago. Today I calibrate my monitor before I process any major shoot and about once every two months routinely. So how do you calibrate your monitor? You need to buy a colorimeter. Most photographers buy either a Datacolor Spyder or an X-Rite (Colormunki). Prices vary from about $90.00 through $150.00 (there are more expensive models). The colorimeter comes with software which displays set colors for the colorimeter to "see" or measure. It then compares which color is sent with which color is "seen". The process goes through many colors and takes 15 to 20 minutes to complete. Once done, your monitor is set to display the same color as the color you see when looking at it. There can be quite a difference between the before and after images.
If you are serious about photography, think about investing in a colorimer. There is no use to spend all your time editing images on a monitor that displays incorrect colors. All the work will have to be redone. Therefore, I highly recommend that you calibrate your monitor regularly.
]]>Look for contrasting themes and attempt to create an image displaying such contrast. Try to place them dynamically in your composition. This technique can also be used in landscape photography. In the image below I contrasted a young sapling against lifeless rock:
The image asks questions ... How did this sapling get to grow here? How does it grow here? Why it is the only one? What is its chance of survival? The image also contrasts the green color against the color of the rock. The sapling seems to attract the viewer's eyes. One explores the rock but our eyes always seem to come back to the sapling.
Find themes of contrast. Shoot such themes. They will enhance your shots. They tend to add life and interest.
]]>
The light is already turning warmer (red and yellows) and there is detail in the shadows. This shot is certainly better than shooting the same scene in the middle of the day in harsh light. The light in this image is till harsh(ish) to me. Now let's wait for the light to get softer. Let's wait for the shadows to change ...
This shot is of the same scene (Thor's Hammer, Bryce Canyon, Utah). We simply waited for the sun to set, but did not wait too long for it to get darker. Compare the mood of each shot. Compare the light in each shot. What you are seeing is a comparison between harsh(ish) light and soft light. Look at the shadows in the first image and compare them to the rock face in the second image. Which image do you prefer (light-wise; forget the composition)?
Harsh light generally is not pleasing in landscape shots. Soft light just presents a different mood, a different look. In post processing we can boost contrast a lot more with soft light than we can with harsh light.
Learn to read the light. Wait for softer light (depending on your topic). By all means, shoot even after the sun has set. Very few people like harsh dark shadows in landscape images. Soft light seems to even things out. Usually the background light in the sky is also better just after sunset. If the soft light is due to overcast conditions it may be better not to include the sky in the shot.
Happy shooting,
]]>
This image has been sold seventeen times. The sandstone, the colors, the texture, and the light in these canyons are just gorgeous. Here are some tips to help you shoot in the Slot Canyons:
Watch the weather - these canyons are caused by flash floods. Once inside, you are pretty much trapped if a flash flood comes. Any rain, even as far as 100 miles away could lead to a flood. Be careful ...
Watch for sand - sand could be falling all the time. The sand gets in everywhere. Protect you gear.
Install a wide-angle zoom lens on the camera and do not change lenses once inside the canyon. Did I mention sand floating around? A zoom may be better than a prime in this location because you cannot really "zoom" with your feet; there is simply no space as this is a very narrow canyon.
Work fast - people come walking into your shot within seconds.
Use a tripod - it can be kind of dark in the canyon so your shutter speed will be slow.
If you want to copy the famous light shaft images you will need to be in the canyons between 11am and 2pm. Throw sand into the air to add "life" to the light shafts (away from your camera).
Join the photographic tour or you will not have enough time and there may be too many people.
What you see here is not one of those famous light shafts, but sand falling (longer exposure). It is not like this every day, it all depends on how much wind is blowing in the area.
Enjoy shooting in the canyons ...
]]>
Panoramic images are actually a series of images which have been "stitched" together. This gives you a lot of resolution which can be made into really large prints. Here is what you need to know to start shooting panoramic images:
Pick the right subject matter that is suited to very wide or tall prints. Your composition still needs to be strong.
Use a tripod. Your tripod needs to be level because you are going to rotate your camera.
Imagine the final image in your mind. Now take the first image (let's start with the far left).
Pan your camera to the right for the next shot.
Make sure you overlap the two shots (by about a third). That means that the second shot should include about a third of the previous shot. The computer is going to need the overlap to register items so that it can line them up correctly.
Pan your camera to the right again and shoot the next shot. Make sure you overlap a part of the second shot with the third shot.
Now that you have three images (you can shoot as many as you want), stitch them together in Photoshop.
It is very imported to set your camera on manual when you shoot because all three shots needs to be made using the same settings. If your exposure is difference it will be hard to match when you bring your shots together.
The good news - although many people claim that they do not need 50 Megapixels, Megapixels are very valuable to me. Landscape shots are born to be printed large; very large (I have had an image of mine printed on 6 bill boards in Japan; size does matter). There is just something about a large landscape print that screams "WOW!" So personally, I will take every extra Megapixel I can get. Not only do I want to print large, landscape photography is about detail and 50 Megapixels deliver boat loads of detail. I am very excited about the possibility of having more Megapixels available. Many photographers complain about large file sizes necessitating better computers and more storage space on hard disks, but this does not bother me in the least. Firstly, memory cards are so much cheaper today than just a few years ago. Secondly, hard disks are also cheap (a 3 or 4 TB drive cost the same as what a 500 or 750 GB cost a few years back). Lastly, my website host (Zenfolio - please see my 10% discount code in my blog about websites), offers me unlimited online storage; of even my raw files.
The bad news - there are three areas of concern to me:
The price point - by the time you have added tax these cameras are around $4,000.00, body only. I am not a camera engineer or a manufacturing expert but I do not think there is much difference in the cost of manufacturing a 20 MP sensor versus a 50 MP sensor (if both are full frame). Now you may argue that the price jump between these new cameras and the Canon 5D III (at introduction) is only about $400.00 - $600.00. My response is simple: even the 5D III was over priced compared to the Nikon D810, AND these two new cameras are inferior to the 5D III in almost every way save the Megapixels (see the next two points).
The dynamic range - Canon has been lagging behind Sony and Nikon (same basic sensor as the Sony) for some time now. I was hoping for some improvement in this area, but it never came. Canon themselves admitted that the dynamic range of this new sensor is about on par with the 5D III. That means that there has been no real improvement in this department from Canon for more than 5 or 7 years. The 5D III was behind the Sony and Nikon offerings to begin with, new these new sensors are going to be even further behind once Sony introduces their new sensors. You may ask, "what does that matter in real life shooting?" You may even be tempted to think that we just want the latest and greatest. Landscape shooting often results in shooting into the setting or rising sun. In most of these cases the foreground is in deep shadow. The difference between the bright sun and the deep shadow can just be too much for the Canon's to handle. On the Sony or Nikon you can shoot the scene with just one shot and then brighten the shadows with one slider in Photoshop; done. No, I do not want to mess with HDR or blend multiple exposures; that takes time.
High ISO noise - once again Canon themselves said that these cameras' high ISO performance is on par with the 5D II, possibly the III. Yes, I realize that 50 Megapixels on the same real estate (sensor size) have smaller photosites which is supposed to result in more high ISO noise. However the same is true for Sony's 36 MP sensor versus their previous 24 MP sensor and yet, magically their high ISO performance did not suffer. Many photographers counter by saying that landscapes are shot at base ISO (100), what do you need high ISO for? I have written about this before; landscape photographers need good high ISO output because we shoot on the edges of storms. These weather conditions go hand in hand with wind. Wind blows the grass or flowers resulting in their movement. The only way to freeze them for sharp focus (a must in landscapes) is to use a high shutter speed. The only way to use a small F.Stop (for depth of field) AND a fast shutter speed at sunrise or sunset (with little available light) is to use a high ISO. On my last two trips we were shooting in terrible wind. I need good clean high ISO to enable a faster shutter speed. Using a tripod (which I always do for landscapes) does nothing to prevent moving foliage from moving; stabilizing the camera against shake does not prevent subject motion blur.
In the shot below the wind was blowing as if paid to do so. The grasses in the foreground swayed with the wind. This shot just would not have worked at any lower shutter speed. Even so, I had to wait for lulls in the wind to shoot because my camera does not give clean high ISO; yet many of the shots of this shoot were out of focus (I was lucky to get one or two usable ones):
So will I be investing in one of these Canons? I am probably leaving Canon (after many years with Canon). I am not sure what I am going to replace my gear with at this point in time. It will depend on what the other manufacturers offer in the next few months. My lenses are probably for sale now. By the way, my decision to leave Canon is also based on their service center policies and practices. Since my camera was sent in for service I have not been happy with the way in which they work.
Either way, I am very excited with where photographic gear is going. I thank Canon for bringing out these two cameras as it will certainly force the other manufacturers to respond; competition is good. Overall, (between the different brands) things have never been so good for photographers; this is an exciting time to be in the market for new gear. Megapixels are going up, auto-focus systems are just brilliant, exposure meters are awesome, optics are very good (this is what I will miss in leaving Canon), high ISO is getting better and better at higher and higher settings, and dynamic range is stretching. I cannot wait to find out what is around the corner.
I will keep you updated as to what I decide to buy in the next few months.
]]>
Here are a few tips to help you shoot fog images:
Go out and shoot in the fog.
]]>
There is not much here, a farm land and one oak tree. The shot works because it is simple. Here is another example of pure simplicity:
The fog, as discussed last week gets rid of the background and allows you to isolate small pieces of real estate. Shooting in fog is like macro photography in landscape photography because you are shooting such a small piece of the landscape. Keeping it simple works even with no fog:
The clouds in the upper left balances with the tree in the bottom right; simple. You do not always need wonderful grand scenes. Find simple scenes, they make good shots too.
]]>
Rust and texture are important parts of these images. Make sure to bring these elements out in your post processing. You can do that by warming up your image (increase your color temperature). The Nik filters (I have a blog on them) also have a preset to bring out texture. Side lighting also helps to show texture. In the shot above I used my trusted little black blanket as a backdrop. Spraying these items with water also helps to saturate the color a bit. As you can see from the shot above; you don't need much to make a shot.
Remember the look room concept in composition. There always needs to be more space in front than behind things that move or when there is implied motion. I have broken that rule in the top shot because the eye does go back and up to the steering wheel and door. However, here is a shot where you can see the principle of look room:
The light needs room to shine into. Your eye wants to have room to see where the light will be pointing. Make sure to have a strong center point of interest. You can create that by introducing anything that is different in your scene, by only have your center point of interest in focus, by choosing a bright object, and by placing things on lines of thirds (see my blog on composition).
The nice thing about these objects is that they do not move. They are all over the country. They are easy to shoot, yet can be very interesting to look at. How about shooting some old objects from yesteryear?
]]>
Today I am going to teach you how to mix black and white with color (only in some parts). This type of shot works well when you want the viewer's attention going to a specific spot. The human eye will always go to the color part of the image. To get this kind of photograph plan your shot and composition so that you place the object you want in color on a strong compositional position (rule of thirds, for example: see my blog on composition). Next, shoot the shot in color (just as you normally would).
Please note that I will be using Photoshop cc 2014 for this blog. Open your raw file (see my blog on what is cooking with raw) and process it for color. Save your color image. Now open the same raw file again and process it for black and white. Do not change the cropping from one to the other. Save your black and white image. Open both images in Photoshop. Click and hold on the file name of the image and drag it down. You want to see both images in two separate windows side by side. While holding down the shift key, click and hold on the black and white image. Now drag it on top of the color image. This will place the black and white image on a layer in front of the color image. Obviously, you only see the black and white image (the color one hides behind).
There are many techniques to do what comes next. Some will use masks, others will use color pickers, I simply "paint" on a layer mask. Use what works for you. Find your layers on the right of your screen and make sure that the top layer (the black and white image) is selected (click on it in the layers pallet). Add a layer mask (there are a few icons on the bottom right corner of your screen; use the third one from left to right). I enlarge the image to 300% or 400%. Use your scroll bars to move the image around until you see the part that you would like in color. You will notice that the layer mask is white. Press the letter "d" on your keyboard to insure that the default colors are black and white. Select black (total left of the screen third icon from the bottom up). Click on the paint brush (higher up on the same row of icons). Now go paint the area that you want in color. Voila, you see the color from the image below. Keep painting until you are done. If you make a mistake, simply click on white (where you clicked on black before) and repaint it. You can go back and forth as much as you want.
Congratulations, you have just made a black and white image with an element of color. When you are done you can flatten your image (on the menu bar choose layers, flatten image). Save and back up.
Go make some creative shots.
]]>The best light for shooting flowers is when you have gray, drab, and overcast skies. See, when the light is not best suited for landscape work photographers simply go shoot flowers. By the way, very nice landscapes can also be had in these conditions, just insure that you don't include the sky in the shot. The reason why these conditions suite flowers well is because all that cloud cover acts as a giant light diffuser. You end up with nice, soft light, the very light that brings out the best in flowers. Now that you know what light works best for flowers, here are a few tips for shooting flowers:
Use a tripod and set your camera on the self timer (you will see why next).
Take a black backdrop. A small little blanket works well. Insure that it absorbs light rather than reflects light. I bought one at Walmart for a few Dollars. Once you trip your camera's self timer you quickly get behind the flower and hold up your backdrop. This helps to really make your flowers stand out.
I have said this before, but it also helps to bring your flowers to life. Bring a mister (water spray bottle that sprays mist) and spray your flowers before you shoot.
Drive around in your city or town to find great gardens (I prefer residential areas rather than city parks although that can work well also). Always knock and ask for permission before you shoot.
An iPad (set on bright white - yes, there is an app for that {soft box}) helps to reflect nice soft light into the flower, or to light dark parts of the image.
Shooting on windless days work best. If the wind is blowing find some cacti (they do not move in light wind).
Back lighting can be very nice as it makes the leaves translucent. Shine a flash light from behind. This often shows the veins in the leaves.
Here are a few examples:
Enjoy those flowers.
]]>Shooting while there is Alpen Glow solves this problem because the light is not that intense. Therefore the difference between the light parts and the dark parts are not as much as it is going to be when there is direct sunlight on only the elevated parts of the image. Alpen Glow does not last long. So be out early. Have everything setup and ready. Compose and focus early. Shoot early. Shoot, shoot, shoot when you see the glow. First light and last light are warmer types of light (more orange; whereas blue light is cold light). When orange, reddish light falls on reddish rock you have red on red which intensifies the red. Be careful when you post process because the red may look overdone. People will tell you that it looks too saturated even though you never added any saturation. At times this red may be so strong that you need to actually remove some of it. Yet, that is the way it looked.
Ensure that you do not just rely on really nice light. Your composition is still important. Look for those foregrounds. Attempt to find lead in lines. Here is an example of this kind of glow light.
Get out early. Chase high elevation and see what you get.
]]>
While I really like this image I never want to walk away from a nice scene with just one shot. I talked about this topic once before. We want to make sure that we get multiple shots of the same scene. Yet these shots have to be different. You cannot change the grand vista, but you can change the foreground by moving around. A changed foreground can dramatically alter your shot and give you a very different image. When the Alpen Glow begins it only lasts a few minutes. You just do not have the time to go looking for new shots. By the time you find another good composition the glow is gone.
Scout for multiple shots during the day when the light is not conducive to great photography. When this is not possible do your scouting the minute there is enough light to see but before it is shootable. Find yourself a few compositions close by so that you can quickly switch between them. The ideal is to get a few good shots from the same few minutes of great light (or glow). As I have said before, many amateurs will shoot many shots, but of the same image. When they get home they choose the best one and they are done. Yet no matter how many shots they shot they still end up with only one shot (of which they may have hundreds in duplicate shots).
Go early.
Work hard the minute you can see to find alternate compositions.
Have a plan. Setup for the first shot and then look around to make sure you can identify and know where your other shots are.
Refrain from shooting hundreds of the same image. Shoot a few and move to your next foreground.
Make sure each composition is different and unique.
So having shot the previous shot, here is the next one I got. This will give you an idea of what I am talking about. The scene is the same, the glow light is the same, but the foreground and composition is totally different. Thus I walk away with two shots I really like instead of just one. P.S. I do not often get to shoot more than two images during a short period of time since workshop participant call for help and they come before my shooting.
Even rotating the camera makes a difference. Get some vertical and horizontal images. Move around and make the most of the few moments of glow time.
]]>There are some challenges to shooting before sunrise. It is darker so focusing may be a problem. For the same reason it may be more difficult to compose, especially in darker areas. You need to shoot at longer shutter speeds in order to get enough light to make a well exposed image. With such long shutter speeds wind can ruin your focus (because plants and leaves move in the wind). Here are some tips to help you shoot before sunrise.
Locations with less plants work best; rocks do not tend to move when the wind blows.
High deserts work well to because the plants (little rain is only attractive to more robust plants) tend to be more rigid and therefore also do not move as much.
Pull out your flashlight, shine where you want to focus and focus there. Without your flashlight your camera may not be able to focus in such dark conditions.
Use live view to compose. The image will not look good in live view (it will be full of ugly grain and noise because the camera has cranked up the ISO to be able to produce the image, but do not worry your image will not look like this) but hey, at least you can see the basics to compose.
Work quickly in live view. You don't want to leave live view on for too long as your sensor will heat up causing noise when you actually shoot.
Looooong exposures can only be done on a study tripod.
Looooong exposures will often exceed your light meter's 30 second limit which means you need to set your camera on Bulb. You do not want to be touching your camera all the time while it is shooting in order to keep the shutter open in Bulb. This will cause camera shake which ruins focus. So make sure to use your cable release instead.
Here is an example of what you can get before sunrise:
Go attempt some shots before sunrise.
]]>These shots are so iconic and so desirable that they are often very difficult to shoot. What makes them difficult to shoot is not always due to technical difficulty but due to the ten thousand other photographers trying to get the same shot at the same time. Here are some tips to help you get your trophy shot:
Arrive really early. I have been to many of these icons where hundreds of other photographers clammer for space. Arrive before them and stake you spot. Sometimes that means standing in freezing weather and waiting for two or more hours.
Be courteous and helpful. Let other photographers squeeze in to make room for others. During my last workshop in the Grand Tetons a fellow demanded two to three feet of space around him. That is just plain selfish. Let others squeeze in so that everyone can get a chance at the shot. Kindly remind fellow photographers who are close by not to touch your tripod and be mindful that you return the courtesy.
Attempt to get something different; even just a little bit difference. Make your composition really strong. Your shot is competing against millions of other shots of the same scene.
Plan ahead. Once there are many photographers in line you cannot move around. You are stuck where you stand. So while you have time because you arrived before everyone else ensure that you pick the spot you plan to stay at. Planning ahead will help you know where that spot is because you may not be able to move around later.
Visit the scene during the middle of the day before you go to shoot it in the morning. You will be arriving in the dark using a flash light. You will want to know how to get there and you will want to be safe getting there in darkness. You will not be able to see well to get your composition or your spot. Knowing where it is before you go shoot will help you get the spot you want.
This barn, the T.A. Moulton Barn on Mormon Row near Jackson in Wyoming, is officially the most photographed barn in the world. This particular morning photographers lined up standing from shoulder to shoulder in a line longer than you can image. How do you get a different shot when there are hundreds of photographers shooting this same scene every morning? It may not be possible, but then at least get the strongest composition you can possibly get.
I choose this spot because I could use the curving stream and leaves as a lead in line. Without it the large foreground does not offer much. The other solution is to go panoramic. Either way, make the composition as strong as you can. Keep on going back until you get good light. There may be millions of these barn shots out there but if your light (and sky) is better you will have the better shot.
See you on the iconic circuit.
]]>
Here is another example:
And yet another example:
Enjoy the fall and get out shooting.
]]>However, you get there and the weather is not conducive for great photography. A long time resident told us that he has never seen five or six days of consecutive rain during this time of year during his 30 year life there. Regardless of the rain we still go out to shoot because photographers love bad weather; that is often what gives you drama and shots that others don't have. In mountainous terrain the clouds and weather can also change by the minute.
So here are were attempting to shoot Mount Moran. Just about all the cameras are pointing at Mount Moran. That is what we came to shoot. It is so easy to get fixated on shooting the shot you wanted to shoot that you don't look around, especially behind you. This is even more true when you get to a place for the first time and you are so excited to get that trophy shot of the famed icon (I have been there a few times). Professional landscape photographers learn to always look around them. They constantly observe the light in all directions. They make a point of looking behind them from time to time; even if the great iconic scene is in front of them. With Mount Moran not at its best I started to look around. What is the light doing elsewhere?
With most people shooting one way I saw the light turning behind us so I turned around to shoot the nice light behind us. Remember that photography is always more about the light than about the scene. This was the result:
Now there is no great mountain in this shot, but there is color and at least something was happening in the sky. Always look around you. Look behind you. Things may be more exciting there than in front of you. Look for the light. Criminal detectives always say "follow the money". Photographers always say "follow the light".
]]>Learn to see in black and white. Black and white is all about contrast. Why try to enhance color where there is not much color when such an image is often ideal for black and white? Let's look at some examples:
In this landscape there was not much color. The Sage brush in the foreground was a boring gray with a hint of a green tint. The mountain is grayish rock. The trees in the distance had some dark green but it did not really show itself because of the light. The sky was gray. When a photographer is confronted with such a scene one almost don't want to shoot because this shot just does not offer much in color. Let us not forget that there is such a thing as black and white. So purposefully, thinking of black and white I shot this shot. It did not look as dramatic as it appears here. That is the beauty of black and white, you don't need much other than contrast. In post processing you just push the contrast in the sky to bring out the detail and drama in the clouds.
Remember to try to find a foreground element to draw the viewer into the image. I walked around and found this little footpath. In post processing it is easy to just lighten the footpath a bit.
Once again I had a scene with almost no color to speak of. Seeing a black and white opportunity I shot this image. Selecting the sky / clouds the photographer simply boosts the contrast and the shot comes to life. Now I only needed a canoe in the right spot.
Give black and white a try. For a black and white image to work there has to be a good range of blacks and whites. Look for scenes that have dark objects AND light parts. Please don't think that the middle of the day offers loads of contrast. The light still cannot be too harsh, especially if you plan to still add a lot of contrast in post processing. Have fun with your black and whites.
Happy "seeing" black and white
]]>The Good: Reduced size and weight is important to landscape photographers as we hike long distances in unforgiving terrain with heavy gear. Saving pounds and size mean we can use a smaller backpack and a smaller tripod. So savings in the gear lead to additional savings in the weight and size of both backpack and tripod. Secondly, the image quality on the full frame A7R is stunning. It packs 36 Mega Pixels in this tiny body which translates into big prints.
The Bad: Because there is no optical viewfinder and because this camera is small the battery life suffers. Luckily these batteries are small and light, so carrying a few extra batteries is not a problem. The file size can also be a problem; they are huge. The lens selection (for native lenses) are rather limited right now although we are promised a number of additional lenses before the end of 2015.
Canon said that they will release higher Maga Pixel sensors very soon (Probably in February or March). It will be interesting if the new higher resolution sensors will make it into both DSLR and millorless offerings. Sales trends do show that mirrorless is growing, perhaps more so abroad.
So what am I waiting for? The distance between the focal plane (where the sensor is) and the lens is much shorter in mirrorless cameras. This means that we will either need to work with adapters or change lenses (sell Canon lenses in favor of Sony / Zeiss). Even when Canon releases their mirrorless offering it will probably require a new line of lenses. Selling one's beloved lenses and replacing them is an issue and it can be costly. Using adapters is an option but it throws out the balance of the camera and you end up loosing some of the gains made in size.
I will wait until March 2015, evaluate where Canon and Nikon stand regarding mirrorless, see if Sony comes out with an even better A7R and probably switch to mirrorless then. Having said that, mirrorless is not for everyone. Their auto focus is still too slow for sports, for landscape work their are great. Sony, Fuji, Olympus and Panasonic are all driving this market.
Less size and weight are where things are going. Cell phone cameras have already killed off the low end of the point and shoot market. High end point and shoots are beginning to negatively impact the low end DSLR market. This is the future ...
]]>So why do we miss THAT shot? For photographers the reasons are typically the following:
A lesson I learnt was to shoot while you can to avoid disappointment. I cannot tell you how many times I have said to myself that I will come back later to find the flower open, or in better light, only to come back the next day to find the flower eaten by a bug or a bigger problem. Yes, please do come back for better light or a better situation but also shoot it during this session while you are there. Digital shooting is free (once you have your equipment). You can always delete the shot once you have a better one. However, you may never get a better one.
This lesson was proved once again during my trip to Newfoundland. One day was totally socked in by thick fog. It was so thick that we did not even bother to go out. By mid afternoon we got cabin fever so we decided to go for a drive. About a half hour later the fog opened up just a little bit and we came upon this scene:
Having learnt the lesson to shoot while you can I shot this shot. I really liked this iceberg as it was not just a chunk of ice; it had shape (I know they all have a shape; I mean this shape was interesting to me) and character. So I vowed to come back late afternoon to get some nice light on it and if the fog was still in place I vowed to come back the next day. Closer to sunset we came back to this place as promised, but guess what ... Yes, you got it, the iceberg was gone; never to be seen again (by me at least)!
Now, this may not be the greatest shot and it is certainly not a trophy shot. At some level though I do like it somewhat. There is depth, color and mood. One can almost feel the cold just by looking at it. Most importantly, I have the shot. What would have happened if I did not shoot it while I had the chance; dreaming about golden light on the iceberg at sunset?
I do advocate to go back to the same scene over and over to get better conditions, but please shoot every time you get there (if it is worth a shot at least). Shoot while you can as it may never be the same again. Some opportunities only come by once. Just shoot it and see how it looks when you get home. What have you lost by doing so if the shot is no good?
]]>1. Easy to setup and maintain; without the need for me to learn HTML or computer code.
2. Integration of my photo site and blog site. I did not want two different solutions as so many other photographers are using. Why pay twice?
3. Clean professional look yet with power to customize with ease. I did not want a site that was branded by the provider's brand. I did not want a site with one template where thousands of photographers' websites all look the same. It needed to be mine.
4. Integration of both sales and fulfillment. I wanted a one stop shop where people can enjoy my work and buy images and products if they so which. Many sites offer this but then send the photographer a note once a sale is made so that the photographer can print the image and ship it. I run a busy life and just do not have time to run a photographic sales business. I wanted the website solution to handle everything. The only thing I want to deal with is my royalty check. Their fulfillment needed to be done by top notch photographic labs and it needed to happen seamlessly and automatically; I just did not want to be involved in any part of it.
5. Ability to sell stock images. My images are sold world-wide by a major macro stock agency called Alamy. Stock agencies take a major slice of the pie; I mean MAJOR. More and more commercial sales however are happening by people searching Google for images rather than going to a stock agency. So I wanted the ability to sell my own files through my website in an attempt to get sales that bypass the agency.
6. Automatic scaling and watermarking. I just wanted to site to manage everything including the pesky watermarks. Yes, they are needed as people steal images.
7. Lastly, although I was willing to pay for the service it should not eat up all the money one makes through sales.
There are many sites which, to some extent, offer what I was looking for. I looked into Smugmug, Foliolink, Photoshelter, and many others. In the end of the day I selected http://www.Zenfolio.com. It has now almost been a year and I must say I am very happy with this company. Their support is really good and fast. They are photographers themselves and understand the business. They do everything I wanted to be done in a photographic website. Their pricing is very reasonable. Have you thought of opening a photographic website? If so check out Zenfolio.
For a 10% discount on already very reasonable pricing use this code: 3FA-ENZ-SHG
]]>
Evaluate each shot before tinkering with the white balance. Ask whether the shot is supposed to feel warm or cold. What is the shot supposed to make the viewer feel? Many people automatically set their white balance a bit warmer; which is mostly just fine. However, if your shot needs to be cold do not be afraid of making the shot a bit colder. Many shots have a mood which can often be enhanced by the correct white balance for that shot.
It was raining on and off. Fog was coming and going. The light was changing by the minute and changes happened quickly. One minute the iceberg was lit in bright sunshine with harsh shadows, the next it was shrouded in fog so thick one could barely see it. The wind was annoying. I mostly hate the wind when trying to shoot. The wind messes with your focus because the flowers, leaves, etc. are moving and when you shoot in low light with small F.stops your shutter speed is slow. When objects in your shot are moving because of the wind and you are shooting with slow shutter speeds your images are ruined; out of focus. The wind even makes these big icebergs bob up and down by its own force and by causing wave action. In short, it was cold, windy, and miserable.
I wanted this shot to convey what it was like; cold, windy, and miserable. To do that I deliberately set the white balance lower to create the feeling of cold. I wanted that mood to be evident in the shot. Don't be afraid to work with colder white balance if your shot needs it.
By the way, the only solution to the motion blur (out of focus objects due to movement, often from wind) is to shoot at faster shutter speeds, to freeze the motion. You cannot get a faster shutter speed in landscape photography by opening up your aperture because you generally need the depth of field (everything in focus, front to back). So to get a faster shutter speed you have to crank up your ISO. Be careful not to go too high as noise (grain like effect that is just ugly in most landscape shots) will increase. I cannot wait for Canon to introduce a sensor than can really shoot noise free images at high ISO. This trip to Newfoundland made me realize that once again. This is an island; the wind is always blowing so clouds move, flowers move, leaves move, even the camera can be shaking in the wind (yes, even on the tripod).
Choose a white balance that is right for the shot at hand; warmer is not always better.
]]>You may still need a graduated neutral density filter to shoot to hold back the sky. The color can still be good even though your eyes cannot see it. Since the light is very low you WILL need a good tripod. I often shoot in quite dark situations. Just open up the shutter long enough and your shots will look good with good color.
When the sun is set most people leave. This was also the case when I shot this image. It was shot the same night as last week's shot. You are there already. Just wait another 20 or 30 minutes. You may very well get one more shot. To get sharp and well composed images I setup and focus while I still have light. I set the lens on manual focus so that it will not change when it gets dark because then it is very difficult to focus again. Use live view or mirror lock up to eliminate vibration. Use your remote shutter release so that you are not touching the camera. These measures help you to get sharper images. The camera cannot be moving when you shoot at long shutter speeds lest you get blurred images.
Stay out just a little bit longer.
]]>When you arrive on scene spend a bit of time looking around, evaluating the scene. See if you can anticipate anything. Think about what is going to happen if this or that happens. Which direction are the clouds moving into? How fast are they moving? Where is the sun going to set (it is not strait down from its current position; it follows an arc)? Plot where the clouds are going and attempt to visualize possible shots for when the clouds reach the ideal position for that shot. Then move and get ready to shoot it when and if it happens.
Setup, compose and be ready well before the time. Things can happen quickly so being ready is key. Of course it does not always happen, but when it does you will be glad that you anticipated the shot and that you were ready to capture it.
People may think: "Well the water is not going anywhere anytime soon and neither are the rocks or mountain. Remember that one of my first blogs said that photography is not about the scene but about light. Light changes very fast. I have had gray boring skies light up in bright orange, but just for a minute before returning to gray again as the sunset broke through momentarily. The sports photographer may say that a minute of time is plenty. Not so! Landscape photographers often work in very low light in which it is very difficult to focus. At times it is even difficult to compose because you cannot see the darker areas of the image. You have to maneuver a tripod. To make matters worse the camera's light meter stops telling you how long to keep the shutter open when your shutter speed exceeds 30 seconds (and we shoot many shot with shutter speeds of longer than 30 seconds). Now you have to calculate it manually. While all of this is taking place the light changes all the time (especially on the edges of storms when we find good dramatic light).
On the foot of this mountain is a little town. I did not want to shoot the town. Within minutes the fog rolled in, seemingly from out of nowhere. That fog created this moody shot. A few minutes prior to this shot, this image did not exit (the town was visible and the shot would not have been moody). A minute later the mountain itself was hidden by the fog; opportunity gone.
In other situations God-rays may only appear for seconds. Light may burst through and beautifully illuminate an object for a short moment. We have to be ready. We have to work fast. So how do we work fast?
1. Know your gear. This is not the time to wonder how to setup the camera in a certain way. Ensure that you can set anything, anytime, quickly. I cannot tell you how many times students call me over for help with camera settings in fleeting light. There are hundreds of camera models out there. It is not feasible to expect the instructor to know every workshop participant's camera. By the time the camera is set the shot is gone.
2. Know where everything is. Place your gear in the same place in your bag every time. When you are done with something (a filter for example), place it where it belongs right away. You may need it quickly when you do not have time to look for it. I have a pouch that holds multiple filters right on my tripod. We often need two hands to change composition (one hand on the camera and the other on the ball head), so what do you do with the filter in your one hand? Prior to getting this pouch I would stick it in a pocket just to search for it later (which pocket, or was it in the camera bag?). Often a 4x6 filter did not fit in my pocket so I would pinch it between my knees (I hope other photographers did not think I have a need). Standing in an awkward position slows you down. This little pouch work so well for me. I know where my filters are at all times and have quick access to them right from my tripod.
3. Keep a spare battery and memory card handy for quick access. Mr. Murphy will ensure that your battery is flat or that your memory card is full just when you need to grab that winning shot.
4. Use an L-bracket for vertical orientation. It is just sooooo much easier to quickly change orientation and compose using an L-bracket than trying to use the slot in your ball head.
5. Be aware of what is happening around you. The action may take place behind you.
6. Find a workflow that works well for you when using your camera and stick with it to become proficient and quick. Your workflow needs to happen automatically and in order. You just don't have the time to wonder if you have set this or done that.
7. Practice. Review your settings before a major shoot (or trip). Anticipate your shot (as far as possible) and set your camera accordingly prior to the shoot.
Be ready and act quickly.
]]>1. How much would it cost you to travel to so many places to figure out when the best time of the year is, where the best shots are, how long it takes to drive from shooting location one to location two, where to stay, etc. etc? Don and his assistants have done all the work for you at their expense. I have personally accompanied Don on many such scouting trips. We work hard, walk far, examine the place, read and study about the place, and know the place well before we schedule any workshop. Last year the National Parks Service shut down the park during the government shut down. We were in the middle of a workshop with another one to follow. Where were we going to shoot, where were we going to take the workshop participants? This is what you pay for. While Don was teaching file processing two of us went out scouting for new locations. Good alternate locations were found and the participants got good images. We know the area well (especially from a photographer's point of view) and can adapt to the weather and problems. We even read the local doppler radar to know more about what the weather is going to do and to go to the right places accordingly. Everything is well planned.
2. You are taken to the right places at the right times. You will get more good shots than you will ever get trying this on your own in such a short time.
3. You get personal attention. The teacher student ration is never more than 1-6. We are not there to shoot for ourselves (although we shoot when not needed), we are there to serve you. Because this ratio is low we can work with you regardless of your skill level.
4. You get taught to process your files by a pro who has spent a lifetime learning and perfecting techniques. Just this alone is worth so much. You get to interact and act questions. Everything is done live right before you.
5. You are totally immersed in photography and learn much faster.
6. You are with like minded photographers, having a good time.
7. Your own shots get critiqued to help you improve and learn (don't worry, we know the shots have not been edited yet and we are not critical; we are there to help).
Give Don a call. See you on the next workshop.
]]>
The size of the iceberg does not look that big without the boat. The boat adds scale. I took various shots of this iceberg. As you can see the light was not good as it was the wrong time of day. So I placed the lens cap on and spent some time with my family (this was vacation, not photography). Some time passed as we were looking at the scene. Then I saw the boat going out. I ran to my spot, removed the lens cap and shot this image. The boat transforms this image into something better. Sometimes we want people to know how big or small something is. Real size is shown by adding something for scale.
Shoot icebergs during the wrong time of day is not a good idea. They are bright, can be shinny, and they reflect a lot of light. That often results in blown highlights (the whites are too bright with no detail). A polarizing filter can help some with the reflection. Expose for the right (under expose so that the whites still have detail) and lift the darker areas in post (use image editing software such as Photoshop to lighten the dark areas).
Scale is determined by the brain by taking an object of which it knows the size and then using that size to tell you how big the other objects are in relation to the known object. In this case, the brain knows how big the man in the boat it (relatively speaking) and uses that to let you know how big the iceberg is.
If you want to show the real size of something add an element for scale.
]]>It is difficult to create the illusion of 3 dimensionallity (distance into the image) on a flat surface. We create such depth by having strong foreground elements in the image. We use lead in lines. We use light intensity to draw the eye. We use color the draw the eye. We use composition (we place things strategically) and perspective to get the viewer to look into the image rather than looking at the image. We want the viewer to look at the image from bottom to top. Instead of thinking that his or her eyes are moving from bottom to top we want the viewer to think that he or she is moving into the image.
Therefore I cannot over emphasize the importance of using the techniques mentioned above. Strong foregrounds and strong leading lines is just a winning recipe that transforms a cook into a chef; an amateur into a pro (remember that we are talking about landscape photography here.) Spend much time looking for such lines, patterns, elements.
Here is an example. See for yourself how these lines just draw you into the picture. Does it almost feel as if you are there or that you can step right into the shot and start walking?
Think depth.
While in Newfoundland we went whale watching on a zodiac. A zodiac on the open ocean moves a lot due to wave action. Trying to keep a whale in your frame while you are bopping up and down in the zodiac is no easy task. This movement complicates things because now we have moving whales and a moving photographer. To get sharp images we now need to have really, really fast shutter speeds to freeze the whale and to prevent camera motion blur. Since the camera is already set on the largest F.Stop a faster shutter speed is not available. So the next step is to bump up the ISO to enable a faster shutter speed.
It is really important to think about all these things before the action starts. The camera needs to be set and ready to go in advance. Action happens fast and if you are not ready you missed the shot; a shot which you might never get again. For action ensure that your shutter speed is really fast even if you have to bump up your ISO.
Focusing is the next challenge. Set your camera on a focusing mode that tracks movement. Also take your camera off of the single shot mode and set it to shoot as many frames per second as possible. When the action happens just keep depressing the shutter and let the camera click away as fast as it can. Shoot in bursts when there is action. In the end most shots are deleted as the framing and focus might not be there. However, the keepers can be really nice.
We cannot wait for the moment and then lift the camera to shoot. It happens too fast and you have missed the shot. Track the action all the time and shoot when the action heats up. Learn to read the game. Learn the animal's behavior. We need to be able to anticipate in order to get the shots. It takes practice.
Enjoy the action.
]]>I had to change my position in order to change the perspective. The light was fading fast. I flung my backpack over my shoulder, picked up my tripod and camera with the Canon 100-400mm L attached and started to run. The goal was to shoot the iceberg from the side rather than from the narrow view. I wanted the opening in the iceberg to be more visible. The shoreline behind the iceberg was rugged. As I moved towards the left the opening became more visible and I knew what I wanted to shoot. I wanted to place one of the rocks in the background right in the opening of the iceberg. Here is the shot:
This shot is soooo much better than the ones I started off with. Let's not be so fixated with what is in front of us that we forget to think about perspective and composition. Walk around. Get a sense of the place. Explore. Change your position to change the perspective. Shooting digital is free so shoot from many different perspectives. You will not believe the difference a few steps can make (if you have a wide angle lens on). With a telephoto lens one has to walk further to make a difference, but it is worth it.
Always look for the best perspective.
]]>Here is an example of a strong foreground element:
Close your eye for a few seconds. Now before you open them again be conscious of and make a note of how your eyes move through this image. Okay, where did your eyes go? This rock in the foreground has huge pull to get you back and to start over. Remember, landscape photography is not just about the great scene in front of you. Search for good foreground elements to place in your landscapes and you will have much stronger images.
Happy looking for foreground elements.
]]>Tip #1 - Shoot abstract shots. There are techniques to blur the shot by moving the camera while the shutter is open that creates beautiful abstract shots of the trees.
Tip #2 - Look for clearings. See if you can make something of a clearing.
Tip #3 - Find something other than a tree trunk to place in the shot. Any flowers, ferns, mushrooms, etc.
Tip #4 - There has to be fallen trees. Fallen trees can be used to create depth.
Tip #5 - Streams and water are great to create depth and interest.
Tip #6 - Avoid forests in bright light. Bright light often creates hot spots where the sun shines on the forest floor while most other spots are in the shade. It is very difficult to shoot in such conditions and the shots are usually not pleasing. Drab gray skies are made for shooting in the woods.
Tip #7 - Woods are often darker. Take your tripod and use it.
Tip #8 - Although you are not including the sky in your shot (please don't) a polarizer filter works wonders in forests. It removes sheen from the leaves (reflections), and adds a touch of saturation.
Here is an example of using a fallen tree and a fern to try to create something that breaks the monotony of thousands of tree trunks:
Enjoy shooting in the woods on gray drab days.
Except for a few days our entire stay offered gray drab skies. It drizzled and rained often. There is plenty of water for a reason. It is so green for a reason. Gray drab skies are boring and ruin your photographs. So how do we deal with drab gray skies? First of all, by drab gray skies I mean that there are no detail, contrast, and definition in the clouds. Gray skies that offers lots of detail, contrast, and definition is actually quite dramatic.
Tip #1 - Do not put gray drab skies in your composition. Shoot in such a way that you simply avoid including the sky. Go for higher elevation so that you can shoot down; away from the sky.
Tip #2 - Drab gray cloud cover is a wonderful diffuser. Such diffused light is wonderful to shoot in as there are no harsh shadows and the light produces a wonderful 3D effect. Diffused light means that you can boost your contrast significantly in post processing which adds to your image. Take advantage of this light and shoot; just adhere to tip #1. This is the light that is great for shooting portraits, flowers, macro, waterfalls (if you can avoid the sky), forests, streams, etc.
Tip #3 - Soft light often makes one's images appear flat (no depth). Make sure to use strong lead in lines when shooting landscapes. Use such lines to create more depth.
Here is an example (from the Newfoundland shoot):
Tip #4 - When in a forest (like the scene above) a person can also use light to create depth. If there is a bit of a clearing in the trees ahead it will be slightly lighter in that area. Place that area in the top part of your image. Remember the human eye will always go to the brightest areas. Thus the brighter light draws the viewer into the shot.
If the light or sky is bad don't give up; rather ask what it is good for and go shoot that.
]]>Pierre
]]>The first thing I do with my images in Photoshop is to blow them up to 100% view. I then go over every part of the image to remove dust spots, discolored pixels, and other distractions like very bright pebbles, sun spots glaring through leaves, bright reflections, etc. I want to get the image free from these things before I start working with the image. If there are any spots that are too bright I darken those spots (sometimes these spots can be quite large; part of clouds where the sun shines through, etc.) Next I start working the image with the Nik filters.
The first Nik filter in my workflow is Dfine 2. I want a clean image before I start working on anything else. The nice thing about Nik filters is that they do not touch your original file; instead they create a new layer for you. Once Define 2 has done its job and created your new layer I do two things. Firstly, I delete Define's work using a layer mask on areas where I do not want the effect (anything where I want much detail). In other words, I want Define only to effect water, sky, blurred areas, and so forth. I then play with the Define's layer's opacity to weaken Define's effect to how I like it. Define removes noise at the cost of sharpness and detail. By changing the opacity I get to set it just right to get rid of the noise without cutting too much into the sharpness and losing detail. This is also the reason why I want Define's effect mostly on water, sky, blurred areas, and so forth; there are not much detail there anyways.
Next it is Color Efex Pro 4's turn. This filter has so many sub-filters that it is not feasible to discuss them all. I do not use all of them. Neither do I use all of my favorites on every image; it all depends on the image. Here are my favorites:
Now it is time for Viveza 2. Viveza is used to make local adjustments (you can also use any of the other filters mentioned above to do localized adjustments using the "paint" button at the bottom right of the window). I use Viveza to dodge and burn. I typically add a bit of texture to the clouds (not too much). I also use it to lift or darken shadows. Some places may be in need of a bit more warmth. On rare occasions I may add a bit of saturation to only a few selective spots.
Lastly I use Sharpener Pro 3. I do not mess with it. Once it is done I remove it's effect on water, sky, blurred areas and so forth using a layer mask. Then I also bring its effect way down using the opacity slider. That is it. I now meta tag the file (search terms) and save it. I save a 16 bit Tiff file and an 8 bit JPG (for uploading to the web and stock agencies). Every file is duplicated on three hard drives for safety.
Make your images shine,
Pierre
]]>Open your file in the software of your choice. I happen to use Adobe Photoshop CC. Before we continue, please allow me to say that every photographer has a different workflow. What I do may not suite you. Play around and find what works for you. Now that my file is open I adjust the following:
I almost always bring my highlights way down, even if not needed, even if the histogram shows lots of open space to the right. In fact, I bring it down so far that the image looks terrible. So why ruin a perfectly good looking image in this way? Once again, I just want to stress that this is what I do because my method of processing produces images that I like. Others may differ and may not even like "my" look. I am okay with that; I shoot for me and if others like it, good, if not - well I like it that way. In time you will develop a certain look or style. What I am describing here is just how I achieve my style, my look. Back to the question ...
Next week I will share how I post process my images after they have been developed. For now, I will just say that I plan to significantly boost my contrast dynamically later on. If I do not pull back my highlights during the development process they will be blown (or just look overdone) later when I start playing with dynamic contrast.
That is basically it. I do not mess with curves or anything else in the development process, that will come later. In preparation for next week please download Nik Filters and install them on your computer (If you use Light room or Photoshop or software that take these filters). They are amazing, easy, and quick. If you decide to buy these filters they only cost $150.00 (for all of them) and are well worth it. You can download them here: https://www.google.com/nikcollection/ (top right of screen).
Enjoy playing around with your raw file and find what works for you,
Pierre
]]>JPG is a file format that is very small and convenient. Therefore one can work with them very quickly and they do not take a lot of space on your computer. They come already processed by the camera which saves a lot of time. If you shoot sports you are shooting at a very fast frame rate (7 - 10 ten shots per second). If you are shooting for a news agency they need those images up on the web or to the news paper within minutes after the game (even after half time). Some outfits will need the images as you shoot (file transfer or tethered shooting). There is no time to process. Decisions are made in seconds. In these cases most of the photographs are used for the web where processing is not that important. In situations such as this JPG is the clear winner.
Raw is a file format that gives you what the sensor saw; unprocessed. To work with raw requires more time because the files are large and need to be developed. The camera did not process these files, you are going to. Working on a powerful computer with great software can produce images better than what a camera can process. JPG's are processed as 8 bit files by the camera while raw's are processed as 16 bit files by a computer. This means that there are millions more colors available in 16 bit files as opposed to 8 bit files. This really shows up when there are smooth gradations between colors. Because of the wider color pallet a person can do more in post processing to raw files than one can do to JPG's. When you are shooting for yourself and have time to process these files, raw is far superior. Here is why. With raw files you can:
You can see why raw is great for cooking your images. Landscape photographers always shoot raw (yes, I know there are some exceptions out there). Typically sports photographers and photo journalists shoot JPG. If you are a landscape photographer shoot JPG consider giving raw a go. I will deal with the basics of processing next week. Hard disk space is cheap, do not let the file sizes bother you. We want the utmost in quality; that usually starts raw and is cooked slowly.
Landscapers go raw ...
Pierre
]]>Two other photographers stayed for a long time waiting for the light to turn. They knew what they were talking about. However, their patience wore out, so they left because "the fog was coming in and tonight was not going to yield anything." Yet others came, looked at the scene and just left without engaging anyone in conversation or shooting a shot. Now if you have been following my blog you will know:
Before I came to San Francisco for this shoot I visualized exactly what I wanted. I wanted to get a shot of San Francisco at night with the Bay Bridge leading into the city and streaks of light from the traffic on the bridge. Here is the shot I got:
So how do we get streaks of light? It is really simple, the movement of the cars just need to be a lot faster than that of your shutter speed. Slow shutter speeds require the use of a tripod. Why do we see lights but no cars? That is the beauty of this technique, we wait until it is fairly dark and we use a smallish F.Stop. Since the cars are much darker than their rear lights and since they are moving they do not appear in the shot (they do not stand still long enough in the darkness to reflect light to be seen).
This technique can be used in many situations. A person can actually walk right in the shot waving a light (flashlight, glowing stock, etc.) without himself / herself being seen. Streaks of light are great because they are brighter than anything else in the shot so we know the viewer's eyes are going to go straight to the streaks of light. In this shot above the viewer's eyes go straight to the streaks of light, follow the light into the city, move to the right as they explore the city and come right back to the streaks of light to start over again.
Be creative, experiment and play around. You may just be blessed with shots that are different and that will have people ask you how you shot that.
Shoot some streaking lights!
Pierre
]]>On a recent trip to Hawaii I went to the Volcano National Park. The volcano glows but it is not visible during the day. In fact it looks rather pathetic during the day; I fail to see why a photographer would even shoot it during the day - perhaps just to be able to say he or she was there, I suppose.
Plan to shoot at night. Night shooting has its own challenges. Focus and composition are two such problems because you cannot see well enough to focus or frame. In most situations a flash light does the trick. A volcano is not one of those situations because you cannot get close enough and if you dare to use a strong hunting spot light 99 other photographers might want to hunt you. For this situation I set up while it was still dusk. I locked in my composition and focus. I set my focus to manual so that the camera will not attempt to change it later when it is dark. Now just wait ... When darkness falls the magic begins.
Exposure is another problem because shots like this require a longer than 30 second exposure so your camera will not be able to help you with your exposure (please read the blog on night photography for the solution). Leave some time between shots because long exposures heat your camera's sensor which causes noise.
Do not be afraid to shoot at night. It may be your best bet ... Remember to take something warm and please be careful.
]]>
Remember that we want to create depth. We want people to look into our images from front to back (over and over again; hopefully). One of the most useful things that help you achieve this are rocks. Try to find rocks. Find out when the tide is right to expose the rocks at the right time of day for good light (around sunrise or sunset). Now try to find rocks that lead you into the image. Change your angle to make this happen. Shoot from low down so that the rocks go quite high up into the image. If the ocean water is not that interesting this helps to minimize the size of the ocean in the image.
Shoot horizontal shots, shoot vertical shots but get a few shots. You can also use the flow of water with a slow shutter speed to pull the viewer's eye into the shot. Try to position yourself such that the rocks line up and lead where you want the viewer's eyes to go. Here is another example:
By using a neutral density filter (not is use in these shots) you can shoot at long shutter speeds. Wait for wave action and fire. These shots create ghost-like images where the water looks like mist / clouds as it interacts with the rocks. Play around and have fun. Rocks are your friends.
Happy tide pooling.
]]>Since we love animals we often think of them as the sole subject. We get so focused on them that we can forget to think of animals as part of the landscape. On a past blog which displayed elephants I wrote that we should shoot intimate shots but also different shots where we show these animals in their habitat, how they live, and what they do. Shoot shots like this:
Do be afraid to use a large F.Stop to blur the background. In this way you isolate the animal and the shallow depth of field forces the viewer's eyes right where you want them; in the case of animals, on their eyes. Remember to focus on the eye; they have to be sharp. Shots like these are cozy, intimate and warm. Remember that we do not want to walk away with just one shot (of 50 shot the same way). We want numerous different shots. Remember to think of animals as part of the landscape. Try something like this:
This landscape by itself is rather boring and blah. There is not much color or interest. Placing the animal in the landscape makes the animal the point of interest. Remember your compositional rules; there has to be more space in front of the animal than behind it - it has to have room to move into.
Go out and shoot more.
]]>Pro photographer Don Smith (http://www.donsmithphotography.com) and other photography friends of mine and I went to shoot the famous Delicate Arch in Arches National Park, Utah. Walking uphill to this arch with heavy equipment is not something you wish to do if you are not going to get the shot. By the time the light turned sweet there must have been 40 or 50 photographers. As we all were just about to start shooting up walked Rambo. He was tall and built like a tank. His shirt was off. He walked right up to the arch, stood under it and started to pose while his girlfriend snapped away on her little point and shoot. Now what do you do? Nobody was going to confront this hulk. His motto in life was probably: "Well, if you are not smart you have to be strong." Eventually, some brave photographers started to shout at him. Not that it made a difference, he just kept on posing until he was done. He casually walked off in no hurry, at least in no more of a hurry than those who shouted at him. Here this guy was ruining the day for 40 to 50 photographers who walked some distance with heavy gear and high hopes. Lesson 1: Let's remember our manners. Lesson 2: Posing in the very scene others have come to shoot is bad manners. Lesson 3: If you plan to forget your manners make sure you are very strong.
I was shooting in a canyon. A storm went by causing a lot of wind that blew sand in all over the place. There was a larger opening and I was the only person in that space. I had just setup my tripod when in walked a nationally renowned photographer and his crew. The entrance to the larger space was rather small and that was were I was setup. He almost bumped me (literally) out of the way as he entered the space with his crew. He surveyed the scene for a few moments and proceeded to place his tripod right in my space. He was in no hurry for apparently the light proved ephemeral and he was mesmerized by his connection to the place. He was shooting away while his assistant fed him with sheets of film. While he was engrossed in his own shooting his paying customers stood around without guidance. I just stood there when after what seemed to be years later he was reminded of his transgression against me. He instructed his paying customers to get out of my way since I was there first but he just kept on shooting. After I voiced my displeasure he irritatedly picked up his tripod and stepped aside. I shot one shot. The second my shutter went click to conclude the shot he plunked his tripod right where it was and started shooting again. He mentioned who he was (as if that makes a difference) while his attitude and body language suggested how privileged I was to meet the “King”.
To insult me and put me down he invited me to peek through his camera to see some “real pro photography”; inferring that I was “just another” worthless irritation of a photographer bothering his majesty. I did not say it but I should have said: “I guess that makes me a pro to because I already saw that shot before you came, that is why I was setup right here.” He was still shooting when I left. His customers just stood there; he did not speak to them or help them. For the longest time he just acted as if I was not there, and that after he almost ran me over when he stormed into the larger space. He just did not care and did what he pleased. He did not apologize or realize his wrongdoing as I was the one causing him irritation ... Lesson 1: Let's remember our manners. Lesson 2: Setting up in someone else's shot is bad manners. Lesson 3: If you cannot remember your manners, don't tell people who you are.
This is a shot from that shoot:
Remember when I wrote about working the scene, where I wrote about trying different angles, perspectives, and getting multiple shots from the same scene? The idea is to get different shots. Well, what if we applied that same concept to animals? How about not ending the shoot with that "perfect" shot? How about trying to get different shots from different angles to show a different perspective?
Animals do not stand still. We are not on foot and able to walk around to change perspectives or angles. However, we have different lenses. Instead of being satisfied with using the one that gives us the perfect focal length to get that perfect shot, why not try a few different perspectives? As perfect as that perfect shot is, there are thousands of them and as with anything in abundance they get boring after some time. Variation is always a good thing.
Here I used a longer lens to create a different shot. So what that most of the animal is not in the shot? I wanted something different and I already shot the "perfect" shot. This is the time to work the scene and to create different shots from the same scene. Go in close (with your lens)(always be safe). Get an intimate shot. Show something that most people do not see. Show a different perspective. Show something interesting. Shots like these can engage the viewer. You notice things that perhaps you have not observed before, like the hair around the mouth and trunk. Now that the intimate shot has been shot, how about going wider and showing the surroundings?
An animal in a landscape shot brings interest. We want to see where and how these animals live. These kind of shots can also tell a story. They place the viewer in the scene. Today's message is simple; break away from just shooting the standard "perfect" shot. Shoot close ups, shoot the wider scene. Get different shots.
Happy "hunting" ...
P.S. These two shots were shot at different locations.
]]>The following shot was shot deep into the night. You can see the stars in the sky. The rainbow is actually a Moon bow (caused by the moon's light).
There are three favorite subjects for night shooting.
Here is an example of a cityscape.
Go try shooting at night. Get something different.
I often go back to the same place to shoot and have been blessed for it. The same scene can present it very differently depending on seasons, conditions, and light. Think of Yosemite, for example, and compare spring and winter shots. Find a few spots you like that you can get to easily and quickly. When the light or weather show up run to your spot and shoot. Look at these three shots.
These shots are yet another example of working the scene to harvest different shots from the same scene. However, I saw the light was going to be nice and I needed to get on location soon so I visited this scene again. Once you see special light you already need to have a place in mind you can quickly get to or the opportunity will be lost.
Here you see the same scene during a different season under different light. Pick a few spots and just keep them in mind for when you see the weather or season coming together for something nice. Visit the same place over and over but shoot different shots under different conditions. This practice is part of making shots and pre-planning.
Happy returns.
]]>Many non-photographers shoot the scene of interest and leave. Photographers work the scene for one scene can produce multiple shots. So once I find something that I think I can work with I get my gear out and then I:
Even if I get a shot I like I keep working the scene trying to get different shots. This forces one to think and try new things. Before long my creativity comes back and I start "seeing" again. I have seen many beginners setup for a shot and wait for the light to change for the better. Then when the light is right they shoot and shoot and shoot the same shot over and over and over. Yes they may zoom a bit wider or zoom in a little but they end with with 50 shots each of which is basically the same. Now how many of those shots are they going to use? Probably just one; the best one. There certainly is no point to print three similar shots, nor is there submitting similar shots to a stock agency (if they will let you).
It is best to work the scene and harvest as many different shots as possible. The same scene can often yield many different shots, each of which can be used instead of shooting similar shots of which you will just use one. Look at these shots all taken of the same scene.
Even though I initially struggled to "see" the shots they eventually came. The same scene yielded multiple different shots. My vision was restored and I enjoyed shooting other parts of Death Valley during the next few days. This trip ended up being the most lucrative trip I ever had with sales coming in from a few different countries.
Just hang in there and work the scene. Banish the notion of shooting the same shot 50 times over when other shots lie and wait right before you.
]]>Non-photographers typically pack up their gear and head for warmer pastures. In fact, we did not see many other people out there when the weather was bad. Yet, bad weather presents shooting opportunities that do not come by every day. Of particular interest are the edges of storms. The light and clouds can be very special during these times. However some stunning shots can be had even during snow or other weather related inconveniences.
This shot tells a story. You can see the snow fall. You can see from the angle of the snow that it is windy. The picture screams "cold!" It speaks of the change of seasons; fall is going and winter has come. When shooting in snow beware of your front lens element. Ensure that no snow lands on it because it will ruin your shot. Cover you gear and use a lens cloth to clean it right before you shoot, but please shoot; even in bad weather.
This shot was shot in the rain. You can see that it is cloudy because there are no shadows. Falling rain drops are visible above the Zebra's head. Yet I just love the soft light. When things are wet their color is more saturated. When the weather is bad we don't stop shooting, rather we ask: what kind of photography is best suited to this light?
If safe, when others pack away their gear, go shoot.
]]>Take Bryce Canyon for example. In 2012 Bryce Canyon was visited by 1,385,352 people. If each visitor took just ten images then Bryce was photographed 10.38 million times in 2012. One would expect awesome images yet only a very small percentage of the images taken by non-photographers are good photographically and have any sense of wow. Why is this when they had access to a grandscape?
Firstly, as has been said before, photographers shoot in good light while most non-photographers shoot when they get there after the good light is gone and they usually leave later afternoon before the good light returns. Secondly, people get so taken by the grandscape in front of them that they just start shooting as if the grandscape by its self is going to produce great shots. Once photographers know basically what they want to shoot they actually forget about the grandscape in front of them. They look for foreground elements to include to create depth. Yes, that little flower or log is just as important in making your shot as the scene. Look at this image:
I came to this area the day before. I wanted to shoot this rock formation but how can I create depth? I spent a good amount of time just walking around looking for something to place in the foreground of the shot. After all, what else are you going to do mid-afternoon when the light is bad? Photographers use that time planning for the evening light or for the next day. In this case, I found these tree roots and decided to use them to create depth.
We want a strong foreground to catch the viewer's eye. We want the viewer's eye to go to the middle ground and then to the background, and then back to the foreground again. We want to lead the viewer into our image from front to back. In this image the roots form the foreground, the rock formation the middle ground and the sun the background.
We make the roots look much bigger and more important than what they are by using a wide angle lens and placing the camera right close to them. The roots were placed on a third line to the left while being balanced by the sun on the right. Next time look for foreground elements. Foreground elements add depth. They also help to make your image unique. Who wants a shot that every other photographer has? By including and featuring a foreground element you end up with a shot of the grandscape that no one else has; it is different.
Happy hunting for foreground elements. Remember, it is not always only about the grandscape.
]]>Basics
More advanced
Beginners often think of composition laterally. When our images are presented they are flat (screen, print, etc). So we look at them from left to right and up and down (or down and up depending on the scene). Landscape photographers feel their work has failed if people only look at their images laterally. As photographers we do not want viewers to looks at our images just from left to right and up and down and be done looking. We want people to look into our images. We want viewers to perceive depth. Since our images are flat this is difficult to achieve. We have to create the illusion of three dimensionality. We have to create the illusion of depth on a flat surface so that people can look into the image rather than at a flat image. Photographers use the following compositional guidelines to help achieve these illusions:
Analyze the following image and specifically look at the composition ...
Two dead plants were framed to be in the foreground. The image was shot from low down to minimize the size of the water. The color of the mountains draw the viewer in. The separation of the foreground from the background creates depth. The sky did not have much color or interest so not much of it was included. Close your eyes and ask yourself to consciously note where your eyes go as you look at the image. You will note that your eye goes back and forth between the dead plants (foreground) and the mountains (background). This is what we want. We do not want the viewer's eyes to just move from left to right and be done. We want the viewer's eyes to move into the image from foreground to background. We want the viewer to perceive depth. The mountains are not placed in the middle of the image as many beginners may have been tempted to do. The dead plants are not placed in the center either. Rather, the mountains are on a third or fifth from the top while the plants are placed on a third to a fifth from the bottom. You can also see that the two plants are placed on a third from each edge laterally.
Spend some time looking at images online or look at a few calendars. Analyze their composition and see what you can learn.
Happy compositioning.
]]>A good way to visualize the interaction between these two settings is to think of water. Let's say we want to fill a glass with water for a glass full of water is a good exposure (not too dark or too bright). If the glass is not full the image is too dark. If the glass overflows the image is too bright. Now there are two ways in which to fill the glass.
Both methods will fill the glass. The size of the stream of water (fire hydrant or drip) is controlled by how much you open the faucet (or fire hydrant). In the same way you control the size (strength) of the light stream entering your camera by the F-Stop. Yes, the hole in the lens determines the strength of the light stream. Your shutter speed is how long the glass (sensor) gets water (or light in our case). You can now clearly see that these two settings impact each other. If you want the same sized glass full of water a bigger F-stop (more light) will require a faster shutter speed to prevent the water from overflowing (too bright), just like we needed to let the glass fill up in front of the fire hydrant for just a split second. Similarly, a weak small beam of light will need time to fill up the glass, so a small F-stop requires longer shutter speeds to allow enough time for the glass to fill up.
So what is ISO (ASA)? Simple, ISO is the size of the glass. A large vase requires more water to be filled than a small glass. For our purposes here, the ISO sets your sensor's sensitivity to light. The more sensitive the less light you need to see well. The less sensitive the more light you need to see well. Let's keep it simple. The lower ISO values result in cleaner and better image quality (I am not going to explain why here). Therefore, always use the lowest ISO possible for the situation. There are situations where you need faster shutter speeds to freeze moving objects and you simply do not have enough light to do so. The only way out is to use a higher ISO which requires less light for proper exposure.
It is important to understand how these values work:
The good news about digital photography is that once you have your gear shooting is free. So play around and shoot. Experiment with different settings. Change one setting and see how your camera changes the other settings to keep the glass full.
Happy learning.
]]>You will remember when we spoke about taking pictures versus making pictures that photographers do not just snap pictures. We think about what we want to achieve and then we takes steps to ensure that we achieve what we wanted to. That means that before we shoot we ask ourselves: What do we want this image to look like? We ask whether or not we want the background blurred. We ask whether or not we want to show motion. The main point is that we need to pre-visualize the image before we shoot it.
As photographers we have a few choices to make when we shoot:
We will want the background blurred to isolate the object and to make it stand out (like the image of the first lady in the previous post). Subjects that lend themselves to blurred backgrounds are portraits, flowers, bugs, birds, and so forth. We will want the background sharp if we want to lead the viewer into the image (generally speaking). Landscapes are good examples of needing everything sharp from the foreground through to the background.
Flowing water often looks very good when we show the motion. We show the motion by blurring the water. When objects with wheels are moving we need to show motion by blurring the wheels. To show action we often freeze motion so that you can see the water splashing in mid air, for example. Let us analyze an image:
This image is a landscape, so I wanted to draw the viewer into the image. As a landscape I wanted everything to be in focus right from the first rock sticking out of the water in the foreground through to the trees in the distance. At the same time we have flowing water. I wanted to use that flowing water to make the viewer flow into the image (draw them in). So I wanted to blur the water to show motion going into the image.
This is how to achieve the look you want:
The image above was created using a small F-Stop (everything not moving is in focus) with a slow shutter speed (moving objects are blurred). This is what I ask myself every time I shoot an image:
Depending on the answers to these questions I just set my gear to achieve what I want. Choose how you want the image to look and then get that look by simply adjusting your F-Stops and shutter speeds accordingly. Keep it simple to begin with. If the F-Stop (what is in focus) is more important to you set your camera on AV (Canon) or A (Nikon) and select the F-stop you want and let the camera worry about everything else. If shutter speed (showing or freezing motion) is more important to you set your camera on TV (Canon) or S (Nikon) and select the desired shutter speed and let the camera worry about everything else.
Enjoy experimenting.
]]>It has been said that you can measure the success of a photograph by the length of time people stare at it. The longer the picture engages the viewer the better the image. One way of enticing people to look at your images for longer is to let your photographs tell a story. Stories speak to us. Stories help us to identify with the subject. Stories trigger our own memories and stories. Stories help us to connect with the image.
It has also been said that if your pictures are not good enough it is because you are not close enough. The other way of saying the same thing is that your frame needs to be filled; there cannot be any dead space. Every part of the image needs to make a contribution to the image rather than just filling up space. I will still write about composition in future. Getting really close often helps to tell a story.
This image is filled. The background is blurred. So how does it tell a story? The image does not "say" where this is taken, nor does it add any story about the lady. This image does manage to tell a story because the lady is the story. One cannot help but look at her eye and ask:
Filling a frame to tell a story does not always work because you are removing information that may add to the story. To successfully tell a story with a shot like this you have to shoot someone / something with character. Just looking at the person or thing must tell a story all by itself or the shot will just be a portrait or still life without a story.
If the subject itself does not tell a story you have to tell the story by stepping back. Step back to include items in the frame that builds the story. In this case the surroundings tell the story. The surroundings make us ask the questions. Here is an example:
Not to detract from this lady, but her face (although beautiful) does not have the character of the previous lady. Her face does not tell an interesting story all by itself. She is very photogenic and would make a very nice portrait but such a portrait would only be a very nice portrait, it would not tell a story like the previous lady does. It would not make you ask questions or wonder about her. By stepping back and crafting an image that includes scenery that do tell a story does the trick.
The scene now makes us want to ask:
When facing a scene, ask yourself if you can make it tell a story or make it ask the viewer question. Ask yourself where the story is; is it in the person / object or in the surrounding. Make your images tell a story or ask questions. This is not always possible and depends on what your shoot. Make a point of looking for story telling images. Look for people / objects with character or history. Investigate things that make you very curious.
Enjoy your shooting.
]]>
I have many images of flowers and leaves with water droplets on them. One finds oneself looking at the water droplets more than at the flower itself. Water just seems to draw a person in; it screams - "look at me." That is what photographers want. We want to keep the observer looking at our photograph for as long as possible. The longer people look at it the better the image (generally).
One day I was busy shooting a flower but no matter what I tried, I was just not satisfied with the final result. Something was missing. It needed interest and more punch. Then I remembered, I needed some water droplets. I was in the middle of nowhere and it was not about to rain. I left the scene with disappointment.
When I got home and pondered about the image of the flower, the thought dawned on me ... why not just add water? I went to the store and bought a little mister spray bottle which I still carry in my camera bag to this day. When I shoot flowers or leaves I just spray it with mist until droplets form.
Now the purest will tel me that that is cheating. May I please respond:
All my shots are either as they are or, in cases such as these, how it frequently does look like naturally. When you need a bit of spark, a bit more interest, or an added element just add water.
I have done many searches on Google and in App Stores for "Photography Apps". The results often disappoint because they show image editing and related apps. What I need are apps that help me prepare for shots. Over the last few years I have accumulated a collection of apps that really help me a lot. I hope they help you to make better images too. All the apps I use are free except for The Photographer's Ephemeris which is free for your desktop, but paid for mobile devices.
Sun and Moon Apps
These apps tell you when the sun and moon will be where. They tell you when the sun and moon rise and when they set, for your location or the location of your shoot. Examples of such apps are: LunaSolCal, Sun Surveyor, Sunrise Sunset, Moon trajectory (Andriod), Sun & Moon (Apple).
Photographer's Ephemeris
This app also tells you about sunrise and set (as well as the moon). You can drop a pin on any location in the world over a topo or satellite map and it will show you the rise and set times for that location on any date of your choice. It also shows you the angle of the sun and moon from your pin's location. By moving the pin you can exactly see whether or not the sun will rise over that hill you want the sun next to. You can change the date to see on which day it will happen if at all. You can also calculate the right time the sun will peak over any elevation on the topo map. This app is really great; I have been using it since it first came out.
Safety
Since I often hike to where I shoot safety must also be a concern. I have a map and compass app and a few medical ones like iTriage which tells me what to do in case of a medical emergency. This app is useful for any medical emergency not just for photography.
Weather
Nothing is more important to landscape photography than the weather. I use apps that give me live views from the current doppler radar. I need to see which way the clouds move so that I can position myself on the edges of storms rather than being in them. Sometimes there are multiple locations to choose from. Knowing which way the clouds and rain move helps you to go to the better location for the current weather conditions. I use Tempest Free (Andriod) and MyRadar (Apple). I also use weather forecasts on my phone.
Hyper Focal
This app is called "Hyperfocal" (Andriod) and MyPhotoAssistant (Apple). It calculates the hyper focal distance to focus on for your camera, lens and current F.Stop to have your foreground in focus through to infinity. The Apple app also give you sun and moon information and twilight information.
Tides
Tides (Apple) give me the tide table for any place of my choice. This way you can plan to be there when the tide is the way you want it for the rocks or shoreline you want to shoot.
If you know of any apps that are useful to landscape photographers please mention them by leaving a comment for others to see.
Happy shooting.
]]>Non-photographers take pictures. Photographers make pictures. I have heard many non-photographers comment that "that was a lucky shot." It is thought that somehow the photographer just happened to get the lucky shot because everything just happened to fall right into place at the very moment when he / she happened to be there to take the picture. No doubt, that sometimes happens; but that is very rare - that is why it is called lucky. However, most shots attributed to luck has nothing to do with luck at all. The famous South African golfer of yesteryear, Gary Player, was at a press conference once when a reporter said: "you seem to be very lucky getting out of bunkers." Gary replied: "yes, the more I practice the luckier I get."
Photographers make "luck" with good planning and practice. Non-photographers step up to a scene whenever they get there and take pictures. Photographers make pictures rather than take pictures because they script the image beforehand. They find out when the ocean tides are going to favor the shot they have in mind. They find out when the moon is going to be in a certain place. They examine the weather forecast. They are at the scene at the right times. They go the same location multiple times until things work out. They experiment with different angles using different lenses. They setup lights, background, and whatever is needed, if possible, to make the shot look the way it does. They sit in blinds for days waiting for the "luck" to show up. They pre-visualize the shot they want and then they set out to make that shot come to life. Luck is when preparation and opportunity meets. Non-photographers forget about the "preparation" part. Photographers prepare well and do things to maximize the possibility of opportunities showing up.
The shot below was not taken, it was made. The sun only shines through the hole in the rock at a certain time of year. Software was used to determine when that happens at the best angle. Weather was checked to eliminate cloud cover. It can only happen when you are there at the right time to make your shots come true.
When you are there at the right time and the magic happens, think before you shoot. Think about your composition. Place things or use angles of view to create the best possible composition. Ask yourself if there is any motion in the scene; if so, think about whether you want to show the motion or blur the motion with your shutter speed. Ask yourself what you want to do with the focus; do you want to have everything sharp or do you want to blur the background, foreground or both with your F.Stop?
The more time you spend making picture the better they will be. Happy planning.
P.S. In the next blog I will share the software and apps I use to help me make images.
]]>When shooting animals on safari you cannot use a tripod. There are some gear you can fasten to the roll bars of the vehicle instead. Such expense was too great for me given that this was a once off trip. I have found that a bag of rice or beans actually works best to stabilize your gear. It helps to absorb some of the vibrations of the vehicle. Ensure that your rice / bean bag is a cloth bag and not a plastic one that will break easily.
There are some challenges shooting from within a vehicle. Firstly, a long telephoto lens (which is needed to shoot wildlife) needs to be held still. Any movement, even the slightest movement will make you loose the bird in the viewfinder or blur your image. Attempt to use a fast shutter speed to minimize motion blur from the camera. This is not always possible because the best light to shoot in is not always bright light. Secondly, people get excited when they see great wildlife and they want to talk. Talking coupled with excitement often leads to either loud talking or high pitched talking or both. Tweet, tweet, there goes the bird!
In order to be successful the best solution it to train your companions. Before you drive off into the sunset speak to the driver and teach him / her to always (when it is safe) turn off the engine when you shoot. This eliminates engine vibration which causes motion blur. Next, speak to your fellow passengers. Teach them when they can talk and make noise and when it needs to be quiet. Also teach them to sit as still as they possibly can when you shoot. When they move the vehicle moves, when the vehicle moves your camera moves.
While on safari in Kenya I did my best to train my companions, but I was unsuccessful. It seemed as if every time I was just about to press the shutter someone had to change position and move. After numerous attempts to speak to my fellow passengers, all of whom where non-photographers, they were still not complying with my request. The light was starting to become harsh. As we were driving along I saw a big bird perched high on a tree. Then I got an idea ...
I asked the driver to stop. My APC sensored camera had a 400mm prime lens attached which gives you a field of view of 640mm. I handed the camera to the first passenger, pointed to the bird in the tree and asked him to take a picture of the bird. While he was attempting to find the bird in the viewfinder I kept on moving around. After a minute or so he started to complain that he cannot find the bird in the viewfinder. Then when he did, he repeatedly lost it again. He could not control the camera sufficiently to compose his shot. He handed back the camera. Without me saying anything he spoke up and said: now I understand about the need to have everyone still in the vehicle when Pierre shoots. I passed the camera to the second person and so on until everyone had a go. The lesson was learnt. I had a still car when shooting from then on.
Teach your companions up front and you will have a better shoot.
Yosemite is an exciting place to photograph. During one long weekend stay the weather was horrible. It was raining and raining, gray and drab. By the third day I was getting frustrated. It was my last day there and I did not really have anything to show for my labor. My family was not too excited to be stuck in the car for yet another day. By the end of the day all of us just wanted to get home. Even though I also wanted to get home I also wanted to wait ...
The sun had set. The light was gone, so was some 30 or so other photographers who had waited for something that never showed up. It was cold and miserable. Only one other photographer (he was from Russia, perhaps the cold and wet did not bother him that much) and I stayed behind, still waiting ...
Ten to fifteen minutes later, just as I was loosing all hope the clouds lit up. It only lasted long enough for two shots. They were the only two decent shots of the entire trip, but they taught me to wait ...
On another occasion I was with long time friend and veteran pro-photographer Don Smith (www.DonSmithPhotography.Com) on one of his workshops. We were at the Grand Tetons in Wyoming. The weather was not good. We were rained upon, hailed upon, and snowed upon. One sunset never showed up because of thick cloud cover. A strong icy wind blew right through us. The wind was so strong that one tripod got blown over (luckily someone caught it mid-air). Secretly, everyone wanted to call it a day and go home. Instead we waited ... By now the sun was set and it was getting dark. Yet we waited ...
Fifteen to twenty minutes later the clouds lit up. The shot below was the result:
The lesson is simple: wait ... Wait until at least twenty minutes after sunset before you leave. Many of my shots were actually taken after sunset. The hues in the sky can get great after sunset. You are there already, what is twenty minutes longer to wait? The magic does not always show up, but when it does it will be well worth the time waited.
See you waiting on location ...
P.S. It is almost impossible to shoot these shots without a tripod. I know a tripod is a hassle to carry but never leave your best friend behind.
]]>Every photography sales person wants to sell you filters because they generally have high profit margins. They always seem to ask: don't you want to protect your $1,000.00 lens? Or they may say: it is much cheaper to damage a $25.00 protective filter (UV filter) than the front lens element of your $1,000.00 lens. May I please ask a counter question: what does a $25.00 filter do to the image quality of your $1,000.00 lens? If you place a piece of junk in front of your lens your lens just became a piece of junk, because the bad filter only lets bad light through to your lens. I will never use any kind of protective filter (see one exception below). So what about my expensive lens? The best protection is called a lens cap. It is cheap and works just perfectly. I have been around photographers for well over 25 years and I have never heard of any of them getting their lens scratched while they are busy shooting. The damage usually comes while walking or doing things other than looking through the view finder. So the risk of your lens being scratched while you shoot is low. Using a lens cap while not shooting covers you for everything else. There is one exception; water or ocean spray. If you shoot in these conditions a filter as protection is a good idea. However, not the $25.00 one. I use my good quality polarizer rather than a protective filter.
Then you also get the folk on the other side of the spectrum; they never use any kind of filters because "in the digital age you can do anything with your computer in post processing." While you can do amazing things in post processing I like to get the image right in camera rather than sitting in front of my computer for hours and hours; I just don't have the time and even if I did, I would rather be shooting than sitting in front of my computer. So which filters do I use and why?
Graduated Neutral Density Filters
These filters do not effect the color of your image in any way. They simply let less light through on one side of the filter than the other (or top and bottom). Here is the problem. Your eyes can see detail in both bright and dark areas at the same time, but your camera cannot. Successful photographers learn to see the way their cameras do. Your camera will either expose your light areas correctly with no detail in the dark areas or it will correctly expose the dark areas leaving the bright areas devoid of detail. It is usually the sky or top part of the image that is too bright. By placing the dark part of the filter over the light part of the image it "steals" two or three F.Stops of light (only from the light part because the bottom part of the filter is clear). In this way the difference in light intensity between the light and dark areas of the image is reduced by two or three F.Stops bringing it in line with what your camera can see. Using this filter is easy and quick. Yes, it can be done on the computer. Yes, you can also use High Dynamic Range Photography (which I do not find particularly attractive). However, I can hold my filter in front of my lens in two seconds making a huge positive difference in my image right away and in camera; and I am done. Please stay away from the cheap brands because they are not really neutral; they produce a color cast and they may degrade your image quality over all.
Here is an example. The sky was too bright (in fact, the sky what three times brighter than what you see here). Shot without a graduated neutral density filter I would have had to make one of two choices. Either expose for the sky, but then the foreground (especially the rock face in the middle right of the image) would have been too dark, or expose for the foreground leaving the sky too bright. Holding the filter in place "darkens the sky" so that the light is within range of the camera's sensor to capture. I used a three stop filter here reducing the amount of light by three times.
Circular Polarizers
As far as I know software is still not good enough to replace a polarizer. A polarizer removes reflections from water, sheen from leaves, and makes clouds pop a little. Saturation may also be boosted just a tad. I use a polarizer almost all the time. Please do not use a polarizer when shooting with a wide angle lens (or shooting panoramas). Polarizers work best at a 90 degree angle to the sun. The angle of view with a wide angle lens using a polarizer results in different shades of blue in the sky, where at 90 degrees from the sun the sky is bluer (and darker) than the rest of the image. This is a nightmare to try and fix with software. On lenses other than wide angles a polarizer works great. High altitude shooting (if your image includes sky) requires less polarization so do not over do it, your sky will not look natural (too dark and too blue). Once again, only use good filters because you do not want to degrade the light reaching your lens. Good light is what photography is all about.
That is it. I don't use any other filters. Some of my friends use neutral density filters to enable them to use longer shutter speeds to blur water movement. I have not been converted to this idea yet. Shoot in lower light and use a polarizer (which also steals up to two stops of light). I know that shooting in lower light is not always an option, but I have just not seen many good images taken at the wrong time (less than ideal light) which became good because of a neutral density filter.
Happy shooting.
]]>In the film days a cheap camera and a very expensive camera produced the same quality image because the image quality was determined by the film in use and not the camera. This is no longer true in the digital world because the camera's sensor is the "film" and it does contribute to image quality. So many mistakenly think that if only they get a better camera they will automatically also be a better photographer. Although your photographic gear is important it will not make you a better photographer.
I was shooting in Yosemite once when two photographers approached me with very expensive gear (gear that I only wished for) to ask me about what my graduated neutral density filter was. They had fancy gear but they had no idea of even the basics of photography. When they compared their shots to mine on the back screen they could not believe that their "cameras" did not produce such nice images.
Actually there are only two pieces of gear guaranteed to make you a better landscape photographer (or to get you better shots); and I stand by that. Firstly, buy yourself the best tripod and tripod head you can afford. Tripods are a hassle to carry and use, but if you want better images a good tripod is your friend. When we shoot just before and just after sunset and sunrise we are shooting in low light. You are also going to want to use a small F.Stop to get everything in focus. When you combine low light with a small F.Stop you are left with long shutter speeds. These shots can only be shot sharply using a tripod. Furthermore, a tripod slows you down. It helps you to consider your composition. It helps you to scan the edges around your photograph for bright objects, cut off objects, and so forth; something that does not work very well when the camera is handheld.
I started with a little piece of an excuse for a tripod. Before long I realized I needed a sturdier one, so I bought another one; still not the one I should have bought because that was all I could afford. Before long I realized that the head sagged after I tightened it as tight as it would go. So this would not work for me and I had to buy a better one. My next tripod was wonderful; or so I thought. I was shooting with long time friend and veteran pro-photographer Don Smith (donsmithphotography.com) in Colob Canyon in Zion National Park when the wind swept my tripod over. As the tripod leg flew buy my head I grabbed it in desperation in an attempt to prevent my camera and lens from falling. The next thing I knew I was standing with just a piece of the tripod leg in my hand which had snapped right in two. Needless to say over $4,000.00 worth of camera and lens smashed to the ground. So now I had to buy yet another tripod. If only I had saved up and put all the money I had spend on tripods together and bought the one I should have bought to begin with I could have saved all the money I wasted on the junk tripods; while still paying for the right one in the end.
The second piece of gear guaranteed to get you better landscape shots is an alarm clock, yes, no kidding. You cannot get great shots if you are dreaming about them in bed. You have to be out there at the right time and for landscape shooters that means before sunrise. Many people think that landscape pro-photographers get magical shots every time they touch their cameras. This is not true, they get great shots because they plan well AND because they are out there all the time. I have been to certain places ten to twenty times before the magic (great light, colored clouds, etc.) showed up. You have to be there to shoot it when the magic is there and it does not happen every time you are out there. Use the clock and get up early, be out there regularly.
This shot was obviously taken at night. The scene was exposed for 17 minutes while I "painted" the arched rock with a flashlight to get the warm light. Getting this shot without a tripod is nearly impossible. In conclusion, good gear is important but gear by itself is not going to transform you into a pro-photographer. Rather focus on getting a good tripod and using your alarm clock to get you up and out there and then shoot, shoot, shoot.
Many people think that creating great images is about shooting in exotic locations. Photography is not so much about what you shoot but rather about light. The word photography comes from two Greek words: photo and grapho. Photo means light. Grapho means to write (or by extension to draw). Photography is thus writing or drawing with light.
Totally beginner photographers often talk about cameras. Better photographers talk about lenses. Good photographers discuss tripods and support systems. Advanced photographers talk about techniques. Great photographers have learnt to read the light and talk about it.
Great photographers develop their skills at reading the light. With reading the light comes a growing vocabulary to describe light. Some examples are: soft light, flat light, defused light, twilight, sweet light, alpenglow, harsh light, side light, back light, catch light, crisp light, warm light, cold light, etc.
Photographing in exotic locations does not guarantee great shots. Even such locations regularly deliver blah shots because of shooting in bad light. Conversely, great light can make even the boring special. The best light to shoot landscapes in is typically just before to just after sunset and sunrise and on the edges of storms.
Watch the light. Read the light. Chase the light. Capture the light.
]]>